JP2005524595A - Method for controlling crystal growth, crystallization, structure and phase in materials and systems - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention affects various crystal formation, structure formation or phase formation / phase change reaction pathways or systems by exposing one or more components of the crystallization reaction system to at least one spectral energy pattern. It relates to new ways of exerting, controlling and / or guiding. In the first aspect of the present invention, at least one spectral energy pattern can be applied to the crystallization reaction system. In a second aspect of the invention, at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied to the conditioning crystallization reaction system. The spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied, for example, at a location separate from the reaction vessel (eg, in the conditioning reaction vessel) or in (or against) the reaction vessel, but other (or It can be applied before all of the substances involved in the crystallization reaction system are introduced into the reaction vessel.

Description

  The present invention affects various crystal formation, structure formation or phase formation / phase change reaction pathways or systems by exposing one or more components of the overall reaction system to at least one spectral energy pattern. , Control and / or new ways to guide. In the first aspect of the present invention, at least one spectral energy pattern can be applied to the crystallization reaction system. In a second aspect of the invention, at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied to the conditioning crystallization reaction system. The spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied, for example, at a location separate from the reaction vessel (eg, in the conditioning reaction vessel) or in (or against) the reaction vessel, but other (or It can be applied before all of the substances involved in the crystallization reaction system are introduced into the reaction vessel.
  The method of the present invention can be applied to several reactions in various crystallization reaction systems, including but not limited to inorganic reactions (eg, oxides, nitrides, carbides, borides, chlorides, bromides, carbonates, organics Metals, mixed phases, metals, metal alloys, single crystal structures, polycrystalline structures, amorphous structures, etc.), organic reactions (eg, monomers, oligomers, and / or polymers made from one component or many different components) And / or biological reactions (eg, proteins, fatty acids, or cells) and the like. The invention also relates to mimicking different mechanisms of action of different catalysts and components in crystallization reaction systems under different environmental reaction conditions. The present invention specifically considers the various energy requirements in the overall reaction system, for example to achieve energy transfer to at least one participant (or at least one conditioned participant) in the overall reaction system ( Energy dynamics (e.g., matching) between applied energy and matter (e.g., solid, liquid, gas, plasma, and / or combinations or portions thereof), for example, to prevent and / or increase Various means for achieving (or non-matching) control are disclosed. The present invention further provides various methods for delivering at least one spectral energy pattern (or at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern) to at least a portion of the total reaction system to at least a portion of the total reaction system. And various means are disclosed. The present invention also discloses an approach for designing or determining suitable catalyst components, environmental reaction conditions, and / or conditioned participants for use in a crystallization reaction system.
  About related patent applications commonly owned
  The subject matter of the present invention is two co-pending U.S. provisional applications Nos. 60 / 366,755 and 60 / 403,225, both titled “Controlling Crystal Growth, Crystallization, and Phase in Biological, Organic, and Inorganic Systems. The first is related to the content contained in March, 21, 2002 and the second in August 13, 2002.
  The subject matter of the present invention is also related to the subject matter contained in co-pending US Provisional Patent Application No. 60 / 403,251, filed August 13, 2002, entitled “Spectral Chemistry”.
  The subject matter of the present invention is also related to the subject matter contained in co-pending U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60 / 439,223, filed Jan. 10, 2003, entitled “Spectral Conditioning”. .
  The subject matter of the present invention is related to the subject matter contained in co-pending US Patent Application No. 10 / 203,797, the application entitled “Spectral Chemistry”, which entered the National Phase in August 12, 2002.
  The contents of each of the aforementioned patent applications are expressly incorporated herein by reference.
Background of the Invention
  The physical structure of various materials (eg, organic, inorganic, and / or biological materials) can be, for example, the physical properties (eg, functionality, Size, physical properties, electrical properties, mechanical properties, dielectric properties, thermal properties, etc.) are extremely important. In this regard, certain materials may have very different physical properties while having similar chemical composition, for example: (1) ions, atoms, molecules, and / or , Different arrangements of macromolecules of various sizes and / or shapes; (2); differences in bond angles between atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules; (3) ions, atoms, molecules And / or differences in the types of bonds that hold the macromolecules together. In the prior art, structure formation and / or control in the fields of biology, inorganic chemistry, and / or organic chemistry generally includes crystal growth, crystallization, crystal optics, and / or material structure or phase engineering. I'm calling.
  Crystal growth or crystallization begins, for example, by primary nucleation followed by secondary nucleation. However, in crystal systems that do not appear to require primary nucleation (eg, some type of seed is usually provided), only secondary nucleation occurs.
  In the prior art, a new rice crystallization model has been proposed to explain the crystallization reaction in the material system. Such models include the following: (1) Bond breaking model, which focuses on the energy of dissociated atoms being proportional to the number of bonds between nearest atoms; (2) Free Energy model, which focuses on the free energy associated with various lattice forms; (3) step-step interaction, which focuses on dipole-dipole interaction; (4) Wulff's configuration; This focuses on obtaining crystal shapes with minimal surface energy; (5) Frank's model, which theorizes that the rate of growth or dissociation depends on the orientation of the surface; (6) BCF (Burton, Cabrera, Frank) model, which focuses on a sequence of steps or a sequence of growth stages caused by the presence of a sequence of steps or shelves; (7) Schweebel effect, which is adsorbed Discusses overcoming potential energy maxima before atoms attach; and (8) Various other crystallization models, such as impurities, field effects, liquid field theory, and / or morphology, etc. We are considering. None of the various models and theories proposed for crystal growth can satisfactorily explain the relevant mechanism of crystal growth. Therefore, fine control of crystal growth or crystallization in various fields of science remains empirical science to achieve the desired crystal growth or crystal engineering and / or the desired phase, structure or phase transformation. It takes a lot of trial and error.
  As is well known, certain ions and atoms have an affinity for other atoms and ions, such as ionic bonds, covalent bonds, polar-covalent bonds, metal bonds, hydrogen bonds, Van der Waal forces, etc., and They can be coupled to each other in a well-known manner, such as hybrids or combinations thereof. A particular type of bond that holds atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules together is, for example, the positioning of atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules relative to each other (eg, spacing, distance). , Bond angle, coordination number, etc.). Furthermore, molecules (eg, combinations of atoms) bind to other molecules or molecular ions (eg, proteins composed of amino acid molecules) and exhibit various spacings and angular displacements relative to each other. In addition, certain materials are a mixture of atoms and molecules, where the atoms and molecules are bonded in more ways than one of the bonding methods described above, and are arranged at a distance and angle with respect to each other. In addition, there are a large number of macromolecules (eg, viruses composed of different proteins, water, etc.) that contain different structural and angular relationships between different molecules of the same (or substantially the same) chemical composition.
  One of the most basic structures used to refer structurally to the arrangement of atoms, ions, molecules, etc. is the unit cell. As an example, unit cells of seven different crystal systems are shown in FIG. In particular, Figure 70a shows a cubic unit cell structure; Figure 70b shows a tetragonal unit cell structure; Figure 70c shows an orthorhombic unit cell structure; Figure 70d shows a monoclinic unit cell structure. FIG. 70e shows a triclinic unit cell structure; FIG. 70f shows a rhombohedral unit cell structure; and FIG. 70g shows a hexagonal unit cell structure. In addition, Table A shows the relationship between the various unit cell dimensions and angles shown in FIG. 70, as well as some examples of inorganic materials that exhibit the unit cell structure.
Table A
Unit cell dimensions                          Crystal class            Example
a = b = c a = β = γ = 90 ° Cubic NaCl, MgAl₂O_Four, C₆₀K_Three
a = b ≠ c a = β = γ = 90 ° tetragonal K₂NiF_Four, TiO₂
                                                        BaTiO_Three(298K)
a ≠ b ≠ c a = β = γ = 90 ° orthorhombic YBa₂, Cu_ThreeO₇
a ≠ b ≠ c a = γ = 90 ° β ≠ 90 ° monoclinic KH₂PO_Four
a ≠ b ≠ c a ≠ β ≠ γ ≠ 90 ° Triclinic
a = b ≠ c a = β = 90 ° γ = 120 ° hexagonal LiNbO_Three
a = b = c a = β = γ ≠ 90 ° trigonal / rhombohedral BaTiO_Three(-80 ° C) or less
  Various known inorganic, biological, and / or organic atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules take one or more unit cell configurations shown in FIGS. 70a-70g. Various rules and experimental measurements are known to help predict different unit cells and / or macrostructures resulting from combinations of different atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules of similar or different chemical composition It has been. For example, particularly for inorganic systems, the various types of bonds that can be used to bind atomic species include covalent bonds, ionic bonds, Van der Waals bonds, metal bonds, and the like. For example, in covalent crystals, the covalency of atoms and ions and the characteristics of the spatial distribution of bonds formed by the atoms are the main factors that determine the coordination or bonding or specific assembly of atoms and ions in a structure. is there.
  In contrast, electrostatic or ionic bonds are subject to several different rules. Specifically:
  (1) The first rule treats ions like a rigid sphere as an approximation, and the way in which spherical ions are filled depends on the relative size of the ions. In particular, a polyhedron with anions coordinated is formed around each cation, and the cation-anion distance is determined by the coordination number of the cation according to the sum of the radii and the radius ratio.
  (2) The second rule is known as the principle of electrostatic valency. This rule results in a charge balance. In particular, in a stable coordination structure, the total strength of a valence bond reaching a certain anion from all adjacent cations is equal to the charge of that anion. According to this rule, the structure takes the configuration form with the lowest potential energy, in which ions try to achieve electrical neutrality at that location (eg, in the unit cell).
  (3) The third rule relates to the presence of ridges and faces common to the two anionic polyhedra in the coordinated structure. In particular, the stability of a polyhedron is reduced by the presence of edges and faces. This effect is particularly large when the cation has a high valence and a small coordination number, and the radius ratio approaches the lower limit of stability of the polyhedron. This rule is that the edges or faces common to the two anions and polyhedra share only the corners, thus resulting in closer access of the two cations compared to the situation where the cations are as far apart as possible, and the position of the system By causing a corresponding increase in energy.
  (4) The fourth rule is that in crystals containing different cations, those having a high valence and a small coordination number usually do not share polyhedral elements with each other. This rule comes from the third rule described above.
  (5) The last general rule is that the number of different types of components in the crystal is generally small.
  The above five general rules also apply to organic and biological systems to some extent, but are referred to specifically for inorganic systems to simplify the discussion.
  According to each of the above rules, different crystal structures (or phases or patterns) may be obtained in similar (or exactly the same) chemical systems. This aspect of obtaining different crystal structures while having the same (or substantially the same) chemical structure is called polymorphism. A substance is usually said to be polymorphic if it can exist in more than one form with different crystal structures or patterns. Examples of well-known polymorphs include carbon, selenium, quartz (SiO₂), Some metals, barium titanate, zinc sulfide, iron oxide, silica, protein, prions, lipids, hydrocarbons, glycine, and the like. In some polymorphic substances, the first crystalline form is found under a first set of physical conditions, there is a reversible transition between the different forms, and this reversible transition, for example, It can be caused by one or more changes in some physical conditions (eg, environmental conditions to which the polymorphic material is exposed) or by the introduction of a catalyst. This type of material is said to be enantiotropic. When the transition between crystalline forms or states is irreversible, the form is said to be monootropic. An example of an enantiomer is iron, which has a cubic packing structure at temperatures between about 906 ° C. and 1401 ° C., and a body-centered cubic structure at temperatures outside this range. Water also exhibits different structural forms (eg, microclusters, macroclusters, etc.) and has at least 13 different crystals H in a relatively low pressure and temperature range.₂It is known that an O structure exists. The third example is several proteins. When exposed to polymorphic prions, this changes to a structure that matches the structure of the prion by autocatalytic transition.
  There are various rules that help identify the relationships that exist between the polymorphic forms of various substances. Specifically, the prior art has attempted to classify polymorphic changes into the following: For example, what is recognized as an existing polymorph includes one or more of the following relationships:
  (1) Changes in which the immediate coordination number of ions / atoms does not change much;
  (2) Changes that cause changes in the number of direct coordination;
  (3) changes including transitions between ideal and defect structures; and
  (4) A change that causes a change in the type of binding.
  Each of the above four polymorphic relationships may exclude each other and may include other features. However, for many substances of substantially similar composition or for substantially the same composition, there are various different forms such as unit cell, protein folding, or DNA twist. Will be understood.
  In addition to the unit cells shown in FIGS. 70a-70g, there are different lattices that can be combined with the unit cells. In particular, a grid is known as an array of 1, 2, or more usually three-dimensional transparent points. A lattice usually gives no information about the position of an atom or molecule in actual spatial relation, but by defining an equivalent position in the lattice, various translational symmetries of different atoms, ions, or molecules can be obtained. Show. The environment of an atom or ion placed at one of the lattice points is the same as the environment of a similar atom or ion placed at another corresponding lattice point. The simplest example of this concept is a one-dimensional lattice consisting of an infinite number of points arranged at equal intervals along a straight line (see, for example, FIG. 71). However, a more realistic use of the lattice is seen in the three-dimensional crystal structure. The simplest lattice type is called primitive (represented by the symbol “P”), and the unit cell of the primitive lattice contains only one lattice point.
  The second lattice type is a body-centered lattice (represented by the symbol “T”). FIG. 72 shows a body-centered cubic structure.
  A lattice having lattice points at the center and corners of all unit faces is called a face-centered lattice and is represented by the symbol “F”. This grid is shown in FIG.
  The last grid contains points on only one of the faces and is called the face center, but is represented by one of the symbols “A”, “B”, or “C”. The “C-type” lattice represents a situation where the lattice point is centered on the plane with another translational symmetry; whereas the A and B face centered lattices are obtained in the same way, but with an additional lattice A point appears on another face. An example of a face center lattice is shown in FIG. It will be appreciated that the “A” and “B” face centered lattices are obtained in the same manner, but additional lattice points in the bc and ac planes are obtained, respectively. Therefore, the face centered cubic lattice is usually represented by the letter “C”. The four different lattice types described above (ie, P, I, F, and C) can be combined with seven unit cells or crystal classes to give all possible variations. All possible variations are known as “Bravais” lattices. In particular, for example, in inorganic systems, seven different crystal classes are combined in a particular Bravais lattice. Table B shows 14 possible Bravais lattices.
Table B
          Crystal system                              Bravais lattice
          Cubic P, I, F
          Tetragonal P, I
          Orthorhombic P, C, I, F
          Monoclinic P, C
          Triclinic P
          Hexagonal crystal P
          Trigonal / Rhombohedral P (R)^*
*The primitive representation of rhombohedral lattice is usually given the symbol “R”.
  There are various ways to achieve crystal growth or structure in organic, inorganic, biological, etc. systems. For example, (1) high vacuum methods of molecular beam epitaxy and atomic layer epitaxy project atoms or molecules onto the substrate surface where they are incorporated (eg, adsorbed atoms); (2) from solution Growth (eg, epitaxial growth); (3) vapor phase growth on one or more substrates or seed crystals; (4) growth from liquid metal; (5) solution (eg, aqueous, molten salt, or other solvent) (6) Growth from saturated or supersaturated solutions (eg aqueous or other solvents); (7) Growth from melt, also called solidification; (8) Precipitation growth; (9) High pressure conditions Growth (eg, hydrothermal growth); (10) chemical vapor transport reaction growth; (11) growth by electrochemical reaction (eg, electrocrystallization); (12) growth from solid phase (eg, strain annealing) ; (1 ) Acoustic crystallization methods; (14) biological methods (eg sitting and dropping methods, hanging and dropping methods, containerless, etc.); and (15) various post-growth treatments that affect already formed structures. (E.g., annealing, heat treatment, laser treatment, etching process, (e.g., chemical, thermal, etc.)). Phase diagrams are often used to help understand what crystal layers or structures can be realized by these various crystal growth, crystallization or ordering methods and post-growth processing methods.
  Much experimental work has been done to determine the systems and / or phases that various atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules make up. For example, there are thousands of phase diagrams describing various organic, biological, and / or inorganic systems. The phase diagram shows the equilibrium state of the system, usually the state of lowest free energy known under the composition, temperature, pressure, and / or other conditions imposed on the system. In particular, the traditional belief that only one phase mixing state can exist under a fixed set of parameters. Phase equilibria provide an accurate way to graphically represent equilibrium states and are important for expressing the characteristics of various organic, inorganic, and / or biological systems. The phase equilibrium diagram records the composition of each phase present at equilibrium, the number of phases present, and the amount of each phase. Note that in most systems, equilibrium is rarely achieved. However, even though non-equilibrium states (eg, metastable equilibrium states) are common in real systems, the phase diagram is still for practitioners in their respective fields to see what phases exist in various crystallization systems. And is important as an aid in determining whether it will be affected and / or controlled.
  Phase diagrams are always utilized to determine the phase and composition changes that occur under changing environmental conditions. For example, changes in the environmental gas present in the system, changes in the partial pressure of the environmental gas, changes in temperature, changes in pressure, changes in composition, etc. are all the products obtained in the crystallization reaction system (for example Or a structural species).
  For each of the systems, there are a number of phase diagrams, such as a one-component phase diagram, a two-component phase diagram, and a three-component phase diagram. A good example of a one-component, single solid phase system is sodium chloride. In particular, FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the temperature and pressure of an ion binding material known as NaCl. Further, FIGS. 76a and 76b show a clinograph projection of a cubic unit cell of sodium chloride. FIG. 77 shows a clinograph projection of the cubic unit cell structure of sodium chloride, where the ions are shown in approximately correct relative sizes. A solid circle represents sodium ions, and a hollow circle represents chlorine ions.
  The phase diagram can be interpreted by the phase rule (called Gibbs phase rule). This has the following relationship for a one-component system:
  P + V = C + 2
Indicated by.
  The above phase rule uses the number P of phases present in equilibrium, the number V of variations or degrees of freedom, and the number C of components. This phase relation is the basis for creating and using phase equilibrium diagrams. For example, FIG. 78 shows a perspective view of a simple binary phase diagram. This two-component system adds a new component variable to the phase rule. Therefore, the application of phase rule is as follows: At point “A”, there is one phase and both the temperature and the composition can be arbitrarily changed. However, in the area where there are two phases at equilibrium, the composition of each phase is indicated by the line in the figure. The intersection of the constant temperature line and the phase boundary gives the phase composition at equilibrium at the temperature “T”. Thus, when there are two phases, there is a relationship of the following phase rules:
          P + V = C + 2, 2 + V = 2 + 2, V = 2
That is, at any fixed pressure, any change in the temperature or composition of one phase requires a corresponding change in the other variables. Thus, the maximum number of phases that can exist when the pressure is arbitrarily fixed (ie, when V = 1) is:
          P + V = C + 2, P + 1 = 2 + 2, P = 3
  The horizontal solid line indicated by the letter C in FIG. 78 represents a situation where there are three phases and the composition and temperature of each phase are fixed. Thus, the phase diagram can be used to determine what phases exist and what states can occur in the phases present and the composition of the phases.
  In particular, there are defect crystallization paths in each crystallization reaction system, and the exact crystallization path chosen is a function of many factors known to those skilled in the art. For example, a representative ternary phase diagram is shown in FIG. 86a (which represents a ternary eutectic) and FIG. 86b (which represents a ternary solid solution). In addition, FIG. 86c shows the exact crystallization path followed by component “A” shown in FIG. 86a. A brief description of this crystallization path is as follows: A liquid having composition A enters the primary field of the first component “X”. The temperature of the ternary liquid is T₁Crystallization begins from a solid gmelt having the composition “X”. The composition of the remaining liquid varies along the line AB as some solid “X” crystallizes out. The concept known as the “lever principle” (ie the concept for determining the relative amount and composition of the material that crystallizes from the melt) applies along line AB. Furthermore, cooling continues and the temperature is T₂, The crystallization path reaches a boundary state representing the balance of the remaining liquid composition and the equilibrium of the two solid phases “X” and “Z”. At this point, as with “X”, “Z” begins to crystallize, and the composition of the remaining liquid changes along the path CD. However, at point “L”, the phase that exists in equilibrium includes liquids having the composition “L” and solids “X” and “Z”, but the overall composition of the entire system is “A”. Temperature T at point D_ECooling continues until a ternary eutectic is generated at. At point D, the composition “Y” can also be crystallized.
  Thus, a variety of crystal species can be crystallized, for example by solidification of one or more species from the melt, regardless of whether the melt is in an equilibrium or non-equilibrium state.
  Another example of a phase diagram is shown in FIG. This figure shows an example of a solubility curve. This general solubility curve is for a solid that forms a hydrate (ie, one or more compounds with one or more water molecules attached) when the system is cooled. For example, FIG. 79 may be any solid that yields a hydrate, eg, Na₂S₂O_ThreeIt may be. The number of hydrate molecules shown in FIG. 79 is arbitrary and varies depending on the substance.
  Furthermore, FIG. 79a shows several solubility curves for different solutes in water. Most of these materials show increasing solubility as a function of temperature. Sodium chloride is one of the solutes that exhibit a slowly increasing solubility as a function of increasing temperature. Specifically, for example, a NaCl solubility plot shows that a saturated solution of NaCl at 20 ° C. contains 36 grams of NaCl in 100 grams of water.
  Thus, various bonding mechanisms for bonding atoms, ions, molecules, macromolecules, etc. have various possibilities as crystal and structural forms (eg, various unit cells shown in FIG. 70, and FIGS. 72-74). It is clear that the various Bravais lattices shown in (1) are produced. Much work has been done to categorize different chemical forms and / or structures, and various theories and explanations have been presented to explain the mechanism of crystallization, including initiation of crystallization and secondary nucleation or growth. Although proposed, much remains unknown regarding the possibility of controlling various crystal structures within a range of one or more given species, for example. However, it is clear that various reactions, including various bonds and chemical reactions, are important in determining the crystal structure.
  In this regard, chemical reactions are driven by energy. Energy appears in many different forms, such as chemical, thermal, mechanical, sonic enemies, and electromagnetic energy.
  In this connection, the chemical reaction is driven by energy. Energy arrives in many different forms, such as chemical, heat, mechanical, sound and electromagnetic forms. The different characteristics of the individual types of energy appear to contribute in different ways to driving chemical reactions. Regardless of the type of energy involved, chemical reactions are inextricably entangled with energy transfers and combinations. Therefore, understanding energy is critical to understanding chemical reactions and thus specific structures.

  The chemical reaction may be tuned and / or directed by the addition of energy to the reaction medium in the form of heat, mechanical, sound and / or electromagnetic energy, or by means of transferring energy through a physical catalyst. These methods have traditionally not been sufficient energy and, for example, unwanted side products, required transients and / or intermediates and / or degradation of activated complexes, and / or insufficient Produces a good amount of the preferred reaction.

In general, chemical reactions have been thought to occur as a result of collisions between reactive molecules. With regard to chemical kinetic collision theory, it has been assumed that the rate of reaction is directly proportional to the number of molecular collisions per second as follows:
Number of velocity alpha collisions / second.

  This simple relationship has been used to explain the dependence of reaction rate on concentration. Furthermore, with few exceptions, the reaction rate has been thought to increase with increasing temperature due to increased collisions.

The dependence of the reaction rate constant k can be expressed by the following equation known as the Arrhenius equation:
k ＝ Ae ^{-Ea / RT}
Where Ea is the minimum energy required to initiate a chemical reaction, the activation energy of the reaction, R is the gas constant, T is the absolute temperature, and e is the natural logarithm It is the bottom of the scale. The quantification A represents the impact speed and indicates that the impact speed is directly proportional to A and hence the impact speed. Furthermore, because of the negative sign associated with the index Ea / RT, the rate constant decreases with increasing activation energy and increases with increasing temperature.

  Usually, only a low percentage of collision molecules, typically the fastest-moving molecules, have sufficient kinetic energy to exceed the activation energy, so the increase in rate constant k is explained by an increase in temperature. Since higher energy molecules are present at higher temperatures, the rate of product formation is also faster at the higher temperatures. However, there are many problems that can be introduced into the crystallization reaction system due to the elevated temperature. With thermal excitation, other competitive processes, such as bond breaking, occur before the desired energy state is reached. Often there are many degradation products that produce fragments that are extremely reactive, but they can survive for a short time due to their thermodynamic instability that attenuates the preferred reaction. it can.

  Radiation or light energy is another form of energy that can also be added to the reaction medium that has negative side effects but is different (or the same) from those side effects from thermal energy. The addition of radiant energy to the system produces electronically excited molecules that can undergo chemical reactions.

  Molecules in which all electrons are in stable orbitals are said to be in the ground electronic state. Their trajectories can be either bound or unbound. When a suitable energy photon collides with a molecule, the photon is absorbed and one of the electrons can be advanced to a high energy unoccupied orbit. Electronic excitation results in a spatial redistribution of valence electrons with simultaneous changes in internuclear shape. Since chemical reactions and bonds are tuned to a high degree by these factors, an electronically excited molecule undergoes a chemical reaction or bond transformation that is distinctly different from its ground state counterpart molecule.

The energy of a photon is defined by its frequency or wavelength:
E = hν = hc / λ
Where E is energy; h is Planck's constant, 6.6 × 10 ⁻³⁴ J · sec; ν is the frequency of radiation, sec ⁻¹ ; c is the speed of light; and λ is the wavelength of radiation. is there. When a photon is absorbed, all of its energy is typically imparted to the absorbing species. The main action following absorption depends on the wavelength of the incident light. Photochemistry studies photons whose energy depends on the ultraviolet region (e.g., 100Å-4000Å) and visible region (e.g., 4000Å-7000Å) of the electromagnetic spectrum. Such photons are mainly responsible for electronically excited molecules.

  Since molecules are imparted with electronic energy based on the absorption of light, reactions and structural transformations arise from those that are different from the potential energy surfaces encountered in thermally excited systems. However, there are several disadvantages of using known photochemical techniques that use wide band frequencies, thereby causing unwanted side effects, inadequate experimentation, and poor quantitative yields. The area of photocrystallization is still in the early stages, and the known knowledge is that of trial and error, experimental approaches, and the underlying mechanism is not firmly or fully understood. Some good examples of photochemistry are shown in the following patents.

  In particular, US Pat. No. 5,174,877 issued by Cooper et al., (1992) discloses an apparatus for photocatalytic treatment of liquids. In particular, it is disclosed that the surface of the conditioned slurry is irradiated in order to activate the photocatalytic properties of the particles contained in the slurry. The transparency of the slurry affects, for example, the absorption of radiation. In addition, a discussion of different frequencies suitable to achieve the desired photocatalytic activity is disclosed.

  In addition, US Pat. No. 4,755,269 issued by Brumer et al., (1998) discloses a photodissociation method for dissociating various molecules at known energy levels. In particular, it is disclosed that different dissociation paths are possible and that different paths follow for the selection of different frequencies of a given electromagnetic line. It is further disclosed that the applied electromagnetic radiation amplitude corresponds to the amount of product produced.

  The selective excitation of different species is shown in the following three patterns. In particular, US Pat. No. 4,012,301 by Rich et al., (1977) discloses a vapor phase chemical reaction that is selectively excited by using a vibration mode corresponding to a continuously flowing reactant species. In particular, continuous wave lasers emit radiation that is absorbed by the vibration mode of the reaction volume.

US Pat. No. 5,215,634 (Wan et al., (1993)) discloses a process for the selective conversion of methane to the desired oxygen. In particular, methane is irradiated in the presence of a catalyst by pulsed microwave radiation to convert the reactants to the desired product. The disclosed physical catalyst includes nickel and microwave radiation is applied in the range of about 1.5-3.0 GHz.
The technology includes many well-known crystallization and structure-forming or modification methods (eg, single crystal, polycrystalline, amorphous, etc.) and many well-known post-processing methods that also affect the structure. (Eg, annealing, chemical etching, laser etching, temperature conditioning, pressure conditioning, atmospheric conditioning, etc.). Prior art methods generally include empirical results obtained in many trials and errors, and in most cases they are not well understood at the basic level.

  US Pat. No. 5,015,349 (Suib et al., (1991)) discloses a method for separating hydrocarbons to create cracked reaction products. It is disclosed that the hydrocarbon stream is irradiated with microwave energy that creates a low power density microwave discharge plasma, where the microwave energy is adjusted to achieve the desired result. The desired specific frequency of microwave energy is disclosed as being 2.45 GHz.

Physical catalysts are also well known in the art, but the role of physical catalysts in various reactions is not well understood at a basic level. In particular, a physical catalyst is typically considered to be a substance that alters the reaction rate of a chemical reaction without the appearance of a final product. It is known that some reactions can be accelerated or controlled by the presence of substances that appear themselves to remain intact after the reaction has ended. By increasing the rate of the desired reaction relative to the undesired reaction, the formation of the desired product can be maximized compared to the undesired by-product. Often, only trace amounts of physical catalyst are needed to promote the reaction. Also, some substances have been observed that can slow down the reaction rate when added in trace amounts. This appears to be the reverse of the catalyst, and in fact, substances that slow the reaction rate have been called negative catalysts or poisons. Known physical catalysts are passed through which they can be used and regenerated so that they can be used again. A physical catalyst operates by providing another path for a reaction having a faster or slower reaction rate than is available in the absence of that physical catalyst. At the end of the reaction, the physical catalyst may not be included in the reaction because it can be recovered. However, the physical catalyst should contribute somewhat to the reaction or the rate of the reaction will not change. Catalysis has traditionally been represented by the following five essential steps first assumed by Ostwald in the late 1800s:
1. Diffusion to the catalytic site (reactant);
2. Bond formation at the catalytic site (reactant);
3. Reaction of the catalyst-reactant complex;
4). 4. Bond breakage at the catalytic site (product); and Diffusion from the catalytic site (product).

  The exact mechanism of catalysis is unknown in the art, but physical catalysts, on the other hand, are known to accelerate reactions that occur too late to perform.

One well-known category of catalysts is autocatalysis. With autocatalysis, the product of a reaction functions as a catalyst, further increasing the rate at which product is formed. In an autocatalytic reaction, it is clear that the catalyst is actually involved in the reaction. However, little is known about the exact mechanism of autocatalysis.
Therefore, what is needed is a more in-depth understanding of crystal growth, crystallization, structure, and / or phase change processes and mechanisms, more precise control of many existing reaction processes, and entirely new reactions. By enabling engineering design of biological, organic, and / or inorganic processes and materials by developing pathways and / or new and / or desirable reaction products (eg, crystalline phases or species) is there.

Definition :
For the purposes of the present invention, the following terms and expressions present in the specification and claims are intended to have the following meanings:
“Activated complex” as used herein is the atom (charged or neutral) corresponding to the maximum in the reaction profile describing the conversion of the reactant to a reaction product. Means assembly. Any of the reactants or products in this definition can be an intermediate in the overall conversion involving more than one stage.

  “Applied spectral energy conditioning pattern” as used herein means (a) any spectral energy conditioning pattern applied externally to a tunable participant; and / or (b) a conditioning crystal Means the overall nature of the spectral conditioning environment reaction state used to tune one or more tunable participants that form a tuned participant in a crystallization reaction system.

“Applied spectral energy pattern” as used herein refers to (a) any externally applied spectral energy pattern; and / or (b) the spectral environment into the crystallization reaction system. It means the totality of reaction state input.
“Bravais lattice” as used herein means an acceptable combination of lattice type and unit cell.
“Catalytic spectral conditioning pattern”, as used herein, is at least a portion of a physical catalyst's spectral conditioning pattern that can be conditioned when applied to a conditionable participant. Means that the active agent can be conditioned to help catalyze and / or catalyze the crystallization reaction system as follows:

“Catalytic spectral conditioning pattern”, as used herein, when applied to a tunable participant, is tailored to catalyze the crystallization reaction system and / or assist the catalyst of the system by: Means at least part of the spectral conditioning pattern of a physical catalyst that can be tuned to form a tangible participant:
Complete replacement of physical and chemical catalysts;
In harmony with physicochemical catalysts to speed up the reaction;
Reducing the reaction rate by acting as a negative catalyst; or changing the reaction path to form a specific reaction product.

  “Catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern”, as used herein, is applied to a tunable participant in the form of a beam or field, where the conditioned participant is placed in the crystallization reaction system. Or having a spectral energy pattern corresponding to at least a portion of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst that catalyzes the crystallization reaction system and / or assists the catalyst when it becomes involved with the system. Means at least a portion of a spectral energy conditioning pattern that can be tuned to form a participant.

  “Catalytic spectral energy pattern”, as used herein, is a physical that can catalyze a specific reaction in a crystallization reaction system when applied to the crystallization reaction system in the form of a beam or field. It means at least part of the spectral energy pattern of the catalyst.

“Catalytic spectral pattern” as used herein means at least part of a spectral pattern of a physical catalyst that, when applied to a crystallization reaction system, can then catalyze a particular reaction. To:
a) complete replacement of the physical chemical catalyst;
b) working in concert with physicochemical catalysts to speed up the reaction rate;
c) Reducing the reaction rate by acting as a negative catalyst; or d) Changing the reaction path to form a specific reaction product.

“Columnar liquid crystal” as used herein means a mesophase liquid crystal in which disk-like molecules are stacked to form a column, and the column itself forms a two-dimensional long-range ordered hexagonal packing ( For example, cylindrical columnar mesophase of block copolymer).
“Regulation” or “conditioning”, as used herein, becomes involved in a crystallization reaction system (eg, disposed in and / or prior to activation of the crystallization reaction system). Means the application or exposure of conditioning energy or a combination thereof to at least one adjustable participant before the adjustable participant.

  A “tunable participant” as used herein refers to a molecule, in the form of any substance (eg, solid, liquid, gas, plasma) that can be tuned by the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern. By reactants, physical catalysts, solvents, physical catalyst support materials, reaction vessels, promoters and / or poisons consisting of macromolecules, ions and / or atoms (or their components).

  A “tuned participant”, as used herein, is any form of material (eg, solid, liquid, gas, plasma) that is tuned by the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern, By reactant, physical catalyst, solvent, physical catalyst support material, reaction vessel, promoter and / or toxicant consisting of molecules, macromolecules, ions and / or atoms (or their components).

  “Conditioning energy” as used herein means at least one of the following spectral energy conditioning: spectral energy conditioning catalyst; spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioning pattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy Conditioning pattern; catalyst spectral conditioning pattern; applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmental reaction state.

  A “conditioning environmental reaction state”, as used herein, is a conventional reaction that can exist and can positively or negatively affect the conditioning of at least one tunable participant. Means variables such as temperature, pressure, catalyst surface area, physical catalyst size and shape, concentration, electromagnetic radiation, electric field, magnetic field, mechanical force, sound field, conditioning reaction vessel size, shape and composition, and combinations thereof; And include.

  A “conditioning crystallization reaction system” as used herein refers to a reactant, physical catalyst, poison, promoter, which is included in any reaction pathway to form a coordinated participant. Solvent, physical catalyst support material, conditioning reaction vessel, reaction vessel, spectral conditioning catalyst, spectral energy conditioning catalyst, tuned participants, environmental conditioning reaction state, spectral environmental conditioning reaction state, applied spectral energy conditioning pattern, etc. Means a combination of

  A “conditioning reaction vessel” as used herein includes all components of a conditioning crystallization reaction system, including any physical structure or medium contained within the vessel or system, or Means a physical container or storage system for storage.

“Conditioning targeting” as used herein, in order to adjust a tunable participant before a tunable participant involved and / or activated in a crystallization reaction system, Means the application of conditioning energy to a tunable participant, wherein the conditioning energy is the following tunable participant: reactant: physical catalyst; promoter; poison; solvent; physical catalyst support material; reaction vessel; A conditioning reaction vessel; and / or with at least a portion of at least one of their mixtures or components (in any form of material), (1) direct resonance; and / or (2) harmonic resonance; and / or Or (3) to achieve anharmonic heterodyne resonance, the following spectral energy conditioning donor: spectral energy Spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioning pattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; provided by at least one of applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmental reaction state, wherein Wherein the spectral energy conditioning donor is such that at least one desired reaction product and, if the conditioned participant is to be involved in and / or activated in the crystallization reaction system, and At least one to help produce at least one desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate To form the integer been participant, it provides conditioning energy for adjusting at least one adjustable participant by interacting with at least one of the frequency.
“Coordination number”, as used herein, means the number of different atoms or ions in a crystal structure that are usually near the closest proximity of an atom or ion in the crystal structure (eg, FIG. 76a). And 76b show 6-fold coordination to Na ⁺ and Cl ⁻ , respectively).
“Crystal growth” or “crystallization”, as used herein, means an atom, ion, molecule into an ordered structure (macromolecule, micromolecule, etc.) containing at least one repeatable unit cell. And / or an arrangement of macromolecules.
“Crystalling reaction system”, as used herein, is a reactant, intermediate material, transient material that participates in some reaction pathway and usually results in at least some ordering (eg, crystallization or structure) in the system. Activated complexes, physical catalysts, poisons, cocatalysts, solvents, physical catalyst support materials, spectral catalysts, spectral energy catalysts, reaction products, seeds or seed crystals, crystal substrates, epitaxial growth substrates, environmental reactions It means a combination of conditions, spectral environmental reaction conditions, applied spectral energy pattern, reaction vessel and the like. However, controlling the system to prevent order falls within the meaning of this definition.
“Inductive structure” as used herein means a slightly more complex structure that is associated with a basic or simple structure, but is disturbed in some way into a more complex arrangement or structure. To do. The mechanisms to achieve such a slightly more complex structure are: (1) Ordered substitution of one or more species to another species; (2) Ordered exclusion of one or more species; (3) Addition of one or more species to the non-reactive site; and / or (4) distortion of the sequence of one or more species.

  “Direct Resonant Conditioning Targeting”, as used herein, modulates a tunable participant prior to a tunable participant involved and / or activated in a crystallization reaction system Means the application of conditioning energy to a tunable participant, where the conditioning energy is at least one tunable participant (eg, reactant: physical catalyst; promoter; toxicant; solvent; physical The following spectral energy conditioning to achieve direct resonance with at least a portion of the catalyst support material; reaction vessel; conditioning reaction vessel; and / or mixtures or components thereof (in any form of matter) Donor: Spectral energy conditioning catalyst; Spectral conditioning Spectral energy conditioning pattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; provided by at least one of applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmental reaction state, wherein said spectral energy conditioning The donor is at least one desired reaction product and / or a desired reaction if the conditioned participant becomes involved in and / or becomes activated in the crystallization reaction system. In order to form at least one coordinated participant that aids in the production of at least one desired reaction product at a rate. Providing a conditioning energy for adjusting at least one adjustable participant by interacting with the wave number.

  “Direct resonance targeting” as used herein refers to at least one of the following forms of substance: reactant: transient; intermediate; activated complex; physical catalyst; reaction To achieve direct resonance with the product; promoter; poison; solvent; physical catalyst support material; reaction vessel; and / or mixtures or components thereof, the following spectral energy donor: spectrum Spectral catalyst; spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectral energy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; means application of energy to a crystallization reaction system by at least one of applied spectral energy pattern and spectral environmental reaction state Wherein the spectral energy donor is at least one place. By interacting with at least one of the frequencies, excluding electrical and vibrational frequencies in the reactants, to produce the desired reaction product and / or at least one desired reaction product at the desired reaction rate. Energy is provided to at least one of the aforementioned materials.

“Electrochemical cell” as used herein means a device that converts chemical energy into electrical energy. The device includes two electrodes that are separated by an electrolyte. The electrodes include conductive materials (eg, solid or liquid metals, semiconductors, etc.) that can communicate with each other by an electrolyte. In these cells, oxidation and reduction reactions occur separately at each electrode.
“Electrocrystallization”, as used herein, means an electrochemical method that yields a crystalline material (eg, deposition of metal to the cathode in an electrolytic cell).
“Electrolytic cell” as used herein means an electrochemical cell that converts electrical energy to chemical energy. When the electrodes are joined by an external circuit, chemical reactions usually do not occur spontaneously at the electrodes. The chemical reaction is usually forced by applying an external current to the electrode. This cell is used to store electrical energy in chemical form, as in, for example, secondary or rechargeable batteries. The process in which water is decomposed into hydrogen gas and oxygen is called electrolysis, and such electrolysis is performed in an electrolysis cell.
“Electrometallurgy”, as used herein, is a field of metallurgy that utilizes an electrochemical process called electrowinning.
“Electric transfer” as used herein means the transfer of ions under the influence of a potential difference.
“Electrophoresis” as used herein means the movement of small suspended particles or large molecules in a liquid driven by a potential difference.
“Electroplating” as used herein means a process that produces a thin metal film on the surface of another material (eg, another conductive material such as metal or graphite). The material to be coated is arranged to be the cathode of the electrolysis cell and the electrolyte cations become cations that are coated on the surface of the cathode. When an electric current is applied, the electrode reaction that takes place at the electrode is a reduction reaction, whereby this metal ion becomes a metal at the cathode surface.
“Electrical extraction” as used herein means an electrochemical process that produces metal from achievements. In particular, metal oxides are usually found in nature, and electrochemical reduction is one of the most economical ways to produce metals from these ores. More specifically, the ore is dissolved into an acidic aqueous solution or molten salt, and the obtained electrolytic solution is electrolyzed. The metal is electroplated on the cathode (eg, in solid or liquid form) and oxygen is involved in the reaction at the anode. Manufactured in a copper, zinc, aluminum, magnesium, and sodium box process.
“Tautomeric polymorph” as used herein means a polymorph that exhibits a reversible transition between at least two different crystal structures.
“Environmental reaction conditions” as used herein are conventional reaction variables that can exist and can positively or negatively affect the reaction pathway in a crystallization reaction system, such as Means and includes temperature, pressure, catalyst surface area, physical catalyst size and shape, concentration, electromagnetic radiation, electric field, magnetic field, mechanical force, sound field, reaction vessel size, shape and composition, and combinations thereof To do.

“Epitaxial growth” as used herein refers to the growth of at least one atom, ion, molecule, and / or macromolecule on at least one substrate material.
“Frequency”, as used herein, refers to an equilibrium value where a physical phenomenon (eg, wave, field and / or motion) is in unit time (eg, 1 second; and 1 period / second = 1 Hz). Means the number of hours that vary from to full cycles. Variations from equilibrium can be positive and / or negative and often can be symmetric, asymmetric and / or proportional with respect to the equilibrium value.

“Galvanizing” as used herein means the process of coating an iron or steel surface with a thin layer of zinc for corrosion protection. Galvanization is performed electrochemically by an electroplating process or by a dip galvanizing process in which the metal is immersed in hot dip zinc.
“Harmonic conditioning targeting”, as used herein, to adjust a tunable participant before a tunable participant involved and / or activated in a crystallization reaction system Means the application of conditioning energy to a tunable participant, wherein the conditioning energy is at least one tunable participant (eg, reactant: physical catalyst; promoter; poison; solvent; physical catalyst support material) A reaction vessel; a conditioning reaction vessel; and / or a mixture or component (in any form of material) together with at least part of the following spectral energy conditioning donor to achieve harmonic resonance: spectral energy Conditioning catalyst; Spectral conditioning catalyst; Spectral energy conditioning pattern; catalyst spectral energy conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; provided by at least one of applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmental reaction state, wherein said spectral energy conditioning donor is At least one desired reaction product and / or at the desired reaction rate, when the conditioned participants become involved in and / or become activated in the crystallization reaction system Interact with at least one of its frequencies to form at least one coordinated participant that aids in the production of at least one desired reaction product. Providing a conditioning energy for adjusting at least one adjustable participant by use.

  “Harmonic targeting”, as used herein, includes at least one of the following forms of material: reactant: transient; intermediate; activated complex; physical catalyst; reaction product; To achieve harmonic resonance with promoter; poison; solvent; physical catalyst support material; reaction vessel; and / or mixtures or components thereof, the following spectral energy donor: spectral energy catalyst; Spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectral energy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; means application of energy to a crystallization reaction system by at least one of applied spectral energy pattern and spectral environmental reaction state, wherein said spectrum The energy donor is at least one desired reaction product. Energy is provided to at least one said form of substance by interacting with at least one of its frequencies to produce a composition and / or at least one desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate.

  By “holoreaction” as used herein is meant all components of a crystallization reaction system and a conditioning reaction system.

“Hydrolysis” as used herein means a chemical reaction in which water reacts with another substance to cause decomposition of other products, often a reaction that produces a tri- or base with water and a salt. including.
“Intermediate” as used herein means a molecule, ion, and / or atom that exists between a reactant and a reaction product in a reaction pathway or reaction profile. It corresponds to the minimum value in the reaction profile of the reaction between the reactant and the reaction product. The reaction involving the intermediate is typically a stepwise reaction.
“Liquid crystal” as used herein is one that has both liquid state properties (eg, short range translational order due to excluded volume) and crystalline state properties (eg, long range orientation order). The above crystal seeds are meant. In addition to long-range orientational order, smectic and cholesteric liquid crystals exhibit one-dimensional long-range translational order; columnar liquid crystals exhibit two-dimensional long-range translational order. Some higher-order smectic liquid crystals exhibit a two-dimensional positional order within the layer.
“Mass transport” as used herein means the transfer or transport of mass (ie, compounds, ions, etc.) from one part of the system to another. This phenomenon is usually coupled with diffusion, convection, and electron transfer, but may occur or be promoted by a spectral mechanism.
“Monomorphic polymorph” as used herein means a polymorph that exhibits an irreversible transition between at least two different crystal structures.
“Nematic liquid crystal” as used herein means a molecule that has a short-range translational order (eg, a closely packed liquid) and a long-range uniaxial orientational order.

  “Anharmonic heterodyne conditioning targeting” as used herein refers to a tunable participant prior to a tunable participant involved and / or activated in a crystallization reaction system. To tune, means the application of conditioning energy to a tunable participant, wherein the conditioning energy is at least one tunable participant (eg, reactant: physical catalyst; promoter; toxicant; solvent; physics In order to achieve an anharmonic heterodyne resonance with at least a portion of a catalytic catalyst support material; reaction vessel; conditioning reaction vessel; and / or mixtures or components thereof (in any form of matter) Energy conditioning donor: Spectral energy conditioning catalyst; Spectral conditioning conditioning pattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; provided by at least one of applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmental reaction state, wherein said spectral energy The conditioning donor is at least one desired reaction product and / or desired if the conditioned participant becomes involved in and / or becomes activated in the crystallization reaction system. In order to form at least one coordinated participant that helps produce at least one desired reaction product at the reaction rate, Providing a conditioning energy for adjusting at least one adjustable participant by interacting with Kutomo one of the frequency.

  “Anharmonic heterodyne targeting” as used herein refers to at least one of the following forms of material: reactant: transient; intermediate; activated complex; physical catalyst; To achieve anharmonic heterodyne resonance with a reaction product; a promoter; a poison; a solvent; a physical catalyst support material; a reaction vessel; and / or a mixture or component thereof. Spectral energy catalyst; Spectral catalyst; Spectral energy pattern; Spectral pattern; Catalytic spectral energy pattern; Catalytic spectral pattern; Application of energy to crystallization reaction system by at least one of applied spectral energy pattern and spectral environmental reaction state Means that the spectral energy donor is To produce at least one desired reaction product and / or at least one desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate, by interacting with at least one of its frequencies to at least one of the above-mentioned substances Provide energy.

“Participant” as used herein refers to reactant: transient; intermediate; activated complex; physical catalyst; promoter; toxicant; and / or molecule, macromolecule , Means a reaction product consisting of ions and / or atoms (or components thereof).
“Phase diagram” as used herein usually means a graphical representation of the equilibrium state for a set of system parameters.

  “Plasma” as used herein may or may not include electrically activated atoms or molecules, or ions (positive and / or negative), and background neutral gases. It means an almost electrically neutral (quasi-neutral) collection of good electrons, and some of which can respond to at least an electric and / or magnetic field.

"Plastic crystal" as used herein means a crystal that has a three-dimensional translational order but is disordered in orientation. This type of crystal usually has the opposite properties of nematic liquid crystals.
“Polymorphism” or “polymorphism” as used herein refers to a chemical composition or atom, ion, molecule, and / or that can exist in at least two different crystal structures or configurations. , Meaning the arrangement of macromolecules.
“Primary nucleation”, as used herein, is the first step in the crystallization process, usually the growth of new crystals.
“Quasicrystal” as used herein means the state of matter between a periodic long-range translational order in the crystalline state and a limited short-range translational order in the amorphous state.
“Reactant” as used herein refers to a starting material or starting component in a crystallization reaction system. Reactant means inorganic, organic and / or biological atoms, molecules, macromolecules, ions, compounds, substances and / or the like.

  “Reaction coordinates” as used herein means a molecular / intra-atomic or inter-shape variable whose change corresponds to the conversion of the reactant to a reaction product.

  “Reaction pathway” as used herein means those steps that lead to the formation of a reaction product. Reaction pathways include intermediates and / or transients and / or activated complexes. A reaction pathway can encompass some or all of the reaction profile.

  “Reaction product” as used herein means any product of a reaction involving a reactant. The reaction product has a different chemical composition from the reactants, or a substantially similar (or exactly the same) chemical composition, but exhibits a different physical or crystal structure and / or phase and / or nature. .

  “Reaction profile” as used herein means a plot of energy (eg, molecular potential energy, molar enthalpy or free energy) against reaction coordinates for the conversion of reactants to reaction products. .

  “Reaction vessel”, as used herein, is a physical that contains or contains all components of a crystallization reaction system, eg, any physical structure or medium contained within the vessel or system. Mean container or storage system.

  “Obtained energy conditioning pattern” as used herein is such that a tunable participant becomes involved and / or activated in a crystallization reaction system as a tuned participant. Means the totality of energy interactions between applied spectral energy conditioning patterns with at least one adjustable participant.

  “Obtained energy pattern” as used herein means the totality of energy interactions between applied spectral energy patterns having all participants and / or components in the crystallization reaction system. To do.

“Secondary nucleation”, as used herein, converts atoms, ions, molecules and / or macromolecules located near seed crystals (etc.) into nucleating crystals (etc.). It means crystallization to supply and achieve crystallization.
“Smectic liquid crystal” as used herein means a liquid crystal that exhibits long-range one-dimensional translational order in addition to long-range alignment order. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules are stacked in layers in addition to the alignment order.
“Spectral catalyst” as used herein means electromagnetic energy that acts as a catalyst in a crystallization reaction system, eg, electromagnetic energy having a spectral pattern that affects, controls, or directs the reaction pathway. To do.

  “Spectral conditioning catalyst” as used herein, when applied to a tunable participant to form a tuned participant, when said tuned participant in a crystallization reaction system is Electromagnetic energy that helps act as a catalyst, e.g., when a regulated participant becomes involved and / or activated with a crystallization reaction system, the reaction path in the crystallization reaction system is adjusted. Means electromagnetic energy having a spectral conditioning pattern that causes influence, control or direction by other participants.

  “Spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions” as used herein means at least one frequency and / or field that stimulates at least a portion of at least one conditioning environmental reaction condition.

“Spectral conditioning pattern” as used herein means a pattern formed by one or more electromagnetic frequencies that are emitted or absorbed after excitation of an atom or molecule. The spectral conditioning pattern can be formed by a known spectroscopic technique.
“Spectral energy catalyst” as used herein means energy that acts as a catalyst in a crystallization reaction system having a spectral energy pattern that affects, controls, and / or directs the reaction pathway. .

  “Spectral energy conditioning catalyst” as used herein, when applied to a tunable participant, once tuned helps the tunable participant act as a catalyst in a crystallization reaction system Means conditioning energy, wherein the tuned participant is included in the reaction pathway if the tuned participant becomes involved and / or activated in the crystallization reaction system. Has a spectral energy pattern to influence, control and / or direct.

  A “spectral energy conditioning pattern” as used herein is formed by one or more conditioning energies and / or components that are released or absorbed by molecules, ions, atoms and / or components thereof. And / or patterns present by and / or within molecules, ions, atoms and / or components thereof.

  A “spectral energy pattern” as used herein is formed by one or more energies and / or components released or absorbed by molecules, ions, atoms and / or components thereof, and Means a pattern present by and / or within a molecule, ion, atom and / or component thereof. For example, the spectral energy pattern can be a series of electromagnetic frequencies designed to cause a heterodyne effect by the reaction intermediate, or the spectral energy pattern can be part of the actual spectrum emitted by the reaction intermediate.

  “Spectral environmental reaction conditions” as used herein means at least one frequency and / or field that stimulates at least a portion of at least one environmental reaction condition in a crystallization reaction system.

  “Spectral pattern” as used herein means a pattern formed by one or more electric field frequencies that are released or absorbed after excitation of an atom or molecule. The spectral pattern can be formed by any known spectroscopic technique.

  “Targeting” as used herein refers to at least one of the following forms of substance: reactant: transient; intermediate; activated complex; physical catalyst; reaction product; To achieve direct resonance and / or harmonic resonance and / or anharmonic heterodyne-resonance with at least one of: a toxicant; a solvent; a physical catalyst support material; a reaction vessel; and / or a mixture or component thereof. Crystallization by at least one of the following spectral energy donors: spectral energy catalyst; spectral catalyst; spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectral energy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; Means the application of energy to the reaction system, where The energy donor is at least one by interacting with at least one of its frequencies to produce at least one desired reaction product and / or at least one desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate. Provide energy to the material in the form.

“Transient” as used herein means any chemical and / or physical state that exists between a reactant and a reaction product in a reaction pathway or reaction profile.
A “unit cell” as used herein is a basic, repeated collection of atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules in a crystal (eg, in a reaction product). means.

Summary of invention :
The present invention provides a variety of new spectral energy methods, also referred to herein as spectral crystallization, that can be utilized in several crystallization reactions, including very basic reactions in organic, biological, and / or inorganic systems. Is disclosed. It is desirable to achieve (or prevent) this to happen or occur in various crystallization reaction systems. This spectral energy method can be, for example, all known crystal growth or crystallization methods, such as, but not limited to, evaporation, vapor diffusion, liquid diffusion, thermal gradient, high vacuum methods such as gel diffusion , Molecular beam epitaxy, atomic layer epitaxy, epitaxial growth from solution, growth from liquid metal, solution (eg, aqueous solution, molten salt, other solvents), growth from supersaturated solution, growth from melt, precipitation growth , Hydrothermal growth, chemical vapor transport reaction growth, electrocrystallization, solid phase growth, acoustic crystallization, co-crystal and clathrate, etc. In addition, the method of the present invention achieves almost all types of crystallization by all known crystallization or crystal growth methods, including those that utilize defects if desired or those that eliminate defects if desired. Available to: In addition, the method of the present invention can be used to achieve desirable phase or structural changes in some already formed crystals (single crystal or polycrystal) and / or to some grown crystals as if It can behave as if a phase change has occurred. Examples include an annealing process, an etching process (eg, thermal, chemical), a chemical treatment (eg, solid, liquid gas, and / or plasma) and the like. Furthermore, the desired structure can be obtained with several materials using the method of the present invention.
In addition, the present invention discloses a variety of new spectral energy conditioning methods, also referred to herein as spectral conditioning or conditioning energy, that can be used to condition a conditionable participant. Once the conditioned participant is conditioned, the conditioned participant can be used in a crystallization reaction system. Such spectral energy conditioning methods are used to condition at least one conditionable participant, after which it can be converted into, for example, any type of organic or inorganic crystallization system, biological crystallization reaction system (eg, Plants and animals), industrial crystallization reaction systems, and the like. In addition, the conditioned participant itself may contain reactants and reaction products, for example, the chemical composition of the conditioned participant does not change substantially, but the conditioned participant is crystallized once. When associated with and / or activated by a reaction system, one or more energy dynamics, physical properties or structures and / or phases change.
The method of the present invention is useful for growing crystals that exhibit only a single crystal species, and mixed crystals (or to prevent crystal growth in certain crystallization reaction systems), as well as at least It is useful for growing crystals that exhibit two crystal seeds and is also useful in systems that are similarly polymorphic (ie, systems that have more than one crystal phase for a single chemical formula). For example, using the method of the present invention, given primary nucleation of crystals, secondary nucleation of crystals, control of a specific composition formed by crystallization, control of a specific phase formed by crystallization, Formation of crystals and / or phases that do not normally occur under a set of environmental conditions (or prevention of the formation of certain phases), changing the formed crystal phase to make the crystal behave as if the phase has changed Generation of primary or secondary nucleation of the first material or crystalline species and subsequent primary or secondary nucleation of the second composition and / or crystalline phase, epitaxial growth of the same or different materials on the substrate, Preferential or selective crystallization of specialty species from mixed species sources can be assisted. The method of the present invention can be used with all known methods of crystal growth or crystallization, whereby the method of the present invention enhances existing methods (eg, the use of seed crystals is at least 1 Enhanced by one spectral energy provider and / or at least one spectral energy conditioning provider), or substantially completely replaces certain aspects of growth (eg, a seed crystal is a fully spectral energy provider) And / or can be replaced by a provider of spectral energy conditioning). In addition, the method of the present invention can prevent the formation of certain crystals or structures, for example, one or more amorphous phases, usually when one or more crystallized species or structures occur. Or a structure can be produced.

  These new spectral energy techniques (currently referred to as spectral crystallization) and new spectral energy conditioning techniques (currently referred to as spectral conditioning crystallization) achieve energy transfer (or prevent energy transfer). And / or achievement of the basic expression contained herein disclosing various means for adjusting the energy dynamics and / or adjusting, for example, the resonant exchange of energy of at least two entities. Is made possible. The key to the transfer of energy between two entities (eg, one entity shares energy with another entity) is that energy is transferred when the frequency is matched. Teaching that For example, (1) frequency adaptation of materials of two different forms of spectral energy pattern, or frequency adaptation of materials of a spectral energy pattern having energy in the form of a spectral energy catalyst; and / or (2) spectrum Matching the frequency of two different forms of material in an energy conditioning pattern, or matching the frequency of a substance in a spectral energy pattern having energy in the form of a spectral conditioning catalyst. For example, when achieving energy transfer between a spectral energy conditioning pattern and a tunable participant, once the conditioning energy is transferred, the tuned participant is preferably the tuned energy pattern in the crystallization reaction system. Is used. The aforementioned entities both consist of substances (solids, liquids, gases and / or plasmas, and / or mixtures and / or components thereof), both of various forms of energy, or one of various It consists of energy in the form and the other one consists of substances (solid, liquid, gas and / or plasma, and / or mixtures and / or components thereof).

  More specifically, all materials can be represented by spectral energy patterns that can be very simple to very complex in appearance, for example depending on the complexity of the material. One example of a spectral energy pattern is a spectral pattern (or spectral conditioning pattern) that can be very simple to very complex in appearance, depending on the complexity of the material. In the case of a substance represented by a spectral pattern (or spectral conditioning pattern), the substance can exchange energy with other substances, for example if the two forms of spectral patterns are at least partially matched, or At least partially, they can be matched or overlapped (eg, spectral curves or spectral patterns (or spectral conditioning patterns) comprising one or more magnetic frequencies can overlap each other). In general, but not in all cases, the amount of energy transferred as the spectral pattern overlap increases (and thus the frequency overlap comprising the spectral pattern or spectral conditioning pattern increases). Will rise. Similarly, if, for example, a spectral pattern (or spectral conditioning pattern) of at least one form of energy can be caused to match or cover wrap with a substance (eg, a participant or a tunable participant) of the spectral pattern Will also transfer material. Thus, energy can be transferred to the material by causing a frequency match.

本発明の方法は、チタン酸バリウム結晶システム及びこれと同様なシステムにおけるいろいろな相をコントロールするために利用できる。
水に関するいろいろな相図（例えば、温度と圧力の関係を示すもの）が、図８３ａ、８３ｂ、及び８３ｃに示されており、図８３ｃが最も普通に見られる水の相図である。さらに、図ｑ８３ｄは、氷の六方晶構造のクリノグラフ投影図を示す。一般に、上記の図に示されている温度／圧力条件の下で、水には３つの認められている形態がある。具体的に言うと、水の第一の構造は氷のようなものであり、約４℃よりも下で安定である；第二の相は水晶のような構造の水であり、示された圧力条件の下で約４℃から約１５０℃までの間で安定である；水の第三の相は密に充填された配列で、示された圧力条件の下で約１５０℃より上で安定である。しかし、水は、人間に知られている最も複雑な構造の一つと言っても良い。詳しく言うと、上で述べた一般的な相の内部に多数の準相（subphase）が存在する。準相は、いろいろなミクロ及びマクロの分子クラスターと一致しているかもしれない。
さらに、あまり大きくない温度と圧力の関数として少なくとも１３の認められた水の相がある。本発明の方法は、水の挙動に影響を及ぼすために利用できる（例えば、本発明の方法によって、溶質／溶媒関係に影響を及ぼすことができる）。
ＭｇＯ−ＳｉＯ２システムの二元相図が図８４ａに示されている。フォルステライト（すなわち、Ｍｇ２ＳｉＯ４）の理想化された斜方晶構造のｘ−軸と垂直な平面での対応する平面図が図８４ｂに示されている。本発明の方法は、ＭｇＯ−ＳｉＯ２システムのいろい
ろな相をコントロールするために利用できる。 システムＦｅＯ／Ｆｅ２Ｏ３が、図８５ａに相図で示されている。α−鉄の立方晶体心構造の４つの単位胞のクリノグラフ投影図が図８５ｂに示されている。本発明の方法は、システムＦｅＯ／Ｆｅ₂Ｏ₃及びこれと同様なシステムにおいて望ましい相を得るために利用できる（さらに詳しく（原文欠）
さらに、図７９に示されているように、理論的な水和物に対する溶解度曲線が与えられる。本発明の方法は、このシステム及びこれと同様のシステムにおいて溶解度曲線で予期される相を修飾するのに利用できる（本明細書においてあとでさらに詳しく説明する。
さらに、図９７ａは、水中の異なる溶媒に関するいくつかの溶解度曲線を示す。これらの物質の多くは温度の関数として増加する溶解度を示している。塩化ナトリウムは、増加する温度の関数として水中の溶解度がゆっくりと増加する溶質の一つである。詳しく言うと、例えば、ＮａＣｌの溶解度プロットは、２０℃でのＮａＣｌの飽和溶液が１００グラムの水に溶解した約３６グラムのＮａＣｌを含むことを示す。したがって、例えば、もしも４０グラムのＮａＣｌが１００グラムの水に加えられた場合、約４グラムの溶解しないＮａＣｌが容器の底に固体として残される。さらに、もしも３６グラムのＮａＣｌが２０℃で１００グラムの水に加えられ、溶液の温度を上げた場合、溶液は少し不飽和になる（例えば、溶液はこの温度でさらにＮａＣｌを溶かすことができる）。さらに、上のように、もしも３６グラムのＮａＣｌが２０℃で１００グラムの水に加えられ、溶液の温度を下げた場合、溶液は、余分の（例えば、４グラムの）溶質が溶液から析出するまで、（少なくとも一時的に）“過飽和”になる（析出した時点で、溶液は再び飽和になる）。このように、前記の選択的な例は、溶解度曲線を利用して、飽和、不飽和、及び過飽和溶液を形成する仕方を例示している。この点で、飽和溶液は、普通、溶解していない溶質と溶解した溶質の間で平衡が確立されている状況と見なされる。しかし、本発明の方法は、既知の溶液における既知の温度での既知の物質の溶解度に（又は、少なくとも溶質が溶媒に溶解される速さに）有利に影響を及ぼす又は変化させることができる（本明細書においてあとでさらに詳しく説明する）。
さらに、本発明の方法は、ポリマー又は有機のシステム、並びに生物システムにも同様に適用できる。この点に関して、例えば、タンパク質、脂肪酸、脂質、ＤＮＡ、等の結晶又は構造成長、並びに、例えば、ポリマー（モノマー及びオリゴマーを含む）の結晶又は構造成長、は良く知られている。これらの結晶化反応系において異なる結晶又は構造種（例えば、相）も得られる。さらに、本発明の方法は、準結晶システム、液晶システムをコントロールするために、またある種の結晶化反応系が本質的に非結晶にとどまるように（例えば、圧倒的に非結晶又は局所秩序のみ）、又はある種の結晶化反応系内で少なくとも限られた秩序のみを促進するために利用できる。
図７８ａは、オレイン酸、エルシン酸、アスクレピン酸、及びパルミトレイン酸で見られるδ−α変換の分子モデルを示す。詳しく言うと、オレイン酸は主要な不飽和脂肪酸の一つである。不飽和脂肪酸の多くは多形的挙動を示す。不飽和脂肪酸は脂質分子で重要な役割を演じ、脂質分子は生物の機能的活性及び脂肪生成物で対応する決定的に重要な役割を演ずる。不飽和脂肪酸は生体膜のリン脂質の全てのアシル鎖の約半分を占め、アシル鎖のコンフォメーションの柔軟性によって膜の流動性と透過性を高める。不飽和脂肪及び脂質の物理的及び化学的性質に影響すると考えられる主要因子は二重結合の数、位置及び形態である。したがって、不飽和脂肪酸の構造−機能関係について分子レベルで理解することは非常に重要である。本発明の方法は、いろいろな有機又は生物的結晶化反応系におけるいくつかの反応生成物及び／又は反応経路をコントロールするのに役立つ。
図８７ｂは、ゴンドイン酸のα−形態とδ−形態の単結晶形態を示す。
図８７ｃは、ゴンドイン酸のα−形態とδ−形態のラマン散乱Ｃ−Ｃストレッチング・バンドを示す。
図８７ｄは、ゴンドイン酸とアスクレピン酸の混合物の相図を示し、図８７ｅは、ゴンドイン酸とオレイン酸の混合物の相図を示す。
特に、図８７ｂ−８７ｅは、これらのいろいろな生物学的な酸の間の重要な相と構造の関係を示している。これらの脂肪酸の内部での特定の相又は構造のコントロールは、生物的な反応で大きな意義と重要性がある。したがって、本発明の方法は、これらの結晶化反応系の内部でのいろいろな反応経路を助け、及び／又はコントロールするのに利用できる（本明細書においてあとでさらに詳しく説明する）。
しかし、生物学的な結晶化反応系における結晶化は、一般に、核生成と生長という基本的ステップに従う。この点に関して、例えば、脂肪化合物の結晶化には普通、過飽和又は過冷却が必要である。脂肪システムの場合、天然の脂肪はいろいろなトリアシルグリセロールの混合物であるため、結晶化はしばしば複雑である。したがって、これらのトリアシルグリセロールの濃度は普通低く、例えば、大きな過飽和度が、望ましい核生成を低い濃度の分子種で実現するために必要になる。さらに、トリアシルグリセロールは複雑な融解挙動が特徴である。トリアシルグリセロールは、普通、α、β、及びβ′という３つの異なる結晶構造を示す。これらの多形的結晶構造は、例えば、結晶化を進行させる特定の力に依存する。したがって、望ましい多形的な相を実現するために、これらのいろいろなプロセスについての理解とそれをコントロールする方法がこれらの結晶化反応系で重要になる。
その他の有機化合物、例えばタンパク質、の結晶化は普通、いろいろな触媒成分、例えば、塩、バッファー、沈殿剤、試薬、添加剤、及び温度、を用いて遂行される。したがって、本発明の方法は、これらの結晶化反応系内のいろいろな反応経路を助け、及び／又はコントロールするために利用できる（本明細書においてあとでさらに詳しく説明する）。 As discussed above, energy (E), frequency (ν) and wavelength (λ) and (c) speed of light under vacuum are interpreted through, for example, the following equations:
E = hν = hc / λ
Energy is transferred between different forms of material if a frequency or frequency set corresponding to at least a first form of material can be matched with a frequency or frequency set corresponding to at least a second form of material. And allows at least some interaction and / or reaction to occur, including at least one of two different forms of material. For example, substances in the form of solid, liquid, gas and / or plasma (and / or mixtures and / or parts thereof) can interact and / or react and the desired reaction product or result Can be formed. Any combination of substances of the above forms (eg solid / solid, solid / liquid, solid / gas, solid / plasma, solid / gas / plasma, solid / liquid / gas, etc., and / or mixtures thereof and / or Or) is enabled to achieve the desired interaction and / or reaction occurrence in various crystallization reaction systems in biological, organic and / or inorganic systems.
In particular, the present invention is applicable to, for example, the following systems: (1) graphite / diamond; (2) phase related to SiO ₂ ; (3) phase related to BaTiO ₃ ; (4) water / Ice phase; (5) solubility of the substance in the solvent (eg, solute in water); (6) phase in binary system MgO / SiO ₂ ; (7) phase in FeO / Fe ₂ O ₃ system; (8) (9) a phase in the polymer; (10) a phase in the lipid; and (11) a phase in the protein. Specific experimental examples of various crystallization reaction systems are described in the “Examples” section later in this specification, but the following exemplary system is about the applicability of the method of the present invention. Give a general understanding.
Figures 80a, 80b, and 80c relate to various phases of carbon including graphite and diamond. The phase diagram for the various phases of carbon is shown in FIG. 80a. This phase diagram shows that graphite is the dominant phase at low pressures and temperatures, but that the transition to diamond occurs at high temperatures and / or high pressures. A clinograph projection of the hexagonal structure of diamond is shown in FIG. 80b, and a clinograph projection of the cubic unit cell of diamond is shown in FIG. 80c. The method of the present invention can be utilized to aid in phase conversion in this system and systems such as this system.
81a and 81b show a two-phase diagram of the SiO ₂ system. Specifically, FIG. 81a shows the phase equilibrium diagram of SiO ₂ and FIG. 81b shows the metastable phase also found in the SiO ₂ system. FIG. 81 Brown shows a clinograph projection of an idealized cubic β-cristobalite unit cell. FIG. 81d shows a plan view projected onto a plane perpendicular to the principal axis of the rhombohedral structure of α-quartz. FIG. 81e shows a plan view of a hexagonal crystal of β-quartz projected onto a plane perpendicular to the z-axis. The method of the present invention is useful for controlling one or more phases in this SiO ₂ system and similar systems.
FIG. 82a shows the phase diagram of the Ba ₂ TiO ₄ / TiO ₂ system. Of interest in this phase diagram is the formation of barium titanate (BaTiO ₃ ). FIG. 82b shows a clinograph projection of an idealized cubic unit cell of BaTiO ₃ . Furthermore, FIG. 82c shows the cation displacement relative to the oxide sublattice in tetragonal BaTiO ₃ . In addition, Table C shows the relationship between the transition temperature and the crystal structure for the phase behavior of BaTiO ₃ .

The method of the present invention can be used to control various phases in barium titanate crystal systems and similar systems.
Various phase diagrams for water (eg, showing the relationship between temperature and pressure) are shown in FIGS. 83a, 83b, and 83c, with FIG. 83c being the most commonly seen water phase diagram. Furthermore, FIG. Q83d shows a clinograph projection of the hexagonal crystal structure of ice. In general, under the temperature / pressure conditions shown in the above figure, there are three recognized forms of water. Specifically, the first structure of water is like ice and is stable below about 4 ° C .; the second phase is crystal-structured water, shown Stable between about 4 ° C. and about 150 ° C. under pressure conditions; the third phase of water is a tightly packed array, stable above about 150 ° C. under the indicated pressure conditions It is. But water is one of the most complex structures known to humans. More specifically, there are many subphases within the general phase described above. The quasi-phase may be consistent with a variety of micro and macro molecular clusters.
In addition, there are at least thirteen recognized water phases as a function of modest temperature and pressure. The method of the present invention can be used to influence the behavior of water (eg, the solute / solvent relationship can be influenced by the method of the present invention).
A binary phase diagram of the MgO-SiO2 system is shown in FIG. 84a. The corresponding plan view in the plane perpendicular to the x-axis of the idealized orthorhombic structure of forsterite (ie Mg2SiO4) is shown in FIG. 84b. The method of the present invention can be used to control various phases of the MgO-SiO2 system. The system FeO / Fe2O3 is shown in phase diagram in FIG. 85a. A clinographic projection of four unit cells of the α-iron cubic core structure is shown in FIG. 85b. The method of the present invention can be used to obtain the desired phase in the system FeO / Fe ₂ O ₃ and similar systems (more details)
In addition, a solubility curve for the theoretical hydrate is provided, as shown in FIG. The method of the present invention can be used to modify the expected phase in the solubility curve in this system and similar systems (described in more detail later herein).
In addition, FIG. 97a shows several solubility curves for different solvents in water. Many of these materials exhibit increasing solubility as a function of temperature. Sodium chloride is one of the solutes that slowly increase in water solubility as a function of increasing temperature. Specifically, for example, a NaCl solubility plot shows that a saturated solution of NaCl at 20 ° C. contains about 36 grams of NaCl dissolved in 100 grams of water. Thus, for example, if 40 grams of NaCl is added to 100 grams of water, about 4 grams of undissolved NaCl is left as a solid at the bottom of the container. In addition, if 36 grams of NaCl is added to 100 grams of water at 20 ° C. and the temperature of the solution is raised, the solution becomes slightly unsaturated (eg, the solution can dissolve more NaCl at this temperature). . Furthermore, as above, if 36 grams of NaCl is added to 100 grams of water at 20 ° C. and the temperature of the solution is lowered, the solution will cause extra (eg, 4 grams) solute to precipitate out of the solution. Until (at least temporarily) “supersaturated” (at the time of precipitation, the solution becomes saturated again). Thus, the above selective examples illustrate how to use saturated solubility curves to form saturated, unsaturated, and supersaturated solutions. In this regard, a saturated solution is usually considered a situation where an equilibrium is established between an undissolved solute and a dissolved solute. However, the method of the present invention can advantageously affect or change the solubility of a known substance at a known temperature in a known solution (or at least the rate at which the solute is dissolved in the solvent) ( This will be described in more detail later in this specification).
Furthermore, the method of the invention is equally applicable to polymer or organic systems as well as biological systems. In this regard, for example, crystals or structural growth of proteins, fatty acids, lipids, DNA, etc. and, for example, crystal or structural growth of polymers (including monomers and oligomers) are well known. Different crystals or structural species (eg, phases) are also obtained in these crystallization reaction systems. Furthermore, the method of the present invention can be used to control quasicrystalline systems, liquid crystal systems, and so that certain crystallization reaction systems remain essentially amorphous (eg, predominantly amorphous or local order only). Or at least limited order in a certain crystallization reaction system.
FIG. 78a shows the molecular model of the δ-α conversion seen with oleic acid, erucic acid, asclepic acid, and palmitoleic acid. Specifically, oleic acid is one of the major unsaturated fatty acids. Many unsaturated fatty acids exhibit polymorphic behavior. Unsaturated fatty acids play an important role in lipid molecules, and lipid molecules play a corresponding critical role in the functional activity of the organism and the fat product. Unsaturated fatty acids occupy about half of all acyl chains of phospholipids in biological membranes and increase membrane fluidity and permeability through the conformational flexibility of the acyl chains. The major factors that are thought to affect the physical and chemical properties of unsaturated fats and lipids are the number, position and form of double bonds. It is therefore very important to understand the structure-function relationship of unsaturated fatty acids at the molecular level. The method of the present invention is useful for controlling several reaction products and / or reaction pathways in various organic or biological crystallization reaction systems.
FIG. 87b shows single crystal forms of the α-form and the δ-form of gondonic acid.
FIG. 87c shows the Raman scattered CC stretching bands of the α-form and δ-form of gondonic acid.
FIG. 87d shows a phase diagram of a mixture of gondonic acid and asclepic acid, and FIG. 87e shows a phase diagram of a mixture of gondonic acid and oleic acid.
In particular, FIGS. 87b-87e show the important phase and structure relationships between these various biological acids. Control of specific phases or structures within these fatty acids is of great significance and importance in biological reactions. Thus, the method of the present invention can be used to help and / or control various reaction pathways within these crystallization reaction systems (described in more detail later herein).
However, crystallization in a biological crystallization reaction system generally follows the basic steps of nucleation and growth. In this respect, for example, crystallization of fatty compounds usually requires supersaturation or supercooling. In the case of fat systems, crystallization is often complicated because natural fat is a mixture of various triacylglycerols. Therefore, the concentration of these triacylglycerols is usually low, for example, a high degree of supersaturation is required to achieve the desired nucleation with low concentrations of molecular species. In addition, triacylglycerol is characterized by complex melting behavior. Triacylglycerol usually exhibits three different crystal structures, α, β, and β ′. These polymorphic crystal structures depend, for example, on the specific forces that drive crystallization. Therefore, in order to achieve the desired polymorphic phase, an understanding of these various processes and how to control them becomes important in these crystallization reaction systems.
Crystallization of other organic compounds, such as proteins, is usually accomplished using various catalyst components, such as salts, buffers, precipitants, reagents, additives, and temperatures. Thus, the methods of the present invention can be utilized to assist and / or control various reaction pathways within these crystallization reaction systems (as described in more detail later herein).

  In order to practice the techniques of the present invention, materials (eg, solids, liquids, gases and / or plasmas, and / or mixtures and / or portions thereof) are applied to at least a portion of a crystallization reaction system, for example. Spectral energy donors, eg, catalytic spectral energy patterns, catalytic spectral patterns, spectral energy patterns, spectral energy catalysts, spectral patterns, spectral catalysts, spectra, that collectively result in applied spectral energy patterns By applying energy in the form of environmental reaction states and / or combinations thereof, along with the desired reaction path, for example, interaction with other substances and / or parts thereof in the crystallization reaction system and / or Reaction can be triggered or affected (or reaction and / or Or have been found to be able to prevent interaction).

Similarly, substances (eg, solids, liquids, gases and / or plasmas, and / or mixtures and / or parts thereof) collectively apply applied spectral energy conditioning patterns applied to tunable participants. In the form of a catalyst spectral energy conditioning pattern, a catalytic spectral conditioning pattern, a spectral energy conditioning pattern, a spectral energy conditioning catalyst, a spectral conditioning pattern, a spectral conditioning catalyst, a spectral conditioning environmental reaction state and / or combinations thereof, By applying the energy in the conditioning reaction system to the participants that can be tuned, the crystallization reaction system is applied along the desired reaction path. Interactions and / or reactions with other substances and / or parts thereof can be caused or influenced. In particular, the applied conditioning energy can be adjusted to a regulated participant that can cause the behavior of the crystallization reaction system in the desired manner when exposed to and / or activated by the crystallization reaction system. (Eg, the adjusted energy pattern of the adjusted participants preferably interacts with at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system).
One aspect of the present invention is the discovery that the spectral energy pattern delivered to the crystallization reaction system functions as a kind of scaffold that realizes and controls the structure of the crystallization and / or reaction products. For example, seed crystals in a crystallization reaction system can be modeled as an autocatalyst. In this model, seed crystals emit a unique spectral energy pattern that extends a short distance into the surrounding medium. This spreading energy pattern functions as a kind of scaffold, which leads to crystal growth and catalysis. In this regard, seed crystals can be considered as autocatalysts, and crystallization can be considered as an autocatalytic process. A spectral energy pattern can be delivered to the crystallization reaction system that enhances or replaces the intrinsic energy scaffold of the seed crystal. As will be explained in more detail in the “Examples” section later in this specification, an example of this phenomenon is the use of a sodium vapor lamp as the spectral energy pattern, thereby allowing sodium halide from various aqueous solutions. The formation of crystals is strengthened.
Since seed crystals appear to behave as catalysts in the autocatalytic process, thereby forming one or more ordered or structured forms of the substance in the crystallization reaction system, seed crystals (or seed crystal spectra, The energy pattern is an important component to be considered in the crystallization reaction system. For example, seed crystals catalyze at least one reaction in a crystallization reaction system, leading to the formation of one or more seeds (eg, crystal growth, crystallization, phase change, etc.). In the case of seed crystals, the spectral frequency that is constantly released and absorbed by all substances acts as a spectral catalyst that encourages further crystal formation in the crystallization reaction system. However, these emitted frequencies are usually somewhat limited in intensity (ie, relatively weak) due to the relatively small size of the seed crystals used. Thus, the projected or emitted spectral pattern may not reach far into the crystallization reaction system. This teaches that crystallization can be enhanced if the spectral signal of the seed crystal is effectively amplified. In many respects, the electrolysis and / or magnetic field emitted from the seed crystals acts as an electromagnetic scaffold, for example, for the rapid and ordered formation of more crystalline phases. However, when the signal is small (eg, the “scaffold” does not extend too far into the reactants or participants in the crystallization reaction system), crystal growth is relatively slow. However, if the size of the “scaffold” can be effectively increased (for example, using a sufficiently strong spectral energy provider to increase the effective size of the spectral pattern emitted by the seed crystal. For example, the speed of crystallization or the speed of crystal growth can be effectively increased. Furthermore, by selecting the directing pattern of the electromagnetic scaffold, for example, the shape, form, and phase of crystal growth or formation in the crystallization reaction system can be influenced.
In particular, existing seed crystals produce an electromagnetic “scaffolding” effect that includes, for example, a standing wave and nodal combination caused by the interaction of the crystallized seed's spectral pattern. Such electromagnetic waves include electronic, vibration, rotation, balance, translation, gyro, and torsional frequencies as well as fine splitting, hyperfine splitting frequency, Stark frequency, and Zeeman frequency. These particular electromagnetic nodes and waves usually extend only a short distance from the seed crystal (or epitaxial substrate or nucleation site). For example, when an adatom approaches a seed crystal, the adatom resonates in synchrony with a standing wave pattern (eg, the presence of a scaffold) emitted from the seed crystal and is attracted, for example, by a beading process. A new layer is formed on the seed crystal (ie, growth of one or more crystal seeds occurs thereby).
Therefore, for example, by enhancing or supplementing the naturally occurring standing wave pattern of electromagnetic energy present in the seed crystal, growth can be accelerated one by one, and the growth can be controlled with high specificity. Specific controls for growth include control of lattice vibration of atomic or root crystals; control of vibration, vibration or translation frequency for molecular crystals such as water; for example, twist or hydrogen bond frequency for organic macromolecules And / or electronic or other frequency control.
In addition to supplementing the seed crystal electromagnetic pattern, a complete replacement of the electromagnetic pattern (eg, use of a spectrum provider) may be utilized.

  In those cases, similarly, the spectral energy pattern to which the interaction and / or reaction is applied (or the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) is, for example, the spectral energy pattern of one or more forms of material in the crystallization reaction system. Occurrence can occur if it results in some type of denaturation. Various forms of substances include: reactants: transients; intermediates; activated complexes; physical catalysts; reaction products; promoters; poisons; solvents; physical catalyst support materials; A mixture of these components. For example, the applied spectral energy donor (ie, at least one spectral energy catalyst; spectral catalyst; spectral energy pattern; spectral pattern; catalytic spectral energy pattern; catalytic spectral pattern; applied spectral energy pattern and spectral environmental reaction state) Is appropriately targeted to a participant and / or component in a crystallization reaction system, the generation of one or more participants and / or the desired interaction with it (eg, primary nucleation and / or Secondary nucleation) can be provided (or primary and / or secondary nucleation can be prevented or substantially eliminated if desired). In particular, the applied spectral energy donor can be targeted for achieving a very specific desired result and / or desired rate of reaction product and / or along the desired reaction path.

  Targeting is often a direct resonance approach (ie, direct resonance targeting), a harmonic resonance approach (ie, harmonic targeting) and / or a non-harmonic heterodyne resonance approach (ie, non-resonant heterodyne targeting). ). Spectral energy donors are, for example, at least one frequency or field of atoms or molecules, such as electronic frequency, vibration frequency, rotation frequency, rotation-vibration frequency, vibration frequency, deformation frequency, swirl frequency, microfission frequency, hyperfine fission frequency , Magnetic field induced frequency, electric field induced frequency, natural vibration frequency, and interaction with all components and / or parts thereof (but not limited to) Will be discussed in more detail later in the book). These approaches can result in mimicking at least one mechanism of action such as physical catalysts, environmental factors and / or seed crystals in the crystallization reaction system.

  Similar concepts apply to the use of spectral energy conditioning patterns that are applied to the formation of conditioned participants in conditioning reactions. Where one applied spectral energy conditioning pattern is used, the interaction and / or reaction is applied to the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern, eg, such that the crystallization reaction system is included and / or activated. If it leads to some type of modification to the spectral energy pattern of one or more tunable participants before the participant, it can be triggered in a conditioning crystallization reaction system. Various forms of substances that can be used as tunable participants include: reactants; physical catalysts; reaction products; promoters; toxicants; solvents; physical catalyst support materials; reaction vessels; Includes a mixture of ingredients. For example, the applied spectral energy conditioning donor (eg, at least one of the following: spectral energy conditioning catalyst; spectral conditioning catalyst; spectral energy conditioning pattern; spectral conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern; catalytic spectral conditioning pattern; application Spectral energy conditioning pattern and spectral conditioning environmental reaction state) can be included in the crystallization reaction system and / or prior to, for example, tunable participants and / or components thereof to be activated thereby Production of the desired reaction product when appropriately targeted to the participant and / or its components, It may provide the desired interaction with one or more participant in beauty / or crystallization reaction system. In particular, the applied spectral energy conditioning donor can be targeted to a tunable participant in order to achieve a very specific desired result (eg, a very specific tuned energy pattern). Thus, the desired tuned energy pattern is such that, if the tuned participant is involved in or activated in the crystallization reaction system, the desired reaction pathway, desired reaction product, and / or crystal The desired rate in the conversion reaction system can be brought about. Furthermore, the regulated participant comprises both the reactant and the reaction product itself, so that the chemical composition of the regulated participant is not substantially changed (if any), but One or more physical properties or structures or phases, or relationships, in one or more of its energy structures are subject to change when the regulated entity is encompassed and / or activated by the crystallization reaction system. .

  Conditioning targeting includes direct resonance conditioning approach (ie, direct resonance conditioning targeting), harmonic resonance conditioning approach (ie, harmonic conditioning targeting), anharmonic heterodyne conditioning resonance approach (ie, anharmonic heterodyne conditioning targeting) ). Spectral energy conditioning donor is at least one frequency of atom or molecule, e.g. electronic frequency, vibration frequency, rotation frequency, rotation-vibration frequency, vibration frequency, deformation frequency, swirl frequency, microfission frequency, hyperfine fission frequency, magnetic field Interact with tunable participants by interacting with, but not limited to, induced frequencies, electric field induced frequencies, natural vibrational frequencies, and all components and / or parts thereof (Discussed later in more detail herein; and specific examples are given in Table D). Some examples of known sources of spectral energy conditioning donors include EOF sources, VLF sources, radiation sources, microwave sources, infrared sources, visible light sources, ultraviolet light sources, X-ray sources and γ-ray sources, However, it is not limited only to them.

  Table D below lists examples of various possible sources of spectral energy patterns and spectral energy conditioning patterns.

Table D
ELF, VLF and radiation sources :
• Electron tubes (eg oscillators, eg regenerators, Meissner, Harley, Colpitts, Ultraudion, tuned lattice tuned plates, crystal rectifiers, dynatrons, transitionrons, beat-frequency, RC transitionrons, phase transitions, Multivibrator, inverse feedback, sweep-circuit, thyratron cleanup);
・ Glow tube;
・ Silatron;
・ Electron beam tubes;
・ Cathode ray tubes;
・ Light tube;
・ Ballast tube; Hot body;
・ Magnetotubes;
・ Velocity modulation tube;
A crystal rectifier (eg, microprocessor, piezoelectric, quartz, quartz strip, SAW resonator, semiconductor);
Oscillators (eg crystal rectifiers, digitally compensated crystal rectifiers, hybrids, ICs, microcomputer-compensated crystal rectifiers, oven-controlled crystal rectifiers OCXO, positive emitter coupled theories, pulses, RC, RF, RFXO, SAW, sine wave, square wave, temperature compensated TCXO, trigger coherent, VHF / UHF, potential controlled crystal VCXO, potential controlled VCO, dielectric resonator DRO);
Microwave source :
・ Hot body ・ Spark discharge;
An electron tube (eg triode);
・ Velocity modulation tube ・ Velocity modulation tube and multiplier tube;
・ Magnetotubes;
・ Magnetoelectric harmonized tube;
Traveling wave tubes and antibody wave tubes;
・ Fireworks oscillator;
・ Mass oscillator;
・ Vacuum tube ・ Double tube ・ Microwave tube;
Microwave solid state devices (eg, transistors, bipolar transistors, field effect transistors, migrated electron (Gann) devices, avalanche bipolars, tunnel bipolars);
・ Maser;
Oscillators (eg crystal rectifiers, digitally compensated crystal rectifiers, hybrids, ICs, microcomputer-compensated crystal rectifiers, oven-controlled crystal rectifiers OCXO, positive emitter coupled theories, pulses, RC, RF, RFXO, SAW, sine wave, square wave, temperature compensated TCXO, trigger coherent, VHF / UHF, potential controlled crystal VCXO, potential controlled VCO, dielectric resonator DRO);
Infrared source :
Filaments (eg Nernst, heat-resistant, spherical);
Gas mantle;
Lamps (eg mercury, neon);
・ Hot body;
・ Bipolar ILEDs that emit infrared light, arrays;
Visible source :
· flame;
・ Electric arc;
・ Spark electrodes;
Gas discharge (eg sodium, mercury);
・ Planar gas discharge;
・ Plasma;
・ Hot body;
・ Filament, incandescent;
• Laser, laser bipolar (eg, multiple quantum well type, double heterostructure);
• Lamps (eg arc, cold cathode, fluorescence, electroluminescence, fluorescence, high intensity discharge, hot cathode, incandescent, mercury, neon, tungsten halogen, deuterium, tritium, hollow cathode, xenon, high pressure, photoionization, zinc );
-Light-emitting diode, LED array:
Organic light-emitting bipolar OLEDs (eg small molecules, polymers);
• fluorescence (eg electricity-, chemistry-);
· Charge coupled device CCD;
・ Cathode ray tube CRT;
Cold cathodes;
・ Field radiation;
・ Liquid crystal LCD;
Liquid crystals on silicon LcoS;
・ Low temperature polycrystalline silicon LTPS;
Metal-insulating metal (MLM) active matrix;
Active matrix liquid crystal;
・ Chips on glass COG;
・ Twisted nematic TN;
・ Super Swiss Tonematic STN;
・ Thin film transistor TNT;
• fluorescence (eg vacuum, chemical-);
Ultraviolet source :
・ Spark discharge;
・ Arc discharge;
・ Hot body;
Lamps (eg gas discharge, mercury vapor, neon, fluorescence, mercury-xenon);
・ Light emitting diode, LED array;
· laser;
X-ray source :
・ Atomic inner shell;
・ Positron-electron annihilation;
-Electron impact on solids;
・ Spark discharge;
・ Hot body;
• tubes (eg gas, high vacuum);
γ-ray source :
・ Radiation nuclei;
・ Hot body.
The method of the present invention can be used to achieve favorable characteristics such as growth and / or orientation and / or morphology that are not normally achievable with known systems. For example, when using seed crystals, the electromagnetic energy is preferentially directed to one or more sides of the seed crystal to increase the “scaffold” that spreads from one or more sides of the seed crystal and to give priority from those sides. Growth can be realized. Furthermore, not only spectral energy providers that simulate seed crystal “scaffolds” or energy patterns, but also spectral energy providers such as spectral environmental reaction conditions can be used. In this regard, environmental factors such as temperature, pressure, concentration, etc. can also have a beneficial effect on crystal growth or crystallization. Thus, for example, instead of or in addition to a spectral energy pattern corresponding to a “scaffold” of seed crystals, a spectral pattern corresponding to, for example, temperature and / or pressure can be applied.
In addition, for example, a spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied to a tunable participant, which alone or when used with a spectral energy pattern causes the conditioned participant to crystallize. Advantageously affects the formation of the desired reaction product at one or more specific locations in the crystallization reaction system. For example, the conditioned participating substance can function as a seed crystal itself, or can compensate for the energy pattern of one or more participating substances in the crystallization reaction system. Depending on the individual crystallization reaction system, the spectral energy pattern and the spectral energy conditioning pattern may be substantially similar to each other or very different from each other. An example of this phenomenon is described in more detail later in this section in the “Examples” section, but a sodium vapor lamp is used as a spectral energy pattern to condition water prior to dissolving the solute. Used.
As noted above, a spectral energy provider can be used to enhance the system or replace it with seed crystals, for example. In this regard, for example, if seed crystals are used to provide a critical size for nucleation, crystallization occurs at the provided nucleation site. There are several important factors associated with such nucleation sites. However, instead of using such a seed crystal, a spectrum energy provider can be input to the crystallization reaction system to effectively function as a seed crystal.
The method of the present invention can also grow (eg, epitaxially grow) crystals in a different crystalline state from the material that one wishes to grow on another material (eg, an epitaxial substrate). In particular, for example, by providing a suitable spectral energy provider on the substrate, a suitable “scaffold” is extended from the surface of the substrate, and the desired atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules on at least one substrate surface, Can be aspirated.
In addition, atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules bind or attach to the substrate in the desired manner, for example, by substantially matching the spectral energy pattern of the substrate with the spectral energy provider. Can be promoted. If, for example, the spectral energy pattern (eg, electromagnetic energy pattern) produced by the desired substrate is, for example, the spectrum of an atom, ion, molecule, and / or macromolecule that is to be bound to that substrate. If the energy pattern is not well matched, the substrate can be caused to emit a spectral energy pattern that is different from the energy pattern that it normally emits (ie, the intrinsic). In this regard, for example, certain frequencies can be heterodyne (eg, externally or internally) on the substrate so that the substrate behaves in a spectrally different manner (ie, different, more Can create a favorable energy pattern). Using these methods that allow the substrate to behave in a spectrally different manner, for example, (1) attract ions, atoms, molecules, and / or macromolecules (or parts thereof) that are not normally attracted. (2) attracts ions, atoms, molecules and / or macromolecules (or parts thereof), which then remain anchored to the substrate; (3) ions, atoms, molecules and / or macros; Attracts a molecule (or part thereof), which then becomes free-standing away from the substrate; and / or (4) does not normally repel, eg, corresponds to an impurity or defect in a particular structure or material Ions, atoms, molecules, and / or macromolecules (or parts thereof) can be repelled. These methods make it possible to produce many difficult and / or economically undesirable products in an efficient, economical and desirable manner. In addition, these methods can be used to form a pattern or design of atoms, ions, molecules, and / or macromolecules that are similar or dissimilar to at least a portion of the substrate. In particular, specially useful designs can be formed permanently or temporarily on various substrate materials (eg, by forming circuit patterns on a chip) to achieve various functional effects.
Furthermore, composite crystals can be formed using the method of the present invention (eg, formation of superlattices). In this regard, a first crystal growth will be achieved using a first spectral energy provider in a crystallization reaction system. Thereafter, different spectral energy providers (and / or conditioned participants) can be introduced into the same crystallization reaction system to allow different crystal seeds to grow, for example, on the initially generated crystal seeds. . In this way, alternating layers of different crystalline materials are obtained. An example of an alternating layer useful in the field of inorganic crystallization is a CdTe layer followed by a ZnTe layer. In addition, one or more alternating layers of amorphous seeds can be included with one or more crystalline seeds. Accordingly, many other sequences not mentioned will occur to those of skill in the art given the teachings contained herein. An example of this phenomenon is described in more detail later in this section in the “Examples” section, but uses various spectral energy patterns to enhance the formation of specific crystal seeds in a composite crystal. .
Furthermore, composite crystals are also obtained when different growth patterns are realized in different directions. In this regard, for example, the first crystal seed can be realized in the XY direction and another crystal seed can be realized in the Z direction, for example.
The method of the present invention can also enhance the evaporation crystallization process. In this regard, when the material flows from the normal vapor phase, the crystallization growth rate is approximately equal to the difference between the flow rate of atoms from the vapor and the evaporation rate. The incoming flow rate is proportional to the vapor pressure (and therefore to the vapor density). The present invention effectively reduces the evaporation rate, for example, by using a spectral energy provider (and / or a spectral energy conditioning provider) that corresponds to the electronic frequency or the frequency of the individual components of the crystal lattice, For example, it helps to stabilize atoms deposited on the surface, or generally within the crystallization reaction system. This effective stabilization can, for example, limit the reabsorption of atoms into the gas and / or accelerate the deposition of adsorbed atoms.
The method of the present invention can also be used to eliminate certain guiding structures, if desired, or to realize certain guiding structures. In this connection, there are various defects in the crystal. These defects include: point defects (eg, lattice vacancies, interstitial atoms, impurities, etc.); line defects (eg, dislocations); surface defects (eg, grain boundaries, stacking faults, etc.); and three-dimensional There are defects (eg, stripes, cellular growth, vacancies, inclusions, etc.). In many cases, it is desirable to realize a perfect crystal, for example, because a perfect crystal is mechanically very strong. Such crystals are very useful in applications where scratching or wear is a problem. However, when crystal defects such as lattice defects, interstitial atoms, dislocations, grain boundaries, and stacking faults occur, all of these defects reduce the mechanical strength. To minimize defects, using a suitable spectral energy provider, for example, “getter”, “getting”, or “getting” for system impurities at a location away from the area where crystallization occurs A “scavenging” standing wave pattern or “scaffold” can be created. Such “getter” spectral patterns can minimize the inclusion of undesirable defects. Alternatively, if it is desirable to include certain types of defects, special spectral energy providers can be used to mimic such defects, for example using an appropriate spectral energy provider, for example impurities The mechanism of action can be reproduced. In addition, some inductive structures or defects are minimized or eliminated using a suitable spectral energy provider that creates an effective repulsive or repulsive wave pattern at or near where crystallization occurs. Can do. Such “repulsive” spectral patterns can minimize the inclusion of undesirable impurities or defects. One example of such a “repulsive” wave pattern is the rotational frequency of the crystal seeds, which increases the rotational motion of those seeds in the crystallization reaction system, eg, binding to growing crystals. Slow down or interfere.
Furthermore, for most materials, E ₁ (ie, the energy required to form interstitial atoms) is greater than E _V (ie, the energy required to form vacancies). Vacancy tends to dominate the defect structure. Usually, near the melting point, the empty concentration of crystals reaches 0.1%. The presence of vacancies and interstitial atoms in the crystal provides a mechanism for mass transport (ie, diffusion) to occur in the crystal lattice. The vacancies provide a vacant spot where adjacent atoms can jump. When an atom jumps, the vacancy moves and occupies the original adjacent atom location. Interstitial atoms can move in the same way. Both of these movements activate the lattice as the atoms move. Furthermore, the jump rate of defects in the crystal (as well as the rate of atomic diffusion) is proportional to temperature. Thus, the method of the present invention controls the energy provided by a spectral energy provider by including and / or eliminating the spectral patterns of lattice vacancies and / or interstitial atoms in a controlled manner. Can be used to control the number of interstitial atoms and / or lattice vacancies. In addition, the diffusion of extraneous materials also includes, for example: (1) controlling or eliminating the number of lattice vacancies / interstitial atoms; (2) using a spectral energy provider that mimics the mechanism of action of lattice patterns Increase the point defect jump rate and hence the diffusion rate of the foreign material; and / or (3) control the energy structure of the foreign material to directly activate the foreign material, etc. Can be controlled. For example, extraneous substances such as heavy metals (tungsten, mercury, etc.) are often infiltrated into protein crystals as interstitial atoms to aid in X-ray analysis of these crystals. The method of the present invention, for example, applies a mercury lamp emitting an electronic frequency of mercury to a protein crystal immersed in a solution of mercury salt to enhance the formation of interstitial atoms and promote the infiltration of mercury into the protein crystal. Can be used.
For non-metals, lattice vacancies and interstitial atoms can be activated in the crystallization reaction system using a suitable spectral energy provider to create conductivity. The presence of lattice vacancies and interstitial atoms in semiconductors helps to trap and scatter free electrons and holes, thus changing the electronic properties of the material. The method of the present invention reduces the random chaos of the current crystallization method and the random placement of point defects, produces a semiconductor with a more evenly spaced group of point defects, and refines the conductivity properties of this material. It can be used to
Electronic transitions of trapped charges also cause light absorption and emission bands in semiconductors and insulators. Thus, for example, by controlling the placement and number of point defects (ie, by using an appropriate spectral energy provider), these properties can also be tailored to the order.
The somewhat random manner in which atoms settle during growth (eg, adatoms) facilitates the formation of lattice dislocations. Once such lattice dislocations are formed on a small scale, the dislocations propagate as the crystal grows. Thus, when a dislocation moves due to applied shear stress, one atomic plane can slip on another atomic plane, which in some cases changes one or more properties of the material to negative. In addition, work hardening, which will pin the dislocations, is currently used to strengthen the material with minimal dislocation problems. By using the spectral energy method of the present invention, the chaos of current crystallization methods can be minimized, so that the dislocations in the crystal structure are minimized and correspondingly formed by this method Various physical properties, such as strength, can be increased. Further, as shown in the “Examples” section later in this specification, deformation crystal growth can be achieved from a solution that has not yet reached the saturation point (eg, with an aqueous sodium chloride solution, NaCl crystals are produced from an unsaturated solution).
Waves and surface defects can also be a problem during crystal growth. Like other defects, chaos in the random crystallization method allows grain boundaries and stacking faults to occur. By reducing the chaos in the crystallization process, these defects are also reduced if desired.
A cellular structure may occur in the alloy, which is believed to be due to impurities. Impurities diffuse fairly slowly in the liquid melt and more slowly in the solid. Therefore, the impurities trapped in the pocket cannot escape from the pocket, the pocket becomes infinitely deep, and a cellular structure is formed. Thus, the formation of the cellular structure occurs at a high growth rate. The method of the present invention uses a spectral energy provider to apply the rotational frequency of the impurity to increase the diffusion rate of the impurity (eg, by heterodyne of the impurity and lattice frequencies), or the crystal immediately surrounding the impurity Can be promoted to avoid the formation of deep pockets and cellular structures, which are usually undesirable.
Current methods for controlling defects include, for example, applying a temperature gradient during directional solidification to eliminate oversaturation that would otherwise occur and prevent cell growth due to morphological instability. . There is also a method of controlling the dislocation density by using a seed crystal in the form of a bottleneck so that dislocations emerge on the crystal surface. These methods or mechanisms of action can be reproduced at least in part by the application of at least one spectral energy provider. For example, vibrational frequencies can be used to reproduce the effects of atomic and / or molecular motion at high temperatures without actually raising the temperature.
The method of the present invention is also useful for controlling step bunching as well as annealing. For example, step bunching can produce macro steps. This macro step may occur during crystal growth from the liquid or gas phase. In the formed crystal, defects are caused, for example, by inclusion of physical impurities. Further, in the annealing process, the crystal is heated, for example, to reduce surface roughness. The method of the present invention can be utilized to enhance both of these general processes.
The method of the present invention can also be used to affect a myriad of electrochemical crystallization systems. For example, the method of the present invention is formed by any of the following processes or methods: electrocrystallization; electrometallurgy; electromigration; electrophoresis; electroplating; electrowinning; galvanizing; It can be applied to influence the structure of materials.

  In some cases, the desired result in the crystallization reaction system for the above crystal is to use a single applied spectral energy pattern targeted to a single participant or component or multiple participants or components. However, in other cases, more than one applied spectral energy pattern can be achieved by multiple approaches in a single crystallization reaction system, with a single participant or component or multiple participants. Alternatively, it can be targeted to a component. In particular, the combination of direct resonance targeting, harmonic targeting and anharmonic heterodyne targeting, which can be made to interact with one or more frequencies occurring in atoms and / or molecules, is continuous or substantially Used continuously. Furthermore, in some cases, spectral energy donor targeting results in various interactions at energy levels preferentially above one or more different forms of material present in the crystallization reaction system.

  Furthermore, in another preferred embodiment of the present invention, said approach of generating a conditioned participant is, for example, when the conditioned participant is exposed to a crystallization reaction system (eg, when activated). ), The conditioned participant will mimic at least one mechanism of action of physical or environmental reaction conditions, and / or the conditioned participant will enhance several reaction pathways and / or reaction rates (For example, the rate of reaction increases or decreases; or the reaction product changes, increases, or decreases). For example, in some cases, desirable results can be achieved by applying a single spectral energy conditioning pattern that targets a single conditioned participant; however, in some cases, more than one A plurality of spectral energy conditioning patterns are applied to target a single participant or target multiple conditioned participants, eg, by multiple approaches. In particular, a combination of direct resonance conditioning, harmonic conditioning targeting and anharmonic heterodyne conditioning targeting, which can be made to interact with one or more frequencies occurring in the atoms and / or molecules of a tunable participant, Used continuously or substantially continuously to create the desired coordinated participant. Further, in some cases, spectral energy conditioning donor targeting can result in various interactions at preferentially higher energy levels of one or more different forms of material that exist as tunable participants.

  In addition, many combinations of the aforementioned applied spectral energy patterns and applied spectral energy conditioning patterns can be used in the crystallization reaction to target the participants and / or tunable participants. For example, the applied spectral energy pattern can be directed to one or more participants; and / or the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern can be directed to one or more adjustable participants. In some crystallization reaction systems, the spectral energy pattern and the spectral energy conditioning pattern are substantially similar to each other (eg, exactly the same, or at least comprise a similar portion of the magnetic spectrum), or Very different from each other (eg, comprising similar or very different parts of the magnetic spectrum). The combination of one or more spectral energy conditioning patterns and one or more spectral energy patterns has a significant relationship for controlling the growth and / or reaction rate of a particular structure or phase.

  Furthermore, the present invention recognizes and explains that various environmental reaction conditions can affect the reaction path in a crystallization reaction system when using a spectral energy catalyst, such as a spectral catalyst. The present invention teaches specific methods for controlling various environmental reaction conditions to achieve a desired result in a reaction (eg, a desired reaction product in one or more desired reaction pathways). Furthermore, the present invention discloses an applied spectral energy approach that allows at least partial simulation of a desired environmental reaction state by application of at least one spectral environmental reaction state. Thus, the environmental reaction state can be controlled and used in combination with at least one spectral energy pattern to achieve the desired reaction pathway (eg, desired phase, desired crystal form or crystal seed). . On the other hand, the conventionally used environmental responsive state is replenished and / or replaced by at least one spectral environmental responsive state in a desired manner (eg reduced concentration). And / or application of reduced pressure). An example of such a spectral environmental response pattern is the delivery of vibrational overtones to water so that water acts as a solvent as if it were at a higher temperature. This is described in more detail later in this specification in the “Examples” section.

  Similarly, the present invention further provides crystallization when various conditioning environmental reaction conditions are such that such conditioned participants are associated with and / or activated in the crystallization reaction system. Recognizing and explaining that the resulting energy pattern of a tunable participant that can affect the reaction pathway in the reaction system can be affected. The present invention can achieve desired results in a crystallization reaction system (e.g., desired reaction products and / or one or more desired reaction pathways and / or desired interactions and / or desired reaction rates), In order to achieve the desired conditioning of the at least one adjustable participant, specific methods for controlling various conditioning environmental reaction states are taught. The present invention further discloses an applied spectral energy conditioning approach that allows at least partially simulation of a desired cyclic reaction state by application of at least one spectral conditioning environmental reaction state. Thus, the conditioning environmental reaction state can be controlled and used in combination with at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern to achieve the desired adjusted energy pattern in the adjusted participant. On the other hand, conventionally used environmental reaction states are reduced in a desired manner (eg, reduced) by filling and / or replacing conventional environmental reaction states by at least one spectral conditioning environmental reaction state. Application of temperature and / or reduced pressure).

  The present invention also provides a desired physical catalyst (ie, a material known to function as a physical catalyst) used in a crystallization reaction system to achieve a desired reaction path / or desired reaction rate. Or a method for determining unknown materials (eg, comprising new or different seed crystals). In this regard, the present invention can provide a formulation for physical and / or spectral catalysts for a particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system in which no physical catalyst is pre-existing. In this aspect of the invention, the spectral energy pattern is determined or calculated by the techniques of the invention, and the corresponding physical catalyst (eg, seed crystal) is applied or produced, and then It is included in the crystallization reaction system to produce the calculated required spectral energy pattern. In some cases, one or more existing physical species can be used to obtain a single calculated physical energy pattern to achieve the desired reaction path and / or the required reaction rate. If the species appears to be deficient, it can be used or combined in an appropriate manner. Such catalysts can be used alone, with other physical catalysts, spectral energy catalysts, controlled environmental reaction conditions to achieve the desired resulting energy pattern and, consequently, the reaction path and / or the desired reaction rate. And / or can be used in combination as spectral environmental reaction conditions.

  Similarly, the present invention also provides the desired reaction pathway and / or desired reaction when the conditioned participant becomes associated with (eg, added to or activated) the crystallization reaction system. Desired physical catalysts (e.g., known materials or Provided is a method for determining a material not previously known to function as a physical catalyst, eg, comprising a physical catalyst or seed crystals. In this regard, the present invention can also provide a formulation for physical and / or spectral catalysts for certain crystallization reaction systems where no physical catalyst has ever existed. In this aspect of the invention, the spectral energy conditioning pattern is determined or calculated by the technique of the invention, and the corresponding tunable participants are supplied or manufactured and calculated. It can be included in a crystallization reaction system to produce the required spectral energy pattern. In some cases, a tunable participant of one or more existing physical species obtains a suitable calculated spectral energy tuned pattern to achieve the desired reaction pathway and / or desired reaction rate. Thus, if a single physical species appears to be insufficient, it can be used or combined in an appropriate manner. Such conditioned participants, once conditioned, can be used alone or with other physical catalysts, spectral energy catalysts, spectra to achieve the desired reaction pathway and / or the desired crystallization reaction rate. It can be used in combination with an energy catalyst, a regulated environmental reaction state, a spectral environmental reaction state and / or a spectral environmental reaction state. Thus, once the desired tuned energy pattern is achieved in a tunable participant, the tuned participant becomes associated with and / or activated in the crystallization reaction system.

The present invention is adapted by adjusting one or more important themes of the present invention, i.e., the frequency of the participants in the overall reaction system with at least one adjustable participant, or the energy is Many different modifications are disclosed that transfer between components, participants or regulated participants in the reaction system. Many different modifications thereof can be used alone or desired to achieve the desired result (eg, desired reaction pathway and / or desired reaction rate and / or desired reaction product). It should be understood that a combination of infinite modifications can be used to achieve a result (eg, desired reaction path, desired reaction product, desired reaction rate). However, in one preferred aspect of the invention, the participant or tuned participant is matched to at least one frequency of at least one other participant in the crystallization reaction system (eg, spectral pattern overlap). As long as it has one or more of its frequencies, energy can be transferred. When energy is transferred in this targeted manner, the desired interaction, reaction and / or energy dynamics is in a crystallization reaction system, for example a key component encompassed by one or more reactions in the crystallization reaction system. An increased energy amplitude can be provided. Further, the conditioned participant comprises both the reactant and the reaction product itself, so that, for example, the chemical composition of the tuned participant is not substantially changed (if any). However, one or more physical properties or structures or phases are altered when the tuned participant is associated with and / or activated by the crystallization reaction system.
The present invention is one important theme of the present invention, i.e. when the frequency of the components of the crystallization reaction system is matched or can be matched, the components of the crystallization reaction system, the participating substances, or the conditioned. The energy transfer between the participating substances discloses many different forms of permutation. Depending on how the energy dynamics of the components are controlled or guided, the crystallization reaction system is similarly controlled or guided. Many different forms can be used alone to achieve the desired result (eg, desired reaction path and / or desired reaction rate, and / or desired reaction product), and the various forms can be combined in unlimited combinations. It will be appreciated that desirable results (eg, desired reaction pathways and / or desired reaction products, and / or desired reaction rates) can be achieved. However, in a first preferred embodiment of the present invention, one or more frequencies of a participant, or conditioned participant, match at least one frequency of at least one other component of the crystallization reaction system. As long as you do, you can transfer energy. If energy is transferred, the desired interactions and / or reactions occur in the crystallization reaction system. Furthermore, a conditioned participant may include both a reactant and a reaction product, such that a conditioned participant is involved in and / or active by a crystallization reaction system, for example. When converted, the chemical composition of the conditioned participant does not change substantially (even if it changes), and one or more energy dynamics, physical properties, structures, or phases change.

Furthermore, the same targeted frequency or energy can be used with different power amplitudes in the same crystallization reaction system to achieve dramatically different results. For example, the vibration frequency of a liquid solvent can be input with a low power amplitude to improve the solvent properties of the liquid without causing any substantial change in the chemical composition of the liquid. At high power levels, the same vibration frequency can be used to dissociate the liquid solvent, thereby changing its chemical composition. Thus, there is a continuous effect obtained with a single targeted frequency that ranges from a change in the energy dynamics of the participant to a change in the actual chemical or physical structure of the participant.
Targeted frequencies or energies can also be used at various power amplitudes for the material formed in the post-formation process, and dramatically different structural results can be achieved for the formed material. For example, post-treatment processes such as annealing, thermal etching, chemical etching (eg, by liquid, solid, gas, and / or plasma) all to selectively change one or more properties in the formed material. Can be used. The frequency or energy tailored to the target is also desirable in at least a portion (or at least a portion of the surface) of the formed material (eg, solid, liquid, gas, and / or plasma), and the desired structural, physical, and Chemical changes can occur (eg, allow certain reactions to occur locally or globally). These methods may be useful in interactions such as metal formation, semiconductor manufacturing, sintering, biological processes, plastic molding, hydrocarbon manufacturing, and the like.

  Furthermore, the concept of frequency matching can be used in reverse. Specifically, if a reaction occurs due to frequency matching in a crystallization reaction system, the reaction can be slowed or stopped by making the frequency no longer match or by reducing the degree of matching. it can. In this regard, one or more crystallization reaction system components (eg, environmental reaction conditions, spectral environmental reaction conditions, and / or applied spectral energy patterns) may be altered and / or added to Matching can be minimized, reduced, or eliminated. This also allows the reaction to be easily started and stopped and allows new control of many reactions in the crystallization reaction system. For example, formation of a certain crystal seed can be prevented, the amount of crystallization in the crystallization reaction system can be controlled, and the like. In addition, for example, if the source of electromagnetic radiation contains a spectral wavelength or frequency (ie, energy) that is slightly larger than that required to optimize (or prevent) a particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system. As described in detail later in this specification, appropriate filter filtration, absorption, and / or reflection methods prevent some of the unwanted (or undesirable) wavelengths from contacting the crystallization reaction system. (E.g., block, reflect, absorb, etc.).

  Furthermore, the concept of frequency adaptation can also be used in reverse with respect to adjustable participants. In particular, if the response occurs because the frequency is matched, the response can be slowed or stopped by the frequency no longer matching or at least by matching to a lower extent. In this regard, one or more crystallization reaction system components (eg, environmental reaction conditions, spectral environmental reaction conditions and / or applied spectral energy patterns) minimize frequency from adaptation in the crystallization reaction system, Once adjusted, it can be modified by introducing regulatable participants to lower or eliminate. This also prevents the formation of certain species, easily controls the amount of product formed in the crystallization reaction system, and easily provides new controls in a myriad of reactions in the crystallization reaction system. Makes it possible to start and stop the reaction. In addition, for example, those with a spectrum that is somewhat larger than their wavelength or frequency (ie, energy) required for the source of magnetic radiation to optimize (or prevent) a particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system. If this is the case, some of the unwanted (or undesired) wavelengths may be contacted with the crystallization reaction system by appropriate filtration, absorption and / or reflection techniques, as will be discussed in more detail later herein. It can be disturbed (eg, blocked, reflected, absorbed, etc.).

  It is also possible that various tunable participants can be used in combination with various participants and / or spectral energy donors in the crystallization reaction system to control various reaction pathways once tuned. Should be clear. In addition, conditioning the reaction vessel or a portion thereof may also lead to desirable control of multiple reaction pathways.

  In addition, the conditionable participant can be conditioned by removing at least a portion of its spectral pattern before introducing it into the crystallization reaction system. Also, removing (or blocking) at least a portion of the spectral pattern of the reaction vessel may lead to desirable control of the various reaction pathways.

  In order to simplify the disclosure and understanding of the present invention, specific categories or sections have been created in the "Summary of Invention" and "Specific Description of Preferred Embodiments". However, it should be understood that these categories are not mutually exclusive and there are some overlaps. Accordingly, these artificially created sections do not limit the scope of the invention as defined in the claims.

  Further, in the next section, attempts have been made to simplify the discussion and reduce the overall length of this disclosure. For example, in many cases, “participants” in the crystallization reaction system or the entire reaction system are referred to exclusively. However, “adjustable participants” can also be addressed separately in the disclosure, not necessarily explicitly mentioned. Thus, when the various general mechanisms of the present invention are referred to herein, the discussion is also accompanied by similar relevance whether only "participants" are referred to directly or indirectly. It should be understood that this applies to “adjustable participants”. Efforts have been made throughout the disclosure to explicitly mention all of the novel phenomena associated with adjustable participants only when required for illustrative purposes.

I. Wave energy :
In general, thermal energy has traditionally been used to drive chemical reactions by applying heat and raising the temperature of the crystallization reaction system. The addition of heat increases the kinetic (transfer) energy of the chemical reactant. Reactants with strong kinetic energy have moved faster and farther and have been implicated by chemical reactions. Mechanical energy also increases their kinetic energy by agitating and moving chemicals, and therefore their reactions. The addition of mechanical energy often increases temperature by increasing kinetic energy.

  Sound energy is applied to chemical reactions as regular mechanical waves. Because of its mechanical properties, sound energy can increase the kinetic energy of chemical reactants and can also increase their temperature. Electromagnetic (EM) energy consists of electric and magnetic field waves. EM energy also increases kinetic energy and heat in the crystallization reaction system. It also activates electron orbital or vibrational motion in some reactions.

  Both sound and electromagnetic energy consist of waves. Energy waves and frequencies have several interesting properties and can be combined in several interesting ways. The manner in which wave energy is transferred and coupled depends primarily on its frequency. For example, if two energy waves, each having the same amplitude but one at a frequency of 400 Hz and the other at 100 Hz, are caused to interact, the waves combine and their frequencies add up, 500Hzno Generate a new frequency (ie "total" frequency). Wave frequencies also decrease when they combine to produce a frequency of 300 Hz (ie, a “different” frequency). All wave energy typically adds and decreases in this manner, and such additions and decreases are referred to as heterodynes. The usual result of heterodyne is best known as harmony in music. The importance of heterodyne will be discussed in more detail later herein.

Another important concept of the present invention is wave interaction or interference. In particular, wave energy is known to interact constitutively and destructively. The phenomenon is important in determining the applied spectral energy pattern. FIGS. 1a-1c show two different spectral energy patterns corresponding to two different spectral energy patterns with two different wavelengths λ ₁ and λ ₂ (and therefore different frequencies) applied to the crystallization reaction system. Different incident sine waves 1 (FIG. 1a) and 2 (FIG. 1b) are shown. The energy pattern of FIG. 1 corresponds to an electromagnetic spectral pattern (or electromagnetic spectral conditioning pattern) and FIG. 1b appears to correspond to one spectral environmental reaction state (or spectral conditioning environmental reaction state). Each of the sine waves 1 and 2 has a different differential equation describing its individual motion. However, when a sine wave is combined with the resulting additional wave 1 + 2 (FIG. 1c), it is obtained that accounts for the sum of the combined energy (ie, applied spectral energy pattern; or applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) The compound differential equation is actually high at some point in time (ie, constructive interference indicated by high amplitude) and low at some point in time (ie destructive interference indicated by low amplitude), constant input energy Bring.

  In particular, the part “X” represents the region where the electromagnetic spectral pattern of wave 1 interfered constitutively with the spectral environment response state 2 and the part “Y” was the destructive interference of the two waves 1 and 2 Represents an area. Wavelength, frequency or energy desired or undesired by the part “X” (eg, a spectral energy pattern (or a positive or negative interaction with one or more participants and / or components in the overall reaction system) (or Depending on whether it corresponds to (causes acquisition due to the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern), the part “X” enhances the positive effect in the crystallization reaction system or negative effect in the crystallization reaction system Can be strengthened. Similarly, the portion “Y” can correspond to an effective loss of either positive or negative effects, depending on whether the portion “Y” is desired or undesired, frequency depends on energy. .

Further, if the source of magnetic radiation includes those with a spectrum that is somewhat larger than the wavelength or frequency (ie, energy) required to optimize a particular response, some unnecessary (or undesired) The wavelength can be prevented from contacting the crystallization reaction system (eg, blocked, affected, absorbed, etc.). Thus, in the simplified example discussed immediately above, by allowing interaction in the crystallization reaction of only the desired wavelength λ ₁ (eg, a certain wavelength or frequency of a broad spectrum magnetic emitter). By filtering), the possibility of negative effects due to the combination of waves 1 (FIG. 1a) and 2 (FIG. 1b) is minimized or eliminated. In this regard, it is noted that in fact many desired incident wavelengths can be incident on at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system. Further, the positive or desired effect includes the wavelength or frequency of the incident light, the wavelength inherent to the crystallization reaction system itself (eg, atoms and / or molecules, etc.), the frequency or nature (eg, Stark effect, Zeeman effect) Including, but not limited to, their effects (eg, heterodyne, resonance, additive, subtractive, constitutive or destructive interference) due to interaction with Indicated. Thus, by maximizing the desired wavelength (or by minimizing the undesired wavelength), crystallization reaction system effects that have never been known before (eg, crystal growth rate, crystal morphology, crystal phase, crystal Purity, etc.) can be achieved. On the other hand, certain destructive interference effects due to different energy, frequency and / or wavelength combinations can reduce certain desired results in the crystallization reaction system. Since the present invention comes to be incident on the crystallization reaction system, it masks or screens as many such undesired energies (or wavelengths) as much as possible (eg, somewhat larger spectral wavelengths may cause crystallization reactions). Attempts to work for synergistic results that can be generated, for example, due to the desired constructive interference effects between incident wavelengths of electromagnetic energy).

  It is clear from this particular analysis that constitutive interference (ie, point “X”) can maximize the positive and negative effects in the crystallization reaction system. Thus, this simplified example is from one or more other frequencies from at least one spectral environmental response state (or at least one spectral environmental conditioning response state), eg from a spectral pattern (or spectral conditioning pattern). Combining with a constant frequency indicates that the spectral energy pattern actually applied to the crystallization reaction system (or the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) is a combination of constitutive and destructive interference. The degree of interference can also depend on the relative phase of the waves. Therefore, these factors should also be taken into account when selecting the appropriate spectral energy pattern (or applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) to be applied to the crystallization reaction system. In this regard, there is practically a wave interaction effect where many desired incident wavelengths are applied to unwanted incident wavelengths that are removed from the crystallization reaction system or from an incident source on at least a portion of the crystallization reaction. It is also obvious that, including, but not limited to, heterodyning, direct resonance, joint resonance, additive wave, subtractive wave, constructive or destructive interference, etc. Furthermore, as will be discussed in detail later, additional effects, such as electrical and / or magnetic field effects, also affect the spectral energy pattern or spectral energy conditioning pattern (or spectral pattern or spectral conditioning pattern), respectively. Can affect.

II. Spectral catalyst, spectral conditioning catalyst and spectroscopic analysis :
A wide variety of reactions conveniently initiate a desired crystallization path within a crystallization reaction system (eg, a desired crystallization reaction path in a single or multiple component crystallization system) and a desired reaction rate. Spectral energy catalyst (or spectral energy conditioning catalyst) with a specific spectral energy pattern (eg, spectral pattern, spectral conditioning pattern or electromagnetic pattern) that transfers the targeted energy to control, and / or promote Can be influenced and directed with the help of. This section discusses spectral catalysts (and spectral conditioning catalysts) in more detail and describes various techniques for using spectral catalysts (and / or spectral conditioning catalysts) in various crystallization reaction systems. For example, a spectral catalyst replaces and provides the additional energy normally supplied by a physical catalyst (eg, seed crystal, epitaxial growth substrate, crystallization agent, promoter, or inhibitor, etc.). Therefore, it can be used in a crystallization reaction system. Spectral catalysts can in fact mimic or copy the mechanism of action of physical catalysts. The spectral catalyst can act as a positive catalyst to increase the reaction rate or as a negative catalyst or poison to reduce the reaction rate. In addition, spectral catalysts can enhance physical catalysts, for example, by using both physical and spectral catalysts to achieve a desired reaction path in a crystallization reaction system. Spectral catalysts can improve the activity of physical chemical catalysts. Spectral catalysts also partially displace specific amounts of physical catalysts, thereby reducing many difficulties associated with, for example, primary and / or secondary nucleation, selectivity, and / or morphology, And eliminate.

  Furthermore, the tunable participant can be tuned by a spectral conditioning catalyst to form a tuned participant, after which it can be used alone or in combination with a spectral catalyst. Spectral conditioning catalysts, as discussed immediately above with respect to spectral catalysts, are augmented or supplied by participants that can displace and tune additional energy normally provided by physical catalysts in crystallization reaction systems. It can be activated to bring about a regulated participant that can.

  Further, in the present invention, the spectral energy catalyst is used in a sufficient amount for a sufficient amount of time to initiate and / or promote and / or direct a chemical reaction (eg, following a specific reaction pathway). Energy (eg, electromagnetic radiation comprising a particular frequency or combination of frequencies) is provided. The total combination of targeted energies applied at any time to the crystallization reaction system is referred to as the applied spectral energy pattern. The applied spectral energy pattern can consist of a single spectral catalyst, multiple spectral catalysts and / or other spectral energy catalysts. Absorption of targeted conditioning energy (eg, electromagnetic energy from a spectral catalyst) into a conditioning crystallization reaction system allows the reactants to participate in one or several reaction pathways, eg, chemical reactions. Adapt and ionize or dissociate; stabilize reaction products; activate and / or stabilize intermediates and / or transients and / or activated complexes involved in the reaction pathway; Causing one or more components in the crystallization reaction system having spectral patterns that at least partially overlap; altering the energy dynamics of the components to affect their properties; and / or within the crystallization reaction system Adapting the frequency to change the resonant exchange of energy; initiating chemical reactions by causing ionization or dissociation Can cause one or more reactants to proceed in the crystallization reaction system through an energy transfer that can excite electrons to a high energy state.

  In addition, in the present invention, the spectral energy conditioning catalyst forms a tuned participant and reacts (e.g., a specific species) when the regulated participant is initiated or activated in the crystallization reaction system. In a sufficient amount for a sufficient period of time to adjust the adjustable participants to allow initiation and / or promotion and / or instruction by the adjusted participants) Provide targeted conditioning energy (eg, electromagnetic radiation comprising a particular frequency or combination thereof). The total combination of targeted conditioning energies that can be applied to the conditioning crystallization reaction system at any point in time is referred to as the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern. This applied spectral energy conditioning pattern can consist of a single spectral conditioning catalyst, multiple spectral conditioning catalysts and / or other spectral energy conditioning catalysts. Modulated participants are involved in one or several reaction pathways, eg chemical reactions, by absorption of targeted conditioning energy (eg electromagnetic energy from spectral conditioning catalysts) into the conditioning crystallization reaction system. Can adapt the reaction; ionize or dissociate; stabilize the reaction product; activate intermediates and / or transients and / or activated complexes involved in the reaction pathway; and / or Stabilize; cause one or more components in the crystallization reaction system having spectral patterns that at least partially overlap; and / or change the energy dynamics of one or more components to have altered properties And / or causing a frequency to alter the resonant exchange of energy within the crystallization reaction system Can cause the progress of one or more reactants through an energy transfer that can excite electrons to a high energy state for the initiation of a chemical reaction.

物質A及びB＝未知の周波数、及びC＝30Hz；
従って、物質A＋30Hz→物質B。 For example, in a simple crystallization reaction system, the physical catalyst “C” (or conditioned) can be used if the chemical reaction provides at least one reactant “A” that is converted to at least one reaction product “B”. Participant “C”) may be utilized. In contrast, a portion of the catalytic spectral energy pattern of the physical catalyst “C” (eg, in this section, the catalytic spectral pattern) is used to generate electromagnetic radiation (other Can be applied in the form of:

Substances A and B = unknown frequency, and C = 30 Hz;
Therefore, substance A + 30Hz → substance B.

スペクトロスコピーは、システムの許容される状態の間のエネルギー差が、吸収又は放出される対応する電磁エネルギーの周波数を決定することによって測定されるプロセスである。電磁スペクトロスコピーは、一般に、電磁放射と物質の相互作用を扱う。光子が、例えば、原子又は分子と相互作用すると、原子及び分子の性質に変化が観測される。 In the present invention, the spectral pattern (eg, electromagnetic spectral pattern) of the physical catalyst “C” can be determined by known spectroscopy. Using a spectrophotometer, the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst is preferably a physical catalyst (eg, the spectral energy pattern, and the spectral pattern can be affected by environmental reaction conditions, as discussed later herein. ) Is preferably determined under conditions close to those conditions that occur in the entire reaction system. In the case of crystallization, which is an autocatalytic process, B and C are the same. It looks like this:

Spectroscopy is a process in which the energy difference between the acceptable states of the system is measured by determining the frequency of the corresponding electromagnetic energy that is absorbed or emitted. Electromagnetic spectroscopy generally deals with the interaction of electromagnetic radiation with matter. When photons interact with, for example, atoms or molecules, changes in the properties of the atoms and molecules are observed.

  Spectroscopic methods generally deal with the interaction of wave energy with matter. Spectroscopic methods typically involve measuring the energy difference between enabled states of any system by determining the frequency of its corresponding electromagnetic energy that is absorbed or emitted. It is. When spectroscopy interacts with, for example, electrons or molecules, changes in atomic and molecular properties are observed.

  Atoms and molecules are joined by several different types of motion. The whole molecule rotates, the bond oscillates, and the electrons move very rapidly despite the electron density distribution being the main focus of the prior art. Each of these types of movement is quantified. That is, atoms, molecules or ions can exist only in well-defined states corresponding to different energy quantities. The energy difference between different quantum states exists in the form of motion involved. Thus, the frequency of energy required to produce the transition is different for different types of motion. That is, individual types of motion correspond to energy absorption in different regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, and different spectroscopic measurements are required for individual spectral regions. The total kinetic energy of an atom or molecule appears to be at least the sum of its electron, vibration and rotational energy.

In both the emission and absorption spectra, the relationship between the energy change in an atom or molecule and the frequency of electromagnetic energy emitted or absorbed is the so-called Bohr wavenumber condition:
ΔE = hν
Where h is the Planck constant; ν is the frequency; and ΔE is the energy difference between the final and initial states.

  An electron spectrum is the result of electrons moving from one electron energy level to another in an atom, molecule or ion. Molecular physics catalytic spectral patterns include not only electronic energy transfer, but also transfer between rotational and vibrational energy levels. As a result, the molecular spectrum is much more complicated than the atomic spectrum. The main changes observed in an atom or molecule after interaction with a photon include chemical bond excitation, ionization and / or destruction, all of which emit radiation or give the same information about energy level separation. It can be measured and quantified by spectroscopy, including absorption spectroscopy.

  In emission spectroscopy, when an atom or molecule is subjected to a flame or electrical discharge, such atom or molecule will absorb energy and become “excited”. When they return to their “normal” state, they can release radiation. Such radiation is the result of the conversion of an atom or molecule from a high energy or “excited” state to one low state. The energy lost in the transition is released in the form of electromagnetic energy. “Excited” atoms usually generate line spectra, whereas “excited” molecules tend to generate band spectra.

  In absorption spectroscopy, the absorption of a nearly monochromatic incident line is monitored when it is moved over a range of frequencies. Depending on the absorption process, atoms or molecules pass from a low energy state to a high energy state. The energy change produced by electromagnetic energy absorption exists only in the isolated amount of energy, called quantity, which is a characteristic of the individual absorbing species. Absorption spectra can be classified into four types: rotation; rotation-vibration; vibration; and electron.

  The rotational spectrum of a molecule is related to changes that occur in the rotational state of the molecule. The energy of the rotational state varies only by relatively small amounts, and therefore the frequency required to bring about a change in rotational level is very low and the wavelength of the electronic energy is very large. The energy interval of the molecular rotation state depends on the bond distance and angle. A pure rotational spectrum is observed in the far infrared and microwave and radio regions (see Table 1).

  The rotation-vibration spectrum relates to a transition in which the vibrational state of the molecule is altered and can be accompanied by a change in the rotational state. Absorption occurs at high frequencies or short wavelengths and usually occurs in the middle of the infrared region (see Table 1).

  Vibration spectra from different vibration energy levels arise due to the movement of the bonds. Stretch vibration includes changes in interatomic distance along the axis of bonding between two atoms. Bending vibration is characterized by a change in the angle between the two bonds. The vibrational spectrum of a molecule is typically in the near infrared range. The term vibration spectrum means all states of the following bond motion spectrum: stretching vibration, bending vibration, equilibrium vibration, deformation vibration, torsional bending vibration, etc.

  The electronic spectrum is from the transition between electronic states for atoms and molecules and is accompanied by simultaneous changes in rotational and vibrational states in the molecule. A relatively large energy difference is included, and therefore absorption occurs at fairly large frequencies or relatively short wavelengths. Different electronic states of atoms or molecules correspond to energies in the infrared, ultraviolet-visible or x-ray region of the electromagnetic spectrum (see Table 1).

  Electromagnetic radiation as a form of energy can be absorbed or emitted, and therefore many different types of spectroscopic analysis can be used to determine the desired pattern of a spectral catalyst (eg, the spectral pattern of a physical catalyst). Can be used in the present invention: x-ray, ultraviolet, infrared, microwave, atomic absorption, flame emission, atomic emission, inductively coupled plasma, DC argon plasma, arc-source emission, spark-source emission , High resolution laser, radio, Raman and the like.

  In order to study electron transfer, the material being studied needs to be heated to a high temperature in a flame, where the molecules are atomized and excited. Another very effective means of atomizing the gas is the use of a gas discharge. When the gas is placed between charged electrodes that cause an electric field, electrons are generated from the electrodes and from the gas atoms themselves and can form a plasma or plasma-like state. Those electrons will collide with gas atoms that will be atomized, excited or ionized. By using a high frequency field, it is possible to induce gas discharge without using electrodes. By changing the field strength, the excitation energy can be changed. For solid materials, electrical spark or arc excitation can be used. In a spark or arc, the material to be analyzed is evaporated and the atoms are excited.

  The basic scheme of a radiation spectrophotometer includes a purified silica cell containing the sample to be excited. The sample radiation passes through the slit and is separated into the spectrum by a dispersive element. The spectral pattern can be detected on a screen, photographic film, or by a detector.

  An atom will absorb electromagnetic energy most strongly at the same frequency it releases. Absorption measurements are often made such that the electromagnetic radiation emitted from the source passes through the wavelength-limiting device and impinges on the physical catalyst sample held in the cell. When a white light beam passes through the material, a selected frequency is absorbed from the beam. Electromagnetic radiation that is not absorbed by the physical catalyst passes through the cell and reaches the detector. If the remaining beam is spread in the spectrum, the absorbed frequency is shown as a dark line in the continuous spectrum. The positions of these dark lines correspond exactly to the positions of the lines in the emission spectrum of the same molecule or atom. Emission and absorption spectrometers are available through normal commercial routes.

In 1885, Ballmer, hydrogen, has the following simple formula:
1 / λ = R (1/2 ² -1 / m ² )
[Where λ is the wavelength, R is the Reed-Beri constant, and m is an integer greater than or equal to 3 (eg, 3, 4 or 5 etc.)] in the visible light region of the electromagnetic spectrum It has been found to vibrate at frequency and generate energy. Subsequently, for Reedberg, this equation is as follows:
1 / λ = R (1 / n ² -1 / m ² )
[Where n is an integer greater than 1 and m is an integer greater than n + 1], can be adapted to yield all wavelengths in the hydrogen spectrum by changing 1/2 ² to 1 / n ² I discovered that. Thus, for every different number n, the result is a series of numbers for the wavelength and assigned to each such series from which many chemist names are obtained. For example, if n = 2 and m ≧ 3, the energy is in the visible light spectrum and the series is referred to as the Balmer series. The Lyman series is present in the ultraviolet spectrum when n = 1, and the Paschen series is present in the ultraviolet spectrum when n = 3.

  In the prior art, energy level diagrams were the primary means used to describe the energy level in hydrogen atoms (see FIGS. 7a and 7b).

After determining the magnetic spectral pattern of the desired catalyst (eg, a physical catalyst such as a seed crystal), the catalytic spectral pattern can be at least partially overlapped and applied to the crystallization reaction system. For example, any generator of one or more frequencies within an acceptable approximate range of electromagnetic radiation frequencies may be used in the present invention. For example, if one or more frequencies in a spectrum pattern (or spectrum conditioning pattern) overlap, it is not necessary to overlap that frequency exactly. For example, the effect achieved with a frequency of 1,000 THz can also be achieved with a frequency very close to it, such as 1,001 or 999 THz. Thus, there will also be ranges above and below the individual exact frequencies that catalyze the reaction. In particular, FIG. 12 shows a typical bell curve “B” distribution of frequencies near the desired frequency f ₀ , where it does not correspond exactly to f ₀ , but the frequency f to achieve the desired effect. Desired frequencies sufficiently close to ₀ may be applied, for example those frequencies between frequencies in the range of f ₁ and frequencies in the range of f ₂ . Note that f ₁ and f ₂ correspond to about 1/2 of the maximum amplitude a _max of curve “B”. Thus, it should be understood that the term “frequency”, “exact” or specific or similar, has this meaning when used. Furthermore, harmony of spectral catalysts (or spectral conditioning catalysts) above and below the correct spectral catalyst frequency (or spectral conditioning catalyst frequency) will cause resonance with the correct frequency and catalyze the reaction. Finally, rather than using the exact frequency itself, it is possible to catalyze the reaction by overlapping one or more mechanisms of action of the exact frequency. For example, platinum catalyzes, in part, the formation of water from hydrogen and oxygen by stimulating hydroxyl groups at that frequency of approximately 1,060 THz. The desired reaction can also be catalyzed by stimulating the hydroxyl group with its microwave frequency, thereby duplicating the mechanism of action of platinum.

  The electromagnetic radiation-radiation source should have the following characteristics: high intensity desired wavelength; long lifetime; stability; and the ability to emit electromagnetic energy in a pulsed and / or continuous manner. Furthermore, in some crystallization reaction systems, it is desirable for the emitted electromagnetic energy to be able to be directed to an appropriate point (or region) within at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system. Suitable techniques include optical waveguides, engineering fibers, etc.

  Irradiation sources include arc lamps such as xenon-arc, hydrogen and deuterium, krypton-arc, high pressure mercury, platinum, silver; plasma arc discharge lamps such as As, Bi, Cd, Cs, Ge, Hg, K, Na, P, Pb, Rb, Sb, Se, Sn, Ti, Tl and Zn; hollow cathode lamps, single or multiple elements such as Cu, Pt and Ag; and solar and coherent electromagnetic energy radiation such as masers and lasers Including, but not limited to. A more complete list of irradiation sources is listed in Table D.

  A maser is a device that amplifies or generates electromagnetic energy waves with high stability and accuracy. Masers work on the same principles as lasers, but generate electromagnetic energy in the radio and microwave, rather than in the visible range of the spectrum. In a maser, electromagnetic energy is generated by a molecular transition between rotational energy levels.

  A laser is a powerful interfering photon source that produces a beam of light having the same frequency, phase and direction, ie, a beam of photons that also moves precisely. Thus, for example, a predetermined spectral pattern of the desired catalyst can be generated by a series or group of lasers that generate one or more required frequencies.

Any laser capable of emitting the necessary electromagnetic radiation having the frequency of the spectral energy donor can be used in the present invention. Lasers are available for use throughout most spectral ranges. They can be operated in either a continuous or pulsed manner. Lasers emitting lines and lasers emitting continuums can be used in the present invention. Sources include argon ion lasers, ruby lasers, nitrogen lasers, Nd: YAG lasers, oxygen dioxide lasers, carbon monoxide lasers and nitrous oxide-carbon dioxide lasers. In addition to the spectral lines emitted by the laser, several other lines can be obtained by addition or subtraction in the crystal of the frequency emitted by one laser or emitted by another laser. Devices that combine frequencies and can be used in the present invention include different frequency generators and total frequency mixers. Other lasers that can be used in the present invention include crystals such as Al ₂ O ₃ doped with Cr ³⁺ , Y ₃ Al ₅ O ₁₂ doped with Nd ³⁺ ; gases such as He—Ne, Kr− ions Including, but not limited to: glass, chemicals such as vibrationally excited HCL and HF; dyes such as rhodamine 6G in methanol; and semiconductor lasers such as Ga _1-x AlxAs. Many models can be tuned to different frequency ranges, thereby providing several different frequencies from one instrument and applying it to the crystallization reaction system (see example in Table 2) ).

  Interfering light from a single laser or series of lasers is simply focused or introduced into the region of the crystallization reaction system where the desired reaction takes place. The photogen should be close enough to avoid "dead space" where light does not reach the desired region in the crystallization reaction system, but is not sufficient to assume complete incident light absorption. Since ultraviolet sources generate heat, such sources need to be cooled to maintain effective operation. The subsequent irradiation times that cause the excitation of one or more components in the crystallization reaction system can be individually adjusted for individual reactions: some short period for continuous reactions with large surface exposure to the light source Or long light-contact time for other systems. Further, the exposure time and energy amplitude or intensity can be controlled depending on the desired effect (eg, altered energy dynamics, ionization, bond breaking, species selection, directional growth, etc.).

The purpose of the present invention is to apply at least a portion of the required spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) determined and calculated, for example, by waveform analysis of the spectral pattern of the reactants and reaction products, Providing a spectral energy pattern (eg, a spectral pattern of electromagnetic energy) to one or more reactants in a crystallization reaction system. Thus, in the case of a spectral catalyst, the calculated electromagnetic pattern will be a spectral pattern or will act as a spectral catalyst to obtain a preferred reaction path and / or preferred reaction rate. In a basic relationship, the spectroscopic data for the identified substance is used to perform simple waveform calculations to arrive at the correct electromagnetic energy frequency or combination of frequencies needed to catalyze the reaction. obtain. In a simple relationship:
A → B
Substance A = 50Hz and Substance B = 80Hz
80Hz-50Hz = 30Hz:
Therefore, substance A + 30Hz → substance B.

  The spectral energy pattern (eg, spectral pattern) of both the reactants and the reaction product can be determined. In the case of spectral catalysts, this can be achieved by the previously mentioned spectroscopic means. Once the spectral pattern is determined within an appropriate set of environmental reaction conditions (eg, having a particular frequency or combination of frequencies), the spectral energy pattern (eg, electromagnetic spectral pattern) of the spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) Can be determined. Using spectral energy patterns (eg, spectral patterns) of the reactants and reaction products, waveform analysis calculations can determine the energy difference between the reactants and reaction products, and spectral energy catalysts (eg, , Spectral catalyst) at least a portion of the calculated spectral energy pattern (eg, electromagnetic spectral pattern) in the form of a spectral energy pattern (eg, spectral pattern) as desired along the desired crystallization reaction path. Can be applied to the desired reaction in the crystallization reaction system. The particular frequency of the calculated spectral energy pattern (eg, spectral pattern) corresponding to the spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) affects and initiates the desired crystallization reaction path. It will provide the necessary energy input during the desired reaction in the crystallization reaction system.

  For example, the implementation of waveform analysis calculations to reach the correct electromagnetic energy frequency can be accomplished by using complex algebra, ie, the Fourier transform or Wavelet Transforms, supplied under the trademark Mathematica and by Wolfram, Co. . Only a portion of the calculated spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) may be sufficient to catalyze the reaction, or a substantially complete spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) may be suitable for a particular environment. Can be applied depending on.

  In addition, at least a portion of the spectral energy pattern (eg, the electromagnetic spectrum of the required spectral catalyst) can be generated and applied to the crystallization reaction system by the electromagnetic radiation source as defined and described above.

Another object of the invention is that of the required spectral energy conditioning catalyst (e.g., spectral conditioning catalyst) determined and calculated, for example, by waveform analysis of the adjustable participant and the spectral pattern of the adjusted participant. Providing a spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, a spectral conditioning pattern of electromagnetic energy) to one or more conditioning participants in a conditioning crystallization reaction system by applying at least some (or substantially all) is there. Thus, in the case of a spectral conditioning catalyst, the calculated electromagnetic conditioning pattern, when applied to a tunable participant, is adjusted to produce a preferred reaction path and / or preferred reaction rate in the crystallization reaction system. It will be possible to act as a spectral catalyst in the body crystallization reaction system. In a basic relationship, the spectroscopic data for the identified substance is used to perform simple waveform calculations to arrive at the correct electromagnetic energy frequency or combination of frequencies needed to catalyze the reaction. obtain. In a simple relationship:
A → B
Adjustable substance A = 50Hz and adjusted substance B = 80Hz
80Hz-50Hz = 30Hz:
Therefore, substance A + 30Hz → substance B.

  Spectral energy conditioning patterns (eg, spectral conditioning patterns) of both tunable participants and tuned participants can be determined. In the case of a spectral conditioning catalyst, this can be achieved by the previously mentioned spectroscopic means. Once the spectral pattern is determined within an appropriate set of environmental reaction conditioning conditions (eg, having a particular frequency or combination of frequencies), the spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, spectral conditioning catalyst) of the spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, spectral conditioning catalyst) Electromagnetic spectrum conditioning pattern) can be determined. Using the adjustable participant and the spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, spectral conditioning pattern) of the adjusted participant, the waveform analysis calculation determines the energy difference between the adjustable participant and the adjusted participant. And at least one of the calculated spectral energy conditioning patterns (eg, electromagnetic spectral conditioning patterns) in the form of a spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, spectral conditioning pattern) of the spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, spectral conditioning catalyst) Once the conditioned participants are introduced and / or activated into the crystallization reaction system, the desired reaction in the crystallization reaction system continues. Can be applied to the desired tunable participants in the conditioning crystallization reaction system. The specific frequency of the calculated spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, spectral conditioning pattern) corresponding to the spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, spectral conditioning catalyst) required to form the tuned participant is desired In order to influence and initiate the reaction pathway, it will provide the necessary energy input during the desired reaction in the crystallization reaction system.

  For example, the implementation of waveform analysis calculations to reach the correct electromagnetic energy frequency can be accomplished by using complex algebra, ie, the Fourier transform or Wavelet Transforms, supplied under the trademark Mathematica and by Wolfram, Co. . Only a portion of the calculated spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, a spectral conditioning catalyst) may be sufficient to catalyze the reaction, or a substantially complete spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, a spectral conditioning catalyst) is It can be applied depending on the specific environment.

  In addition, at least a portion of the spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, the electromagnetic pattern of the required spectral catalyst) is generated and applied to the conditioning crystallization reaction system by the electromagnetic radiation source as defined and described above. obtain.

  Specific physical catalysts (eg, seed crystals, epitaxial substrates, crystallization agents, promoters, inhibitors, etc.) that are replaced or enhanced in the present invention are any having homogeneous or heterogeneous catalytic activity. Solid, liquid, gas, or plasma catalysts.

III. Targeting :
The frequency and wave nature of energy has been discussed herein. Further, Section I entitled “Wave Energy” disclosed the concept of various possible interactions between different waves. The general concepts of “targeting”, “direct resonance targeting”, “harmonic targeting” and “nonharmonic heterodyne targeting” (all defined terms in this document) Based on.

Targeting is generally a spectral energy donor to a desired reaction in a crystallization reaction system (eg, spectral energy catalyst, spectral catalyst, spectral energy pattern, spectral pattern, catalytic spectral energy pattern, catalytic spectral pattern, spectral environmental state And applied spectral energy pattern). Application of those types of energy to the desired reaction can result in an interaction between the applied spectral energy donor and the material (including all of its components) in the crystallization reaction system. This targeting can result in at least one direct resonance, harmonic resonance and / or anharmonic heterodyne resonance with at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system, such as at least one substance. In the present invention, targeting is generally a substance (or its) to achieve a particular desired result (eg, a desired reaction product and / or a desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate). It should be understood as a means of applying a particular spectral energy donor (eg, a spectral energy pattern) to another entity comprising any component.
Furthermore, the present invention does not involve, for example, the production of desired transients, intermediates, activated complexes and / or reaction products (eg, derived structures, impurities, defects, etc.). Techniques for achieving the desired results are provided. In this regard, there are some limited prior art techniques that apply certain forms of energy (discussed previously) to various non-crystallization reactions. Their constant form of energy has been limited to direct and harmonic resonances along with some electronic and / or vibrational frequencies of some reactants. Those limited forms of energy used by the prior art were due to the fact that the prior art lacks the spectral energy mechanism and proper understanding disclosed herein. Furthermore, the prior art crystallization has general processing conditions that are typically applied, such as temperature, pressure, etc. to achieve the desired destination. In addition, at least some undesired intermediates, transients, activated complexes and / or reaction products were formed and / or resulted in suboptimal reaction rates for the desired crystallization reaction pathway. This has often existed in the prior art. The present invention overcomes the limitations of the prior art by specifically targeting various forms of materials (eg, seed crystals) in a crystallization reaction system, for example, by the applied spectral energy pattern. So far, such selective targeting of the present invention has never been disclosed or proposed.
Thus, whenever the term “to target” is used herein, to target does not correspond to an unordered energy band being applied to the crystallization reaction system; Corresponding to the spectral energy pattern applied.

IV. Conditioning targeting :
Conditioning targeting generally involves at least one regulated participant before a regulated participant that becomes involved (eg, introduced and / or activated) in the crystallization reaction system. Spectral energy conditioning donors (eg, spectral energy conditioning catalyst, spectral conditioning catalyst, spectral energy conditioning pattern, spectral conditioning pattern, catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern, catalytic spectral conditioning pattern, spectral conditioning to participants that can be adjusted to form Defined as application of environmental reaction state and applied spectral energy conditioning pattern). The application of those types of conditioning to the calibrated participants, which can be tuned to form the tuned participants prior to the conditioned participants being introduced into the crystallization reaction system, crystallization Interactions between other components in the reaction system (including all of its components) can result, and as a result, the tuned material can produce the desired reaction pathway and / or desired reaction within the crystallization reaction system. Speed can be initiated and / or directed. This conditioning targeting can be performed at least one of the participant substances (in any form) that can be tuned to form a conditioned participant substance that is subsequently introduced into or activated in the crystallization reaction system. Part, for example with at least one form, can produce at least one direct conditioning resonance, harmonic conditioning resonance, anharmonic conditioning heterodyne resonance and / or non-resonant effects. In the present invention, conditioning targeting is generally desired to achieve a particular desired result (eg, for a conditioned material introduced into a crystallization reaction system, a desired reaction product, and Specific to another tunable entity comprising a tunable substance (or any component thereof), to ultimately achieve the desired reaction product at the desired reaction rate) Should be understood to mean applying a spectral energy conditioning donor (eg, a spectral energy conditioning pattern). The introduction into the crystallization reaction system should not be construed to mean only the physical introduction of the regulated participants adjusted in the conditioning reaction vessel, but also the adjustable participants are in the reaction vessel. Can be conditioned in situ (or the reaction vessel itself can be tuned), and then the crystallization reaction system can be initiated, activated, or tuned when conditioned participants are present in the crystallization reaction vessel Should be understood as meaning (eg, initiated by application of temperature, pressure, etc.). Thus, the present invention achieves such desired results without, for example, the generation of unwanted temperature bodies, intermediates, activated complexes and / or reaction products (eg, defects, impurities, etc.). Provide techniques for doing this. The present invention selectively achieves the desired result by specifically targeting various forms of the conditioned material (and / or its components) before the conditioned material participates in the reaction in the crystallization reaction system. Teaches what to achieve.

  Thus, when the term “conditioning targeting” is used herein, conditioning targeting refers to a participant that can be tuned to form a tuned participant that becomes involved in the crystallization reaction system. Does not correspond to the undisciplined energy band applied; but rather corresponds to a well-defined, targeted and applied spectral energy conditioning pattern, each of them to form a coordinated participant Have a specific desired purpose, so that tailored participants can track the desired reaction pathway and / or at the desired result and / or desired reaction rate in the crystallization reaction system. It should be understood that the desired result can be achieved. Those results can cause favorable behavior of the conditioned material when such conditioned material is activated or initiated in a crystallization reaction system, or can be conditioned participants of the conditioning targeted polymorphism It includes conditioning that targets a single tunable participant's substance to form a tuned substance that causes the substance to achieve the desired result.

V. Environmental reaction conditions :
Environmental reaction conditions are important to understand because they have a positive or negative impact on the reaction pathway in the crystallization reaction system. Conventional environmental reaction conditions include temperature, pressure, catalyst surface area, catalyst size and shape, solvent, support material, poison, promoter, concentration, electromagnetic radiation, electric field, magnetic field, mechanical force, sound field, reaction vessel size, shape And compositions, combinations thereof, and the like.

特に、いくつかの場合、反応体Aは、結晶化反応系における環境反応条件が環境反応条件の一定の最大又は最大条件、例えば圧力及び/又は温度を包含しなければ、いずれかの触媒Cの存在下で反応生成物Bを形成しないであろう。これに関しては、多くの反応は、環境反応条件が例えば、高められた温度及び/又は高められた圧力を包含しなければ、物理的触媒の存在下で生じないであろう。本発明においては、そのような環境反応条件は、特定のスペクトルエネルギー触媒（例えば、スペクトル触媒）を適用する場合、考慮されるべきである。多くの特定の種々の環境反応条件が、“好ましい態様の記載”の表題のセクションに、より詳細に論じられる。 The following reaction can be used to discuss the effects of environmental reaction conditions that need to be considered to cause the reaction to proceed along the simple reaction pathway disclosed below:

In particular, in some cases, Reactant A contains either catalyst C if the environmental reaction conditions in the crystallization reaction system do not include certain maximum or maximum conditions of environmental reaction conditions, such as pressure and / or temperature. In the presence it will not form reaction product B. In this regard, many reactions will not occur in the presence of a physical catalyst unless the environmental reaction conditions include, for example, elevated temperature and / or elevated pressure. In the present invention, such environmental reaction conditions should be considered when applying certain spectral energy catalysts (eg, spectral catalysts). Many specific and various environmental reaction conditions are discussed in more detail in the section entitled “Description of Preferred Embodiments”.

VI. Conditioning environmental reaction conditions :
Conditioning environmental reaction conditions also have a positive or negative impact on the conditioning of participants that can also be tuned, and conditioned participants are introduced into or active in the crystallization reaction system. It is important to understand that, ultimately, different reaction pathways can be derived in the crystallization reaction system. The same conventional environmental reaction conditions listed above: temperature, pressure, catalyst surface area, catalyst size and shape, solvent, support material, poison, promoter, concentration, electromagnetic radiation, electric field, magnetic field, mechanical force, sound field, The size, shape, and composition of reaction vessels, and combinations thereof, etc. apply here.

  In the present invention, such conditioning environmental reaction conditions should be considered when applying a particular spectral energy catalyst (eg, a spectral conditioning catalyst) to a tunable participant. Those considerations that are similar to environmental considerations need to be taken into account when tailored participants are introduced into the crystallization reaction system. Many specific different environmental and / or conditioning environmental reaction conditions are discussed in more detail in the section entitled “Description of Preferred Embodiments”.

VII. Spectral environmental reaction conditions :
If it is known that a certain reaction path does not occur in the crystallization reaction system (or does not occur at the desired rate), certain minimum or maximum environmental reaction conditions (eg temperature and / or pressure are increased) ) Is not present, the presence of the catalyst can also be applied to the crystallization reaction system, or additional frequencies or combinations thereof (ie, the applied spectral energy pattern). In this regard, spectral environmental reaction conditions are applied in place of, or in addition to, those environmental reaction conditions that exist or need to exist naturally, depending on the desired reaction pathway and / or desired subsequent reaction rate. Can be done. Environmental reaction conditions that can be measured or replaced by spectral environmental reaction conditions include, for example, temperature, pressure, catalyst surface area, catalyst size and shape, solvent, support material, poison, promoter, concentration, electric field, magnetic field, etc. Is included.

  In addition, a particular frequency or combination of frequencies and / or fields that can generate one or more spectral environmental reaction conditions can be applied to the applied spectral energy pattern that can be concentrated in a particular region in the crystallization reaction system. It can be combined with one or more spectral energy catalysts and / or spectral catalysts to produce. Thus, it should be considered what specific frequencies or combinations of frequencies and / or fields are desired to be combined (or replaced) with various environmental reaction conditions.

  Further, the field that generates a particular frequency or combination of frequencies and / or one or more spectral environmental reaction conditions can be combined with an applied spectral energy pattern that can be focused on a particular region in the crystallization reaction system. Thus, various considerations can make which particular frequency or combination of frequencies and / or fields combine (or replace) with various environmental reaction conditions.

  As an example in a simple reaction, the first reactant “A” has a frequency or simple spectral pattern of 3 THz, and the second reactant “B” has a frequency or simple spectral pattern of 7 THz. No reaction takes place at room temperature. However, when reactants A and B are exposed to high temperatures, their frequency, or simple spectral pattern, moves to 5 THz. Since their frequencies match, they transfer energy and a reaction occurs. By applying a frequency of 2 THz at room temperature, the applied 2 THz frequency is heterodyned with a 3 THz pattern to yield 1 THz and 5 THz heterodyne frequencies; however, the applied frequency of 2 THz is 7 THz of reactant “B” Heterodyne with the spectral pattern and result in 5 THz and 9 THz heterodyne frequencies in reactant “B”. Thus, a 5 THz heterodyne frequency is generated at room temperature in each of the reactants “A” and “B”. Thus, the frequencies in each of the reactants are matched and thus energy can be transferred between the reactants “A” and “B”. If the energy can be transferred between such reactants, all desired reactions along the reaction path can be achieved. However, in some reactions, only some desired reactions along the reaction path can be achieved by application of a single frequency. In those cases, additional frequencies and / or fields are applied to result in the formation of all desired, for example, all required intermediates and / or transients along the adapted reaction path. There is a need.

  Thus, by applying a frequency, or frequency and / or field (ie, creating an applied spectral energy pattern) corresponding to at least one spectral environmental reaction condition, in some cases a broad spectral energy pattern Spectral energy patterns (eg, reactants, intermediates, transients, catalysts, etc.) that can produce (eg, broad spectral patterns) or otherwise narrow spectral energy patterns (eg, spectral patterns) are effective. Can be modified. Such wide or narrow spectral energy patterns (eg, spectral patterns) can correspond to wide or narrow line widths in the spectral energy patterns (eg, spectral patterns). As mentioned throughout this specification, energy is transferred when the frequencies are matched. In this particular embodiment, the frequency can be caused to fit by broadening the spectral pattern of one or more participants in the crystallization reaction system. For example, as will be discussed in more detail later herein, application of temperature to a crystallization reaction system typically involves one or more spectral patterns of one or more reactants in the crystallization reaction system. Cause expansion. It is this extension of the spectral pattern that can cause the spectral pattern overlap of one or more reactants. Spectral pattern overlap can cause frequency adaptation and thus energy transfer. A reaction occurs when energy is transferred. The range of reactions that occur includes all those reactions along any particular crystallization reaction path. Thus, expansion of the spectral pattern can result in, for example, formation of reaction products, formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of reaction intermediates and / or transients, catalytic frequencies, toxicants, promoters, and the like. All environmental reaction conditions discussed in detail in the section entitled “Detailed Description of Preferred Embodiments” may be mimicked at least in part in the crystallization reaction system by application of spectral environmental reaction conditions.

  Similarly, the spectral patterns can be caused to become non-overlapping by changing at least one spectral environmental reaction condition and thus changing the applied spectral energy pattern. In this case, no energy is transferred (or the rate at which energy is transferred can be reduced) and no reaction will occur (or the reaction rate may be slowed).

  Finally, by controlling the spectral environmental reaction conditions, the energy dynamics within the overall reaction system can be controlled. For example, with a first spectral environmental reaction condition, the first set of frequencies is matched, and thus energy can be transferred at the first set of energy levels and types. If the spectral environmental reaction conditions are changed, the second set of frequencies will adapt, resulting in energy transfer at different levels or types.

  Spectral environmental reaction conditions can be used to initiate and / or stop the reaction in the reaction pathway. Thus, certain reactions can be started, stopped, delayed, and / or accelerated by applying different spectral environmental reaction conditions at different times and / or at different intensities during the reaction. Can be. Thus, the spectral environmental reaction conditions can positively or negatively influence the reaction path and / or reaction rate in the crystallization reaction system.

XIII. Spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions :
Similarly, consideration of spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions applies in a similar manner in this section. In particular, if it is known that a certain conditioning of a regulated participant does not occur in the crystallization reaction system (or does not occur at the desired rate), a certain minimum or maximum conditioning environmental reaction condition ( For example, if there is no temperature and / or pressure increased), the presence of the catalyst can also be applied to a participant whose additional frequency or combination thereof (ie, the applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) can be adjusted. In this regard, the spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions are those that exist or need to exist for the desired conditioning of the tunable participants that occur (ie, form the desired tuned participants). Can be applied in place of the conditioning environment reaction conditions or in the supplement. Conditioning environmental reaction conditions that can be supplemented by or replaced by spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions include, for example, temperature, pressure, catalyst surface area, catalyst size and shape, solvent, support material, poison, promoter, concentration, electric field, magnetic field. , Etc.

  In addition, the specific frequency or combination of frequencies and / or fields that can generate one or more spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions can be concentrated in specific regions in the crystallization reaction system. To generate a pattern, it can be combined with one or more spectral energy conditioning catalysts and / or spectral conditioning catalysts. Thus, it should be considered what specific frequencies or combinations of frequencies and / or fields are desired to be combined (or replaced) with various conditioning environmental reaction conditions.

  Thus, by applying a frequency, or frequency and / or field (ie, creating an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern) that corresponds to at least one spectral environmental conditioning reaction condition, in some cases a broad spectrum The spectral energy conditioning pattern of an adjustable participant can be effectively modified, which can result in an energy conditioning pattern (eg, a broad spectral conditioning pattern), or in other cases, a narrow spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, a spectral conditioning pattern). obtain. Such wide or narrow spectral energy patterns (eg, spectral conditioning patterns) can correspond to wide or narrow line widths in the spectral conditioning energy patterns (eg, spectral conditioning patterns). As mentioned throughout this specification, energy is transferred when the frequencies are matched. In this particular embodiment, the frequency can be induced by broadening the spectral conditioning pattern of one or more participants in the crystallization reaction system. For example, as discussed in more detail later herein, application of temperature to the conditioning crystallization reaction system typically involves one or more of one or more tunable participants in the crystallization reaction system. Causes an expansion of the spectrum conditioning pattern. It is this extension of the spectral conditioning pattern that can cause the overlap of one or more component spectral conditioning patterns in the conditioning crystallization reaction system. Spectral conditioning pattern overlap can cause frequency adaptation and thus tuned participant transitions. The same tunable participants can be tuned with different spectral energy patterns or amounts to yield tuned participants with different energy dynamics (eg, activated electron level vs. activated rotation). The range of reactions that occur includes all those reactions along any particular reaction pathway when coordinated participants are introduced into the crystallization reaction system. Thus, the expansion of the spectral conditioning pattern in the tuned participants may include, for example, formation of reaction products, formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of reaction intermediates and / or transients in a crystallization reaction system, Can bring about poisons, promoters, etc. All environmental reaction conditions discussed in detail in the section entitled “Detailed Description of Preferred Embodiments” can be mimicked at least in part in the conditioning crystallization reaction system by application of spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions.

  Spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions can be used to initiate, direct, include, and / or condition appropriately a tunable participant, so that the tuned participant is a reaction or reaction in a crystallization reaction system. The route can be stopped. Thus, certain reactions apply different spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions to the tunable participants, and the conditioned participants are allowed to crystallize at different times and / or different intensities during the reaction. By introducing into the system, it can be started, stopped, delayed and / or accelerated in the crystallization reaction system. Thus, the spectral conditioning environmental reaction conditions can positively or negatively affect the reaction pathway and / or reaction rate in the crystallization reaction system by supplying different spectral energy patterns to one or more tuned participants. Can do.

IX. Planning of physical and spectral catalysts :
Further, rather than applying the spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) itself, using the above method, the desired spectrum for the spectral energy catalyst (eg, a spectral catalyst corresponding to a seed crystal or an epitaxial substrate). By designing (eg, calculating or determining) a desired spectral energy pattern, such as a pattern, for example, a specific crystallization that is a crystallization reaction in a crystallization reaction system using the designed spectral pattern The optimal physical and / or spectral catalyst that can be used to obtain the results of Furthermore, the present invention can provide a recipe for physical and / or spectral catalysts in certain crystallization reactions where no catalyst was previously present (eg, certain atoms, ions, molecules, and / or Alternatively, it can be crystallized in a way that does not normally occur by affecting macromolecules). For example, a reaction:
A → I → B
Where A = reactant, B = product, and I = a known intermediate, and there is no known catalyst, a physical or spectral catalyst can be designed that is In resonance with I ″ to catalyze the formation of one or more desired crystallization reaction products.
As a first step, the designed spectral pattern is compared with the known spectral pattern of the existing material, and there is a similarity between the designed spectral pattern and the known spectral pattern of the material. You can decide whether or not. If the designed spectral pattern at least partially matches the spectral pattern of a known substance, the known substance is used as a physical catalyst to achieve the desired crystallization reaction and / or desired in the crystallization reaction system. The crystallization reaction route can be obtained. In this regard, it may be desirable to use this known material alone or in combination with certain spectral energy catalysts and / or spectral catalysts. In addition, environmental reaction conditions and / or spectral environmental reaction conditions can be used to cause the known material to behave in a manner that is closer to the designed energy or spectral pattern. In addition, different spectral energy patterns can be applied to make the designed catalyst behave differently, for example by applying the first spectral energy pattern to facilitate the first crystallization reaction path. The second crystallization reaction path can be promoted by applying the second spectrum energy pattern. Similarly, changing one or more environmental reaction conditions may have a similar effect.
Furthermore, the designed catalysts are applicable to all types of reactions, including but not limited to chemical (organic and inorganic), biological, physical, energy, etc.
Further, in some cases, spectral energy appropriately designed to achieve a desired reaction path, using one or more physical species, or in an appropriate manner, eg, by physical mixing or chemical reaction. A physical catalyst material that exhibits a pattern (eg, a spectral pattern) can be obtained. Thus, designed catalysts (eg, physical catalysts that are known or apparently produced as physical catalysts, such as seed crystals), spectral energy catalysts, and / or spectral catalyst The combination results in a combined energy pattern (eg, in this case, a combination of physical and / or spectral catalysts) that is desired at the desired reaction product formation and / or at the desired reaction rate. To follow the reaction pathway of. In this regard, when the designed catalyst is combined with different spectral energy patterns and / or spectral patterns, the spectral energy patterns and / or the different line widths of the spectral patterns and Narrowing may occur.
When calculating or determining a suitable designed catalyst, it is important to consider the energy interaction of all components involved in the desired reaction in a crystallization reaction system. There are specific combinations of specific energy patterns (eg, electromagnetic energy) that interact with the designed catalyst to form an applied spectral energy pattern. For example, the specific frequency of electromagnetic radiation to be applied to the crystallization reaction system, when interacting with the designed catalyst frequency, will cause as much of this as possible to produce the desired effect on one or more participating substances in the crystallization reaction system. As many frequencies as possible that cause undesirable effects in the crystallization reaction system must be eliminated.
X. Design of Participants that can be Conditioned Further, the desired spectral energy pattern, eg, the desired spectrum for the spectral energy catalyst, using the above method, rather than applying the spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) itself By designing (e.g., calculating or determining) the pattern, for example, using the designed spectral pattern, the optimal physical and A spectral catalyst can be designed and / or determined. In addition, the present invention can provide physical and / or spectral catalyst recipes for certain crystallization reactions where no catalyst was previously present. For example, a reaction:
A → I → B
Where A = reactant, B = product, and I = a known intermediate, and there is no known catalyst, a physical or spectral catalyst can be designed that is In resonance with I ″ to catalyze the formation of one or more desired crystallization reaction products.
As a first step, the designed spectral pattern is compared with the known spectral pattern of the existing material, and there is a similarity between the designed spectral pattern and the known spectral pattern of the material. You can decide whether or not. If the designed spectral pattern at least partially matches the spectral pattern of a known substance, the known substance is used as a physical catalyst to achieve the desired crystallization reaction and / or desired in the crystallization reaction system. The crystallization reaction route can be obtained. In this regard, it may be desirable to use this known material alone or in combination with certain spectral energy catalysts and / or spectral catalysts. In addition, environmental reaction conditions and / or spectral environmental reaction conditions can be used to cause the known material to behave in a manner that is closer to the designed energy or spectral pattern. In addition, different spectral energy patterns can be applied to make the designed catalyst behave differently, for example by applying the first spectral energy pattern to facilitate the first crystallization reaction path. The second crystallization reaction path can be promoted by applying the second spectrum energy pattern. Similarly, changing one or more environmental reaction conditions may have a similar effect.
Furthermore, the designed catalysts are applicable to all types of reactions, including but not limited to chemical (organic and inorganic), biological, physical, energy, etc.
Further, in some cases, spectral energy appropriately designed to achieve a desired reaction path, using one or more physical species, or in an appropriate manner, eg, by physical mixing or chemical reaction. A physical catalyst material that exhibits a pattern (eg, a spectral pattern) can be obtained. Thus, designed catalysts (eg, physical catalysts that are known or apparently produced as physical catalysts, such as seed crystals), spectral energy catalysts, and / or spectral catalyst The combination results in a combined energy pattern (eg, in this case, a combination of physical and / or spectral catalysts) that is desired at the desired reaction product formation and / or at the desired reaction rate. To follow the reaction pathway of. In this regard, when the designed catalyst is combined with different spectral energy patterns and / or spectral patterns, the spectral energy patterns and / or the different line widths of the spectral patterns and Narrowing may occur.
When calculating or determining a suitable designed catalyst, it is important to consider the energy interaction of all components involved in the desired reaction in a crystallization reaction system. There are specific combinations of specific energy patterns (eg, electromagnetic energy) that interact with the designed catalyst to form an applied spectral energy pattern. For example, the specific frequency of electromagnetic radiation to be applied to the crystallization reaction system, when interacting with the designed catalyst frequency, will cause as much of this as possible to produce the desired effect on one or more participating substances in the crystallization reaction system. As many frequencies as possible that cause undesirable effects in the crystallization reaction system must be eliminated.

XIII. Objects of the invention :
All of the above information disclosing the present invention should provide an understanding of the main aspects of the present invention. However, for a further understanding of the invention, the invention will now be discussed with respect to some of the representative objectives or goals to be achieved.

  1. One object of the present invention is the form of a spectral catalyst having at least one electromagnetic energy frequency capable of initiating, activating and / or influencing at least one of the participants involved in the crystallization reaction system. To control or direct the crystallization reaction path in the crystallization reaction system by applying the spectral energy pattern in.

2. Another object of the present invention is to
Overlapping at least a portion of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst (eg, at least one frequency of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst such as a seed crystal, epitaxial growth promoter, etc.) to form a catalytic spectral pattern; and the catalytic spectral pattern For replacing a known physical catalyst in the crystallization reaction system comprising applying at least a part of the crystallization reaction system to at least a part of the crystallization reaction system (eg, melt, solution and / or epitaxial plasma) It is to provide an effective, selective and economic method.

3. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining the electromagnetic spectral pattern of the physical catalyst;
Overlapping at least one frequency of the spectral pattern of a physical catalyst (eg, seed crystal, epitaxial substrate, etc.) with at least one electromagnetic energy emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern; and a desired portion of the crystallization reaction system Applying at least one frequency of the catalyst spectral pattern to at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system for a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient period to catalyze the formation of the crystallization reaction product in It is to provide a method for enhancing a physical catalyst in a crystallization reaction system having its own catalytic spectral pattern. The at least one frequency comprises: (1) an electromagnetic wave guide; (2) an optical fiber array; (3) at least one element added to a crystallization reaction system that allows radiation of electromagnetic energy therefrom; (4) an electric field; (5) It can be applied by at least one of a magnetic field; and / or a sound field.

4). Another object of the present invention is to
Overlapping at least a portion of the physical catalyst spectral pattern (eg, at least one frequency of a physical catalyst spectral pattern such as a seed crystal or an epitaxial substrate) to form a catalyst spectral pattern;
Applying at least a portion of the catalytic spectral pattern to a crystallization reaction system; and, when combined with the catalytic spectral pattern, applying at least one additional spectral energy pattern that forms an applied spectral energy pattern; It is to provide an effective, selective and economical method for replacing known physical catalysts in a crystallization reaction system comprising.

5. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining the electromagnetic spectral pattern of the physical catalyst;
Overlapping at least one frequency of the magnetic spectral pattern of the physical catalyst with at least one electromagnetic energy emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern;
Applying at least one frequency of said catalytic spectral pattern to a crystallization reaction system; and applying at least one additional spectral energy pattern to form an applied spectral energy pattern; Provides a method for replacing a physical catalyst in a crystallization reaction system, wherein the applied energy pattern is strong enough to catalyze the formation of at least one crystallization reaction product in the crystallization reaction system. And for a sufficient period of time.

6). Another object of the present invention is to
In order to form a catalytic spectral pattern (eg, a spectral pattern of a seed crystal and / or an epitaxial substrate), at least a portion of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst (eg, of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst) by at least one energy emitter source. Overlapping at least one frequency);
At least a portion of a catalyst spectral pattern (eg, a magnetic spectral pattern having a frequency range of radio frequency to ultraviolet frequency) with sufficient intensity and duration sufficient to catalyze one or more specific reactions in a crystallization reaction system. Applied to a crystallization reaction system (eg irradiation); and introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system, the crystallization reaction system with a spectral catalyst by enhancing the physical catalyst To provide a method for influencing and / or directing a particular reaction pathway in

  The method may be performed by introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system before and / or during and / or after applying the catalyst spectrum and pattern to the crystallization reaction system.

7). Another object of the present invention is to
Applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient strength and for a sufficient time to catalyze a particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system; and introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system A method for influencing and / or directing a specific reaction path in a crystallization reaction system by means of a spectral energy catalyst by enhancing a physical catalyst (eg seed crystal and / or epi-substrate) Is to provide.

  The method can be performed by introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system before and / or during and / or after applying the spectral energy catalyst to the crystallization reaction system.

8). Another object of the present invention is to
Applying at least one spectral catalyst at a sufficient strength and for a sufficient time to at least partially catalyze the desired crystallization reaction system;
Applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient strength and for a sufficient time to at least partially catalyze the desired crystallization reaction system; and introducing the physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system. Affects and / or directs specific reaction pathways in crystallization reaction systems by spectral and spectral energy catalysts by enhancing physical catalysts (eg, seed crystals and / or epi-substrates) Is to provide a method for

  The above method may be performed by introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system before and / or during and / or after applying said spectral catalyst and / or spectral energy catalyst to the crystallization reaction system. . In addition, the spectral catalyst and the spectral energy catalyst are applied simultaneously to form the applied spectral energy pattern, or they are simultaneously with or with the physical catalyst being introduced into the crystallization reaction system. Can be applied continuously at different times.

9. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying at least one spectral catalyst with sufficient strength and for a sufficient period of time to catalyze the reaction pathway;
Applying at least one spectral energy catalyst with sufficient strength and for a sufficient period of time to catalyze the reaction pathway;
Applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient period of time to catalyze the reaction pathway, whereby the at least one spectral catalyst, the at least one spectral energy catalyst and / or at least one When any of the spectral environmental reaction conditions are applied simultaneously, they form the applied spectral energy pattern; and a physical catalyst comprising the step of introducing said physical catalyst into a crystallization reaction system ( For example, with and without seed crystals and / or epi substrates, the spectrum catalyst and spectral energy catalyst and spectral environmental reaction conditions can affect and / or direct the desired reaction to the crystallization reaction system. Is to provide a way to do that.

  The method may be performed by introducing any one or any combination of spectral catalysts and / or spectral energy catalysts and / or spectral environmental reaction conditions into the crystallization reaction system. Similarly, the spectral catalyst and / or spectral energy catalyst and / or spectral environmental reaction conditions may be supplied continuously or intermittently.

10. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying at least one applied spectral energy pattern at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient time to catalyze a particular reaction in a crystallization reaction system, whereby said at least one applied spectral energy pattern is Comprising at least two members selected from the group consisting of spectral energy pattern, catalytic spectral pattern, spectral catalyst, spectral energy catalyst, spectral energy pattern, spectral environmental reaction condition and spectral pattern; and at least one spectral energy catalyst A method for influencing and directing a crystallization reaction system with an applied spectral energy pattern and a spectral energy catalyst comprising the steps of applying to the crystallization reaction system Is to provide.

  The method may be performed by introducing a spectral energy pattern that is applied into the crystallization reaction system before and / or during and / or after applying the spectral energy catalyst to the crystallization reaction system. Furthermore, the spectral energy catalyst and the applied spectral energy pattern can be applied continuously or intermittently. When applied intermittently, a new applied spectral energy pattern is formed.

11. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining at least a portion of the spectral energy for the starting reactant in a particular reaction in the crystallization reaction system;
Determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for a reaction product in the particular reaction in the crystallization reaction system;
From the reactant and reaction product spectral energy patterns, an additive and / or subtractive spectral energy pattern (eg, at least one magnetic frequency) is used to determine the required spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst). Calculate
Generating at least a portion of the required spectral energy catalyst (eg, at least one magnetic frequency of the required spectral catalyst); and in order to form at least one desired reaction product A crystallization reaction with a spectral energy catalyst comprising the step of applying at least a portion of the spectral energy catalyst (eg, spectral catalyst) to be applied to a specific reaction (eg, irradiation with magnetic energy) in said crystallization reaction system To provide a method for influencing and / or directing the system.

12． Another object of the present invention is to
At least in the crystallization reaction system with at least one spectral energy catalyst to cause the formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate, resulting in the desired reaction product. To provide a method for influencing and / or directing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral energy catalyst comprising the step of targeting one participant.

13. Another object of the present invention is to
At least one spectrum with sufficient time and sufficient intensity to cause formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one transient and / or intermediate, resulting in the desired reaction product at the desired reaction rate Providing a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral energy pattern to yield at least one reaction product comprising applying an energy pattern.

14. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying at least one applied spectral energy catalyst to at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system; and causing formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one transient and / or intermediate, Crystallization with a spectral energy catalyst and at least one spectral environmental reaction condition comprising the step of applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition to the crystallization reaction system to allow formation of a desired reaction product. To provide a way to influence and direct the reaction system.

15． Another object of the present invention is to
At least one frequency (e.g., heterodyne with at least one reactant frequency to cause formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one transient and / or intermediate and provide a desired reaction product (e.g., It is to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral energy catalyst to produce at least one reaction product comprising applying an electromagnetic).

16． Another object of the present invention is to
A sufficient number of frequencies (e.g. magnetic, e.g. And / or catalyzing the crystallization reaction system with at least one spectral energy pattern resulting in at least one reaction product comprising applying an electric field, a magnetic field, and / or a sound field. Is to provide a method.

17． Another object of the present invention is to
Targeting at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system with at least one frequency and / or field to indirectly form at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate, thereby A spectrum resulting in at least one reaction product comprising the formation of at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate resulting in the formation of additional at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate. It is to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with an energy catalyst.

  18． Targeting at least one spectral energy catalyst to at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system to indirectly form at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate, thereby said at least one Spectral energy catalyst providing at least one reaction product comprising the formation of one transient and / or at least one intermediate results in the formation of an additional at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system.

  19. Crystallization reaction along a desired reaction path comprising applying at least one targeting approach selected from the group consisting of approaches consisting of direct resonance targeting, harmonic targeting and non-harmonic heterodyne targeting It is an additional object of the invention to provide a method for directing a system.

  In this regard, these targeting approaches may form and / or stimulate and / or stimulate at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate in at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system to yield the desired reaction product. Or it can cause stabilization.

  20． At least one participant in the crystallization reaction system and / or to cause formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate to yield the desired reaction product It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system comprising applying at least one frequency to at least one component, wherein said at least one frequency Is the direct resonance frequency, harmonic resonance frequency, non-harmonic heterodyne resonance frequency, electron frequency, vibration frequency, rotation frequency, rotation-vibration frequency, peristaltic frequency, translation frequency, rotation frequency, microfission frequency, hyperfine fission frequency, Electric field induced frequency, magnetic field induced frequency, cyclotron resonance frequency, orbital frequency, high frequency and / or nuclear frequency At least one frequency selected from the group consisting of consisting.

  In this regard, the applied frequency resonates with at least one participant and / or at least one component in the crystallization reaction system, either directly, harmonically or by anharmonic heterodyne techniques. Any desired combination of frequencies can be included.

  21. Spectral pattern of at least one other participant and / or at least one other component in the crystallization reaction system (to allow energy transfer between at least two participants and / or components) At least one frequency and / or to cause at least partial overlap of the spectral energy pattern (eg, spectral pattern) of at least one participant and / or at least one component in the crystallization reaction system (e.g., spectral pattern). Alternatively, it is another object of the present invention to provide a method for directing a system along a desired reaction path by a spectral energy pattern comprising applying a field.

  twenty two. A crystallization reaction system according to a spectral energy pattern of at least one other participant and / or component in the crystallization reaction system in order to allow resonance transfer of energy between at least two participants and / or components Applying at least one spectral energy pattern to cause at least partial overlap of the spectral energy patterns of at least one participant and / or component in said, thereby causing formation of said at least one reaction product It is intended to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral energy pattern comprising at least one reaction product comprising.

  twenty three. Said crystallization reaction to cause an energy transfer to occur resulting in a conversion (eg, chemical, physical, phase, property or other means) of at least one participant and / or at least one component in the crystallization reaction system. Applying at least one frequency and / or field to cause an expansion of the spectral energy pattern (eg, spectral pattern) of at least one participant (eg, at least one reactant) and / or components in the system. It is another object of the invention to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral energy catalyst comprising at least one reaction product comprising.

  In this regard, the conversion can result in a reaction product that is of the chemical and / or physical or crystalline composition and / or phase of any starting reactant. Thus, only transients can be included in the conversion of reactants to reaction products.

  twenty four. Said crystal to cause the generation of a resonance transfer of energy that results in a transformation (eg, chemical, physical, phase, property or other means) of at least one participant and / or at least one component in the crystallization reaction system Applying an applied spectral energy pattern to cause an expansion of a spectral energy pattern (eg, a spectral pattern) of at least one participant (eg, at least one reactant) and / or a component in the chemical reaction system. It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a spectral energy catalyst comprising at least one reaction product comprising.

twenty five. Another object of the present invention is to
At least one spectral environment comprising: forming a crystallization reaction system; and applying at least one spectral environment reaction condition for directing said crystallization reaction system along at least one desired reaction path It is to provide a method for controlling the reaction in the crystallization reaction system and / or directing the reaction path by using the reaction conditions.

  In this regard, the applied spectral environmental reaction conditions can be used alone or in combination with other environmental reaction conditions to achieve the desired result. Furthermore, additional spectral energy patterns can also be applied simultaneously and / or continuously with other spectral environmental reaction conditions.

26. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining the required spectral pattern to obtain the desired reaction and / or desired reaction path and / or desired reaction rate; and a catalyst exhibiting a spectral pattern close to said required spectral pattern (e.g., There has heretofore been a catalyst (eg a seed crystal and / or an epi-substrate) to be used in a crystallization reaction system comprising planning a material or a combination of materials and / or a spectral energy catalyst). It is to provide a method for planning non-catalytic (eg, physical and / or spectral energy catalysts).

  In this regard, the planned catalyst material comprises a physical mixture of one or more materials and / or a plurality of materials combined by an appropriate reaction. The planned material can be functionally enhanced by one or more spectral energy patterns that can also be applied to the crystallization reaction system. Furthermore, the application of different spectral energy patterns facilitates the first reaction path in different embodiments, for example by application of the first spectral energy pattern, and the second reaction path by application of the second spectral energy pattern. In promoting the behavior of the planned material. Similarly, changing one or more environmental reaction conditions has a similar effect.

  Furthermore, this designed material applies to all types of reactions, such as but not limited to chemical (organic or inorganic), biological, physical, etc. reactions.

27. Another object of the present invention is to
Providing at least one control means for absorbing, filtering, trapping, reflecting, etc. the generated spectral energy;
Allowing emission of the desired spectral energy from the control means, and contacting at least a portion of the crystallization reaction system with the emitted spectral energy; and the emission of the emitted spectral energy from the control means From an interaction with the crystallization reaction system comprising causing a desired interaction with the crystallization reaction system, thereby directing said crystallization reaction system along at least one desired reaction path; It is to provide a method for controlling the reaction and / or directing the reaction path by interfering with at least a portion of certain undesired spectral energy.

  28. It should be understood in each of the aforementioned 27 objects of the present invention that the crystallization reaction system also desirably includes preventing the occurrence of certain reaction phenomena.

  29. One object of the present invention is to control or direct the reaction pathway in a crystallization reaction system with a tuned participant, and the spectral energy conditioning pattern (eg, spectral conditioning) to at least one tunable participant. Generating said conditioned participant by applying a catalyst), wherein said tunable participant initiates at least one of the participants involved in the crystallization reaction system and is active It has at least one adjusted energy frequency (e.g. magnetic energy frequency) to crystallization and / or influence and / or can itself be influenced by subsequent application of spectral energy in the crystallization reaction system.

30. Another object of the present invention is to
Overlapping at least part of the physical catalyst's spectral pattern (eg, at least one frequency of the physical catalyst's spectral pattern) by modifying the tunable participant so that the tunable participant forms a catalyst spectral pattern And effective, selective and economical to replace known physical catalysts in the crystallization reaction system comprising the step of applying or introducing conditioned participants to the crystallization reaction system Is to provide a method.

31. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining the magnetic spectral pattern of the physical catalyst;
Emphasizing at least one frequency of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst by conditioning the tunable participant with at least one electromagnetic energy emitter source to form a catalytic spectral pattern in the tuned participant; and By providing a method for enhancing a physical catalyst in a crystallization reaction system by its own catalytic spectral pattern comprising the step of applying or introducing a conditioned participant to the crystallization reaction system. is there.

32. Another object of the present invention is to
At least a portion of the physical catalyst spectral pattern (eg, at least one frequency of the physical catalyst spectral pattern) by conditioning the tunable participants to form a catalyst spectral pattern in the tuned participant. Duplicate;
Applying or introducing a conditioned participant to the crystallization reaction system; and when combined with the catalyst spectral pattern of the tuned participant, at least one additional spectral energy pattern that forms the applied spectral energy pattern It is to provide an effective, selective and economical method for replacing known physical catalysts in a crystallization reaction system comprising a step of applying.

33. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining the magnetic spectral pattern of the physical catalyst;
Emphasis is placed on at least one frequency of the magnetic spectrum pattern of the physical catalyst by conditioning the tunable participant by at least one electromagnetic energy emitter conditioning source to form a catalyst spectral pattern in the tuned participant. ;
Applying or introducing a conditioned participant to the crystallization reaction system; and applying at least an additional spectral energy pattern to form an applied spectral energy pattern, wherein said applied spectral energy pattern Replaces the physical catalyst in the crystallization reaction system comprising a step that is applied with sufficient strength and for a sufficient period of time to catalyze the formation of at least one reaction product in the crystallization reaction system. Is to provide a way to do that.

34. Another object of the present invention is to
Conditioning the tunable participants with at least one electromagnetic energy emitter source to form a catalyst spectral pattern in the tuned participants, such as at least a portion of the physical catalyst's spectral pattern (eg, physical catalyst Overlapping at least one frequency of the spectral pattern of
Applying or introducing the conditioned participants to the entire reaction system; and introducing the physical catalyst to the crystallization reaction system, by enhancing the physical catalyst, To provide a method for influencing and / or directing the reaction system.

  The above method can be performed by introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system before and / or after application of the conditioned participant to the crystallization reaction system.

35. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying or introducing at least one coordinated participant to the crystallization reaction system; and enhancing the physical catalyst comprising introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system, It is to provide a method for influencing and / or directing a crystallization reaction system with coordinated participants.

  The above method can be performed by introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system before and / or after application of the conditioned participant to the crystallization reaction system.

36. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying or introducing at least one coordinated participant into the crystallization reaction system;
Applying at least one spectral energy catalyst at a sufficient strength and for a sufficient period of time to at least partially catalyze the crystallization reaction system; and introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system. It is to provide a method for influencing and / or directing a crystallization reaction system with tailored participants and spectroenergy catalyst by enhancing the physical catalyst.

  The above method may be performed by introducing a physical catalyst into the crystallization reaction system before and / or after application of the tuned participant and / or spectroenergy catalyst to the crystallization reaction system. . Furthermore, the tuned participants and the spectral energy catalyst can be applied simultaneously to form the applied spectral energy pattern, or they can be used at the same time as the physical catalyst is introduced into the crystallization reaction system. Or it can be applied continuously at different times.

37. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying or introducing at least one coordinated participant into the crystallization reaction system;
Applying at least one spectral energy catalyst with sufficient strength and for a sufficient period of time to catalyze the reaction pathway;
Applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient period of time to catalyze the reaction pathway, whereby the at least one conditioned participant is the at least one spectral energy catalyst and / or Or if any of at least one spectral environmental reaction condition is applied simultaneously, they form applied spectral energy; and comprise introducing the physical catalyst into a crystallization reaction system, To provide a method for influencing and / or directing a crystallization reaction system with tuned participants and spectral energy catalysts and spectral environmental reaction conditions, with or without physical catalysts.

  The method may be carried out before and / or after application of any one or combination of said tuned participants and / or spectroenergy catalysts and / or spectroenvironmental reaction conditions in the crystallization reaction system. This can be done by introducing a physical catalyst into the chemical reaction system. Similarly, tuned participants and / or spectral energy catalysts and / or spectroenvironment reaction conditions can be applied continuously or intermittently.

38. Another object of the present invention is to
Applied spectral energy conditioning pattern and / or spectral energy conditioning comprising applying at least one applied spectral energy conditioning pattern at a sufficient intensity and for a sufficient period of time to condition an adjustable participant Providing a method for conditioning a participant tunable by a catalyst, wherein the at least one applied spectral energy conditioning comprises a catalytic spectral energy conditioning pattern, a catalytic spectral conditioning pattern, a spectral conditioning catalyst, a spectral energy Conditioning catalyst, spectral energy conditioning pattern, spectral conditioning environmental reaction Matter, and comprising at least one member selected from the group consisting of spectral conditioning pattern.

  The method includes introducing a spectral energy pattern to be applied into the crystallization reaction system before and / or during and / or after introducing the conditioned participant in the crystallization reaction system. Can be combined. Furthermore, the tuned participants and the applied spectral energy pattern can be provided continuously. When applied continuously, a new applied spectral energy pattern is formed.

  The method also comprises conditioning the conditioning reaction vessel and / or a participant that can be adjusted in the reaction vessel. If the tunable participant is first conditioned in the reaction vessel, its conditioning occurs before some or all other components comprising the crystallization reaction system are introduced into the crystallization reaction system.

  Furthermore, the reaction vessel and / or the conditioning reaction vessel itself can be treated with conditioning energy. When the reaction vessel is treated with conditioning energy, such conditioning treatment occurs before some or all other components comprising the crystallization reaction system are introduced into the reaction vessel.

39. Another object of the present invention is to
Determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for initiating reactants in the crystallization reaction system;
Determining at least a portion of a spectral energy pattern for a reaction product in the crystallization reaction system;
An additional spectral energy pattern (eg, at least one electromagnetic frequency) is determined from the reactant and reaction product spectral energy patterns to determine the required adjusted participant (eg, spectrally tuned catalyst). Calculate;
Producing at least a portion of the required spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, at least one electromagnetic frequency of the required spectral conditioning catalyst);
Applying at least a portion of the required spectral energy conditioning catalyst (eg, spectral conditioning catalyst) to the adjustable participant (eg, irradiation with magnetic energy) to form the desired tuned participant; And a conditioned process comprising introducing conditioned participants into the crystallization reaction system to form a desired reaction product and / or a desired reaction product at a desired reaction rate. It is to provide a method for influencing and directing the crystallization reaction system by the participants.

40. Another object of the present invention is to
Targeting at least one tunable participant in the conditioning crystallization reaction system with at least one spectral conditioning pattern to cause formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one tuned participant; And applying or introducing at least one desired reaction product in the crystallization reaction system and / or a regulated participant in the crystallization reaction system to provide a desired or controlled reaction rate. To provide a method for influencing and directing a crystallization reaction system with coordinated participants.

41. Another object of the present invention is to
When the conditioned participant communicates with the crystallization reaction system, the formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one tuned participant is performed to yield the desired reaction product at the desired reaction rate. Catalyzing the crystallization reaction system with a tuned participant to yield at least one reaction product comprising applying at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern for a sufficient time and intensity to cause Is to provide a method for

42. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying or introducing at least one coordinated participant into the crystallization reaction system; and causing the formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one transient and / or intermediate and the desired reaction Crystallization reaction with conditioned participants and at least one spectral environmental reaction condition comprising the step of applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition to said crystallization reaction system to enable formation of a product To provide a way to influence and direct the system.

43. Another object of the present invention is to
Applying at least one frequency (eg, electromagnetic) heterodyne with at least one tunable participant frequency to cause formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one tuned participant A method for forming a tuned participant with a spectral energy conditioning pattern to yield at least one tuned participant.

44. Another object of the present invention is to
A sufficient number of frequencies (eg, magnetic) and / or fields (eg, electric field, magnetic field, and / or) to provide an applied spectral energy conditioning pattern that results in the formation of at least one coordinated participant. To provide a method for forming a tuned participant with at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern that results in applying at least one tuned participant.

45. Another object of the present invention is to
Conditioning at least one tunable participant prior to being introduced into the crystallization reaction system by at least one frequency and / or field to form a tuned participant, at least Providing a method for forming a tuned participant by a spectral energy conditioning catalyst that results in one tuned participant, whereby formation of said at least one tuned participant is said tuned When the involved participant is introduced into the crystallization reaction system, it results in the formation of at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate.

  46. If at least one reaction in the crystallization reaction system is initiated such that at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate and / or at least one reaction product is formed in the crystallization reaction system, Conditioning at least one spectral energy conditioning catalyst to form at least one tunable participant (eg, at least one spectral energy catalyst) present in the crystallization reaction system, It is another object to provide a method for catalyzing the entire reaction system with tailored participants leading to reaction products.

  47. Applying at least one conditioning targeting approach selected from the group of approaches consisting of direct resonance conditioning targeting, harmonic conditioning targeting and non-harmonic heterodyne conditioning targeting to at least one adjustable participant It is a further object of the present invention to provide a method for directing a crystallization reaction system along a desired reaction path comprising

  In this regard, these conditioning targeting approaches can form and / or stimulate and / or stabilize at least one transient and / or at least one intermediate to yield the desired reaction product at the desired reaction rate. Can lead to the formation of coordinated participants that can cause crystallization.

  48. At least one tunable comprising applying at least one conditioning frequency to the at least one tunable participant to cause formation and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of at least one tuned participant It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for conditioning a participant, wherein the at least one frequency is a direct resonance conditioning frequency, a harmonic resonance conditioning frequency, an anharmonic heterodyne conditioning resonance frequency, an electron Conditioning frequency, vibration conditioning frequency, rotational conditioning frequency, rotational-vibration conditioning frequency, microfission conditioning frequency, hyperfine fission conditioning frequency, electric field induced conditioning frequency Comprises a magnetic field-induced conditioned frequency, cyclotron resonance conditioning frequencies, at least one frequency selected from the group consisting of orbital conditioning frequency, and / or nuclear conditioning frequency.

  In this regard, the applied conditioning frequency resonates with at least one tunable participant and / or at least one component of said tunable participant, directly, in a harmonic or anharmonic heterodyne technique, Any desired conditioning frequency or combination of conditioning frequencies can be included.

  49. Spectral energy patterns of at least one participant and / or at least one other component in the crystallization reaction system to allow coordinated participants and energy transfer between participants and / or components At least one conditioning frequency and / or conditioning field to cause an adjusted spectro-energy pattern (eg, spectral conditioning pattern) of one adjusted participant in at least partial overlap with (eg, a spectral pattern) It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for directing a crystallization reaction system along a desired reaction path with coordinated participants.

  50. At least partial with the spectral energy pattern of at least one other participant and / or component in the crystallization reaction system to allow coordinated participants and energy transfer between the participant and / or component Applying at least one spectral energy conditioning pattern to the at least one conditioning participant to cause an overlap to the adjusted spectral energy pattern of the at least one adjusted participant in the crystallization reaction system. It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a coordinated participant that yields at least one reaction product.

51. At least one participant in the crystallization reaction system and / or a coordinated participant in the crystallization reaction system that results in a conversion (eg, chemical, physical, phase, property or other means) of at least one component; At least one frequency to cause an expansion of the adjusted spectral energy pattern (eg, the adjusted spectral pattern) of the adjusted participant to cause an energy transfer to and from at least one participant. It is another object of the present invention to provide a method for catalyzing a crystallization reaction system with a conditioned participant that results in at least one reaction product comprising applying and / or applying a field .
In this regard, the transformation may be a different chemical and / or physical than any chemical and / or physical or crystalline composition and / or phase of any starting reactants and / or tailored participants. Reaction products can be provided that are of the target or crystalline composition and / or phase. Thus, only transients can be included in the conversion of reactants to reaction products.

52. Another object of the present invention is to
Forming a crystallization reaction system comprising conditioned participants; and applying at least one spectral environmental reaction condition to direct the crystallization reaction system along a desired reaction path Providing a method for controlling and / or directing a reaction pathway by using at least one coordinated participant and at least one spectral environmental reaction condition.

  In this regard, the applied spectral environmental reaction conditions can be used alone or in combination with other environmental reaction conditions to achieve the desired result. Furthermore, additional spectral energy patterns can also be applied simultaneously and / or continuously with other spectral environmental reaction conditions.

53. Another object of the present invention is to
To obtain the desired reaction and / or the desired reaction path and / or the desired reaction rate, determine the required spectral pattern; and when exposed to an appropriate spectro-energy conditioning pattern, said required To date, there is a catalyst to be used in a crystallization reaction system comprising planning an adjustable participant (eg, a material or combination of materials) that exhibits an adjusted spectral pattern close to the spectral pattern. To provide a method for planning tunable participants (e.g., physical catalysts and / or spectral energy catalysts) to be used as catalysts when adjusted in a crystallization reaction system that has not.

  In this regard, the planned tunable participants comprise a physical mixture of one or more materials and / or a plurality of materials combined by a suitable reaction, eg a chemical reaction. The planned tunable participant material can be functionally enhanced by one or more spectral energy conditioning patterns that can also be applied to the conditioning crystallization reaction system. Further, the application of different spectral energy conditioning patterns can be adjusted to facilitate the first reaction pathway in the crystallization reaction system in different ways, for example by applying the first spectral energy conditioning pattern, and In promoting the second reaction path by adapting the two spectral energy conditioning patterns, the planned material behavior can be induced. Similarly, changing one or more environmental conditioning reaction conditions has a similar effect.

  Furthermore, this planned tunable participant or material can be used for all types of reactions (when tuned), such as chemical (organic or inorganic), biological, physical, etc. (But not limited to) reactions.

  54. It should be understood in each of the aforementioned 29-53 purposes of the present invention that the crystallization reaction system also desirably includes preventing the occurrence of certain reaction phenomena.

  55. Another object of the present invention is to use at least one coordinated participant with the individual techniques shown in the above objects 1-28; and at least one with the individual techniques shown in the above objects 29-54. Is to use two additional spectral energy patterns.

  In each of the 55 purposes of the invention referred to above, specific energy can be applied by at least one of the following techniques: (1) wavelength; (2) optical fiber array; (3) energy t At least one element added to, on and / or adjacent to, at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system that allows for radiation; and / or a transducer, etc.

  While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory or explanation of operation, it is likely that energy will transfer if the frequencies are matched. This energy transfer can be the sharing of energy between two entities and can be, for example, the energy transfer from one entity to another. The entities can be, for example, both substances, or one entity is a substance, and the other is energy (eg, energy spectral energy patterns, such as magnetic frequency and / or electric and / or magnetic fields). It is.

  In general, thermal energy is used to promote chemical reactions by applying heat and raising the temperature. Heating increases the mechanical (kinetic) energy of the chemical reactant. Reactants with greater mechanical energy move faster and farther and are more likely to participate in chemical reactions. Similarly, mechanical forces increase their mechanical energy, and consequently their reactivity, by stirring and moving chemicals. Adding mechanical force often increases the temperature by increasing mechanical energy.

  Acoustic energy is added to the chemical reaction as an ordered mechanical wave. Because of its mechanical properties, acoustic energy can increase the mechanical energy of chemical reactants and can also raise their temperature (s). Electromagnetic (EM) energy consists of electric and magnetic field waves. Electromagnetic energy can also increase the mechanical energy and heat of the crystal reaction system. It can energize electron orbital or vibrational motion in some reactions.

  Both acoustic and electromagnetic energy can consist of waves. The wave number within a certain time can be calculated. Waves are often drawn as in FIG. 1a. Usually, time is placed on the horizontal X axis. The vertical Y axis indicates the strength or intensity of the wave. This is also called amplitude. Weak waves are of weak intensity and have a low amplitude (see FIG. 2a). Strong waves have a high amplitude (see FIG. 2b).

Traditionally, the wave number per second is calculated to obtain the frequency.
Frequency = wave number / time = wave / second = Hz

  Another name for “waves per second” is “Hertz” (abbreviated “Hz”). The frequency is drawn on the wave diagram by showing different numbers of waves in a certain time (see FIG. 3a showing waves with frequencies of 2 Hz and 3 Hz). It is also drawn by placing the frequency itself rather than time on the X axis.

  Energy waves and frequencies have several interesting properties and can interact in several interesting ways. The manner in which wave energy interacts is largely frequency dependent. For example, if two energy waves, each of which has the same amplitude but one is 400 Hz and the other is 100 Hz, interact, the waves add their frequencies to produce a new frequency of 500 Hz (ie, a “sum” frequency) To do. The frequency of the wave is also subtracted to produce a frequency of 300 Hz (ie, a “difference” frequency). All wave energy is generally added and subtracted in this manner, and such additions and subtractions are called heterodyning. The usual results of hetero dining are mostly familiar as musical overtones.

  There is a mathematical and musical basis for overtones generated by heterodyning. For example, consider the continuous progression of heterodyned frequencies. As discussed above, starting at 400 Hz and 100 Hz, the sum frequency is 500 Hz and the difference frequency is 300 Hz. If these frequencies are further heterodyned (added and subtracted), then 800 (ie 500 + 300) and 200 (ie 500-300) new frequencies are obtained. 800 and 200 additional heterodinning results in 1,000 and 600 Hz as shown in FIG.

  Mathematical patterns begin to appear. Both the sum and difference columns contain a number of alternating series that doubles with each set of heterodynes. In the sum column, 400 Hz, 800 Hz, and 1,600 Hz alternate with 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, and 2000 Hz. The same kind of doubling phenomenon also occurs in the difference column.

  Frequency heterodyning is a natural process that occurs whenever wave energy interacts. Heterodining results in a mathematically derived pattern of increasing numbers. The number pattern is an integer multiple of the original frequency. These multiples are called overtones. For example, 800 Hz and 1600 Hz are overtones of 400 Hz. In musical expression, 800 Hz is one octave above 400 Hz, and 1600 Hz is two octaves higher. It is important to understand the mathematical heterodyne basis for harmonics that occur in all waveform energies and therefore in all nature.

  Frequency mathematics is extremely important. Frequency heterodyne increases mathematically in the visible pattern (see FIG. 5). Mathematics has names for these visible patterns in FIG. These patterns are called fractals. A fractal is defined as a mathematical function that produces a series of self-similar patterns or numbers. The fractal pattern has historically driven great interest because fractal patterns can be found everywhere in nature. Fractals can be found in a wide range of patterns from large coastal stretches to microorganisms. Fractals are found in biological insect behavior and fluid behavior. The visible pattern generated by the fractals is very clear and recognizable. A typical fractal pattern is shown in FIG.

  Heterodyne is a mathematical function that is controlled by mathematical equations just like fractals. Heterodyne also generates a number of self-similar patterns such as fractals. When graphed, heterodyne sequences produce visible shapes and forms that are as familiar as those that are characteristic of fractals. It is interesting to compare the heterodyne sequence in FIG. 5 with the fractal sequence in FIG.

  Heterodynes are fractals; conclusions are inevitable. Heterodynes and fractals are both mathematical functions that generate a series of self-similar patterns or numbers. Wave energy interacts in a heterodyne pattern. Therefore, all wave energy interacts as a fractal pattern. Once it is understood that the fundamental process of interaction energy is itself a fractal process, it becomes easier to understand why so many organisms and systems in nature also exhibit fractal patterns. Natural fractal processes and patterns are established at a fundamental or basic level.

  Therefore, since energy interacts with heterodyning, it is preferred that the material can also interact with the heterodyning process. All materials, whether large or small, have what is called the natural frequency. The natural vibration frequency ("NOF") of an object is the frequency at which the object chooses to vibrate once it enters motion. The NOF of an object is related to many factors including size, shape, scale, and composition. The smaller the object, the smaller the distance it will cover if it vibrates back and forth. The smaller the distance, the faster it can vibrate and the higher its NOF.

For example, consider a wire composed of metal atoms. The wire has a natural vibration frequency. Individual metal atoms also have a unique natural vibration frequency. Atomic NOFs and wire NOFs generate heterodynes by addition and subtraction, just in the way that energy generates heterodynes.
NOF _atom + NOF _wire = sum frequency _{atom + wire}
And NOF _atom- NOF _wire = difference frequency _{atom + wire}

When a wire is stimulated by a difference frequency _atom-wire , the difference frequency generates (in addition) a heterodyne by the NOF _wire to generate a NOF _atom (the natural vibration frequency of the atom), which absorbs energy, thereby Stimulated to higher energy levels. Silac and Zeller reported this phenomenon in 1995 and they used a laser to generate the difference frequency.
Difference frequency _atom-wire + NOF _wire = NOF _atom

  Substances generate heterodyne with substances in a manner similar to how wave energy generates heterodyne with other wave energies. This means that substances in their various states can also interact in the fractal process. This interaction of substances by fractal processes helps explain why so many organisms and systems in nature exhibit fractal processes and patterns. Matter and energy interact through the heterodyne mathematical equation to produce overtones and fractal patterns. That is why there are fractals everywhere around us.

Therefore, energy generates heterodyne by energy, and substance generates heterodyne by substance. But perhaps even more important is that the substance can generate heterodyne by energy (and vice versa). In the metal wire study above, the difference frequency _atom-wire in the experiment by Syrac and Zeller was provided by a laser using electromagnetic energy at a frequency equal to the difference frequency _atom-wire . The substance in the wire generated heterodyne by the electromagnetic energy frequency of the laser through its natural vibration frequency, and generated the frequency of individual atoms of the substance. This indicates that energy and matter interact with each other to generate heterodyne.

  In general, when energy encounters a material, one of three possibilities occurs. Energy bounces off the material (ie, is reflected energy), passes through the material (ie, is transmitted energy), interacts with and / or synthesizes (eg, is absorbed by the material) Or generate heterodyne). When energy generates heterodyne by a substance, new frequencies of energy and / or substance are generated by a mathematical process of sum and difference. If the frequency thus generated matches the NOF of the material, the energy is at least partially absorbed and the material is excited, for example, to a higher energy level (ie it has more energy). The critical factor that determines which of these three possibilities occurs is the energy frequency compared to the material frequency. If the frequencies do not match, the energy is reflected or passes as transmitted energy. Both energy and material frequencies are directly matched (eg, in close proximity to each other, as discussed in more detail later herein), or indirectly matched (eg, generating heterodynes). ) Energy can then interact with or be synthesized with the substance.

  Another term often used to describe frequency matching is resonance. In the present invention, the use of the term resonance generally means that the frequency of matter and / or energy is matched. For example, if the frequency of the energy and the frequency of the material are matched, the energy and the material are in resonance and the energy can be synthesized with the material. Resonance or frequency matching is just one aspect of heterodyning that allows coherent transfer and synthesis of energetic materials.

In the above example of wires and atoms, resonances with the atoms could have been created by stimulating the atoms with a laser frequency that accurately matches the NOF of the atoms. In this case, the atom will receive energy by its own resonant frequency and the energy will be transferred directly to the atom. Alternatively, as was done in actual wire / laser experiments, resonance could have been created by atoms by using heterodyning that naturally occurs between different frequencies. Thus, the resonant frequency of _atoms (NOF _atoms ) can be indirectly generated as an addition (or subtraction) heterodyne frequency between the resonant frequency of the _wire (NOF _wire ) and the applied frequency of the laser. Resonance is generated either directly or through indirect resonance through heterodyned frequency adaptation, thus allowing the synthesis of materials and energy. If the frequency is matched, energy transfer and amplitude can increase.

  Heterodinning creates indirect resonances. Heterodining also produces overtones (ie, frequencies that are integer multiples of the resonance (NOF) frequency). For example, the note “A” is about 440 Hz. When the frequency is doubled to about 880 Hz, the note “A” sounds one octave higher. This first octave is called the first overtone. Double the note or frequency again from 880 Hz to 1,760 Hz (ie, 4 times the frequency of the original note) yields another “A” that is two octaves above the original note. This is called the third overtone. Each time the frequency is doubled, another octave is achieved, where these are even integer multiples of the resonant frequency.

  Between the first and third overtones is the second overtone, which is three times the original note. Musically, this is not an octave like the first and third overtones. It is one octave above the original “A” and is exactly 5 degrees higher than the second “E”. Every odd integer multiple is a fifth degree rather than an octave. Since harmonics are simply a multiple of the fundamental natural frequency, the harmonics indirectly stimulate the NOF or resonant frequency. Thus, by playing a high “A” at 880 Hz on the piano, the string for the center “A” at 440 Hz should also begin to vibrate due to the phenomenon of overtones.

Substances and energy in a chemical reaction correspond to the harmonics of the resonant frequency in the way that a musical instrument does. Thus, the resonant frequency of an atom (NOF _atom ) can be stimulated indirectly using one or more of its harmonic frequencies. This is the reason why the harmonic frequency generates heterodyne due to the resonance frequency of the atom itself (NOF _atom ). For example, in the wire / atom example above, if the laser is tuned to 800 THz and the atom resonates at 400 THz, then the two frequency heterodyning is:
800 THz-400 THz = 400 THz
Bring.

  800 THz (first overtone of an atom) generates a heterodyne by the resonance frequency of the atom and generates the resonance frequency of the atom itself. Therefore, the first overtone indirectly resonates with the NOF of the atom, and stimulates the resonance frequency of the atom as the first generated heterodyne.

Of course, the two frequencies are also
800 THz + 400 THz = 1,200 THz
To generate heterodyne in the other direction.

  The 1,200 THz frequency is not the resonance frequency of the atom. Thus, some of the energy of the laser generates heterodyne to generate the resonant frequency of the atoms. Other parts of the laser energy generate heterodynes for different frequencies that do not themselves stimulate the resonant frequency of the atom. That is why the stimulation of an object with an overtone frequency of a specific intensity amplitude is generally less than the stimulation with its own resonant frequency (NOF) at the same specific intensity.

Although it appears that half of the harmonic energy is wasted, this is not necessarily the case. Again, exposing the atom to electromagnetic energy oscillating at 800 THz and referring to a typical atom oscillating at 400 THz results in the following subtraction and addition frequencies:
800 THz-400 THz = 400 THz
And 800 THz + 400 THz = 1,200 THz

The 1200 THz heterodyne, which is expected to waste about 50% of its energy, also generates heterodyne at other frequencies such as 800 THz. Therefore,
1,200 THz-800 THz = 400 THz

Also, 1,200 THz generates heterodyne by 400 THz:
1,200 THz-400 THz = 800 THz,
Thus, 800 THz is generated, and 800 THz generates heterodyne with 400 THz:
800 THz-400 THz = 400 THz,
Thus, the 400 THz frequency is generated again. If other heterodyne generations that seem to be wasted are taken into account, the amount of energy transmitted by the first overtone frequency is much greater than the 50% transmission of the previously estimated energy. Compared to direct resonance, less energy is transferred by this method, but this energy transfer is sufficient to produce the desired effect (see FIG. 14).

  As mentioned above, Ostwald's theory of catalyst and bond formation was based on chemical kinetics from the turn of the century. However, chemical reactions are substance interactions, substances interact with other substances through frequency resonance and heterodyning; and energy is just as easy as substances through similar methods of resonance and heterodyning It should now be understood that interactions can be made. With the advent of spectroscopy (discussed in more detail elsewhere herein), it is clear that a material produces, for example, electromagnetic energy at the same or substantially the same frequency that it vibrates. . Since energy and materials are transferred when their frequencies are matched, they can move around and recombine with other energy or materials as long as their frequencies are matched. In many respects, both fundamental and mathematical, both matter and energy, can be considered fundamentally corresponding to frequency. Thus, since the chemical reaction is a recombination of substances promoted by energy, the chemical reaction is effectively accelerated by just the frequency.

The analysis of general chemical reactions is preferably useful in understanding the usual methods disclosed herein. A typical reaction to examine is the production of water from hydrogen and oxygen gases catalyzed by platinum. Platinum has not been well understood for this reason, but has been known to be a good hydrogen catalyst for some time.

This reaction has been proposed to be a chain reaction in response to the formation and stabilization of hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates. The proposed reaction chain is:

  The formation of hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates appears to be critical to this reaction chain. Under normal circumstances, hydrogen and oxygen gas can be mixed together over an indefinite period of time and they do not produce water. Whenever a hydrogen molecule happens to break up, the hydrogen atom does not have the proper energy to combine with the oxygen molecule to produce water. Hydrogen atoms have only a very short lifetime because they simply recombine again to form hydrogen molecules. Indeed, how platinum catalyzes this reaction chain is a mystery over the prior art.

  The present invention generates an intermediate such that an important step to catalyze this reaction now has enough energy for the intermediate to react with other components, for example in a crystallization reaction system. It is taught to understand the condition that it is crucial to energize and / or stabilize (ie hold the intermediate for a longer time) as well as to do so. In the case of platinum, the intermediate reacts with the reactants to produce a product and further intermediate (ie, by generating a hydrogen intermediate, energizing and stabilizing it, it returns to the hydrogen molecule And sufficient energy to react with molecular oxygen reactants to produce water and hydroxy intermediates). In addition, by energizing and stabilizing the hydroxy intermediate, the hydroxy intermediate can react with more reactive hydrogen molecules, again water and more intermediate result from this chain reaction. Therefore, generating intermediates, energizing and / or stabilizing them affects this reaction pathway. In this regard, parallel properties may be desirable (eg, properties can be collimated by increasing the energy level of the intermediate). In particular, the desired intermediate can be energized and / or stabilized by applying at least one suitable electromagnetic frequency that resonates with the intermediate, thereby exciting the intermediate to a higher energy level. . Interestingly, that is what platinum does (for example, various platinum frequencies resonate with intermediates on the reaction path for water production). Furthermore, in a process that energizes and stabilizes the reaction intermediates, platinum facilitates the formation of more intermediates, thereby allowing the reaction chain to continue, thereby catalyzing the reaction.

  As a catalyst, platinum takes advantage of many ways in which frequencies interact with each other. In particular, the frequencies interact and resonate with each other by 1) directly adapting the frequency and 2) indirectly adapting the frequency through harmonics or heterodyne. In other words, platinum is both a frequency that directly adapts the natural vibration frequency of the intermediate, and a frequency that indirectly adapts those frequencies by, for example, heterodyning harmonics with the intermediate. Vibrate.

  Furthermore, in addition to the specific intermediates of the reactions discussed hereinabove, it should be understood that there are also various transition materials or transition states in this reaction as in all reactions. In some cases, the transition material or transition state can include only different bond angles between similar species, or in other cases, the transition material can exhibit an entirely different chemistry. It is possible to include. In any event, it should be understood that many transition states exist between any particular combination of reactants and reaction products.

  It should now be understood that physical catalysts produce effects by producing, energizing and / or stabilizing all types of transition materials and intermediates. In this regard, FIG. 8a shows a single reactant and a single product. Point “A” corresponds to the reactant and point “B” corresponds to the reaction product. Point “C” corresponds to the active complex. The transition material corresponds to all those points on the curve between the reactant “A” and the product “B” and can also include the active complex “C”.

  In more complex reactions involving the production of at least one intermediate, the reaction profile appears to be somewhat different. In this regard, reference can be made to FIG. 8b, which shows reactant “A”, product “B”, active complexes “C ′ and C ″”, and intermediate “D”. In this particular example, intermediate “D” is present as a minimum in the energy reaction profile of the reaction, while it is surrounded by active complexes C ′ and C ″. However, again in this particular reaction, the transition material in this particular example contains two active complexes “C ′” and “C ″” and intermediate D, reactant “A” and reaction product. Corresponds to everything between "B". In the specific example of hydrogen and oxygen combined to produce water, the reaction profile is closer to that shown in FIG. 8c. In this particular reaction profile, “D ′” and “D ″” could generally correspond to an intermediate between a hydrogen atom and a hydroxy molecule.

  Now, particularly with respect to the reaction that produces water, both intermediates are good examples of how platinum creates resonances in the intermediate by directly matching the frequency. Hydroxy intermediates vibrate strongly at frequencies of 975 THz and 1,060 THz. Platinum also vibrates at 975 THz and 1,060 THz. By directly matching the frequency of the hydroxy intermediate, platinum can resonate with the hydroxy intermediate, allowing them to energize, stabilize and / or stabilize long enough to participate in chemical reactions. Can cause. Similarly, platinum also directly adapts the frequency of the hydrogen intermediate. Platinum resonates with about 10 from about 24 hydrogen frequencies in its electronic spectrum (see FIG. 69). In particular, FIG. 69 shows the frequency of hydrogen listed in the horizontal direction of the table and the frequency of platinum listed in the vertical direction of the table. Thus, by directly resonating with the intermediates in the reactions described above, platinum facilitates intermediate formation, energy application, stimulation, and / or stabilization, thereby catalyzing the intended reaction.

  The interaction of platinum with hydrogen is also a good example of frequency matching through heterodyning. It is disclosed herein and clearly shown in FIG. 69 that many platinum frequencies resonate indirectly as harmonics with hydrogen atom intermediates (eg, overtone heterodyne). Specifically, the 56 frequencies of platinum (ie 33% of all its frequencies) are overtones of 19 hydrogen frequencies (ie 80% of its 24 frequencies). The platinum frequency 14 is the first overtone (2X) of the hydrogen frequency 7. The platinum frequency 12 is the third overtone (4X) of the hydrogen frequency 4. Thus, the presence of platinum causes a large amount of indirect overtone resonances in hydrogen atoms, and significant direct resonances.

It is even more informative to focus on individual hydrogen frequencies. FIGS. 9-10 show various graphs of how hydrogen looks when the same information used to create the energy level diagram is instead plotted as actual frequency and intensity. Specifically, the X axis shows the frequencies released and absorbed by hydrogen, while the Y axis shows the relative intensity for each frequency. Frequency is plotted in terahertz (THz, 10 ¹² Hz), rounded to the nearest THz. Intensities are plotted against a relative magnitude of 1-1000. The highest intensity frequency produced by hydrogen atoms is 2,466 THz. This is the peak of curve I towards the right end of FIG. 9a. This curve I is to be called the first curve. The curve I hangs in the right direction from 2,466 Hz at a relative intensity of 1,000 to 3,237 THz at a relative intensity of only about 15.

  The second curve in FIG. 9a, curve II, starts from 456 THz with a relative intensity of about 300 and hangs to the right. It ends at a frequency of 781 THz with a relative intensity of 5. Every curve in hydrogen has this same downward sag. In FIG. 9, progressing from right to left, transitioning from high frequency to low frequency, from high intensity to low intensity, the curves are numbered from I to V.

  The hydrogen frequency table shown in FIG. 10 appears to be much simpler than the energy level diagram. Therefore, it is easier to imagine how frequencies are organized in the various curves shown in FIG. In fact, there is one curve for each series described by Rydberg. Curve “I” contains the frequencies in the Lyman series that originate from what quantum mechanics is involved in the first energy level. The second curve from the right, curve “II” is the same as the second energy level, and so on.

The curves in the hydrogen frequency diagram of FIG. 9 consist of sums and differences (ie, they are heterodyned). For example, the smallest curve at the left end, labeled “V”, has two frequencies shown at 40 THz and 64 THz, with relative intensities 6 and 4, respectively (see also FIG. 10). The next curve, IV, starts at 74 THz, progresses to 114 THz, and ends at 138 THz. The calculation of sum heterodyne is:
40 + 74 = 114
64 + 74 = 138.

  The frequency in curve IV is the sum of the frequency of curve V plus the peak intensity frequency in curve IV.

Alternatively, subtracting the frequency of curve V from the frequency in curve IV yields the peak of curve IV:
114−40 = 74
138−64 = 74.

  This is not just a coincidental combination of sums or differences in curves IV and V. Any curve in hydrogen is the result of adding the highest intensity frequency of the next curve to each frequency in any curve.

  These hydrogen frequencies are found both in the atom itself and in the electromagnetic energy it radiates. The frequencies of the atoms and their energy are added and subtracted in the usual way. This is hetero dining. Thus, not only substances and energy alternately cause a heterodyne effect, but substances also generate heterodynes in their own energy within themselves.

Furthermore, the highest intensity frequency in each curve is the heterodyne heterodyne. For example, the peak frequency in curve I of FIG. 9 is 2,466 THz, which is the third overtone of 616 THz;
4x616 THz = 2,466 THz

  Thus, 2,466 THz is the third overtone of 616 THz (for heterodyned overtones, the result is an even multiple of the starting frequency, ie for the first overtone the 2X original frequency, the third overtone is 4X Recall that it is the original frequency, quadrupling the frequency is a natural result of the heterodyning process). Therefore, 2,466 THz is the fourth generated heterodyne, that is, the third overtone of 616 THz.

  The frequency corresponding to the peak of curve II in FIG. 9 and 456 THz is the third overtone of 114 THz in curve IV. The peak of curve III corresponding to a frequency of 160 THz is the third overtone of 40 THz in curve V. The peaks of the curves shown in FIG. 9 are not only heterodyne between the curves, but also the overtones of the individual frequencies that are themselves heterodyne. It can be seen that the entire hydrogen spectrum is a combination of heterodyning with balanced frequency and harmonics.

  Theoretically, this heterodyne process could last forever. For example, if 40 is the peak of a curve, it means that the peak is 4 times the lower number, which also means that the peak of the previous curve is 24 (64-40 = 24). It is thus possible to extrapolate backward and downward mathematically in order to induce lower and lower frequencies. The peaks in the series of curves to the left are 24.2382, 15.732, and 10.786 THz, all resulting from the heterodyne process. These frequencies are in complete agreement with the Rydberg formula for energy levels 6, 7 and 8, respectively. The prior art has not historically paid much attention to these lower frequencies and their heterodyning.

  The present invention teaches that heterodyned frequency curves amplify hydrogen vibrations and energy. The low intensity frequency for curve IV or V has a very high intensity until the time that it heterodynes to curve I. In many respects, hydrogen atoms are just one large energy amplification system. Moving from low frequency to high frequency (ie, from curve V to curve I in FIG. 9), the intensity increases dramatically. By stimulating hydrogen with 2,466 THz at an intensity of 1,000, the result is 2,466 THz at 1,000 intensity. However, if hydrogen is stimulated by 40 THz at an intensity of 1,000, by the time it is amplified until it enters curve I in FIG. 9, the result is 2,466 THz at an intensity of 167,000. It can be seen that this heterodyning has a direct relationship with platinum and how it interacts with hydrogen. It must all require hydrogen which is an energy amplification system. That is why the lower frequency curve is perceived as a higher energy level. By understanding this process, low intensity low frequencies suddenly become very large.

  Platinum has energy level 1 as one notable exception and has the highest intensity curve at the right end of the frequency diagram of FIG. 9 starting at 2,466 THz (ie curve I), most if not all. Resonates with the hydrogen frequency. Platinum does not appear to resonate significantly with the ground state transition of the hydrogen atom. However, it resonates with a higher energy level that is a multiple of the lower frequency.

  With this information, one ongoing mystery can be solved. Since the laser was developed, prior art chemists believed that there must be some way to catalyze the reaction using a laser. The standard method is to explicitly use a single highest intensity frequency of atoms (such as 2,466 THz for hydrogen) because it was clearly believed that the highest intensity frequency would yield the highest reactivity. Including using. This method was taken up considering only the energy level diagram. Thus, prior art lasers are generally directed to the ground state transition frequency. The use of this laser in the prior art has been minimally successful for catalyzing chemical reactions. It is now understood why this method was not successful. Platinum, an essential hydrogen catalyst, does not resonate with the ground state transition of hydrogen. It resonates with a higher energy level frequency, indeed many higher level frequencies. Without wishing to be bound by any particular theory or explanation, this is probably the reason why platinum is such a good hydrogen catalyst.

  Platinum resonates with multiple frequencies from the upper energy level (ie, lower frequency). There is a name given to the method of stimulating many upper energy levels, called the laser.

Einstein, at the turn of the century, essentially solved the statistical problem of lasers when an atom at the ground energy level (E ₁ ) is resonated to the excitation energy level (E ₂ ). The number of atoms in the ground state is referred to as “N ₁ ”, the number of excited atoms as “N ₂ ”, and the total number as “N _total ”. Because there are only two possible states that an atom can occupy:
“ _Total N” = N ₁ + N ₂ .

After all mathematics has been performed, the relationship that is developed is the following:

2 In-level system; simultaneously, atoms of greater than 50% at higher energy level E ₂ is never expected absence.

However, if the same set of atoms is energized with more than two energy levels (ie, a multilevel system), it is possible to obtain atoms that are excited beyond the first level greater than 50%. . By referring to the ground and excitation levels as E ₁ , E ₂ , and E ₃ , respectively, and the number of atoms as N _total , N ₁ , N ₂ , and N ₃ under certain circumstances, high energy The number of atoms at the level (N ₃ ) can be greater than the number at the lower energy level (N ₂ ). When this happens, it is called an “inversion distribution”. Inversion distribution means that more atoms are at higher energy levels than at lower energy levels.

  The inversion distribution in the laser is important. Inversion distribution causes amplification of light energy. For example, in a two-level system, if one photon enters, one photon comes out. In a system having 3 or more energy levels and an inversion distribution, if one photon enters, 5, 10 or 15 photons will be emitted (see FIG. 11). The amount of emitted photons depends on the number of levels and how each level is excited. All lasers are based on this simple idea of creating an inversion distribution in a group by creating a multilevel excitation system between atoms. A laser is a simple device for amplifying electromagnetic energy (ie, light). Laser is actually an abbreviation for Light Amplifying System for Emitting Radiation.

  Looking back on the interaction between platinum and hydrogen discussed herein, platinum activates 19 higher level frequencies in hydrogen (ie, 80% of the total hydrogen frequency). However, only three frequencies are required for the inversion distribution. Hydrogen is stimulated at 19. This is a clear multilevel system. In addition, consider that 70 platinum frequencies stimulate. On average, any hydrogen frequencies involved are stimulated by 3 or 4 (ie 70/19) different platinum frequencies; both direct and / or indirect resonant harmonic frequencies. Platinum provides sufficient stimulation per atom to produce a population inversion in hydrogen. Finally, whenever the stimulated hydrogen atom emits some electromagnetic energy, consider the fact that the energy is in return at a frequency that matches and stimulates platinum.

  Both platinum and hydrogen resonate with each other in their respective multilevel systems. Platinum and hydrogen together form an atomic scale laser (ie, an energy amplifier at the atomic level). In doing so, platinum and hydrogen amplify the energy required to stabilize both the hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates, thereby catalyzing the reaction pathway for producing water. Platinum is such a good hydrogen catalyst because it forms an oscillating system with hydrogen at the atomic level, thereby amplifying their respective energies.

  In addition, this reaction can only catalyze the crystallization reaction system and / or control the reaction path in the crystallization reaction system, so that only one transition material and / or intermediate is generated by the applied frequency (eg, spectral catalyst). And / or activated, and at least one transition material required to continue the intended reaction pathway (eg, either a complex reaction or a single reaction) and By generating and / or stimulating at least one intermediate, there is then a need for a frequency, or combination of frequencies, that results in such generation or stimulation of only one such required transition material and / or intermediate. Suggest that everything can be done. Accordingly, the present invention determines at least one required transition material and / or intermediate in some crystallization reaction systems, generates the at least one transition material and / or intermediate, All other transition substances and / or intermediates that are then required for the reaction to travel down the intended reaction path by applying at least one frequency that is activated and / or stabilized Admit that it can occur naturally. However, in some cases, the appropriate frequency or spectral energy pattern that directly stimulates all transition materials and / or intermediates that are required for the reaction to travel down the intended reaction pathway By applying, the reaction could be increased in rate. Thus, depending on the details of any crystallization reaction system, production and / or stimulation and / or stabilization of any required transition materials and / or intermediates for various reasons including equipment, environmental reaction conditions, etc. It may be desirable to provide or apply a frequency or spectral energy pattern that results in. Therefore, it is primarily desirable to determine which transition materials and / or intermediates are present in which reaction pathways in order to determine the appropriate frequency or spectral energy pattern. Similarly, conditioned participants could be formulated to achieve a similar role.

  In particular, once all known required transition materials and / or intermediates are determined, then experimentally determine which transition materials and / or intermediates are intrinsic to the reaction pathway or It can be determined empirically and then it can be determined which transition materials and / or intermediates can be naturally generated by stimulation and / or generation of different transition materials and / or intermediates. Once such a determination is made, the appropriate spectral energy (eg, electromagnetic frequency) can then be applied to the crystallization reaction system to obtain the desired reaction product and / or desired reaction path. it can.

It is known that platinum atoms interact with hydrogen atoms and / or hydroxy intermediates. And that is exactly what modern chemistry has taught over the last 100 years, based on Ostwald's theory of catalysis. However, the prior art teaches that the catalyst must participate in the reaction by binding to the reactant, in other words, the prior art teaches the substance: a substance binding interaction is required for the physical catalyst It is said. As mentioned above, these reactions take the following steps:
1. Diffusion of reactants into the catalytic site;
2. Binding of the reactant to the catalytic site;
3. Reaction of the catalyst-reactant complex;
4). 4. bond rupture at the catalytic site (product); and Product diffusion away from the catalytic site.

  However, according to the present invention, for example, energy: energy frequency can interact with energy: material frequency. Furthermore, the material emits energy, and the energy frequency is substantially the same as the material frequency. There, platinum vibrates at a frequency of 1,060 THz, which also radiates electromagnetic energy at 1,060 HHz. Thus, according to the present invention, the distinction between energy frequency and material frequency begins to appear less important.

Resonance, for example, allows them to contact additional materials that vibrate at substantially the same frequency as the frequency of platinum atoms (eg, platinum that stimulates the reaction between hydrogen and oxygen to produce water). Can be produced in the reaction intermediate. Alternatively, according to the present invention, resonances can also be created in the intermediate by introducing electromagnetic energy corresponding to one or more platinum energies that also vibrate at the same frequency, thus at least partially mimicking the mechanism of platinum catalysis. (An additional mechanism of platinum is resonance with H ₂ molecules, pathway reactants). Since energy is transferred when the frequency is matched, the substance or energy is not different as long as the frequency is concerned. Thus, no physical catalyst is required. Rather, application of at least a portion of the physical catalyst's spectral pattern may be sufficient (ie, at least a portion of the catalytic spectral pattern). However, in another preferred embodiment, substantially all spectral patterns can be applied.

Still further, by understanding the catalytic mechanism of action, a particular frequency is applied to, for example, one or more reactants in a crystallization reaction system, eg, the applied frequency is heterodyne with an existing frequency in the material itself. Can be generated to provide a frequency corresponding to one or more platinum catalysts or other related spectral frequencies. For example, both hydrogen atoms and hydrogen molecules have unique frequencies. By heterodyning the frequency, the difference frequency can be determined:
NOF _{H atom-} NOF _{H molecule} = difference _{H atom-molecule}

The difference _{H atom-molecule} frequency applied to the H ₂ molecule reactant heterodynes the molecule and energizes individual hydrogen atoms as intermediates. Similarly, any reaction participant can serve as a heterodyned backboard for stimulation of another participant. For example,
Difference _{H atom-oxygen molecule} + NOF _{oxygen molecule} = NOF _{H atom}
Or difference _OH-water + NOF _water = NOF _OH

  This method allows a greater degree of freedom for the selection of an appropriate device for applying the appropriate frequency. However, the key to this method is to understand the catalytic mechanism of action and the reaction pathway so that an appropriate choice for frequency application can be made.

  In particular, whenever reference is made to, for example, a spectral catalyst that replicates at least a portion of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst, this reference is to all the different frequencies produced by the physical catalyst, and includes electrons, vibrations, Examples include, but are not necessarily limited to, rotation and NOF frequency. Next, in order to catalyze, control and / or direct chemical reactions, all that is required is to replicate one or more frequencies from the physical catalyst, eg, with appropriate electromagnetic energy. . The actual physical presence of the catalyst is not necessarily required. A spectral catalyst can substantially completely replace a physical catalyst if desired.

  Spectral catalysts can also increase or promote the activity of physical catalysts. Energy exchange at a specific frequency between hydrogen, hydroxy, and platinum primarily promotes the conversion to water. These participating substances interact to create a miniature atomic scale oscillation system that amplifies their energy. The same is done by adding these same energies to the crystallization reaction system using a spectral catalyst. Spectral catalysts amplify the substance energy involved by resonating with them, and energy transfer and chemicals (substances) can absorb energy if the frequency is matched. Thus, the spectral catalyst can not only replace it, but also reinforce the physical catalyst. In doing so, spectral catalysts can increase the reaction rate, increase specificity, and / or allow the use of less physical catalysts.

FIG. 12 shows a basic bell-shaped curve made by comparing how much energy is absorbed by the target object with respect to the frequency of energy. This curve is called a resonance curve. As described elsewhere herein, for example, energy transfer between atoms or molecules reaches a maximum at the resonant frequency (f ₀ ). The further away the applied frequency is from the resonant frequency, f ₀ , the lower the energy transfer (eg, material to material, energy to material, etc.). At some point, energy transfer falls to a value that represents only about 50% of that at the resonant frequency f ₀ . A frequency that is higher than the resonant frequency and has only about 50% energy transfer is called “f ₂ ”. The frequency at which about 50% energy transfer occurs below the resonance frequency is denoted as “f ₁ ”.

従って、式から示されるように、ベル型共振曲線が高くて狭い場合、その結果（ｆ₂−ｆ₁）は極めて小さい数となり、Ｑ、共振特性は高くなる（図１３ａを参照すること）。高い「Ｑ」を有する材料の例は、高品質水晶共振器である。共振曲線が低く広い場合、その結果ｆ₂およびｆ₁間の広がりまたは差は比較的大きくなる。低い「Ｑ」を有する材料の例は、マシュマロである。この大きな値により共振周波数を割ることは、極めて低いＱ値を生じる（図１３ｂを参照すること）。 The resonance characteristics of various objects can be compared using information from a simple representative resonance curve shown in FIG. One such useful characteristic is called the “resonance characteristic” or “Q” factor. To determine the resonance characteristics of an object, the following equation is used:

Therefore, as shown in the equation, when the bell-shaped resonance curve is high and narrow, the result (f ₂ −f ₁ ) is an extremely small number, and the Q and resonance characteristics are high (see FIG. 13a). An example of a material with a high “Q” is a high quality quartz resonator. If the resonance curve is low and wide, the result is a relatively large spread or difference between f ₂ and f ₁ . An example of a material with a low “Q” is marshmallow. Dividing the resonant frequency by this large value results in a very low Q value (see FIG. 13b).

  For example, atoms and molecules have resonance curves that exhibit properties similar to larger target objects such as quartz and marshmallows. If the goal is to stimulate atoms in the reaction (eg, hydrogen in the reaction to produce water as described above), the exact resonant frequency generated by the crystallization reaction components or environmental reaction conditions (eg, Hydrogen) can be used. However, it is not always necessary to use an accurate frequency. For example, the use of one or more crystallization reaction system components or frequencies in the vicinity of the resonance frequency of environmental reaction conditions is appropriate. Less energy is transferred, but there is still an effect, so it cannot be said to be exactly the same as using an exact resonant frequency. The closer the applied frequency is to the resonant frequency, the greater the effect. The further away the applied frequency is from the resonant frequency, the smaller the effect that exists (ie, the less energy transfer occurs).

  Overtones provide a similar situation. As mentioned above, overtones are created by frequency heterodyning (ie, addition and subtraction) that allows the transfer of a significant amount of energy. Thus, for example, a desirable result is that the applied frequency (eg, at least a portion of the spectral catalyst) has one or more resonance frequencies (s) of one or more crystallization reaction system components or environmental reaction conditions (ie, overtones) If it is a compatible heterodyne), it can be achieved in a chemical reaction.

  In addition, an applied frequency close to the harmonic frequency, as well as an applied frequency close to the resonant frequency, can also produce desirable results. The amplitude of energy transfer is not very related to the harmonic frequency, but it still affects it. For example, if the overtone yields 70% of the amplitude of the fundamental resonance frequency, and by using a frequency that is just close to the overtone, eg, about 90% on the resonance curve of the overtone, the overall effect is The total energy transfer is 90% of 70% compared to the resonance frequency, that is, about 63%. Thus, according to the present invention, if at least some of the frequency or environmental reaction conditions of one or more total reaction system components are at least partially compatible, then at least some energy is transferred and at least some Occurs (ie, energy is transferred when the frequency is matched).

Replication of the catalytic mechanism of action As described above, spectral catalysts can be applied to catalyze, control and / or direct chemical reactions. Whether the spectral catalyst can correspond to at least a portion of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst, or can the spectral catalyst correspond to the frequency at which the required participant is generated or stimulated ( For example, heterodyne frequencies), or spectral catalysts can substantially replicate environmental reaction conditions such as temperature or pressure. Thus, as taught by the present invention, the actual physical presence of the catalyst is not required to achieve the desired chemical reaction, phase change, or structural control. The disuse of a physical catalyst is a fundamental mechanism inherent to catalysis, that is, the desired energy is, for example, (1) at least one participating substance in the crystallization reaction system (eg, reactant, transition material, intermediate) , Active complexes, reaction products, promoters and / or toxicants) and / or at least one component, and (2) electromagnetic energy applied when such energy is present at one or more specific frequencies (eg, spectral catalysts) Is achieved by understanding that they can exchange (i.e., communicate) between. In other words, the target mechanism that nature has incorporated into the catalytic process can be replicated in accordance with the teachings of the present invention. Further, it can be mimicked from nature, as the catalytic process reveals several opportunities for replicating the catalytic mechanism of action, thus improving the use of spectral catalysts and countless chemical reactions and transformation control.

  For example, the reaction of hydrogen and oxygen to produce water using platinum as the catalyst described above is a good starting point for understanding the catalytic mechanism of action. For example, the present invention discloses that platinum catalyzes the reaction in several ways not conceivable by the prior art:

  Platinum directly resonates with and energizes reaction intermediates and / or transition materials (eg, atomic hydrogen and hydroxy groups);

  Platinum resonates resonantly with and energizes at least one reaction intermediate and / or transition material (eg, atomic hydrogen);

  Platinum energizes a number of upper energy levels of at least one reaction intermediate and / or transition material (eg, atomic hydrogen).

  This knowledge designs spectral catalysts and spectral energy catalysts that differ from the actual catalyst spectral pattern, and designs physical catalysts (or conditioned participants that can be conditioned to function as physical catalysts) and crystals It can be used to improve the function of spectral catalysts and / or spectral energy catalysts for optimizing environmental reaction conditions in a total chemical reaction system. For example, the electronic frequency of potassium is in the visible region of the electromagnetic spectrum. The electronic spectrum of virtually all atoms is in the ultraviolet, visible and infrared regions. However, these extremely high electromagnetic frequencies can be problematic for large scale and industrial applications because wave energy with high frequencies generally cannot penetrate materials well (ie, do not penetrate deep into the material). . The tendency of wave energy to be absorbed rather than transmitted can be referred to as attenuation. High frequency wave energy has a high attenuation, so that it does not penetrate deeply into typical industrial scale reactors that contain common reactants for chemical reactions. Thus, the replication and application of at least a portion of the platinum spectral pattern into a commercial scale reactor allows the majority of the spectral spectrum applied spectral pattern to be rapidly absorbed near the end of the reactor. In general, it is a slow process.

  Thus, lower frequency energy that would penetrate deep into the reactants present in the reactor could be used to input energy into a large industrial scale commercial reactor. The present invention teaches that this can be accomplished in a unique way by replicating nature. As discussed herein, atomic and molecular spectra are broadly classified into three different sets: electrons, vibrations, and rotations. The electronic spectrum of atoms and small molecules is said to arise from a transition from one energy level of an electron to another, and generally occurs in the ultraviolet (UV), visible, and infrared (IR) regions of the EM spectrum. Has the highest frequency supported. The vibrational spectrum is said to arise primarily from this movement of individual interatomic bonds within the molecule and generally occurs in the infrared and microwave regions. The rotational spectrum occurs mainly in the microwave and radio wave regions, mainly due to molecular rotation.

これらの２つの反応では、同じ反応物質が、反応温度によって、きわめて異なる生成物、すなわち、７４％塩分度又は１００％塩分度、を生ずる。
一般に反応が進行する方向及び強度及び速さに影響する多くの因子が当業者には公知である。温度はそれらの因子の一つにすぎない。その他の因子としては、圧力、体積、物理的触媒の表面積、溶媒、支持物質、汚染物質、触媒サイズと形と組成、反応容器サイズ、形及び組成、電界、磁界、音響場、及びコンディショニングされる関与物質が結晶化反応系で関与又は活性化される前にコンディショニング・エネルギーがコンディショニングされる関与物質に導入されたかどうか、などがあげられる。本発明は、一つのことがこれらの因子全部に共通していると教示する。これらの因子は、例えば、関与物質及び／又は結晶化反応系成分のスペクトル・パタン（すなわち、周波数パタン）を変えることができる。スペクトルの変化のいくつかは非常に良く研究されており、それを考慮し応用するための多くの情報が利用できる。しかし、従来の技術は、これらの因子の各々のスペクトル化学的な基礎及びそれらが触媒の作用メカニズム、及び化学反応一般、とどのように関係しているか、を考えていない。あるいはまた、前記の因子の効果は、別のスペクトル、スペクトル・エネルギー、及び／又は物理的触媒周波数の印加によってさらに増強したり、弱めたりすることができる。さらに、これらの環境反応条件は、１つ以上の対応するスペクトル環境反応条件（例えば、１つ以上の環境反応条件の少なくとも一部を重複させるスペクトル・エネルギー・パタン）の印加によって結晶化反応系で少なくとも部分的にはシミュレートできる。あるいはまた、周波数のマッチングという目標に合致する限り、あるスペクトル環境反応条件（例えば、温度に対応するスペクトル・エネルギー・パタン）を別のスペクトル環境反応条件（例えば、圧力に対応するスペクトル・エネルギー・パタン）に代えることもできる。
温度
極めて低い温度で、原子または分子のスペクトル・パターンは、きれいで明瞭なピークを有する（図１５ａを参照すること）。温度が上がるにつれて、ピークは広がり始め、スペクトル・パターンのベル型曲線を造りだす（図１５ｂを参照すること）。さらに高温では、ベル型曲線はなおさらに広がって、基本周波数のどちらの側にも一層多くの周波数が含まれる（図１５ｃを参照すること）。この現象は「広がり」と呼ばれる。 Microwave or radio frequency radiation penetrates well into large reaction vessels and is an acceptable frequency to use to spectrally control chemical reactions or transformations. Unfortunately, since potassium atoms do not have a vibration or rotation spectrum, they do not produce frequencies in the microwave or radio wave portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. However, by understanding the mechanism of action of potassium's electronic frequency in phase conversion, the selected potassium frequency can be used as a model for spectral catalysis in the microwave portion of the spectrum. Specifically, as previously explained by the platinum analogy, one of the mechanisms of action of potassium that produces only KCl solid crystals in a KCl halide mixed crystallization reaction system is to activate the potassium atom to resonate the potassium atom. It causes adsorption and solid growth. Potassium as an atom has a high frequency electron spectrum and no vibration or rotation spectrum. On the other hand, NaCl and KCl crystals are molecules and have not only an electronic spectrum but also vibration and rotation spectra. Accordingly, NaCl and KCl molecules absorb frequencies and heterodyne in the microwave portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Thus, the potassium atom can be specifically targeted by resonance to copy the mechanism of action of potassium in the reaction to form solid KCl, ie, to resonate with at least one reaction participant. However, instead of resonating with potassium atoms in the electronic spectrum of potassium atoms as in KCl seed crystals, at least one NaCl frequency in the microwave portion of the electromagnetic spectrum can be used to resonate with NaCl nuclei. NaCl molecules resonate at a microwave frequency of approximately 13.0737 GHz. Activation of mixed crystallized Na, K, and Cl with a spectral catalyst of about 13.0737 GHz catalyzes the formation of KCl. In this example, the mechanism of action of the physical catalytic potassium was partially copied and reversed to move this mechanism to a different region of the electromagnetic spectrum. In other words, by manipulating the NaCl vibration frequency, small NaCl molecules are prevented from being activated and bound to KCl solids. Thus, by understanding the resonance mechanism involved in phase transformation, it can be copied to the desired region of the electromagnetic spectrum.
According to the present invention, by copying the mechanism of action again, the physical catalyst (eg, seed crystal) frequency can be adapted or selected to be convenient and / or efficient for the available equipment. Specifically, harmonic frequencies can be used. Potassium has a resonance frequency that is a harmonic of the spectral frequency of sodium. Thus, a K-spectral light source can resonate with sodium (in a sodium crystallization system) at harmonics and vice versa, facilitating phase conversion. Similarly, a material's harmonic overtones can be used to change and control the properties of the material. In summary, an electromagnetic spectrum that can copy, overlap, or imitate the action mechanism of a physical catalyst, while matching the associated energy frequency to a device that can be used to apply the entire reaction system and electromagnetic energy. It can be moved to the part.
The third method described above for platinum catalyzing this reaction is to activate multiple upper energy levels of at least one reaction component. Again, assume that the only available spectral energy source generates frequencies in the infrared region where there are many of the upper energy level electron frequencies. For example, for potassium, these infrared frequencies can be used, for example, to produce resonant adsorption and solid growth of potassium atoms in potassium covalent crystals. Specifically, the present invention has discovered that the mechanism of action used by physical catalysts is to resonate with multiple upward energy levels of at least one reaction participant. We now know that the upper energy level can be used to influence and control the transformation of matter. Again, spectral catalysis can mimic nature by duplicating the mechanism of action seen naturally by tailoring the target specifically to multiple energy levels to achieve energy transfer in a new way.
The foregoing discussion on overlapping catalyst mechanisms of action is only the beginning of an understanding of the many variables associated with the use of spectral catalysts. It must be considered that these new variables can be very useful tools to enhance the performance of spectral energy and / or physical catalysts. There are many factors and variables that affect catalyst performance and chemical reactions in general. For example, the same catalyst (or conditioned participant) is mixed with the same reactant, but different products are produced when exposed to different environmental reaction conditions, such as temperature or pressure. Consider the following example:

In these two reactions, the same reactant produces a very different product, ie 74% salinity or 100% salinity, depending on the reaction temperature.
Many factors are known to those skilled in the art that generally affect the direction and intensity and speed with which the reaction proceeds. Temperature is just one of those factors. Other factors include pressure, volume, physical catalyst surface area, solvent, support material, contaminants, catalyst size and shape and composition, reaction vessel size, shape and composition, electric field, magnetic field, acoustic field, and conditioning Whether or not conditioning energy has been introduced into the conditioned participant before it is involved or activated in the crystallization reaction system. The present invention teaches that one thing is common to all these factors. These factors can change, for example, the spectral patterns (ie, frequency patterns) of the participating substances and / or components of the crystallization reaction system. Some of the changes in the spectrum are very well studied, and a lot of information is available to take them into account and apply them. However, the prior art does not consider the spectral chemical basis of each of these factors and how they relate to the mechanism of action of the catalyst and chemical reactions in general. Alternatively, the effects of the factors can be further enhanced or weakened by the application of another spectrum, spectral energy, and / or physical catalyst frequency. Furthermore, these environmental reaction conditions can be achieved in a crystallization reaction system by application of one or more corresponding spectral environmental reaction conditions (eg, spectral energy patterns that overlap at least a portion of the one or more environmental reaction conditions). Can be simulated at least in part. Alternatively, as long as the goal of frequency matching is met, one spectral environmental reaction condition (eg, spectral energy pattern corresponding to temperature) is changed to another spectral environmental reaction condition (eg, spectral energy pattern corresponding to pressure). ).
At very low temperatures, the atomic or molecular spectral pattern has a clean and distinct peak (see FIG. 15a). As the temperature increases, the peaks begin to broaden, creating a bell-shaped curve of the spectral pattern (see FIG. 15b). At higher temperatures, the bell-shaped curve is still wider and contains more frequencies on either side of the fundamental frequency (see FIG. 15c). This phenomenon is called “spreading”.

These spectral curves are very similar to the resonance curves discussed in the previous section. The spectrographer uses resonance curve terminology to describe the spectral frequency curve for atoms and molecules (see FIG. 16). The frequency at the top of the curve, f _0, is called the resonance frequency. There is a frequency (f ₂ ) above the resonant frequency and another (f ₁ ) (ie in frequency) below it, where the energy or intensity (ie amplitude) is 50 of that relative to the resonant frequency f ₀ . %. The quantity f ₂ −f ₁ is a measure of how wide or narrow the spectral frequency curve is. This amount (f ₂ −f ₁ ) is the “line width”. A spectrum with a narrow curve has a small line width, while a spectrum with a wide curve has a large line width.

  Temperature affects the line width of the spectral curve. Line width can affect catalyst performance, chemical reaction and / or reaction pathway. At low temperatures, the spectral curve of the chemical species is separate and clear, and has a lower potential for resonant energy transfer between all potential reaction system components (see FIG. 17a). However, as the line width of potential reactive species increases, their spectral curves can begin to overlap with the spectral curves of other species (see FIG. 17b). Energy is transferred when the frequencies match or when specific energy patterns overlap. Thus, when the temperature is low, the frequency does not match and the response is slow. At higher temperatures, resonant transfer of energy can occur and reactions can proceed very fast or along a different reaction path than they would otherwise have had at lower temperatures. .

Besides affecting the line width of the spectral curve, the temperature can also change, for example, the resonant frequency of all reaction system components. For some chemical species, the resonant frequency shifts as the temperature changes. This can be seen in the infrared absorption spectrum of FIG. 18a and the blackbody radiation graph shown in FIG. 18b. Furthermore, atoms and molecules do not all displace their resonant frequency by the same amount or in the same direction if they are at the same temperature. This can also affect catalyst performance. For example, if the catalyst resonance frequency shifts more than the resonance frequency of its target species due to temperature rise, then the catalyst can eventually adapt the frequency of the species, and what is the resonance before? Can also be created in places that did not exist (see FIG. 18c). Specifically, FIG. 18c shows catalyst “C” at low temperature and “C ^* ” at high temperature. Catalyst “C ^* ” resonates with reactant “A” at high temperatures, but not at low temperatures.

  The amplitude or intensity of the spectral line can also be affected by temperature. For example, linearly symmetric rotating molecules have an increase in strength as the temperature decreases, while other molecules increase in strength as the temperature increases. These changes in spectral intensity can also affect catalyst performance. Consider an example where the low intensity spectral curve of a catalyst resonates with one or more frequencies of a particular chemical target. Only a small amount of energy can be transferred from the catalyst to the target chemical (eg, hydroxy intermediate). As the temperature increases, the amplitude of the catalyst curve also increases. In this embodiment, the catalyst can transfer a greater amount of energy to the chemical target as the temperature increases.

  If the chemical target is an intermediate species for an alternative reaction pathway, the type and ratio of the final product can be affected. By reviewing the cyclohexene / palladium reaction described above, the product is benzene and hydrogen gas at temperatures below 300 ° C. However, if the temperature exceeds 300 ° C., the product is benzene and cyclohexane. The temperature is determined in such a way that the alternative reaction path leading to the formation of cyclohexane is above 300 ° C., with palladium and / or other components (eg reactants, intermediates and / or products) in the entire reaction system. Including). This could be the result of, for example, an increased line width, a modified resonant frequency, or a change in spectral curve intensity for any component in the overall reaction system.

It is important to consider not only the spectral catalyst frequencies that may be desired to be used to catalyze the reaction, but also the reaction conditions under which those frequencies are assumed to function. For example, in a palladium / cyclohexene reaction at low temperatures, palladium can be frequency matched with an intermediate for molecular hydrogen (H ₂ ) production. At temperatures above 300 ° C., reactants and transition materials can be unaffected, but palladium can have increased linewidth, altered resonant frequency, and / or increased intensity. Changes in line width, resonant frequency and / or intensity can cause palladium to adapt the frequency and instead transfer energy to intermediates in the production of cyclohexane. If a spectral catalyst is to be used to help produce cyclohexane at room temperature, the frequency for the cyclohexane intermediate, if used, will be more effective than the spectral catalyst frequency used at room temperature.

  Thus, it can be important to understand the overall reaction dynamics in designing and selecting an appropriate spectral catalyst. Energy transfer between different crystallization reaction system components varies with temperature. Once understood, this consciously conditions the temperature to optimize reaction, reaction product, interaction and / or reaction product production at the desired reaction rate without prior art trial and error means. It is possible to do. In addition, it makes it possible to select a catalyst such as a physical catalyst, a spectral catalyst and / or a spectral energy pattern to optimize the desired reaction path. Understanding this spectral effect of temperature allows customary high temperature (and sometimes high and dangerous) chemical processes to be performed at a safer room temperature. It also makes it possible to design physical catalysts that function over a wider temperature range (eg, cryogenic temperatures or furnace temperatures) as desired.

Pressure and temperature are directly related to each other. In detail, from the law of ideal gas, we
PV = nRT
Where P is the pressure, V is the volume, n is the number of moles of gas, R is the gas constant, and T is the absolute temperature. Thus, at equilibrium, an increase in temperature results in a corresponding increase in pressure. Pressure also affects the spectral pattern. In particular, an increase in pressure can cause spectral curve broadening and changes, just as an increase in temperature (see FIG. 19 showing the pressure broadening effect on the NH ₃ 3.3 absorption line). ).

  The mathematical treatment of pressure spread is generally incorporated into either collision or statistical theory. In collision theory, it is almost always assumed that atoms or molecules are separated from other atoms or molecules so that their energy fields do not interact. However, in some cases, atoms or molecules approach each other so that they collide. In this case, the atoms or molecules can cause a change in the wave (spectrum) function or can change to a different energy level. Collision theory treats a material's emission energy as occurring only when an atom or molecule is far away from the other and is not involved in a collision. Because collision theory ignores the spectral frequency during a collision, collision theory cannot predict the exact chemical behavior at pressures above a few atmospheres when collisions occur frequently.

However, statistical theory takes into account the spectral frequencies before, during and after the collision. They are based on calculating the probability that various atoms and / or molecules interact with or are perturbed by other atoms or molecules. A drawback with statistical processing of pressure effects is that statistical processing does not do a good job of explaining the effects of molecular motion. In any case, neither collisions nor statistical theory can adequately predict the rich interactions between frequency and heterodyne that occur as pressure increases. Due to experimental work, increased pressure
1) broadening of the spectral curve producing an increased linewidth; and 2) shifting the resonant frequency (f ₀ ),
Has been demonstrated to have an effect similar to that produced by increased temperatures.

Pressure effects that differ from those caused by temperature are: (1) Pressure changes generally do not affect intensity as temperature changes (represents a theoretical set of curves showing invariant intensity for three different applied pressures) (See FIG. 20); and (2) The curve resulting from pressure spreading is often not as symmetric as the temperature-effect curve. Consider the shape of the three theoretical curves shown in FIG. As the pressure increases, the curve becomes less symmetric. The tail extending into higher frequencies is expanding. This upper frequency extension is confirmed by the experimental values shown in FIG. In particular, FIG. 21a shows the absorption pattern due to water vapor in air ( ₁₀ g H ₂ O per cubic meter) and FIG. 21b shows the absorption in NH ₃ at 1 atmosphere.

The effect of pressure broadening on the spectral curve is broadly incorporated into two types: resonance or “Holtzmark” broadening and “Lorentz” broadening. Holzmark broadening is secondary to collisions between atoms of the same element, and therefore collisions are considered symmetric. Lorentz broadening results from collisions between different atoms or molecules. The collision is asymmetric and the resonant frequency, f _0, is often displaced to a lower frequency. This displacement at the resonant frequency is shown in FIG. Changes in spectral curves and frequencies with changes in pressure can affect both physical and spectral catalysts, and chemical reactions and / or reaction pathways. At low pressure, the spectral curve tends to be fairly narrow and clear and almost symmetric with respect to the resonant frequency. However, as the pressure increases, the curve widens and displaces, allowing the high frequency tail to expand.

  Spectral frequencies in low-pressure crystallization reaction systems must be so different for various atoms and molecules that there is little or no resonance effect and consequently little or no energy transfer. Is possible. However, at higher pressures, the combination of spreading into higher frequencies, displacement and expansion creates overlap between spectral curves that results in the creation of resonances that did not exist before, and consequently energy transfer be able to. The crystallization reaction system can follow one reaction path or another according to changes in the spectral curve produced by various pressure changes. One reaction path can resonate and proceed at moderate pressure, while another reaction path can resonate and dominate at higher pressures. As with temperature, it is important to consider the crystallization reaction system frequency and the mechanism of action of the various catalysts under the environmental reaction conditions that one wishes to replicate. In particular, there must be at least some frequency overlap in order for effective transfer of energy to occur, for example, between at least one reactant in the spectral catalyst and the crystallization reaction system.

  For example, the reaction of a physical catalyst seed crystal at 400 THz with the main covalent adatom at 500 THz will proceed slowly at atmospheric pressure. When the pressure is increased to about 5 atmospheres, the catalyst expands and reaches, for example, 500 THz of adsorbed atoms. This enables energy transfer between the catalyst and the adsorbed atoms, for example, by activating and stimulating the adsorbed atoms. The crystallization reaction then proceeds very quickly. While not wishing to be bound by any particular theory or explanation, the rate of reaction is not much related to the number of collisions (as taught by the prior art), and much more of a crystallization reaction system. It seems to be related to the spectral pattern of the components. In the above example, the reaction could be activated at low pressure by applying a frequency of 500 THz to stimulate and adsorb the main adsorbed atoms directly. This could also be caused indirectly using a variety of heterodynes (eg, @ 1,000 THz harmonic, or 100 THz non-harmonic heterodyne between the catalyst and the transient (500 THz-400 THz = 100 THz).

  As shown herein, energy transfer between different crystallization reaction system components varies with pressure. Once understood, this allows the pressure to be deliberately conditioned to optimize the reaction without prior art trial and error methods. Furthermore, it allows to select physical catalysts, seed crystals, epitaxial substrates, catalysts such as spectral catalysts, and / or spectral energy patterns to optimize one or more desired reaction paths. This understanding of the spectral effects of pressure allows conventional high pressure (and therefore generally high risk) chemical processes to be performed at safer room pressures. It also makes it possible to design physical catalysts that function over a large range of acceptable pressures (eg from low pressure equal to vacuum to several atmospheres).

Surface area Traditionally, the surface area of a catalyst has been considered important because the available surface area controls the number of available binding sites. Perhaps the more exposed binding sites, the more catalysis. In light of the spectral mechanisms disclosed in the present invention, the surface area can be important for another reason.

Many of the spectral catalyst frequencies corresponding to physical catalysts are in the visible and ultraviolet regions of the spectrum. These high frequencies are relatively weak in penetrating forces, for example penetrating forces into large reaction vessels containing one or more reactants. Therefore, high-frequency spectral emissions from catalysts such as seed crystals are absorbed before they travel too far in the crystallization reaction system. Thus, for example, an atom or molecule must be fairly close to a physical catalyst for the respective electronic frequencies to interact.
It is primarily the surface area that influences the probability that a particular chemical species is close enough to a physical catalyst, interacts with its electromagnetic spectral emission, and in the case of crystallization, to be adsorbed as an adsorbed atom on that catalyst. When the surface area is small, few atoms or molecules are close enough to interact. However, as the surface area increases, the probability that more atoms or molecules are in range to react also increases. Thus, in addition to increasing the number of available binding sites, a larger surface area will likely also increase the volume of the crystallization reaction system that is exposed to the spectral catalyst frequency or pattern. This is similar to the concept of ensuring sufficient penetration of the spectral catalyst into the crystallization reaction system (eg, assuming that there is sufficient chance that the species will interact with each other).

Understanding the effect of surface area on catalyst and crystallization reaction system components to optimize the production of crystallization reactions, reaction pathways and / or reaction product (s) at desired reaction rates without the disadvantages of the prior art It is possible to consciously condition the surface area and other crystallization reaction system components. For example, the surface area is currently optimized by minimizing traditional chemical catalyst particles as much as possible, thereby maximizing the overall surface area. Small particles, for example, have a tendency to sinter (fuse or bond together) reducing overall surface area and catalytic activity. The regeneration of the large surface area catalyst can be an expensive and time consuming process. This step can be avoided with the understanding of the invention presented herein in the field of spectral chemistry. For example, assume that the reaction is rapidly catalyzed by a 3 m ² catalyst bed (in energy transfer from the catalyst to key reactants and products). After sintering occurs, the surface area is reduced to 1 m ² , however. Thus, energy transfer from the catalyst is dramatically reduced and the reaction is slowed down. An expensive and time consuming process of reclaiming the surface area can be avoided (or at least delayed) by inhibiting the crystallization reaction system (eg, sintering) with one or more desired spectral energy patterns. In addition, since the spectral energy pattern can affect the final physical form or phase of the material and its chemical formula, the sintering process itself can be reduced or eliminated.

In connection with catalyst size and shape evidence, the size and shape of the catalyst is classically thought to affect physical catalyst activity. Crystallization controlled by critical nucleus size has historically been used to navigate the diversion pathway. As with surface area, certain particle sizes (eg, critical nuclei) provide a stable structure and thus maximize conversion and amount. The relationship between size and surface area has been discussed previously.
In view of the general understanding of the spectral mechanisms underlying the activity and conversion of physical catalysts in general, catalyst size and shape can be important for other reasons. One of those reasons is a phenomenon called “self-absorption”. When a single atom or molecule produces its classical spectral pattern, it radiates electromagnetic energy that travels out of the atom or molecule to the adjacent space. FIG. 22a shows the emission from a single atom, while FIG. 22b shows the emission from a group of atoms. Increasingly, when an atom or group of molecules come together, radiation from the center of the group will be absorbed by its neighbors and will never leave it in space. Depending on the size and shape of the group of atoms, self-absorption can cause numerous changes in the spectral emission pattern (see FIG. 23). In particular, FIG. 23a shows a normal spectral curve produced by a single atom; FIG. 23b shows a resonant frequency shift for self-absorption; FIG. 23c shows a self-reversed spectrum produced by self-absorption in a group of atoms. A pattern is shown, and FIG. 23d shows a self-reversing spectral pattern produced by self-absorption in a group of atoms. These changes include movement at the resonant frequency and self-reversal patterns.
Changes in spectral curves and frequencies with changes in catalyst (eg, seed) size and shape can affect catalyst, chemical conversion and / or reaction pathways. For example, physical catalyst atoms or molecules can produce spectral frequencies in a crystallization reaction system that resonates with important intermediates and / or reaction products. For larger groups of atoms, such as in crystal formation, the combination of resonant frequency transfer and self-reversal eliminates overlap between the chemical species' spectral curves, thereby minimizing the state of resonance, eg, crystallization rate delay. Limit or vanish.
A crystallization reaction system may proceed through one reaction path or another reaction path to the end by a change in the spectral curve caused by the particle size. For example, a catalyst having a moderate particle size (or conditioning agent) can go through the first reaction path to the end, while a larger size catalyst can direct that reaction path to another reaction path.
Spectral curves and frequency changes with changes in catalyst size and shape are relevant to the actual application.
The use of the spectral catalyst of the present invention allows for better tuning of these processes. For example, the high level of catalytic activity obtained with smaller catalyst sizes can also be obtained by enhancing the physical catalyst with, for example, at least a portion of one or more spectral catalysts.
For example, assume an average 10 μm particle size catalyst (eg, seed crystal) has 50% of the activity of an average 5 μm particle size catalyst. One approach to maintaining the desired rate of crystallization is to use a 10 μm physical catalyst to enhance the physical catalyst with at least a portion of at least one spectral catalyst. The catalytic activity can be effectively doubled (or increased even more) by the spectral catalyst to produce about the same degree of activity (or possibly greater activity) as the 5 μm catalyst. Thus, the present invention allows the size of the catalyst to be changed while maintaining favorable conditions so that the reaction can be carried out economically compared to traditional prior art approaches.
Another way to address the problem is to eliminate the physical catalyst completely. For example, in another embodiment of the invention, an optical fiber sieve (eg, having very large holes) can be used in a flow-through reaction vessel. According to the present invention, the spectral catalysts are released through the fiber optic sieve and thus catalyze the reactive species as they flow. This improvement over prior art approaches has significant processing implications including low cost, high speed and safety improvements, to name just a few.
The material is also manufactured in a range of shapes and sizes. Shapes include spheres, irregular granules, pellets, extrudates and rings. Some shapes are more expensive to manufacture than others, but some shapes have better properties (eg, material activity, strength, etc.) than others. Sphericals are inexpensive to manufacture, but spherical packed beds cause high pressure losses, and spheres are typically not very strong. On the other hand, traditional physical catalyst rings have excellent strength and activity, resulting in very little pressure drop, but they are also relatively expensive to produce.
Spectral energy catalysts allow greater flexibility, for example in shape selection in traditional chemical catalysts. For example, instead of using an expensive spherical packed bed with inevitable high pressure losses to cause mechanical damage to the catalyst particles, the catalyst annulus can be used while obtaining the same or greater catalytic activity. Using the spectral crystallization techniques described herein, particularly those related to directional growth, the shape of the product can be more easily controlled.
The use of spectral energy catalysts and / or spectral environmental reaction conditions to control the shape of materials has the following advantages:
-Enabling the use of low-cost shaped material granules;
-Allows the use of less particulate overall;
-Allowing the use of stronger shaped granules; and-allowing the use of granules having more desirable performance characteristics.
Their use to replace existing physical catalysts has similar advantages:
Completely eliminates the use and expense of catalyst particles (eg seed crystals);
-Allows the use of faster spectral catalyst delivery systems; and-Delivery systems can be designed to incorporate superior material characteristics.
The catalyst size and shape is also important for the spectral emission pattern because all objects have NOF due to their size and shape. The smaller the size of the object, the higher its NOF (since speed = length × frequency). Furthermore, two objects of the same size but different shapes have different NOFs (for example, a resonant NOF of a sphere with a diameter of 1.0 m is different from a cubic NOF with a side of 1.0 m). Wave energy (both sound and EM) has a unique resonant frequency for a particular object. Objects, such as physical catalyst particles or reactant powder granules in a slurry, act like antennas to absorb and release energy at their structural resonance frequency. With this in mind, the size and shape of the crystallization reaction system components (eg, physical catalyst, reactants, etc.) can be further manipulated and controlled to achieve the desired effect. For example, a transient for the desired reaction path can produce a spectral rotation frequency of 30 GHz. The reaction can be directed using a 1 cm diameter catalyst sphere (3 × 10 ⁸ m / s 1 × 10 ⁻² m = 30 × 10 ⁹ Hz) with a structural EM resonance frequency of 30 GHz. The catalyst particles resonate structurally with the rotational frequency of the transient, providing energy to the transient and controlling the reaction. Similarly, the structural resonant catalyst particles can be further energized by a spectral energy catalyst such as 30 GHz microwave radiation. Understood in this way, the spectral dynamics of chemical conversion can be controlled more precisely than in the case of prior art trial and error approaches.
Solvent In general, the term solvent applies to mixtures in which the solvent is a liquid, but the solvent also includes solids, liquids, gases or plasmas and / or mixtures and / or components thereof. Should be understood. The prior art generally classifies liquid solvents into three broad sets: aqueous, organic, and non-aqueous. When an aqueous solvent is used, it means that the solvent is water. Organic solvents include hydrocarbons such as alcohols and ethers. Non-aqueous solvents include inorganic non-aqueous materials. Many chemical transformations occur in solvents.

Since the solvents themselves consist of atoms, molecules and / or ions, they can have a distinct effect on chemical transformations. Solvents consist of substances, which emit their own spectral frequency. The present invention teaches that these solvent frequencies undergo the same basic processes as previously discussed, including heterodyning, resonance, and harmonics. Spectrographers have known over the years that solvents can dramatically affect the spectral frequencies produced by their solutes. Similarly, chemists have known over the years that solvents can affect catalyst activity and properties. However, spectrographers and chemists in the prior art have not clearly been associated with these long-studied changes in solute frequency with changes in catalytic activity and physical properties. The present invention recognizes that these changes in solute spectral frequency can generally affect catalyst activity and chemical reactions and / or reaction pathways. A change in curve strength, a gradual or sudden shift of the resonance frequency f ₀ , and even a sudden shift of the resonance frequency can occur.

  Furthermore, the present invention allows one or more spectral frequencies in a solvent to be targeted by a spectral energy pattern or a spectral energy conditioning pattern to alter one or more properties of the solvent, so that all We recognize that it is possible to change the reaction and energy dynamics in the reaction system. Similarly, a spectral energy pattern or spectral energy conditioning pattern can be applied to a solute, causing a change in one or more properties of the solute, solvent, or solute / solvent system, resulting in a reaction in the entire reaction system. And it is possible to change the energy dynamics.

  When reviewing FIG. 24a, the solid line represents a portion of the spectral pattern of phthalic acid in alcohol, while the dotted line represents phthalic acid in the solvent hexane. Consider the reaction that occurs in an alcohol that resonates with phthalic acid at a frequency of 1,250 with a large solid curve in the middle of the spectral catalyst. If the solvent is changed to hexane, phthalic acid no longer resonates at a frequency of 1,250, and the spectral catalyst can stimulate it and not energize it. Solvent changes render the spectral catalyst ineffective.

  Similarly, with respect to FIG. 24b, iodine, when dissolved in carbon tetrachloride, produces a high intensity curve at 580 as shown in curve B. In alcohol, iodine, instead, produces a moderate intensity curve at 1,050 and a low intensity curve at 850 in nucleated halide crystallization, as shown by curve A. Thus, the reaction is assumed to use a spectral catalyst that resonates directly with iodine in carbon tetrachloride at 580. If the spectral catalyst does not change and the solvent changes to alcohol, the spectral catalyst will no longer function because the frequency is no longer adapted and no energy is transferred. Specifically, the spectral catalyst frequency 580 no longer matches or resonates with the new iodine frequencies 850 and 1,050.

  There is also the possibility that changing the solvent will make the catalyst resonant with different chemical species and help the reaction to go through the alternative reaction path to the end.

  Finally, consider the graph in FIG. 24c showing various solvent mixtures ranging from 100% benzene at the left end to 50:50 mixture of middle benzene and alcohol to 100% alcohol at the right end. The solute is phenylazophenol. Phenylazophenol has a frequency of 855 to 860 for most solvent mixtures. The frequency is 855 for a benzene: alcohol 50:50 mixture, or the frequency is still 855 for a benzene: alcohol 98: 2 mixture. However, in the benzene: alcohol 99.5: 0.5 mixture, the frequency suddenly changes to about 865. A catalyst that is active in 100% benzene by resonating with phenylazophenol at 865 loses its activity if there is only a small amount of alcohol (eg 0.5%) in the solvent.

  With this understanding, the principles of spectral chemistry presented herein can be applied to general catalysis and reactions and / or reaction pathways. Instead of using prior art trial and error methods for the selection of solvents and / or other total reaction system components, the solvents can be conditioned and / or modified to optimize spectral environmental reaction conditions. For example, the reaction can be intended to have important reaction participants (eg, reaction vessels) that resonate at 400 THz, but the catalyst (eg, seed crystal) resonates at 800 THz to transfer energy harmoniously. A more efficient system can be designed to suddenly move to 600 THz, using different solvents that can produce both participant and catalyst resonance frequencies. There, the catalyst directly resonates with the participant, transmits more energy, and catalyzes the crystallization reaction system more efficiently.

  Furthermore, the properties of solvents, solutes, and solvent / solute systems can be affected by spectral energy donors. Water is a universal solvent. It is generally known and understood that when water is heated, its kinetic energy increases and, as a result, the rate at which the solute dissolves also increases. After solutes are added to a solvent such as water, physical properties such as pH and conductivity change at a rate that is related to their kinetic energy and the temperature of the solute / solvent system.

  The novel aspects of the present invention allow the properties of solvents, solutes, and solvent / solute systems to be influenced and controlled by spectral energy-providing substances outside the area of simple thermal or kinetic mechanisms. Is to understand that. For example, water at about 28 ° C. dissolves salt (sodium chloride) at a specific rate. Water at about 28 ° C. conditioned by its own vibration overtone dissolves the salt faster, even if there is no obvious difference in temperature. Similarly, when salt is added to water, there is a predictable rate of change of solution pH and conductivity. If water is conditioned by its own overtone, or spectrally activated, either before or after each addition of salt, the rate of change in pH and conductivity is quite different even in temperature. If not, it will be enhanced. These effects are shown in more detail in the Examples section herein.

  Furthermore, if the salt is conditioned by some of its own electronic frequency before adding it to water, the rate of change of conductivity is again enhanced, even if there is no difference in temperature again. These effects are shown in more detail in the Examples section herein.

  In general, the delivery of spectral energy patterns and / or spectral energy conditioning patterns to solvents, solutes and solvent / solute systems alters the energy dynamics of solvents and / or solutes and hence their properties in holocrystallization reaction systems. obtain. Using these spectral techniques disclosed herein, a number of aspects of material transformations, such as chemical reactions, phase changes, and material properties, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. Can be controlled.

Support Material Traditional physical catalysts can be either unsupported or supported. An unsupported catalyst is a pure catalyst formulation and is substantially free of other molecules. Unsupported catalysts are rarely used industrially because these catalysts generally have low surface areas and consequently low activity. The low surface area can result, for example, from agglomerating small molecule catalysts into larger particles in a process that reduces sintering or surface tension of the particles. An example of an unsupported catalyst is a platinum alloy gauze that is sometimes used for the selective oxidation of ammonia to nitric oxide. Another example is a small silver granule that is sometimes used to catalyze the reaction of methanol with air to formaldehyde. Where unsupported catalysts can be used, their advantages include simple manufacture and relatively simple installation in various industrial processes.

  A supported catalyst is a blend of catalysts having other particles, and the other particles function as a supporting skeleton for the catalyst. Traditionally, support particles appear to be inert, thus providing a simple physical scaffold for catalyst molecules. Thus, one of the traditional functions of the support material is to provide catalyst shape and mechanical strength. The support material is also said to reduce the sintering rate. When the catalyst support is finely divided like the catalyst, the support functions as a “spacer” between the catalyst particles, thereby preventing sintering. An alternative theory believes that the interaction occurs between the catalyst and the support, thereby preventing sintering. This theory is supported by many observations that catalytic activity is altered by changes in support material structure and composition.

  Supported catalysts are generally made by one or more of the following three methods: impregnation, sedimentation, and / or crystallization. The impregnation technique uses a preformed support material that is then exposed to a solution containing the catalyst or its precursor. The catalyst or precursor diffuses into the pores of the support. Heating, or another conversion process, drives off the solvent and converts the catalyst or precursor to the final catalyst. The most common support materials for impregnation are refractory oxides such as alumina and aluminum hydroxide. These support materials have found their greatest use for catalysts that must be operated under extreme conditions such as steam reforming because they have reasonable mechanical strength.

  The sedimentation technique uses a concentrated solution of a catalyst salt (eg, a normal metal salt). The salt solution is rapidly mixed and then left to settle in a finely divided form. The sediment is then prepared using a variety of processes including washing, filtration, drying, heating, and pelletizing. In many cases, a graphite-type lubricant is added. Precipitated catalysts have high catalyst activity next to high surface area, but they are generally not as strong as impregnated catalysts.

Traditional crystallization techniques produce a support material called zeolite. The structure of these crystallization catalyst zeolites is based on SiO ₄ and AlO ₄ (see FIG. 25a showing silicon tetrahedral units and FIG. 25b showing aluminum tetrahedral units). These units are connected in various combinations to form a group of structures including rings, chains, and complex polyhedra. For example, SiO ₄ and AlO ₄ tetrahedral units can form cut octahedrons that form constructs for A, X, and Y zeolites (lines represent oxygen atoms and corners are Al or Si atoms). Fig. 26a showing a cut octahedron structure, Fig. 26b showing a zeolite having a bonded cut octahedron in which tetragonal faces are joined by oxygen bridges, and zeolite having a joined cut octahedron in which hexagonal faces are joined by oxygen bridges (See FIG. 26c showing X and Y).

The crystal structure of zeolites gives them a distinct pore size and structure. This is different from the various pore sizes found in impregnated or settled support materials. Zeolite crystals are made by mixing silicate and aluminate and catalyst solutions. Crystallization is generally induced by heating (see the spectral effect of temperature in the heading “Temperature”). The structure of the resulting zeolites depends on the silicon / aluminum ratio, their concentration, the presence of added catalyst, the temperature, and even the size of the reactor used, all of which are environmental reaction conditions. Zeolites generally have greater specificity than other catalyst support materials (eg, they not only accelerate the reaction). They can also direct the reaction to a specific reaction pathway.
Spectral crystallization methods can be used to influence and control the production of desired materials, such as zeolites. The methods taught herein use, for example, more convenient environmental factors (eg, lower temperatures for zeolites), more precise control of activity inhibitors or cocatalysts, and the desired material properties. It can be used to crystallize materials in larger numbers, faster and more economically.

  The support material can affect the activity of the catalyst. Traditionally, the prior art has attributed these effects to form factors. However, with the present invention, there is a spectral factor to be considered above. It has been well documented that solvents affect the spectral patterns produced by their solutes. The solvent can be a liquid, solid, gas and / or plasma. The support material can often be seen as just a solid solvent for the catalyst. As such, support materials can influence the spectral pattern produced by their solute catalyst.

The catalyst can be placed in a support material that is a solid phase solvent so that just dissolved sugar can be placed in the solid phase solvent (ice). These support material solid solvents can have a spectral effect on the catalyst similar to that liquid solvents have. The support materials, for example, cause the spectral frequency of their catalytic solutes by causing broadening of the spectral curves, changes in curve strength, gradual or abrupt shifting of the resonant frequency f ₀ , and still abrupt rearrangement of the resonant frequency. Can be changed.

  Furthermore, the use of spectral techniques that affect material transformation is not limited to solvent / solute or support / catalyst systems, but rather all material systems and phases of substances, and their respective properties (e.g. chemical , Physical, electrical, magnetic, thermal, etc.).

  The use of target spectrum technology in many material systems (solids, liquids, and gases) to control chemical reactions, phase changes and material properties (eg, chemical, physical, electrical, thermal, etc.) Further details will be described later in this specification in the Examples section.

Support materials can simply be viewed as solid solvents for their catalytic solutes. The present invention teaches that spectral techniques can be used to control many aspects of mass transformation in solvent / solute systems, such as chemical reactions, phase changes, and material properties. Similarly, spectral techniques can be used to control many aspects such as support / catalyst system chemistry, phase change, and material properties. These spectral techniques can be used to influence the synthesis of the support / catalyst system or to influence the subsequent properties of the support / catalyst system in the overall reaction system.
In addition, in material conversion, the support is often used as a base for the growth of the desired species (eg, an epitaxy support). The methods taught herein can be used to control and direct the interaction between a substance and a support. For example, if the spectral frequency of a crystallization reaction participant is generated from an amorphous surface (which traditionally does not support the formation of the desired crystal seed), the crystal can form that surface and adhere to it. . Thus, it should be understood that the method applied to the support material also applies to all types of supports.

  Accordingly, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, due to the disclosure herein, changes in support material can have a dramatic effect on catalyst activity. The support material affects the spectral frequency produced by the catalyst. Changes in the catalyst spectral frequency accelerate the reaction rate and produce various effects on chemical reactions and catalyst activity, including directing reactions on specific reaction pathways. Thus, the support material can potentially affect the frequency match, resulting in the transfer of energy between the crystallization reaction system components and / or the spectral energy pattern, resulting in certain types of The possibility of allowing the reaction to take place can be supported.

Poisoning of poisoned catalysts occurs when the catalytic activity is reduced by adding a small amount of another component such as a chemical species. Prior art has attributed poisoning to chemical species containing excess electrons (eg, electron donor materials) and to the adsorption of poisons onto physical catalyst surfaces where the poisons physically shield the reaction sites. . However, none of these theories account for poisoning satisfactorily.

  Consider the case of a nickel hydrogenation catalyst. These physical catalysts are substantially deactivated when only 0.1% by weight of sulfur compounds are adsorbed on them. It is difficult to believe that 0.1% by weight of sulfur will be able to contribute so many electrons to deactivate the nickel catalyst. Similarly, it is difficult to believe that the presence of 0.1 wt% sulfur occupies so many reaction sites that it completely deactivates the catalyst. Therefore, neither prior art explanation is satisfactory.

The poisoning phenomenon can be understood more logically in terms of spectral chemistry. Referring to the example in the solvent term using benzene solvent and phenylazophenol as solute, in pure benzene, phenylazophenol had a spectral frequency of 865 Hz. The addition of only a few drops of alcohol (0.5%) suddenly changed the frequency of phenylazophenol to 855. If the expected value at which phenylazophenol resonates is 865, the alcohol would have poisoned that particular reaction as a result. Addition of small amounts of other chemical species can change the resonant frequency (f ₀ ) of the catalyst and reactive chemicals. The addition of another species can function as a poison that removes the catalyst and reactive species from resonance (ie, the presence of the added species eliminates any substantial overlap of frequencies, and thus any energy Can prevent significant transmission).

  In addition to changing the resonant frequency of the chemical species, adding a small amount of other chemicals can also cause the spectral intensity of the catalyst and, for example, to increase or decrease the spectral intensity. Other atoms and molecules in the chemical reaction system can be affected. Consider cadmium and zinc mixed in an alumina-silica sediment (see FIG. 27 showing the effect of copper and bismuth on the zinc / cadmium line ratio). The normal ratio between the cadmium 3252.5 spectral line and the zinc 3345.0 spectral line was determined. The addition of sodium, potassium, lead, and magnesium had little or no effect on the Cd / Zn strength ratio. However, the addition of copper decreased the relative strength of the zinc wire and increased the cadmium strength. Conversely, the addition of bismuth increased the relative strength of the zinc wire while decreasing cadmium.

  Also consider the effect of a small amount of magnesium on the copper-aluminum mixture (see FIG. 28 showing the effect of magnesium on the copper aluminum strength ratio). Magnesium present at 0.6% caused a significant decrease in line strength relative to copper and aluminum. At 1.4% magnesium, the spectral intensity for both copper and aluminum was reduced to about 1/3. If copper frequency is important to catalyze the reaction, adding this small amount of magnesium will dramatically reduce the catalytic activity. Therefore, it can be concluded that the copper catalyst was poisoned by magnesium.

  In summary, the poisoning effect on the catalyst is due to spectral changes. Adding a small amount of another species to the physical catalyst and / or crystallization reaction system can change the resonant frequency or spectral intensity of one or more species (eg, reactants). The catalyst could remain the same while the key intermediates change. Similarly, the catalyst could vary, while the intermediate remains the same. They could both vary, or they could both remain the same and could be the added poison species. This understanding targets the species that cause the overlap in frequency or, in this example, prevents any substantial overlap in frequency and, as a result, prevents reactions from occurring by preventing energy transfer. It is important to achieve the goals of the present invention, including targeting one or more chemical species.

Just as the addition of a small amount of another chemical species to the cocatalyst catalyst and the crystallization reaction system, the opposite can occur. If the added species enhances the activity of the catalyst, it is called a cocatalyst. For example, the addition of 2-3% calcium oxide and potassium to iron-aluminum compounds facilitates the activity of iron catalysts for ammonia synthesis. The cocatalyst works by all the mechanisms discussed above in the section titled Solvent, Support Material and Activity Inhibition. Not surprisingly, some of the support materials are actually cocatalysts. Cocatalysts enhance the catalyst and specific reactions and / or reaction pathways by changing spectral frequencies and intensities. Catalytic activity inhibitors obtain reactive species from resonance (ie, frequencies do not overlap), while cocatalysts resonate them (ie, frequencies overlap). Similarly, instead of reducing the spectral intensity at the critical frequency, the cocatalyst can increase the critical intensity.

Thus, when it is desirable for phenylazophenol to react at 855 in a benzene solvent, an alcohol is added and the alcohol is referred to as a cocatalyst. If it is desired that phenylazophenol react at 865, an alcohol is added and the alcohol can be considered an activity inhibitor. Understood in this way, the difference between the activity inhibitor and the cocatalyst is a matter of view and depends on which reaction pathway and / or reaction product is desired. They both work by the same basic spectral chemistry mechanism of the present invention.
Similarly, in crystallization and mass transfer systems, the addition of small amounts of other species can alter the reaction kinetics. For example, the NaCl structure can be modified from a cube to a pyramid or octahedron with the addition of a small amount of boron. Similarly, spectral irradiation (and hence activation) of NaCl solutions with boron containing support (borosilicate glass) causes typical boron modification of the NaCl structure, so that boron is not physically present in the solution. Even in cases, it can be pyramidal or octahedral. Spectral boron pattern leaves, which can replace the action of boron crystallizer in the actual solution.
Understood in this way, all materials of activity inhibitors, cocatalysts and crystallization agents affect the crystallization reaction pathway by a spectral mechanism that can be doubled, approximated or initiated.

Concentration The concentration of chemical species is known to affect reaction rate and kinetics. The concentration also affects the catalytic activity. The prior art explains these effects by the prospect that various chemical species will collide with each other. At high concentrations of a particular species, there are a large number of individual atoms or molecules present. The more atoms or molecules present, the more likely they will collide with something else. However, this statistical processing according to the prior art does not explain the whole situation. FIG. 29 shows various concentrations of N-methylurethane in the carbon tetrachloride solution. At low concentrations, the spectral lines have a relatively low intensity. However, as the concentration increases, the intensity of the spectral curve increases. At 0.01 molar concentration, the spectral curve at 3,460 cm ^-1 is the only significant frequency. However, at 0.15 molar, the curves at 3,370 and 3,300 cm ^-1 are also prominent.

As the concentration of a chemical species is changed, the spectral characteristics of that species in the reaction mixture also change. Let us assume that 3,300 and 3,370 cm ^-1 are important frequencies for the desired reaction path. At low concentrations, the desired reaction pathway is not found. However, when the concentration is increased (and therefore the intensity of the associated frequency is increased), the reaction proceeds in the desired path. Concentrations are also related to solvents, support structures, activity inhibitors and cocatalysts as described above.
Similarly, as discussed above, the intensity of spectral emission in a holocrystallization reaction system affects seed attraction and phase transformation. The effect of increasing the concentration can be mimicked spectrally. For example, crystallization occurs in an unsaturated solution where crystallization does not normally occur. Furthermore, the structure and morphology can be easily controlled by spectrally controlling the material transformation in the absence of the inherently disordered processes that normally occur in saturated solutions.

The fields of science generally related to the measurement of energy and material frequencies known as fine structure frequency spectroscopy have already been discussed herein. In particular, three broad classes of atomic and molecular spectra have been reviewed. The electronic spectrum that is due to electronic transitions has frequencies in the ultraviolet (UV), visible and infrared (IR) regions, and occurs in atoms and molecules. For example, the vibrational spectrum, which is due to bond motion between individual atoms in a molecule, is primarily in the IR and occurs in the molecule. The rotational spectrum is mainly due to the rotation of the molecule in space, has a microwave or radio frequency, and also occurs in the molecule.

  The previous discussion of various spectral and spectroscopic methods has been oversimplified. In practice, there are at least three additional spectral sets, including the spectra described hereinabove: the fine structure spectrum, the hyperfine structure spectrum and the ultrafine structure spectrum. These spectra occur in atoms and molecules and extend, for example, from the ultraviolet region down to the low radio wave region. Because prior art chemists are typically more concentrated on traditional types of spectroscopic analysis, namely electronic, vibrational and rotational spectroscopic analysis, these spectra are incorporated into prior art chemistry and spectroscopic textbooks. , Typically often described as an epic.

  Fine and hyperfine spectra are very common in the fields of physics and radio astronomy. For example, cosmologists map the location of the hydrogen interstellar cloud, for example by detecting signals from the interstellar space at a microwave frequency of 1,420 GHz, one of the hyperfine division frequencies for hydrogen Collect data about. Most large databases of molecular and atomic microwave and radio frequencies have been developed by astronomers and physicists rather than chemists. This apparent gap between the use by chemists and the use by physicists of fine and hyperfine spectra in chemistry is apparently the prior art chemists, if any, in these potentially useful spectra. It seems that he did not pay much attention.

  Referring again to FIGS. 9a and 9b, the Balmer series (ie frequency curve II) starts at a frequency of 456 THz (see FIG. 30a). This more rigorous examination of individual frequencies is actually very close together as a group containing curves at 456 THz, instead of having exactly one distinct narrow curve at 456 THz. It shows that there are two different curves. Seven different curves are the fine structure frequencies. FIG. 30b shows the emission spectrum for the 456 THz curve in hydrogen. The high resolution laser saturation spectrum shown in FIG. 31 shows further details. These seven different curves located in close proximity in one step are commonly referred to as multiple lines.

There are seven different fine structure frequencies shown, but these seven frequencies fall into roughly two main frequencies. These are the two tall, relatively high intensity curves shown in FIG. 30b. These two high intensity curves are also shown in FIG. 31 at 0 cm ⁻¹ (456.676 THz) and at a relative wavenumber of 0.34 cm ⁻¹ (456.686 THz). What appears to be a single frequency (456 THz) is actually composed primarily of two slightly different frequencies (456.676 and 456.686 THz), and the two frequencies are typically doublet and It is said that the frequency is divided. The difference or split between the two main frequencies in the hydrogen 456 THz doublet is 0.010 THz (100 THz) or 0.34 cm ⁻¹ wavenumber. This difference frequency of 10 GHz is called the fine division frequency for the 456 THz frequency of hydrogen.

Thus, the individual frequencies typically shown in the normal electronic spectrum consist of two or more different frequencies that are very closely spaced together. The difference between the two microstructures frequency divided by a very small amount may include a finely divided frequency (f _0, see FIG. 32 shows the f ₁ and f ₂ is shown as the bottom f ₀ .f ₁ And the difference between f ₂ is known as the fine division frequency). This “difference” between two microstructure frequencies is important because such a difference between any two frequencies is heterodyne.

  Almost all hydrogen frequencies shown in FIGS. 9a and 9b are doublets or multiplets. This means that almost all hydrogen electron spectral frequencies are fine structure frequencies and fine splitting frequencies (this is possible because these heterodynes can be used as spectral catalysts if desired, Means that). The present invention discloses that these “differs” or heterodynes can be very useful for certain reactions. However, before considering the use of these heterodynes, more must be understood in the present invention for these heterodynes. Some of the fine resolution frequencies (ie heterodynes) for hydrogen are listed in Table 3. These finely divided heterodynes range from the microwave down to the upper section of the radio frequency region.

There are more than 23 fine splitting frequencies (ie heterodyne) for the very first series or curve I in hydrogen. A list of finely divided heterodynes can be found, for example, in the classic 1949 reference “Atomic Energy Levels” (Cherlotte Moore). This reference also lists 133 finely divided heterodyne spacings for carbon, but these frequencies range from 14.1 THz (473.3 cm ^-1 ) to 12.2 GHz (0.41 cm ^-1 ). Oxygen has the listed 287 finely divided heterodynes down from 15.9 THz (532.5 cm ^-1 ) to 3.88 GHz (0.13 cm ^-1 ). The detailed platinum fine separation interval of 23 is 23.3 THz (775.9 cm ⁻¹ ) to 8.62 THz (287.9 cm ⁻¹ ) in frequency.

  Graphically, the expansion and resolution of the electronic frequency to several closely spaced fine frequencies is shown in FIG. The electron trajectory is indicated by trajectory numbers n = 0, 1, 2, etc. The microstructure is shown as α. The quantum diagram for the hydrogen microstructure is shown in FIG. In particular, the fine structure of hydrogen atoms at n = 1 and n = 2 levels is shown. FIG. 35 shows multiplet splitting for the lowest energy levels of carbon, oxygen and fluorine as represented by “C”, “O” and “F”, respectively.

  In addition to the fine splitting frequency for atoms (ie, heterodyne), molecules have similar fine structure frequencies. The origin and origin for molecular microstructure and partitioning are different from those for atoms, however, the graph results and the actual results are exactly the same. In atoms, the fine structure frequency is said to be due to the interaction of rotating electrons with its own magnetic field. Basically this means that a single atomic sphere electron cloud that rotates and interacts with the magnetic field itself produces atomic fine structure frequencies. The prior art refers to this phenomenon as “spin orbit coupling”. For molecules, the fine structure frequency corresponds to the actual rotational frequency of the electron or vibration frequency. As such, both the fine structure frequencies for atoms and molecules are due to rotation. In the case of atoms, it is an atomic swirl and rotation around itself, similar to the way the Earth rotates around its axis. In the case of molecules, it is molecular rotation and rotation through space.

FIG. 36 shows an infrared absorption spectrum of the SF ₆ vibration band near 28.3 THz (wavelength 10.6 μm, wave number 948 cm ⁻¹ ) of the SF ₆ molecule. The molecule is highly symmetric and rotates somewhat like the top. Spectral tracking was obtained using a high resolution grating spectrometer. A broad band is observed between 941 and 952 cm ⁻¹ (28.1 and 28.5 THz), and three distinct spectral curves are present at 946, 947 and 948 cm ⁻¹ (28.3, 28.32 and 23.834 THz).

FIG. 37a shows a thin section taken from 949-950 cm ⁻¹ , which is enlarged to show in more detail in FIG. 37b. To obtain details, a tunable semiconductor diode laser was used. There are more spectral curves that appear when the spectrum is reviewed with finer details. These curves are called the fine structure frequencies for this molecule. The total energy of an atom or molecule is the sum of its electron, vibration and rotational energy. Thus the simple Planck equation considered earlier in this specification:
E = hv
Can be rewritten as:
E = E _e + E _v + E _r
(Where E is total energy, E _e is electron energy, E _v is vibrational energy, and E _r is rotational energy). Graphically, these equations are shown in FIG. 38 for molecules. The electron energy E _e includes a change in one orbit of electrons in the molecule. It is indicated by orbital number n = 0, 1, 2, 3, etc. The vibration energy E _v is generated by a change in vibration rate between two atoms in the molecule, and is represented by vibration frequency v = 1, 2, 3, and the like. Finally, the rotational energy _Er is the energy of rotation caused by molecules rotating around its center of mass. The rotational energy is represented by quantum numbers J = 1, 2, 3, etc., as determined from the angular momentum equation.

  Therefore, by examining the vibration frequency in more detail, the fine structure molecular frequency becomes clear. These fine structure frequencies are actually generated by molecular rotation “J” as a subset of each vibrational frequency. Just as the rotation levels “J” are substantially evenly divided in FIG. 38, they are also substantially uniformly divided when plotted as frequency.

This concept can be easily understood by examining several additional frequency graphs. For example, FIG. 39a shows the pure rotational absorption spectrum for gaseous hydrogen chloride, and FIG. 39b shows the same spectrum at low resolution. In FIG. 39a, the separated waves that look like teeth on the “comb” correspond to the individual rotational frequencies. A complete wave (i.e., a wave including all combs) spanning a frequency of 20-500 cm ^-1 corresponds to the total vibration frequency. At low resolution or magnification, this set of rotational frequencies appears to be a single frequency that is maximal at about 20 cm ⁻¹ (598 GHz) (see FIG. 39b). This is very similar to the manner in which atomic frequencies, such as the 456 THz hydrogen frequency, appear (ie it is exactly one frequency at low resolution, but several different frequencies at higher magnifications).

  FIG. 40 shows the rotational spectrum (ie, fine structure) of hydrogen cyanide, where “J” is the rotational level. Note also the regular spacing of the rotation level (note that this spectrum is oriented opposite to the typical one). This spectrum uses transmission rather than emission on the horizontal Y axis, so the intensity increases downward on the Y axis rather than upward.

FIG. 41 further shows the v _{1 to} v ₅ vibration bands (where v ₁ is vibration level 1 and v ₅ is vibration level 5) for an FCCF that includes a plurality of rotational frequencies. The fine sawtooth spike is a fine structure frequency corresponding to the rotation frequency. Note the substantially regular spacing of the rotational frequency. Note also the wave pattern of rotational frequency intensity as well as the alternating pattern of rotational frequency intensity.

  Consider the actual rotational frequency (ie, fine structure frequency) for the ground state carbon monoxide listed in Table 4.

Each of the rotational frequencies is regularly spaced about 115 GHz apart. Prior art quantum theory has the following equation:
B = h / (8π ² I)
Where B is the rotational constant, h is the Planck constant, and I is the moment of inertia for the molecule.
This regular spacing is explained by the fact that it is related to the Planck constant and the moment of inertia (ie the center of mass for the molecule). From there, the prior art follows:
f = 2B (J + 1)
(Where f is the frequency, B is the rotation constant, and J is the rotation level)
The frequency equation for the rotation level corresponding to is established. Thus, the rotational spectrum (ie, fine structure spectrum) for a molecule is found to be a harmonic series line with frequencies that are all spaced or divided (heterodyned) by the same amount. This amount is referred to in the prior art as “2B” and “B” is referred to as the “rotational constant”. In current charts and databases of molecular frequencies, “B” is usually described as a frequency such as MHZ. This is graphically represented in FIG. 42 for the first four rotational frequencies for CO.

  This fact is interesting for several reasons. The rotation constant “B” described in many databases is equal to half the difference between rotation frequencies for molecules. That means that B is the first subharmonic frequency for the fundamental frequency “2B”, which is the heterodyned difference between all rotational frequencies. The rotation constant B described for carbon monoxide is 57.6 GHz (57,635.970 MHz). This is basically half of the 115 GHz difference between the rotational frequencies. Thus, according to the present invention, if it is desired to stimulate the rotational level of the molecule, the quantity “2B” can be used to be a basic first generation heterodyne. Alternatively, the same “B” can be used because “B” corresponds to the first order subharmonic of the heterodyne.

  Furthermore, the prior art indicates that if it is desirable to use microwaves for stimulation, the microwave frequency used is limited to the molecular ground state (n = 0 in FIG. 38) or to a stimulation level in the vicinity thereof. Teach. The prior art teaches that the required frequencies correspond to the infrared, visible and ultraviolet regions when trying to go to information in FIG. 38 towards higher electron and vibration levels. However, the prior art is wrong in this respect.

  Referring again to FIG. 38, it is clear that the rotational frequency is evenly spaced even if the electron or vibration level is under scrutiny. The equivalent spacing shown in FIG. 38 is because the rotational frequencies are evenly spaced when traveling upward through all higher vibration and electron levels. Table 5 lists the rotation frequencies for lithium fluoride (LiF) at several different rotation and vibration levels.

  It is clear from Table 5 that whatever the vibration level, the difference between the rotational frequencies is about 86,000-89,000 MHz (ie 86-89 GHz). Thus, according to the present invention, by using microwaves of about 86,000 MHz to 89,000 MHz, molecules can be stimulated in various ways from the ground state level to its highest energy level. This effect was only slightly implied by the prior art. In particular, the rotational frequency of the molecule can be manipulated in a unique way. The primary rotation level has a natural vibration frequency (NOF) of 89,740 MHz. The secondary rotation level has a NOF of 179,470 MHz. Therefore,

Thus, the present invention has discovered that NOF at rotational frequency causes a heterodyne effect by adding or subtracting all frequencies in a manner similar to that causing a heterodyne effect. In particular, the two rotational frequencies cause a heterodyne effect, resulting in a subtraction frequency. This subtraction frequency happens to be exactly twice the magnitude of the induced rotation constant “B” described in the nuclear physics and spectroscopic analysis manuals. Thus, if the primary rotation frequency in the numerator is stimulated with the subtraction frequency _{rotation 2 → 1} , the primary rotation frequency causes a heterodyne effect (ie in this case in addition) with NOF _{rotation 0 → 1} (ie the primary rotation frequency), NOF _{rotation 1 → 2} results, which is the natural vibrational frequency of the secondary rotation level of the molecule. In other words:

  Since the present invention discloses that the rotational frequency is actually equidistant harmonics, the subtracted frequency adds the secondary level NOF to produce the tertiary level NOF. The subtraction frequency adds the third level NOF to produce the fourth level NOF. This approach can be repeated over and over again. Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to stimulate the full rotation level in the vibration band by using a single microwave frequency.

  Furthermore, if all the rotation levels relating to the vibration frequency are excited, the vibration frequency is also excited correspondingly. Furthermore, if all vibration levels related to the electronic level are excited, the electronic level is excited as well. Thus, according to the teachings of the present invention, it is possible to excite the highest level of electronic and vibrational structure of a molecule by using a single microwave frequency. This is incompatible with the prior art teaching that the use of microwaves is limited to ground state molecules. The prior art teaches that microwave frequencies cannot be used, especially if the goal is to resonate directly using the upper vibration or electronic level. However, according to the present invention, if the catalytic mechanism of action is initiated by resonating with the target species indirectly, for example by heterodyne, at least one higher level is used using one or more microwave frequencies. Can give energy to the vibration or electronic state of Thus, using the teachings of the present invention along with a simple method of heterodyning, it is readily apparent that the microwave frequency is not limited to the ground state level of the molecule.

  The present invention has determined that the catalyst can actually stimulate the target species indirectly by utilizing at least one heterodyne frequency (eg, harmonics). However, the catalyst can also stimulate the target species by direct resonance with at least one of the fundamental frequencies. However, rotational frequency can result in the use of both mechanisms. For example, FIG. 42 graphically illustrates a fine structure spectrum showing the first four rotational frequencies for CO in the ground state. The primary rotational frequency for CO is 115 GHz. The heterodyned difference between rotational frequencies is also 115 GHz. The primary rotational frequency and the heterodyned difference between the frequencies are the same. All high level rotational frequencies are harmonics of the primary frequency. This relationship is not apparent when dealing only with the prior art rotation constant “B”. However, frequency-based spectral chemical analysis similar to that of the present invention facilitates understanding of such concepts.

  Examination of the primary level rotational frequency for LiF shows that it is nearly identical to the heterodyned difference between it and the secondary level rotational frequency. Thus, if the numerator is stimulated at a frequency equal to 2B (ie, a heterodyne harmonic difference between rotational frequencies), the energy resonates indirectly with all high rotational frequencies via the heterodyne and directly with the primary rotational frequency. The present invention teaches that they resonate. This is an important discovery.

  Just as the rotation constant “B” is related to the harmonic spacing of the rotating fine-structured molecular frequency, a number of spectroscopic analyzes that are related in one way or another in relation to atomic and molecular frequencies. The prior art discloses constants. The alpha (α) rotation-vibration constant is a good example of this. The α rotation-vibration frequency constant is related to a slight change in frequency for the same rotation level when the vibration level changes. For example, FIG. 43a shows the frequency of the same rotation level but different vibration levels for LiF. The frequency is approximately the same, but varies 2-3% between different vibration levels.

  Referring to FIG. 43b, the difference between all frequencies for various rotational transitions at the different vibration levels of FIG. 43a is shown. The top row rotational transition 0 → 1 in FIG. 43b has a frequency of 89,740.46 MHz at vibration level 0. At vibration level 1, the 0 → 1 transition is 88,319.18 MHz. The difference between these two rotational frequencies is 1,421.28 MHz. At vibration level 2, the 0 → 1 transition is 86,921.20 MHz. The difference between it and the vibration level 1 frequency (88,319.18 MHz) is 1,397.98 MHz. These slight differences with respect to the same J rotation level between different vibration levels are almost identical. For J = 0 → 1 rotation level, they gather around a frequency of 1,400 MHz.

  For the J = 1 → 2 transition, the difference is concentrated around 2,800 Hz, and for the J = 2 → 3 transition, the difference is concentrated around 4,200 Hz. These different frequencies, such as 1,400, 2,800, and 4,200 Hz, are all harmonics of each other. Furthermore, they are all harmonics of the α rotation-vibration constant. Just as the actual molecular rotation frequency is a harmonic of the rotation constant B, the difference between the rotation frequencies is the harmonic of the α rotation-vibration constant. Thus, the present invention teaches that when a molecule is stimulated at a frequency equal to the α vibration-rotation frequency, the energy resonates indirectly with all rotation frequencies via heterodyne. This is an important discovery.

Consider the rotational and vibrational states for the triatomic molecule OCS shown in FIG. FIG. 44 shows the same rotation level (J = 1 → 2) for different vibrational states in the OCS molecule. For the ground vibration (000) level, J = 1 → 2 transition; and the excited vibrational state (100) J = 1 → 2 transition, the difference between the two frequencies is equal to 4 × alpha ₁ (4α ₁ ). In another excited state, the frequency difference between the ground vibration (000) level, the J = 1 → 2 transition and the two l-type doublets is 4 × alpha ₂ (4α ₂ ). In the higher excitation vibrational state, the frequency difference between (000) and (02 ° 0) is 8 × alpha ₂ (4α ₂ ). Thus, it can be seen that the rotation-vibration constant “α” is actually a harmonic of the molecular frequency. Thus, according to the present invention, the stimulation of a molecule by an “α” frequency or “α” harmonic resonates directly with the various rotational-vibration frequencies of the molecule or indirectly with a heterodyne harmonic. To do.

  Another interesting constant is the l-type doubling constant. This constant is also shown in FIG. In particular, FIG. 44 shows the rotational transition J = 1 → 2 for the triatomic molecule OCS. Just as atomic frequencies are sometimes split into doublets or multiplets, rotational frequencies are sometimes split into doublets. The difference between them is called the l-type doubling constant. These constants are usually smaller than the α constant (ie have a low frequency). For OCS molecules, the α constant is 20.56 and 10.56 MHz, while the l-type doubling constant is 6.3 MHz. All these frequencies are in the radio wave part of the electromagnetic spectrum.

  As discussed earlier herein, energy is transported by two fundamental frequency mechanisms. If the frequencies are substantially the same or match, energy is transported by direct resonance. Energy can also be transported indirectly by heterodyning (ie, the frequency substantially matches after another frequency is added or subtracted). Furthermore, as noted above, the direct or indirect resonant frequency does not have to be strictly matched. If they are simply close, U medical energy will still move. Any of these constants or frequencies that are related to molecules or other substances via heterodyne can be used, for example, to transfer energy to the substance and therefore interact directly with the substance.

  In the reaction where hydrogen and oxygen combine to produce water, the present invention teaches that energizing the reaction intermediate of atomic hydrogen and hydroxy radicals is critical to sustaining the reaction. In this respect, platinum, a physical catalyst, energizes both reaction intermediates by directly and indirectly resonating with them. Platinum energizes intermediates at multiple energy levels, creating conditions for energy amplification. The present invention also teaches how to copy the mechanism of action of platinum by using atomic fine structure frequencies.

The present invention has previously considered resonances with fine structure frequencies with only slight variations between frequencies (eg 456.676 and 456.686 THz). However, indirect resonance with the fine structure frequency is a significant difference. In particular, the present invention teaches that indirect resonance can be achieved by using a fine splitting frequency that is simply a difference or a heterodyne between the fine structure frequencies. By examining the hydrogen 456 THz microstructure and the fine splitting frequency (see, eg, FIGS. 30 and 31 and Table 3), a large number of heterodynes are shown. In other words, the difference between the microstructure frequencies can be calculated as follows:
456.686 THz−456.676 THz = 0.0102 THz = 10.2 GHz
Thus, when hydrogen atoms are subjected to 10.2 GHz electromagnetic energy (ie, energy corresponding to microwaves), they resonate indirectly with it to energize the 456 THz electron spectral frequency. In other words, 10.2 GHz adds to 456.676 THz, resulting in a resonant frequency of 456.686 THz. 10.2 GHz subtracts from 456.686 THz, resulting in a resonant frequency of 456.676 THz. Thus, by introducing 10.2 GHz into the hydrogen atom, the hydrogen atom is excited at a frequency of 456 THz. Microwave frequencies can be used to stimulate electronic levels.

  According to the present invention, it is also possible to use a combination of mimicking catalyst mechanisms. For example, 1) it can resonate indirectly with the hydrogen atom frequency via heterodyne (ie, fine division frequency); and / or 2) it can resonate with hydrogen atoms at multiple frequencies. Such multiple resonances can occur using a combination of microwave frequencies simultaneously in diffusion and / or in chirp or burst. For example, individual microwave microstructure split frequencies for hydrogen at 10.87 GHz, 10.2 GHz, 3.23 GHz, 1.38 GHz and 1.06 GHz can be used in diffusion. In addition, there are a number of subdivision frequencies for hydrogen that were not expressly included herein, and thus, depending on the frequency range of available equipment, the present invention adapts the selected frequency to the capacity of available equipment. Provide a means for Therefore, the flexibility according to the teachings of the present invention is very great.

  Another method for delivering multiple electromagnetic energy frequencies according to the present invention is to use a low frequency as a carrier for high frequencies. This can be done, for example, by generating 10.2 GHz EM energy in short bursts where the bursts arrive at a rate of about 239 MHz. These frequencies are both fine division frequencies for hydrogen. This can also be achieved by delivering EM energy continuously and by changing the amplitude at a rate of about 239 MHz. These techniques can be used alone or in combination with various other techniques disclosed herein.

  It is therefore possible to energize higher levels of atoms using microwaves and radio frequencies by mimicking one or more mechanisms of action of the catalyst and by using atomic microstructures and splitting frequencies. . Thus, selectively energizing or targeting specific atoms can catalyze the desired reaction and lead to the desired end product. Depending on the environment, the option of using low frequencies can have a number of advantages. Low frequencies typically show better penetration into large reaction spaces and volumes and can be better adapted to large scale industrial applications. Low frequencies can be easily delivered in small, portable equipment, as opposed to large, bulky equipment that delivers high frequencies (eg, lasers). The choice of spectral catalyst frequency may be for simple reasons, such as to avoid interference from other sources of EM energy. Thus, according to the present invention, understanding the basic process of heterodyning and fine structure splitting frequency provides greater flexibility when designing and applying spectral energy catalysts in a targeted fashion. In particular, the present invention teaches that rather than simply reproducing the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst, it allows full use of the full range of frequencies in the electromagnetic spectrum as long as the teachings of the present invention are followed. Thus, certain desirable frequencies are applied, while other less desirable frequencies are excluded from the applied spectral energy catalyst targeted to specific participants and / or components in the crystallization reaction system.

  As a further example, reference is again made to the reaction of hydrogen and oxygen for the purification of water. If it is desirable to catalyze a water reaction by doubling the mechanism of action of the catalyst in the microwave region, the present invention teaches that several options are available. Another such option is the use of knowledge that platinum energizes the reactive intermediate of the hydroxy radical. Besides the hydrogen atom, the B frequency for the hydroxy radical is 565.8 GHz. That means that the actual heterodyned difference between rotational frequencies is 2B or 1,131.6 GHz. Such frequencies can therefore be utilized to achieve excitation of the hydroxyl radical intermediate.

  Furthermore, the α constant for the hydroxy radical is 21.4 GHz. This frequency can therefore also be applied to energize hydroxy radicals. Therefore, water is generated by introducing hydrogen and oxygen gas into the chamber and irradiating the gas at 21.4 GHz. This particular gigahertz energy is a harmonic heterodyne of rotational frequency for the same rotational level but different vibration levels. All rotational frequencies that energize vibration levels that energize the electronic frequencies that catalyze the reaction are energized to the heterodyned frequencies. Thus, the above reaction can be catalyzed or targeted with a spectral catalyst applied at several applicable frequencies, all of which have one or more frequencies in one or more participants. Fit and thus carry energy.

  Furthermore, delivery at a frequency of 565.8 GHz, or even 1,131.6 GHz, results in virtually all rotational levels in the molecule that become energized entirely from the ground state. This approach copies the catalytic mechanism in two ways. The first method is by energizing the hydroxy radical and sustaining a critical reaction intermediate to catalyze the formation of water. The second mechanism copied from the catalyst is to energize multiple levels in the molecule. Since the rotational constant “B” is related to the rotational frequency, heterodyne occurs at all levels in the molecule. Thus, using frequency, “B” energizes all levels in the molecule. This facilitates the establishment of an energy amplification system such as occurs with platinum as a physical catalyst.

  Furthermore, when a molecule is energized using a frequency corresponding to an l-type doubling constant, such a frequency is used in a manner substantially similar to that used for finely divided frequencies from the atomic spectrum. Could have been. The difference between the two frequencies in the doublet is a heterodyne and energization of the doublet by that heterodyne frequency (ie, the splitting frequency) energizes the fundamental frequency and catalyzes the reaction.

  A further example utilizes a combination of frequencies for atomic microstructure. For example, using a constant center frequency of 1,131.6 GHz (ie, heterodyne difference between rotational frequencies for hydroxy radicals) with a vibrato that changes ± 21.4 GHz around the center frequency (ie, α constant harmonics for variations between rotational frequencies) Would use 1,131.6 GHz EM energy in a short burst, and the burst would be 21.4 GHz.

Since slight variations are observed between rotational frequencies for the same level, bursts can be constructed using that frequency range. For example, when the maximum “B” is 565.8 GHz, the rotational frequency heterodyne corresponds to 1,131.6 GHz. If the minimum “B” is 551.2 GHz, this corresponds to a rotational frequency heterodyne of 1102 GHz. Thus, a “chirp” or burst of energy starting at 1,100 GHz and increasing in frequency to 1,140 GHz can be used. In fact, the transmitter can be set to “chirp” or burst at 21.4 GHz.
As discussed above, as with other spectral frequencies, control of resonant energy exchange by manipulating magnetic fields can be used in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

  In any case, there are a number of ways to use atomic and molecular microstructure frequencies with their associated heterodynes and harmonics. Understanding the mechanism of catalytic action allows those skilled in the art equipped with the teachings of the present invention to utilize spectral catalysts down from the high frequency ultraviolet and visible light regions, sometimes into the more manageable microwave and radio wave regions. Furthermore, the present invention allows one skilled in the art to calculate and / or determine the effects of microwaves and radio waves on chemical reactions and / or reaction pathways.

Ultrafine frequency The ultrafine structure frequency is the same as the fine structure frequency. The fine structure frequency can be observed by expanding a portion of the standard frequency spectrum. The fine structure splitting frequency occurs at frequencies lower than the electronic spectrum, mainly in the infrared and microwave regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. The hyperfine splitting frequency occurs at frequencies that are even lower than the fine structure spectrum, mainly in the microwave and radio wave regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. The fine structure frequency is generally caused by electrons interacting with at least its own magnetic field. Hyperfine frequencies are generally caused by electrons that interact with at least the nuclear magnetic field.

FIG. 36 shows the rotation-vibration band frequency spectrum for the SF ₆ molecule. The rotation-vibration zone and microstructure are also shown in FIG. However, the fine structure frequency is observed by expanding a small section of the standard vibration band spectrum (ie, the lower part of FIG. 45 shows some of the fine structure frequencies). In many ways, looking at the fine structure frequency is the same as looking at the standard spectrum with a magnifying glass. Enlarging what appears to be a flat and uninteresting part of the standard vibration frequency band shows more curves with low frequency division. Many of these other curves are fine structure curves. Similarly, the small and apparently uninteresting portion of the resulting fine structure spectrum is yet another spectrum of more curves known as hyperfine spectra.

A small portion of the SF ₆ fine structure spectrum (ie 0-300) is magnified in FIG. The hyperfine spectrum includes a large number of curve divisions with lower frequencies. This time, the fine structure spectrum was expanded instead of the regular vibrational spectrum. What is found is more curves that are closer together. 47a and 47b show a further enlargement of the two curves marked with an asterisk (ie “ ^* ” and “ ^** ”) in FIG.

  It can be seen that what appears to be a single waveform curve in FIG. 46 is a series of curves that are very closely spaced together. These are hyperfine frequency curves. The fine structure spectrum is therefore composed of several more curves spaced very close together. These other curves spaced closer together together correspond to hyperfine frequencies.

  Figures 47a and 47b show that the spacing of the hyperfine frequency curves are very close together and at slightly irregular intervals. The small amount by which the hyperfine curve is divided is called the hyperfine division frequency. The hyperfine splitting frequency is also heterodyne. This concept is substantially similar to the concept of fine division frequency. The difference between the two curves being divided is called the division frequency. Therefore, the hyperfine division frequencies are all hyperdyne heterodyne.

  Since the ultrafine frequency curve is caused by the expansion of the fraction of the fine structure curve, the ultrafine division frequency is generated only by the fraction of the fine structure division frequency. The fine structure splitting frequency is actually just a few curves spaced very close together around a regular spectral frequency. Expansion of the fine structure division frequency results in a hyperfine division frequency. The hyperfine splitting frequency is actually just a few curves that are very closely spaced together. The closer the curves are together, the smaller the distance or frequency that separates them. Here, the distance separating any two curves is the heterodyne frequency. Thus, the closer the two arbitrary curves are together, the lower (lower) the heterodyne frequency between them. The distance between the hyperfine division frequencies (that is, the amount by which the ultrafine frequency is divided) is the hyperfine division frequency. It is also called a constant or interval.

  The electronic spectrum frequency of hydrogen is 2,466 THz. The 2,466 THz frequency is made up of fine structure curves spaced 10.87 GHz (0.01087 THz). Therefore, the fine division frequency is 10.87 GHz. Here, the fine structure curve is made from a hyperfine curve. These hyperfine curves are spaced just 23.68 and 59.21 MHz. Thus, both 23 and 59 MHz are hyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogen. Other hyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogen include 2.71, 4.21, 7.02, 17.55, 52.63, 177.64 and 1,420.0 MHz. The hyperfine splitting frequency is spaced closer together and closer than the fine structure splitting frequency, so the hyperfine splitting frequency is smaller and lower than the fine splitting frequency.

Therefore, the ultra fine division frequency is lower than the fine division frequency. This means that rather than being in the infrared and microwave regions, the hyperfine splitting frequency is in the microwave and radio wave regions so that there can be a finer splitting frequency. These low frequencies are found in the MHz (10 ⁶ hertz) and Khz (10 ³ hertz) regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Some of the hyperfine splitting frequencies for hydrogen are shown in FIG. 48 (FIG. 48 shows the hyperfine structure at the n = 2 to n = 3 transition of hydrogen).

FIG. 49 shows the hyperfine frequency for CH ₃ I. These frequencies are an extension of the fine structure frequency for the molecule. Since the fine structure frequency for the molecule is actually a rotational frequency, what is shown is actually a hyperfine division of the rotational frequency. FIG. 49 shows the hyperfine division of the J = 1 → 2 rotation transition. The division between the two highest curves is less than 100 MHz.

  FIG. 50 shows another example of the molecular ClCN. This set of hyperfine frequencies is from the J = 1 → 2 transition of the specified vibrational state for ClCN. Note that ultrafine collections are separated by exactly 2-3 megahertz (MHz) and by less than 1 megahertz at 2-3 locations.

  The energy level graph and spectrum of the J = 1/2 → 3/2 rotational transition for NO is shown in FIG.

FIG. 52 shows the hyperfine division frequency for NH ₃ . Note that the frequencies are closely spaced together so that the magnitude at the bottom is kilohertz (Kc / sec). The ultrafine features of the lines were obtained using a beam spectrophotometer.

  Just like the fine division frequency, the hyperfine division frequency is a heterodyne of atomic and molecular frequencies. Thus, when an atom or molecule is stimulated at a frequency equal to the hyperfine splitting frequency (heterodyne difference between hyperfine frequencies), the energy is equal to the hyperfine splitting frequency that resonates indirectly with the hyperfine frequency via the heterodyne. The present invention teaches that. The associated rotation, vibration and / or electronic energy levels are stimulated sequentially. This is an important discovery. It selectively stimulates certain total reaction system components (eg atomic hydrogen intermediates can be stimulated at 2.55, 23.68, 59.2 and / or 1,420 MHz, for example) using more radio and microwave frequencies, Target.

Similar to the fine frequency, the ultrafine frequency also includes features such as a doublet. In particular, in the region where we expect to find only a single hyperfine frequency curve, two curves are seen instead, typically one on either side of the location where a single hyperfine frequency was predicted. Ultrafine doubling is illustrated in FIGS. This hyperfine spectrum is also from NH ₃ . FIG. 53 corresponds to J = 3 rotation levels, and FIG. 54 corresponds to J = 4 rotation levels. The doubling can be most easily observed in the J = 3 curve (ie FIG. 53). There are two sets of short curves, high curves and then two shorter sets. Each short set of curves is generally located where one expects exactly one curve to be found. There are two curves instead, one on one side of the main curve position. Each set of curves is a hyperfine doublet.

  There are different notations to indicate sources such as doubling, eg l-type doubling, K doubling, and Λ doubling, and they all have their own constants or intervals. Unless the theory behind the generation of various types of doublets is discussed in detail, the spacing between any two hyperfine multiplet curves is also heterodyne, so all these doubling constants represent frequency heterodynes. Therefore, their frequency heterodynes (ie hyperfine constants) can also be used as the spectral energy catalyst of the present invention.

  In particular, frequencies in atoms or molecules can be stimulated directly or indirectly. If the goal is to stimulate the 2,466 THz frequency of hydrogen for several reasons, for example, an ultraviolet laser may radiate 2,466 THz electromagnetic radiation. This directly stimulates the atom. However, if such a laser is not available, a hydrogen microstructure splitting frequency of 10.87 GHz can be achieved using a microwave device. The gigahertz frequency is heterodyned (ie, added or subtracted) using two closely spaced microstructure curves at 2,466 and stimulates the 2,466 THz frequency band. This indirectly stimulates the atom.

  Furthermore, the atoms are stimulated using a hyperfine splitting frequency for hydrogen at 23.68 MHz as generated by radio equipment. The 23.68 MHz frequency is heterodyned (ie, added or subtracted) using two closely spaced hyperfine frequency curves at 2,466 and stimulates the fine structure curve at 2,466 THz. Stimulation of the fine structure curve then leads to stimulation of the 2,466 THz electron frequency for the hydrogen atom.

  Furthermore, additional hyperfine clusters for hydrogen in the radio and microwave portions of the electromagnetic spectrum can also be used to stimulate atoms. For example, radio wave patterns for 2.7 MHz, 4.2 MHz, 7 MHz, 18 MHz, 23 MHz, 52 MHz, and 59 MHz can be used. This stimulates several different hyperfine frequencies of hydrogen and it stimulates them essentially simultaneously. This causes a stimulation of the fine structure frequency, which in turn stimulates the electronic frequency in the hydrogen atom.

  Furthermore, several delivery scheme variations may be used depending on the available equipment and / or design and / or processing constraints. For example, one of the low frequencies can be a carrier frequency for a high frequency. The continuous frequency of 52 MHz can be varied with a rate amplitude of 2.7 MHz. Alternatively, the 59 MHz frequency can be pulsed at a rate of 4.2 MHz. There are various ways in which these frequencies can be combined and / or delivered, including different waveform durations, intensity shapes, cycles of use, etc. Depending on which hyperfine splitting frequency is stimulated, for example, the generation of various and specific intermediates can be precisely adapted to allow precise control of the entire reaction system using fine and / or hyperfine splitting frequencies To do.

Thus, an important aspect of the present invention is that once it is understood that energy is transferred when the frequencies are matched, the determination of which frequencies are available for adaptation is the next step. The present invention clearly discloses a method for achieving the objective. The interaction between equipment limitations, processing constraints, etc. determines which frequency is best suited for a particular purpose. Thus, both direct resonance and indirect resonance are appropriate approaches for the use of spectral energy catalysts.
As discussed above, as with other spectral frequencies, control of resonant energy exchange by manipulating magnetic fields can be used in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

Another means for modifying the spectral pattern of the electric field material is to expose the material to an electric field. Particularly in the presence of an electric field, atomic and molecular spectral frequency lines are split, moved, broadened, or changed in intensity. The action of the electric field on the spectral lines is known as the “Stark effect” in honor of its discoverer J. Stark. In 1913, Stark discovered that the hydrogen Balmer series (ie curve II in FIGS. 9a and 9b) was broken down into several different components, while Stark was in the presence of a hydrogen flame. A high electric field was used. In the meantime, Stark's first observations have evolved into a study of atomic and molecular structures by measuring changes in their respective spectral lines caused by separate branches of the spectroscopic method, namely electric fields.

  The electric field effect has some similarities with fine and hyperfine splitting frequencies. In particular, as discussed previously herein, the microstructure and hyperfine structure frequencies, along with their low frequency splitting or coupling constants, are between atoms of electrons and magnetic fields of electrons or nuclei, or atoms or Caused by intramolecular interactions. The electric field effect is similar, except that an electric field from the outside of the atom is applied instead of an electric field originating from the inside of the atom. The Stark effect is mainly the interaction of an external electric field from the outside of an atom or molecule with the electric and magnetic fields already established in the atom or molecule.

  When investigating electric field effects on atoms, molecules, ions and / or their constituents, the nature of the electric field also needs to be taken into account (eg whether the electric field is static or dynamic). The static electric field can be generated by direct current. The dynamic electric field is time-varying and can be generated by alternating current. If the electric field is from alternating current, the alternating frequency should also be taken into account, for example compared to the frequency of atoms or molecules.

  In an atom, an external electric field disturbs the charge distribution of the atom's electrons. This perturbation of the electric field of the electron itself induces a dipole moment therein (ie a slightly biased charge distribution). This polarized electron dipole moment then interacts with the external electric field. In other words, the external electric field first induces a dipole moment in the electric field and then interacts with the dipole. The net result is that the atomic frequency will split into several different frequencies. The amount of frequency is divided by the strength of the electric field. In other words, the stronger the electric field, the more widely separated it is.

If the split varies directly with the electric field strength, it is called a primary split (ie Δv = AF (where Δv is the split frequency, A is a constant, and F is the electric field strength). is there)). If the split changes with the square of the field strength, it is called a quadratic or quadratic function action (ie Δv = BF ² ). One or both effects can be observed with various forms of material. For example, hydrogen atoms exhibit a primary Stark effect at low electric field strength and a secondary action at high electric field strength. Other electric field effects, such as the third or fourth order of the electric field intensity, have not been studied very much, but nevertheless generate split frequencies. The secondary electric field effect for potassium is shown in FIGS. FIG. 55 is a scheme of the dependence of 4s and 5p energy levels on the electric field. FIG. 56 shows a plot of the deviation of the 5p ² P1 / 2.3 / 2 ← 4s ² S1 / 2 transition wave number from the zero electric field position with respect to the square of the electric field. Note that frequency division or frequency separation (ie, deviation from zero field wavenumber) varies with the square of the electric field strength (v / cm) ² .

  The mechanism for the Stark effect in molecules is simpler than that in atoms. Most molecules already have an electric dipole moment (ie a slightly inhomogeneous charge distribution). The external electric field simply interacts with the electric dipole moment already inside the molecule. The type of interaction, ie the primary or secondary Stark effect, is different for molecules shaped differently. For example, most symmetrical surface molecules have a first-order Stark effect. Asymmetric rotors typically have a secondary Stark effect. Thus, in molecules, as in the case of atoms, the frequency division or separation by an external electric field is proportional to the electric field strength itself or to the square of the electric field strength.

An example of this is shown in FIG. 57, which graphically shows how the J = 0 → 1 rotational transition for the molecule CH ₃ Cl responds to an external electric field. If the electric field is very small (eg less than 10 E ² esu ² / cm ² ), the main effect is a shift of the three rotational frequencies to higher frequencies. When the electric field strength is increased (eg 10-20 E ² esu ² / cm ² ), the three rotation frequencies are divided into five different frequencies. As the electric field strength continues to increase, the five frequencies here continue to move to higher frequencies. Some of the intervals or differences between the five frequencies remain the same regardless of the electric field strength, but other intervals become progressively larger and higher. Thus, the heterodyned frequency stimulates the split frequency at one electric field strength, but not at another electric field strength.

  Another molecular example is shown in FIG. 58 (this is a graph of the Stark effect on the same OCS molecule shown in FIG. 44 for J = 1 → 2). The J = 1 → 2 rotational transition frequency is shown centered at zero on the horizontal frequency axis of FIG. Its frequency centered at zero is a single frequency in the absence of an external electric field. However, when an electric field is applied, the single rotation frequency splits in two. The stronger the electric field, the wider the division between the two frequencies. One of the new frequencies moves higher and higher, but the other frequency moves lower and lower. Because the difference between the two frequencies changes as the electric field strength changes, the heterodyned split frequency can stimulate the rotational level at one electric field strength, but not the other. The electric field affects the spectral frequency of the reaction participants and can thus affect the spectral chemistry of the reaction.

  Spectral line broadening and migration also occurs with the intermolecular Stark effect. The intermolecular Stark effect is created when the electric field from surrounding atoms, ions or molecules affects the spectral emission of the species under test. In other words, the external electric field arises from other atoms and molecules rather than from DC or AC current. Other atoms and molecules are constantly moving, so their electric fields are spatially and temporally inhomogeneous. Instead of dividing the frequency into a number of easily recognized narrow frequencies, the original frequency is simply wider and encompasses most if not all (ie, it is expanded) that was the divided frequency. Solvents, support materials, activity inhibitors, promoters, etc. are composed of atoms and molecules and their constituents. It is understood here that many of these actions are the result of the intermolecular Stark effect.

  The above example demonstrates how the electric field splits, shifts and broadens the spectral frequency associated with the material. However, the line strength can also be affected. Some of these variations in intensity are shown in FIGS. 59a and 59b. FIG. 59a shows the Stark constituent pattern for the transition in the rotation of the asymmetric surface molecule for the J = 4 → 5 transition, while FIG. 59b corresponds to J = 4 → 4. The intensity variation depends on rotational transition, molecular structure, etc., and electric field strength.

  An interesting Stark effect is shown in molecular-like structures with hyperfine (rotational) frequencies. The general rule for the production of hyperfine frequencies is that the hyperfine frequencies are due to interactions between electrons and nuclei. This interaction can be affected by an external electric field. When the applied external electric field is weak, the Stark energy is much lower than the energy of hyperfine energy (ie rotational energy). Ultrafine lines are divided into various new lines, and the separation (i.e. division) between the lines is very small (i.e. radio frequency and very low frequency).

  When the external electric field is very strong, the Stark energy is much greater than the hyperfine energy, and the molecules are sometimes shaken back and forth by the electric field, sometimes intensely. In this case, the ultrastructure is changed from the ground up. It almost seems as if there is no longer any ultrastructure. Stark splitting is substantially the same as that observed in the absence of hyperfine frequencies, and the hyperfine frequencies simply act as small variations on the Stark splitting frequency.

  When the external electric field is of medium strength, Stark and hyperfine energy are substantially equivalent. In this case, the calculation becomes very complicated. In general, the Stark division approximates the same frequency as the hyperfine division, but the relative intensities of the various components can change rapidly with small changes in the intensity of the external electric field. Thus, for a given electric field strength, a certain splitting frequency may be dominant, whereas for an electric field that is just 1% higher, the overall different Stark frequency dominates in strength.

  All of the above considerations on the Stark effect have focused on actions attributable to static electric fields, such as those that can be found using direct current. The Stark effect of dynamic or time-varying electric fields generated by alternating current is very interesting and can be quite different. Which of these propensities appears depends on the frequency of the electric field (ie alternating current) compared to the frequency of the material. If the electric field is changing very slowly, for example with a 60 Hz exit current, normal or static type electric field action occurs. Since the electric field varies from zero to the maximum field strength, the material frequency varies from their non-dividing frequency to their maximum dividing frequency at the changing electric field velocity. Therefore, the electric field frequency adjusts the frequency of the division phenomenon.

  However, as the electrical frequency increases, it is the line width that begins to overtake the primary frequency measurement (see FIG. 16 for the line width graph). The line width of the curve is its distance across, and the measurement is actually a very small heterodyne frequency measurement from one side of the curve to the other. The linewidth frequency is typically about 100 Khz at room temperature. In practical terms, the line width represents the relaxation time for a molecule, where the relaxation time is the time required for any transient phenomenon to disappear. Therefore, if the electrical frequency is significantly less than the line width frequency, the molecule has sufficient time to adjust to a gradually changing electric field and a normal or static type Stark effect occurs.

  If the electrical frequency is slightly less than the line width frequency, the numerator will change its frequency substantially in rhythm with the frequency of the electric field (ie it tunes to the frequency of the electric field). This is shown in FIG. 60 which shows the Stark effect for OCS on the J = 1 → 2 transition, along with the applied electric field at various frequencies. The letter “a” corresponds to the Stark effect with a static DC electric field; “b” corresponds to the Stark frequency expansion and blur with a 1 KHz electric field; and “c” is normal with an electric field of 1,200 KHz Corresponds to the Stark effect. As the electric field frequencies approach the KHz linewidth range, the Stark curves change their frequency with the electric field frequency and become wider and somewhat blurry. As the electric field frequency increases and moves beyond the line width range to about 1,200 KHz, the normal Stark curve becomes rippled again and becomes distinguishable. In many ways, molecules cannot keep up with rapid electric field fluctuations, but simply average the Stark effect. In all three cases, the periodic division of the Stark frequency is adjusted by the electric field frequency or its first harmonic (ie, 2 × electric field frequency).

  The next frequency measurement that the ever-increasing electrical frequency overtakes in the numerator is the transition frequency (ie hyperfine frequency) between the two rotation levels. Since the electric field frequency approximates the transition frequency between the two levels, emission of the transition frequency in the molecule induces a transition before and after the level. The molecule oscillates back and forth between both levels at the frequency of the electric field. When the electric field and transition level frequencies are substantially the same (ie, in resonance), the molecule oscillates back and forth at both levels, and the spectral lines for both levels appear simultaneously and at approximately the same intensity. Normally only one frequency level is observed at a time, but the resonant electric field essentially causes the molecule to go to both levels at the same time, so both transition frequencies appear in the spectrum.

In addition, for sufficiently large electric fields (eg, those used to generate plasma), additional transition level frequencies occur with regular spacing substantially equal to the electric field frequency. Furthermore, the division of the transition level frequency occurs at a frequency of the electric field frequency divided by an odd number (eg, the electric field frequency “f _E ” is divided by 3 or 5 or 7, ie, f _E / 3 or f _E / 5 etc.). obtain.

  Any change in the action of the electric field results in a new frequency, a new split frequency and a new energy level condition.

  Furthermore, if the electric field frequency is equal to the transition level frequency of an atom or molecule, for example, secondary components with opposite frequency charges and equal intensity can be generated. This is a negative Stark effect, with two components having equal and opposite frequency charges that destructively erase each other. In spectral chemistry terms, this amount relative to the negative catalyst or activity inhibitor in the crystallization reaction system was critical to the reaction pathway when the transition was thus targeted. The electric field thus produces a Stark effect, which is a split, shift, broadening, or intensity change and transition state change of the spectral frequency for substances (eg atoms and molecules). As with many of the other mechanisms that have been discussed herein, changes in the spectral frequency of the overall reaction system can affect the reaction rate and / or reaction pathway. For example, consider the following total reaction system:

(Where A & B is a reactant, C is a physical catalyst, I represents an intermediate, and D & F is a product).

  Based on the fact that the physical catalyst produces several frequencies that are quite close to the harmonics of the intermediate, for the sake of discussion it is assumed that the reaction normally proceeds only at moderate rates. It is further assumed that when an electric field is applied, the catalyst frequency is shifted so that some of the catalyst frequency is now an accurate or substantially accurate harmonic of the intermediate. This results, for example, in a reaction that is catalyzed at a faster rate. Thus, the Stark effect can be used to obtain more efficient energy transport by frequency matching (ie frequency adaptation, energy transport).

  If the reaction normally proceeds only at moderate rates, a number of “solutions” have involved subjecting the crystallization reaction system to extremely high pressures. The high pressure causes a broadening of the spectral pattern, which improves the energy transport due to the resonance frequency adaptation. By understanding the underlying catalytic mechanism of action, the high-pressure system can be replaced by a simple electric field that causes, for example, expansion. This is not only low cost for industrial manufacturers, but can also be safer to manufacture, for example due to the removal of high pressure equipment.

  Some reactants do not react very quickly when mixed together, but they react fairly rapidly when an electric field is applied. The prior art mentions that such reactions are catalyzed by an electric field, and the equation is as follows:

(Where E is the electric field). In this case, rather than applying catalyst “C” (above) to obtain product “D + F”, an electric field “E” may be applied. In this case, the electric field is applied to the crystallization reaction system so that the frequency becomes resonant and the reaction can proceed along the desired reaction path (ie, energy is transported when the frequency is matched). It works by changing the spectral frequency (or spectral pattern) of one or more components. Understood in this way, the electric field becomes just another tool for changing the spectral frequency of atoms and molecules, thereby affecting the reaction rate in spectral chemistry.

  The reaction pathway is also important. In the absence of an electric field, the reaction pathway proceeds to a set of products:

  However, when an electric field is applied, the spectral frequency can change so that at some specific intensity of the field, different intermediates are energized and the reaction proceeds in different reaction paths:

This is similar to the concept previously discussed herein for the formation of products that vary with temperature. Changes in temperature cause changes in spectral frequency, and therefore different reaction paths are preferred at different temperatures. Similarly, the electric field causes a change in spectral frequency, and therefore different reaction paths are selected by different electric fields. By adjusting the electric field to a specific crystallization reaction system, not only the reaction rate but also the reaction product produced can be controlled.

  The ability to adapt the reaction by changing the strength of the electric field with or without a physical catalyst must be useful in many manufacturing situations. For example, it depends on which product is desired to build only one physical setting for the crystallization reaction system and to change reaction mechanics and product using one or more electric fields It can be more cost effective. This saves expensive costs by having separate physical settings for the production of each group of products.

  Along with changing the strength of the electric field, the frequency of the electric field can also be changed. Assume that the reaction proceeds at a very fast rate when a specific strong static electric field (ie direct current) is applied as follows:

  However, further assume that due to the design and location of the reactor, it is very easy to deliver a time-varying electric field using alternating current. For example, a very low frequency field with a 60 Hz wall exit can produce a normal or static Stark effect. The reactor is therefore adapted to a 60 Hz electric field and undergoes the same increase in reaction rate that occurs using a static electric field.

  If certain physical catalysts produce spectral frequencies that are close to the intermediate frequency, but not exactly, the activity of the physical catalyst in the past may have been improved by using high temperatures. As previously disclosed herein, the high temperature actually broadens the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst to at least partially match the frequency of the physical catalyst to the at least one intermediate. What is significant here is that high temperature boilers are minimized and eliminated altogether, and instead a moderate frequency electric field, e.g. extending the spectral frequency, can be used. For example, a frequency of about 100 KHz, which is equivalent to a typical linewidth frequency at room temperature, broadens substantially all the spectral curves and adapts the physical catalyst spectral curves to those of the required intermediates, for example. . Thus, the electric field can cause the material to behave as if the temperature had risen even if it was not a layer (as well as any spectral manipulation that causes a change in spectral linewidth (eg, electric field acoustics, heterodyne, etc.) Can make the substance act as if it had been changed).

  The periodic division of the Stark frequency can be adjusted by the electric field frequency or its first harmonic (ie, the primary Stark effect is adjusted by the electric field frequency, while the secondary Stark effect is adjusted by the second electric field frequency) ). Assuming that a metal platinum catalyst is used for the hydrogen reaction, it is desirable to stimulate the 2.7 MHz hyperfine frequency of the hydrogen atoms. Earlier in this specification it was disclosed that electromagnetic radiation could be used to deliver a 2.7 MHz frequency. However, the use of an alternating electric field at 2.7 MHz can be used instead. Because platinum is a metal and conducts electricity well, it can be considered part of an alternating circuit. Platinum exhibits the Stark effect, with all frequencies splitting at a rate of 2.7 MHz. In a sufficiently strong electric field, additional transition frequencies or “sidebands” occur with regular spacing equal to the electric field frequency. There are a number of splitting frequencies in the platinum atom, which is a 2.7 MHz heterodyne. This bulk heterodyned output can stimulate a hydrogen hyperfine frequency of 2.7 MHz and direct the reaction.

  Another way to achieve this reaction is, of course, to completely exclude platinum from the reaction. The 2.7 MHz field has a resonant Stark effect on separate and individual platinum catalysts of hydrogen. Copper is usually not catalytic to hydrogen, but copper can be used to build a reaction vessel such as a Stark waveguide to energize the hydrogen. The Stark waveguide is used to perform Stark spectroscopy analysis. It is shown as Figures 61a and 61b. In particular, FIG. 61a shows the construction of a Stark waveguide, while FIG. 61b shows the field distribution in the Stark waveguide. The electric field is delivered through the conductive plate. The reaction vessel is made for gas flow and uses an economical metal, such as copper, for the conductive plate. When 2.7 MHz alternating current is delivered to a copper conducting plate via an electrical connection, the copper spectral frequency, none of which specifically resonates with hydrogen, exhibits a Stark effect with normal division. The Stark frequency is divided at a rate of 2.7 MHz. With sufficiently strong electric field strength, additional sidebands appear in the copper, with regular spacing of 2.7 MHz (ie, heterodyne), and Stark splitting or heterodyne matches the hydrogen frequency. A number of copper splitting frequencies resonate indirectly with the hydrogen hyperfine frequency to direct the reaction (ie, when the frequency is balanced and energy is transported).

  Stark resonances can be used with transition level frequencies, with high performance equipment and a good understanding of specific systems. For example, assuming that a specific reaction pathway is achieved, the molecule needs to be stimulated with a transition level frequency of 500 MHz. By delivering a 500 MHz electric field to the molecule, this resonant electric field can cause the molecule to oscillate back and forth between two levels at a rate of 500 MHz. This electrically creates a state for optical amplitude (ie, a laser with multiple high energy level stimuli), and arbitrarily added electromagnetic radiation at this frequency is amplified by the molecule. Thus, the electric field can replace the laser action of the physical catalyst.

In short, by understanding the underlying spectral mechanism of a chemical reaction, the electric field can be generated by modifying spectral features such as at least one participant and / or one or more components in a crystallization reaction system. It can be used as yet another tool for catalyzing and modifying the chemical reactions and / or reaction pathways. Thus, another tool can be utilized to mimic the catalytic mechanism of the reaction.
As discussed above, as with other spectral frequencies, control of resonant energy exchange by manipulating magnetic fields can be used in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

In magnetic field spectral terminology, magnetic fields behave like electric fields in their action. In particular, for example, atomic and molecular spectral frequency lines can be split and moved by a magnetic field. In this case, the external magnetic field from the outside of the atom or molecule interacts with the electric and magnetic fields that are already inside the atom or molecule.

  This action of the external magnetic field on the spectral lines is called the “Zeeman effect” in honor of its discoverer, the German physicist Pieter Zeeman. In 1896, Zeeman discovered that when the flame was held between strong magnetic poles, the yellow flame spectroscopic “D” line of sodium was magnified. It was later discovered that the apparent broadening of the sodium spectral lines was actually due to their splitting and shifting. Zeeman's initial observations developed into a separate branch of spectroscopic methods for studying atomic and molecular structures by measuring changes in their spectral lines caused by magnetic fields. This then evolved into nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy and magnetic resonance imaging used in medicine, and laser magnetic resonance and electron spin resonance spectroscopy used in physics and chemistry.

The Zeeman effect for the famous sodium “D” line is shown in FIGS. 62a and 62b. FIG. 62a shows the Zeeman effect for the sodium “D” line, while FIG. 62b shows a graph of the energy level for the transition in the Zeeman effect for the sodium “D” line. The “D” line is traditionally said to result from a transition between 3p ² P and 3s ² S electron orbitals. As shown, each single spectral frequency is divided into two or more slightly different frequencies centered around the original undivided frequency.

  In the Zeeman effect, the amount by which the spectral frequency is divided depends on the strength of the applied magnetic field. FIG. 63 shows the Zeeman splitting effect for oxygen atoms as a function of magnetic field. In the absence of a magnetic field, two single frequencies are observed at zero and 4.8. If the magnetic field is low strength (eg 0.2 Tesla), a slight division and movement of the first two frequency books is observed. However, when the magnetic field is increased, the frequency is gradually divided and moved.

The degree of splitting and moving in Zeeman effect is due to the magnetic field strength is shown in Figure 64 with respect to the ³ P state silicon.

  As with the Stark effect generated from an external electric field, the Zeeman effect generated from an external magnetic field varies slightly depending on whether an atom or molecule is subjected to the magnetic field. The Zeeman effect on atoms can be divided into three different magnetic field strengths: weak; medium; and strong. When the magnetic field strength is weak, the spectral frequency is shifted and the amount divided is very small. Movement from the initial spectral frequency still stimulates the movement frequency. This is because they are close to the initial spectral frequency so that they are well within the resonance curve. Similarly with respect to segmentation, it is even smaller than the normal hyperfine segmentation. This means that in a weak magnetic field, there is only a very small division of the spectral frequency that moves to a very low division frequency in the low region of the radio spectrum and falls to a very low frequency region. For example, the Zeeman splitting frequency for hydrogen atoms caused by the earth's magnetic field is about 30 KHz. Larger atoms have lower frequencies in the low kilohertz region and even in the hertz region of the electromagnetic spectrum.

  In the absence of a magnetic field, atoms can be stimulated by using direct resonance by spectral frequency, or by using their fine or hyperfine division frequencies in the infrared-microwave or microwave-radio wave region, respectively. By simply adding a very weak magnetic field, atoms can be stimulated with lower or very low frequencies matching the Zeeman splitting frequency. Thus, by simply using a weak magnetic field, the spectral catalyst range can be extended even lower to the radio frequency range. The weak magnetic field from the Earth causes atomic Zeeman splitting in the hertz and kilohertz range. This means that all atoms, including biological organisms, are sensitive to EM frequencies in hertz and kilohertz by being subjected to the earth's magnetic field.

  There is a very strong magnetic field at the other end of the magnetic field strength. In this case, the splitting and shifting of spectral frequencies is very extensive. For this wide movement of frequency, the difference between the split frequencies is much greater than the difference between the hyperfine split frequencies. This moves to the Zeeman effect division frequency at a frequency higher than the hyperfine division frequency. This division occurs approximately around the microwave region. As with the weak magnetic field, the addition of a strong magnetic field does not extend the reach of the electromagnetic spectrum at one extreme or the other extreme, but it still remains some more that can be used in the microwave region. Provides possible spectral catalyst frequency options.

  The case of moderate field strength is more complicated. The movement and splitting caused by the Zeeman effect from a moderate magnetic field is almost equal to hyperfine splitting. Although not extensively considered in the prior art, applying a moderate magnetic field to an atom can produce a Zeeman split that is substantially equivalent to its hyperfine split. This shows an interesting possibility. A method for directing atoms in a chemical reaction by stimulating the atoms with a hyperfine splitting frequency has been previously disclosed herein. The Zeeman effect provides a way to achieve a similar effect without introducing any spectral frequencies. For example, by introducing a moderate magnetic field, resonances that stimulate and / or energize and / or stabilize the atoms can be set in the atoms themselves.

  The moderate magnetic field causes a low frequency Zeeman split that balances and thus energizes the low frequency hyperfine splitting frequency in the atom. However, the low hyperfine splitting frequency actually corresponds to the heterodyned difference between the two vibration or fine structure frequencies. When the hyperfine splitting frequency is stimulated, two electrical frequencies are ultimately stimulated. This in turn makes the atom stimulated, for example. Thus, the Zeeman effect allows catalytic energy stimulation of an atom by exposing the atom to a magnetic field of the correct strength, and the use of a spectral EM frequency is not necessary (ie, energy is transferred as long as the frequency is matched). ). The possibility is quite interesting because the inert whole reaction system suddenly becomes active when the appropriate moderate strength magnetic field is applied.

  There is also a difference between the “normal” Zeeman effect and the “abnormal” Zeeman effect. For the “normal” Zeeman effect, the spectral frequency is divided into three frequencies by the magnetic field, with the predicted identical spacing between them (FIG. 65a showing the “normal” Zeeman effect and FIG. 65b showing the “abnormal” Zeeman effect. reference). One of the new split frequencies is higher than the initial frequency, and the other new split frequency is lower than the initial frequency. Both new frequencies are divided at the same distance from the original frequency. Thus, the difference between the upper and original and the lower and original frequencies is approximately the same. This means that in terms of heterodyne differences, at most two new heterodyned differences exist for the normal Zeeman effect. The primary heterodyne or split difference is the difference between one of the new split frequencies and the initial frequency. The other split difference is between the new split frequencies above and below. It is, of course, twice the frequency difference between the upper or lower frequency and the initial frequency.

  In many cases, the Zeeman split generated by the magnetic field results in splits that have more than three frequencies or are spaced differently than expected. This is called the “abnormal” Zeeman effect (see FIGS. 65 and 66: FIG. 66 shows the anomalous Zeeman effect for zinc 3p → 3s).

  Furthermore, if there are exactly three frequencies and the Zeeman effect is abnormal because the spacing is different from the prediction, the situation is similar to the normal effect. However, there are at most two new division frequencies that can be used. However, there are many more fully modified situations where the effect is unusual because more than three frequencies are generated. Assume the simple case where four Zeeman split frequencies are observed (see FIGS. 67a and 67b). FIG. 67a shows four Zeeman split frequencies and FIG. 67b shows four new heterodyned differences.

  In this example of anomalous Zeeman splitting, there are a total of four frequencies where one frequency exists only once. For clarity, the new Zeeman frequencies are labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. The frequencies 3 and 4 are also divided by the same difference “w”. Thus, “w” is the heterodyned division frequency. The frequencies 2 and 3 are also divided by different quantities “x”. So far, there are two heterodyned split frequencies as in the normal Zeeman effect.

  However, frequencies 1 and 3 are divided by a third quantity “y”, where “y” is the sum of “w” and “x”. The frequencies 2 and 4 are also divided by the same third quantity “y”. Finally, frequencies 1 and 4 are further separated by the quantity “z”. Furthermore, “z” is the total amount of the sum “w + x + w”. The result is therefore four heterodyned frequencies at anomalous Zeeman cost: w, x, y and z.

  If there are six frequencies indicated by the anomalous Zeeman effect, more heterodyning differences are observed. The anomalous Zeeman effect thus gives much greater flexibility in frequency selection when compared to the normal Zeeman effect. In the normal Zeeman effect, the initial frequency is divided into three evenly spaced frequencies, for a total of exactly two heterodyned frequencies. In the anomalous Zeeman effect, the initial frequency is divided into four or more non-uniformly spaced frequencies, with at least four or more heterodyned frequencies.

  Similar Zeeman effects can occur in molecules. The molecule provides three basic manifolds: ferromagnetism, paramagnetism and diamagnetism. Ferromagnetic molecules are typical magnets. Such materials typically hold a strong magnetic field and consist of magnetic elements such as iron, cobalt and nickel.

  Paramagnetic molecules retain only weak magnetic fields. When a paramagnetic material is placed in an external magnetic field, the magnetic motion of the molecules of the material is aligned in the same direction as the external magnetic field. Here, the magnetic motion of the molecule is a direction in which the magnetic field of the molecule itself is weighted. In particular, the magnetic motion of a molecule tilts to either side of the molecule, which is heavier loaded with respect to its own field. Thus, paramagnetic molecules are typically in the same direction as the externally applied magnetic field. Because paramagnetic materials align with an external magnetic field, they are also weakly attracted to the source of the magnetic field.

Common paramagnetic elements include oxygen, aluminum, sodium, magnesium, calcium and potassium. Stable molecules such as oxygen (O ₂ ) and nitric oxide (NO) are also paramagnetic. Molecular oxygen makes up about 20% of the Earth's atmosphere. Both molecules play an important role in biological organisms. In addition, unstable molecules, more commonly known as free radicals, chemical reaction intermediates or plasmas, are also paramagnetic. Paramagnetic ions include hydrogen, manganese, chromium, iron, cobalt and nickel. A number of paramagnetic substances occur in biological organisms. For example, the blood that flows through our veins is an ionic solution containing red blood cells. Red blood cells contain hemoglobin, which in turn contains ionized iron. Hemoglobin, and therefore red blood cells, is paramagnetic. In addition, hydrogen ions can be found in many organic compounds and reactants. For example, hydrochloric acid in the stomach contains hydrogen ions. Almost all biological organism energy systems, adenosine triphosphate (ATP), require hydrogen and manganese to function properly. Therefore, nothing but life itself depends on paramagnetic substances.

  On the other hand, diamagnetic molecules are stocked with moments that are rejected by the magnetic field and that are away from the direction of the external magnetic field and that they have little magnetic. Diamagnetic materials typically do not retain a magnetic field. Examples of diamagnetic elements include hydrogen, helium, neon, argon, carbon, nitrogen, phosphorus, chlorine, copper, zinc, silver, gold, lead and mercury. Diamagnetic molecules include water, most gases, organic compounds and salts such as sodium chloride. The salt is actually just a crystal of diamagnetic ions. Examples of diamagnetic ions include lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, ammonium and sulfate ions. Ionic crystals are usually readily soluble in water, for example ionic aqueous solutions are also diamagnetic. Biological organisms meet the requirements of diamagnetic materials because they are carbon-based forms of life. In addition, the blood flowing through our veins is an ionic solution containing blood cells. The ionic solution (plasma) consists of water molecules, sodium ions, potassium ions, chloride ions and organic protein compounds. Therefore our blood is a diamagnetic solution containing diamagnetic blood cells.

  Regarding the Zeeman effect, first consider the case of paramagnetic molecules. As with atoms, effects can be classified based on magnetic field strength. If the external magnetic field applied to the paramagnetic molecule is weak, the Zeeman effect results in splitting into equally spaced levels. In most cases, the amount of splitting is directly proportional to the strength of the magnetic field, ie the “first order” effect. The general rule of thumb is that one (1) Oersted (ie, slightly larger than the Earth's magnetic field) field results in an approximately 1.4 MHz Zeeman splitting in paramagnetic molecules. The weaker the magnetic field, the narrower the division that occurs at lower frequencies. A strong magnetic field produces a wider split at high frequencies. In these primary Zeeman effects, there is usually only splitting, and no initial or central frequency shift is observed, as was the case with the Zeeman effect on atoms.

  In many paramagnetic molecules, a secondary effect in which Zeeman splitting is proportional to the square of the magnetic field strength is also observed. In these cases, the split is very small and has a very low frequency. In addition to splitting, the initial or central frequency moves in the atoms as they do in proportion to the magnetic field strength.

  Sometimes the direction of the magnetic field with respect to the molecular orientation makes a difference. For example, the π frequency is associated with a magnetic field parallel to the excitation electromagnetic field, while the σ frequency is found when it is perpendicular. Both π and σ frequencies exist with a circularly polarized electromagnetic field. A typical Zeeman splitting pattern for paramagnetic molecules in two different transitions is shown in FIGS. 68a and 68b. The π frequency is observed when ΔM = 0 and is above the long horizontal line. When a paramagnetic molecule is placed in a weak magnetic field, circular deflection excites both sets of frequencies in the molecule. Thus, any set of frequencies excited in the molecule can be controlled by controlling its orientation with respect to the magnetic field.

  When the magnetic field strength is intermediate, the interaction between the magnetic moment of the paramagnetic molecule and the externally applied magnetic field produces a Zeeman effect equivalent to other frequencies and energies in the molecule. For example, Zeeman splitting is close to the rotational frequency and disrupts the end-over-end rotational motion of the molecule. Zeeman splitting and energy are either unique or large enough to move the molecular spin away from its molecular axis.

  When the magnetic field is very strong, the nuclear magnetic moment spin deviates from the molecular momentum. In this case, the Zeeman effect overwhelms the hyperfine structure and has a very high energy at a very high frequency. In the spectrum of molecules exposed to strong magnetic fields, hyperfine splitting appears as a small variation of Zeeman splitting.

Next, consider the Zeeman effect in so-called “ordinary molecules” or diamagnetic molecules. Most molecules have a diamagnetic manifold and therefore have the designation “ordinary”. This includes, of course, most organic molecules found in biological organisms. A diamagnetic molecule has a rotating magnetic moment from the rotation of a positively charged nucleus, and this magnetic moment of the nucleus is only about 1/1000 that from a paramagnetic molecule. This means that the energy from Zeeman splitting in diamagnetic molecules is much less than the energy from Zeeman splitting in paramagnetic molecules. The equation for Zeeman energy in diamagnetic molecules is shown below:
Hz = − (g _j J = g ₁ I). βH ₀
(Where J is the molecular rotational angular momentum, I is the nuclear spin angular momentum, g _j is the rotational g factor, and g ₁ is the nuclear spin g factor). This Zeeman energy is much lower than the paramagnetic Zeeman energy and has a much lower frequency. In terms of frequency, it falls within the hertz and kilohertz regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

  Finally, consider the meaning of Zeeman splitting for catalysts and chemical reactions, and for spectral chemistry. Weak magnetic fields produce Hertz and Kilohertz Zeeman splitting in atoms and secondary effects in paramagnetic molecules. Virtually any type of magnetic field results in Hertz and kilohertz Zeeman splitting in diamagnetic molecules. All these atoms and molecules then become sensitive to radio waves and very low frequency (VLF) electromagnetic waves. Atoms and molecules absorb radio waves and VLF energy and become stimulated to a greater or lesser extent. This can be used, for example, to add spectral energy to a specific molecule or intermediate in a chemical crystallization reaction system. For example, for hydrogen and oxygen gas diversion to water over a platinum catalyst, hydrogen atom radicals are important to maintain the reaction. In the Earth's weak magnetic field, the Zeeman split for hydrogen is about 30 KHz. Thus, hydrogen atoms in a crystallization reaction system can be energized by applying to them a Zeeman splitting frequency for hydrogen (eg 30 KHz). Energy application to hydrogen atoms in the crystallization reaction system replicates the action mechanism of platinum and catalyzes the reaction. If the reaction is moved out of the atmosphere away from the Earth's weak magnetic field, hydrogen no longer has a 30 KHz Zeeman splitting frequency, and 30 KHz no longer effectively catalyzes the reaction.

  The numerous materials on this planet exhibit Zeeman splitting of the Hertz and Kilohertz regions by being in the Earth's weak magnetic field. This is true for biologics, organic materials, and inorganic or inanimate materials. Humans consist of a wide variety of atoms, diamagnetic molecules and second-effect paramagnetic molecules. All these atoms and molecules are present in the earth's weak magnetism. All these atoms and molecules in humans have a Zeeman split in the hertz and kilohertz regions because they are present in the earth's magnetic field. Biochemical and biocatalytic processes in humans are therefore sensitive to hertz and kilohertz electromagnetic radiation due to the fact that they exist in the Earth's weak magnetic fields. As long as humans continue to exist on this planet, they are subjected to spectral energy catalysis from Hertz and kilohertz EM waves due to the Zeeman effect from the planet's magnetic field. This has significant implications for low frequency communication and chemical and biochemical reactions, disease diagnosis and treatment.

  A strong magnetic field results in a division greater than the hyperfine frequencies in the microwave and infrared regions of the EM spectrum in atoms and paramagnetic molecules. In the hydrogen / oxygen reaction, a strong field is added to the crystallization reaction system, sending MHz and / or GHz frequencies to the reaction and energizing the hydroxy radical and the hydrogen reaction intermediate. When catalyzing a reaction using physical platinum, the application of a particular magnetic field strength is divided in a way that matches more frequencies than without a magnetic field, and the platinum and reaction intermediate spectra with shifted frequencies Both can occur. In this way, Zeeman splitting can be used to improve the effectiveness of the physical catalyst by copying its mechanism of action (ie, more frequencies are matched and thus more energy is transferred).

  A moderate magnetic field causes Zeeman splitting in atoms and paramagnetic molecules at frequencies equivalent to hyperfine and rotational splitting frequencies. This means that the crystallization reaction system can be energized without the addition of electromagnetic energy. Similarly, increasing the reaction occurs by placing the crystallization reaction system in a moderate magnetic field that produces hyperfine or Zeeman splitting equal to rotational splitting. For example, by using a magnetic field that causes hyperfine or rotational splitting in hydrogen and oxygen gases consistent with Zeeman splitting on hydrogen atoms or hydroxy radicals, hydrogen or hydroxy intermediates are energized and proceed through a reaction cascade. , Produce water. By using a moderately tuned moderate magnetic field, the magnetic field can be used to change the reactants into a catalyst for their own reaction without the addition of the physical catalyst platinum or platinum spectral catalyst. obtain. The magnetic field simply replicates the mechanism of action of platinum, but has the situation that the reaction is catalyzed only by the applied magnetic field.

Finally, consider the direction of the magnetic field with respect to the molecular orientation. If the magnetic field is parallel to the excitation electromagnetic field, a π frequency is generated. If the magnetic field is orthogonal to the excitation electromagnetic field, the σ frequency is found. Assuming that there is an industrial chemical crystallization reaction system using the same (or similar) starting reactants, the objective is to be able to optionally produce different products. By using a magnetic field combined with spectral energy or a physical catalyst, the reaction can be directed to one set or another. For the first set of products, the electromagnetic excitation is oriented parallel to the magnetic field to produce a set of π frequencies, which results in the first set of products. To achieve a different product, the direction of the magnetic field is changed so that it is orthogonal to the excitation electromagnetic field. This results in different sets of sigma frequencies and different reaction paths are energized, thus producing different sets of products. Therefore, according to the present invention, the specificity of many crystallization reaction systems can be fine-tuned using magnetic field effects, Zeeman splitting, splitting and spectral energy catalysts.
As discussed above, as with other spectral frequencies, control of resonant energy exchange by manipulating magnetic fields can be used in crystallization reaction systems to achieve desired results.

  In short, by understanding the underlying spectral mechanism for chemical reactions, the magnetic field catalyzes those chemical reactions by modifying the spectral characteristics of at least one participant and / or at least one component in the overall reaction system. And can be used as yet another tool for modification.

Reaction vessel and conditioning Reaction vessel size, shape and composition An important consideration in the use of spectral chemistry is the reaction vessel size, shape and composition. The reaction vessel size and shape can assign the vessel's NOF to various wave energies (eg, electromagnetic, acoustic, current, etc.). This in turn affects the overall reaction system kinetics. For example, a particularly small bench top reaction vessel may have an electromagnetic NOF of 1,420 MHz for a 25 cm dimension. When reactions with atomic hydrogen intermediates are carried out in a small bench top reaction, the reaction proceeds rapidly due in part to the fact that the reaction vessel and hydrogen hyperfine resolution frequency are matched (1,420 MHz). This resonates the reaction vessel and the hydrogen intermediate, thus transferring energy to the intermediate and promoting the reaction path.

  When the reaction is scaled up for large scale industrial production, the reaction takes place in a very large reaction vessel using, for example, 100 MHz electromagnetic NOF. The reaction proceeds at a slow rate because the reaction vessel is no longer resonating with the hydrogen intermediate. This deficiency in large reaction vessels can be compensated, for example, by replenishing reactions with 1,420 MHz radiation and thereby restoring faster reaction rates.

  Similarly, the reaction vessel (or conditioning reaction vessel) composition may play a similar role in the crystallization reaction system kinetics. For example, a stainless steel bench top reaction vessel produces a vibration frequency that resonates with the vibration frequency of the reactant, thus facilitating the dissociation of the reactant into, for example, a reactive intermediate. If the reaction is scaled up for industrial production, it can be placed, for example, in a ceramic-clad metal reaction vessel. New reaction vessels typically do not generate reactant vibration frequencies and the reaction proceeds at a slower rate. Once again, this deficiency in the new reaction vessel caused by its different composition can be caused by returning the reaction to a stainless steel vessel, or supplementing the reactant oscillation frequency in a ceramic-clad vessel and / or a crystallization reaction system, for example. Compensation can be achieved by conditioning the reaction vessel with the appropriate conditioning energy before some or all of the other components are introduced into the reaction vessel.

  Here, all aspects of spectral chemistry discussed above (resonance, targeting, activity inhibitors, cocatalysts, support materials, electric and magnetic fields etc., both intrinsic and extrinsic for all reaction system components, etc. ) Should be understood to apply to the reaction vessel (or conditioning reaction vessel) as well as to any participant (or conditioning participant) placed therein, for example. The reaction vessel (or conditioning reaction vessel) can be composed of a material (eg, stainless steel, plastic, glass and / or ceramic, etc.) or it can be comprised of a field or energy (eg, magnetic bottle, shading device, etc.). A reaction vessel (or conditioning reaction vessel) interacts with other components in the overall reaction system and / or with at least one participant by possessing unique properties such as frequency, wave and / or field. obtain. Similarly, some of them may interact with the whole reaction system, but where the reaction does not actually take place, a holding vessel, conduit, etc. interacts with one or more components in the whole reaction system, And they can potentially affect them positively or graduately. Thus, when a reaction vessel is referred to, it should be understood that all parts associated with it can also participate in the desired reaction.

実施例５ｂ：
回転周波数を用いた塩化ナトリウム結晶化
「Microwave Spectroscopy: C.H. Townes and A.L.Schawlow, Dover Publ. Inc., New York」から、塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）に関する6536.86 Mcという回転定数Ｂｅを得た。この実験に用いられた回転周波数は、2XＢｅまたは13.07372 GHzであると算定した。
1000 mlパイレックスビーカー中の蒸留水（約800 ml）を約55℃に加熱し、アンビエント蛍光照明下でもはや溶解しなくなるまでＮａＣｌを付加する（約250〜300 g）ことにより、飽和塩化ナトリウム溶液を調製した。ビーカーを黒色プラスチック中に包み込み、戸棚に保存して、一晩（約15時間）平衡させた。飽和溶液を室温（22℃）で結晶上で濾過した。
飽和ＮａＣｌ溶液（約100 ml）を、Ｇ〜Ｎと標識した8つの結晶化皿の各々にピペット分取した。2つの結晶化皿ＧおよびＨをインキュベーター（約28℃に設定）中に入れた；2つの結晶化皿ＨおよびＩを、28〜30℃（8.2 mW/cm²）で、図９４に示したようにナトリウムランプ１１２下に置いた；2つの結晶化皿ＫおよびＬを約25℃でマイクロ波照射のために遮蔽暗囲い中に置いた；そして2つの対照結晶化皿ＭおよびＮを約25℃で遮蔽暗囲い中に置いた。マイクロ波場を、空気を介してマイクロ波皿Ｋの外側と結合した。マイクロ波皿Ｌを、マイクロ波電磁ホーンと一列にマイクロ波皿Ｋに隣接して置いた。マイクロ波をパラメーターＳ₁₁で設定し、13.073719から13.073721 GHzまでスイープした。溶液を約18時間結晶化させた。
皿Ｇ〜Ｎの各々における全結晶重量を確定した。
結果：遮蔽暗囲い中の塩化ナトリウム回転マイクロ波周波数を用いた照射は、遮蔽暗囲い中での対照と比較して、塩化ナトリウム結晶化を抑制した。
ナトリウムランプスペクトル電子照射は、同一周囲室温での対照と比較して、結晶化を増強した。

実施例５ｃ：
回転周波数を用いた塩化ナトリウムの結晶化
「Microwave Spectroscopy: C.H. Townes and A.L.Schawlow, Dover Publ. Inc., New York」から、塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）に関する6536.86 Mcという回転定数Ｂｅを得た。この実験に用いられた回転周波数は、2XＢｅまたは13.07372 GHzであると算定した。
1000 mlパイレックスビーカー中の蒸留水（約800 ml）を約55℃に加熱し、アンビエント蛍光照明下でもはや溶解しなくなるまでＮａＣｌを付加する（約250〜300 g）ことにより、飽和塩化ナトリウム溶液を調製した。ビーカーを黒色プラスチック中に包み込み、戸棚に保存して、一晩（約15時間）平衡させた。飽和溶液を室温（20℃）で結晶上で濾過した。
飽和ＮａＣｌ溶液（約100 ml）を、Ｏ〜Ｒと標識した4つの結晶化皿の各々にピペット分取し、そして85 mlの飽和ＮａＣｌ溶液（約100 ml）を、Ｓ〜Ｖと標識した4つの結晶化皿の各々にピペット分取した。2つの結晶化皿ＯおよびＳをインキュベーター（約28℃に設定）中に入れた；2つの結晶化皿ＰおよびＴを、28〜30℃（8.2 mW/cm²）で、図９４に示したようにナトリウムランプ１１２下に置いた；2つの結晶化皿ＱおよびＵをマイクロ波照射のために遮蔽暗囲い中に置いた；そして2つの対照結晶化皿ＲおよびＶを約25℃で遮蔽暗囲い中に置いた。マイクロ波場を、空気を介してマイクロ波皿Ｏの外側と結合した。マイクロ波皿Ｕを、マイクロ波電磁ホーンと一列にマイクロ波皿Ｏに隣接して置いた。マイクロ波をパラメーターＳ₁₁で設定し、13.073719から13.073721 GHzまでスイープした。周囲温度／囲い温度は全体を通して以下のようであった：
１）インキュベーター対照約28℃；
２）ナトリウムランプ約28℃；
３）マイクロ波照射約25℃；
４）遮蔽囲い対照約25℃。
溶液を約14.5時間結晶化させ、その後、溶液温度を測定した：
１）インキュベーター対照溶液約26℃；
２）ナトリウムランプ溶液約22℃；
３）マイクロ波照射約21℃；
４）遮蔽囲い対照約20℃。
皿Ｏ〜Ｖを約60倍の倍率で顕微鏡写真撮影した（示されていない）。乾燥し、計量することにより、皿Ｏ〜Ｖの各々における全結晶重量を確定した。
結果：遮蔽暗囲い中の塩化ナトリウム回転マイクロ波周波数を用いた照射は、遮蔽暗囲い中での対照と比較して、塩化ナトリウム結晶化を抑制した。
ナトリウムランプスペクトル電子照射は、同一周囲室温での、しかし溶液温度は異なる対照と比較して、結晶化を増強した。ナトリウムランプ溶液は、マイクロ波照射溶液に温度が最も近かった。ナトリウムランプおよびマイクロ波結晶のサイズは本質的には同一であり、そしてナトリウムランプ溶液は、マイクロ波照射を用いた場合よりわずかに暖かく、ナトリウムランプ下で結晶化された塩は約2.5倍であった。

実施例６：
種々のカリウムランプ結晶化実験
ａ）設備および材料
−Bio Whittakerによる滅菌水（限外濾過、逆浸透、脱イオン化および蒸留により調製）。1リットルプラスチック瓶中。
−塩化ナトリウム（Fisher Chemicals） −灰色プラスチック3 kg瓶中に包装。塩化ナトリウムは、結晶形態では、以下のように特性化される：
塩化ナトリウム；保証Ａ．Ｃ．Ｓ．
バリウム（Ｂａ）（約0.001％）−Ｐ．Ｔ．
臭化物（Ｂｒ）−0.01％未満
カルシウム（Ｃａ）0.0002％未満〜0.0007％
塩素酸塩および硝酸塩（ＮＯ₃として）−0.0006％未満〜0.0009％
重金属（例えばＰｂ）−0.2 ppm〜0.4 ppm未満
不溶性物質−0.001％〜0.006％未満
ヨウ化物（Ｉ）−0.0002％未満〜0.0004％
鉄（Ｆｅ）−0.2 ppm未満〜0.4 ppm
マグネシウム（Ｍｇ）−0.0001％未満〜0.0003％
窒素化合物（Ｎとして）−0.0001％未満〜0.0003％
25℃での5％溶液のｐＨ−5.0〜9.0
リン酸塩（ＰＯ₃）−5 ppm未満
カリウム（Ｋ）−0.001％〜0.005％
硫酸塩（ＳＯ₄）−0.003％〜0.004％
−塩化カリウム（Fisher Chemicals） −灰色プラスチック3 kg瓶中に包装。塩化カリウムは、結晶形態では、以下のように特性化される：
塩化カリウム；保証Ａ．Ｃ．Ｓ．
臭化物−0.01％
塩素酸塩および硝酸塩（ＮＯ₃として）−0.003％未満
窒素化合物（Ｎとして）−0.001％未満
リン酸塩−5 ppm未満
硫酸塩−0.001％未満
バリウム−0.001％
カルシウムおよびＲ₂Ｏ₃沈殿物−0.002％未満
重金属（例えばＰｂ）−5 ppm未満
鉄−2 ppm未満
ナトリウム−0.005％未満
マグネシウム−0.001％未満
ヨウ化物−0.002％未満
25℃での5％溶液のｐＨ−5.4〜8.6
不溶性物質−0.005％未満
−フンボルトブンゼンバーナー（コールマンプロパン燃料）。
−ナトリウムランプ。Stonco 70ワット高圧ナトリウム・防護壁ランプ。ハウジングから光を投光するパラボラアルミニウム反射鏡、ならびにナトリウム電球周囲に取り付けられた均一直径（約1.8 cm）周囲に形成された遠位端を有するアルミ箔円錐形光誘導装置を装備。ナトリウムは、垂直に配向された電球を有して頭上に据え付けられ、電球の先端は結晶化皿から約15インチ（約38 cm）であった。
−カリウムランプ（Thermo Oriel）、10 Wスペクトル線カリウムランプ#65070で、Thermo Orielランプ台#65160およびThermo Orielスペクトルランプ電源#65150を伴う。カリウムランプを、水平に配向し、結晶化皿から約9インチ（約23 cm）に水平に配向された電球を用いて頭上に取り付けた。
−結晶化皿（パイレックス容量270 ml、Corning 3140、Ace Glass 8465-12）。
ｂ）溶液の調製
水を、ブンゼンバーナーで室温から約55℃に加熱した。塩を溶液に付加し、これを、塩がそれ以上溶解しなくなるまで、ガラス撹拌棒で撹拌した。溶液を一晩（約18時間）平衡させた後、結晶化手法に用いるためにデカントし、濾過した。
実施例６ａ：
古典的ＫＣｌ溶液を濾過し、約100 mlを9つの結晶化皿の各々に入れた。皿＃１〜３をカリウムランプ下で暗遮蔽室中に置いた。戸棚遮蔽体をカリウムランプと皿＃４〜６の間に置き、次に極低レベルのアンビエントカリウムスペクトルのみを施した。皿＃７〜９を、頭上アンビエント蛍光照明を用いて別の部屋のカウンターの上に置いた。
結果：対照結晶は小立方体結晶を成長させた（図９８ｗ参照）。溶液を低アンビエントカリウムランプ光に曝露すると、多少の双晶を示す約25個の結晶が成長した。ほとんどの結晶は約3〜5 mm立方体であったが、最大結晶（約12 mm立方体）を図９８ｘおよび図９８ｙに示す。カリウムランプ下の溶液は、約15個の大型結晶を成長させ、立方体、三角棒状、多結晶塊および双晶化結晶を有した（図９８ｚおよび９８ａａ参照）。
実施例６ｂ：
古典的ＮａＣｌ溶液を濾過し、約100 mlを3つの結晶化皿の各々に入れた。皿＃１を、カリウムランプ下で暗遮蔽室中に置いた。皿＃２は、低アンビエントレベルのカリウムランプのみを用いて戸棚遮蔽体の後に置いた。皿＃３は、蛍光灯下でオフィス内に置いた。
結果：皿は全て、小立方体結晶を生じた：カリウムランプ下の皿＃１中に約2.8 g；アンビエントカリウムランプ光を用いた皿＃２中に約0.6 g；そして蛍光灯下の皿＃３中に約0.89 g。
実施例６ｃ：
古典的ＫＣｌ溶液を濾過し、約100 mlを8つの結晶化皿の各々に入れた。皿＃１〜３を、カリウムランプ下で暗遮蔽室中に置いた。皿＃４〜６を、ナトリウムランプ下で同一暗遮蔽室中に置いた。戸棚遮蔽体をカリウムおよびナトリウムランプ間に置いて、交差照明を防止した。皿＃８を、蛍光頭上光下約40インチ（約1.12 mW/cm²）でオフィス内のファイル戸棚上に置いた。
結果：
異なる結晶サイズおよび形態学的知見が観察された：
１）カリウムランプ−いくつかの立方体および双晶化ホッパー、カリウム電球の主要部分の下で成長した最大結晶に関する長さは約1.6×1.6×0.7 cmであった；
２）ナトリウムランプ−立方体および双晶化ホッパー、多数の棒状およびガラスシート、約2×2×1 cmの長さの最大結晶が、ナトリウム電球の真下で成長した（図９８ａｂおよび図９８ａｃ参照）；
３）箔バケット−成長なし；ならびに
４）蛍光オフィス−多数の小立方体、約2〜3 mm、2〜3の棒状体およびシート。
平均重量／皿を、以下に示す：１）カリウムランプ、約1.5 g；２）ナトリウムランプ、約2.9 g；３）箔バケット、0.0 g；および６）蛍光オフィス、約0.97 g。
実施例７：
ナトリウムスペクトルパターンによるＮａＣｌ／水溶液中の測定ｐＨの増大
本実施例は、水中に結晶塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）を溶解することによりコンディショニングエネルギー（ナトリウムランプ）を用いてコンディショニング可能関与体（蒸留水）をコンディショニングし、そしてｐＨ変化をモニタリングする効果を実証する。   The invention will be more clearly read and better understood from the following specific examples.
  Example 1:
  Enhanced growth of sodium chloride crystals
  This example shows that the application of electromagnetic energy from a commercial 70 watt high pressure sodium bulb to a saturated solution of sodium chloride enhances the growth of NaCl crystals. In particular, as schematically shown in FIG. 88, the glass beaker 200 is divided substantially in half vertically by a partition or membrane 201. The partition or membrane 201 is not completely liquid resistant in that it contacts the glass beaker 200. Thus, the ions could move around and / or directly under the membrane 201 to allow a substantially equivalent ion concentration at any point in the beaker 200. However, the membrane 201 itself was substantially impermeable to visible light frequencies. In particular, membrane 201 consisted of a paper backing acetate material similar to that used to create overhead project transparency. A saturated sodium chloride solution 202 was prepared by known conventional techniques. In particular, add distilled and deionized water to about 45 ° C and add sodium chloride crystals from Fisher Chemicals (ACS guarantee, discussed later in this specification) until no further dissolution of sodium chloride crystals occurs did. The liquid was then decanted and filtered from any remaining undissolved sodium chloride and the resulting solution was placed in a beaker 200.
  A commercial 70 watt high pressure sodium lamp 203 was used to illuminate only the “A” side of the beaker 200 containing the saturated NaCl solution 202. The lamp 203 is manufactured by Philippe and sold under the trademark CERAMALUX. The discharge sodium lamp 203 contained mainly sodium, but also some mercury, as is common for this type of discharge lamp. As shown in FIG. 88, the camera 204 is mounted on a magnifying microscope assembly (not shown) so that both the “A” side and the “B” can be observed from the top of the beaker 200 under a magnification of 2 to 4 times. Arranged at the top.
  The sodium lamp 203 was illuminated only on the “A” side of the beaker 200 while maintaining both the “A” side and “B” saturated solutions 202 at about room temperature. Even if the film 201 is not completely light-resistant, determining the specific position of the light source 203 prevented almost all light entering the “B” side of the beaker 200 in addition to determining the position of the film 201. By using a conventional heating / cooling stage (not shown in FIG. 88), the temperature of the solution 202 was maintained at a constant temperature (room temperature in this example). In addition, all photomicrographs were taken with a computer controlled system that allowed immediate reading of the temperature at the moment the photomicrograph was taken. All crystal growth experiments were performed in a darkened room.
  FIG. 89a shows a crystal 205 (4 × magnification) grown from a saturated solution 202 on the “A” side of the beaker 200 illuminated by the sodium lamp 203 of FIG. FIG. 89 b shows a crystal 205 (4 × magnification) grown from a solution corresponding to the “B” side of the beaker 200. FIG. 89c shows an actual photomicrograph corresponding to a top view (by microscope 204) of a beaker 200 with a divider or membrane 201 forming the “A” and “B” sides. It is clear that the chamber on the “A” side contained a large number of crystals 205, while the chamber on the “B” side showed little similar crystal formation compared to the “A” side. Therefore, the sodium discharge lamp 203 dramatically affected the number, size and morphology of the crystals 205 formed from the saturated solution 202 (more precisely facets, pyramidal crystals).
  Example 2:
  Enhancement of sodium chloride crystal growth
  This example shows that by applying electromagnetic energy from a commercial 70 watt high pressure sodium bulb to a saturated solution of sodium chloride, the growth of NaCl crystals has a similar intensity, but with different wavelengths or frequencies of electromagnetic energy (eg It is shown to be enhanced compared to the crystal growth achieved using (provided by a tungsten light source).
  In particular, FIG. 90 shows a schematic diagram of an assembly similar to that used in Example 1. In particular, slide 206 contained a small amount of a saturated solution of sodium chloride 202 thereon. A saturated sodium chloride solution 202 was prepared by the same conventional technique discussed in Example 1. A small amount of saturated solution 202 was placed on slide 206. As discussed in Example 1, the saturated solution 202 was brought to a temperature of about 45 ° C. Solution 202 was transferred to slide 206 with its temperature raised (eg, about 25-35 ° C.). The same heating / cooling stage as discussed in Example 1 was placed on slide 206. Thereafter, the temperature of the solution 202 was cooled by heating and control channels 311 and 312 that could change the temperature at a rate of about 1 ° C./min.
  A light source 203 containing the same sodium light source discussed in Example 1 and a light source 203 ′ containing a tungsten bulb were sequentially exposed to different solutions 202. In particular, a first sample of saturated solution 202 was cooled from about 30-45 ° C. by experiment at a controlled rate of about 1 ° C./min, while sodium light source 203 was applied to solution 202 on slide 206. Similarly, a second series of samples of saturated solution 202 is cooled from about 30-45 ° C. at the same controlled rate of about 1 ° C./min, while a tungsten light source 203 ′ is irradiated onto solution 202 placed on slide 206. . In this case, a 50-band filter 207 was used, which allowed only light corresponding to wavelengths from about 4225 mm to about 4275 mm to pass. Similarly, a third sample of the saturated solution 202 was cooled from about 30-45 ° C. at the same controlled rate of about 1 ° C./min, while the filtered tungsten light source 203 ′ was irradiated onto the solution 202 placed on the slide 206. In this case, a second 50-band filter 207 'was used, which passed light corresponding to a wavelength between about 6175 and about 6225. In each of these three different saturated solution sample series, the onset of crystallization was monitored and recorded by a computer controlled system, which allowed an immediate reading of the temperature at the moment the picture was taken. It was noted that these solutions can become slightly supersaturated when cooled. However, for comparison, the solutions were at the same temperature and cooled at the same rate. Therefore, the amount of crystallization observed was only a function of the spectral pattern irradiated with the solution.
  FIG. 91a shows a transmission micrograph of NaCl crystal growth that occurred at a temperature of about 20 ° C. The saturated solution was illuminated with a sodium light source 203.
  FIG. 91b shows a transmission micrograph of NaCl crystal growth from a saturated solution obtained at a temperature of about 19 ° C. This saturated solution was illuminated with tungsten light filtered through a band-pass filter 207 (ie, 4224 to 4275).
  FIG. 91c shows a transmission micrograph of NaCl crystal growth from a saturated solution obtained at a temperature of about 19 ° C. This saturated solution was illuminated with tungsten light filtered through a band-pass filter 207 '(i.e., 6175 to 6225).
  From a comparison of the results of FIG. 91a versus both the results of FIGS. 91b and 91c, the illumination of the saturated solution 202 by the sodium light source 203 was filtered by two filters 207/207 ′, as shown in FIGS. 91b and 91c, respectively. It is clear that it showed a dramatic increase in the amount of crystallization or crystal growth compared to illumination using a tungsten light source 203 ′. In particular, the amount of field occlusion shown in FIG. 91a is dramatically greater than the amount of field occlusion shown in FIG. 91b or 91c. In this particular embodiment, the field occlusion is equivalent to the amount of crystallization that has occurred. Thus, it is clear that the sodium light source had a dramatic effect on the number and size of crystals 205 produced from the saturated solution 202. It should be noted that the excess field occlusion shown in FIG. 91a was accompanied by the onset of crystallization that started immediately upon illumination with a sodium light source. Crystallization did not begin in the experiments corresponding to FIGS. 91b and 91c until the solution was cooled to 2-3 ° C. Typically, this general type of traditional crystallization experiment (eg, growth of NaCl crystals from solution) predicts low crystallization at higher temperatures. NaCl crystal growth began at about 25 ° C. for the experiment corresponding to FIG. 91a, about 23 ° C. for the experiment corresponding to FIG. 91b, and about 22 ° C. for the experiment corresponding to FIG. 91c. Clearly, the results shown in this Example 2 demonstrate that sodium light affected not only the amount of crystallization, but also the temperature at which the onset of crystal growth began.
  Example 3:
  Growth enhancement of potassium dihydrogen phosphate crystals
  Except for the following differences, the procedure of Example 1 was followed. Rather than producing a saturated solution of NaCl in water, a saturated solution of “KDP” (potassium dihydrogen phosphate) was produced. KDP (molecular weight 136.1) was obtained from Baker Analyzed Reagents (stock number # 1-3246; Bakers Company, Phillipsburg, NJ). Furthermore, not a sodium light source, but a potassium light source (Thermo Oriel, 10 W spectral line potassium lamp # 65070; lamp fixture 365160 and spectral lamp power supply # 65150) was used. Further, the beaker 202 was divided into four sections instead of two by the film 201. Potassium source light was introduced into only a portion of the beaker 202. The growth of KDP crystals was observed only in the section of the beaker 202 having the potassium light incidence thereon. Under the experimental conditions of Example 3, no KDP crystal growth began in any of the three other chambers in the beaker 202.
  Example 4:
  Various sodium chloride and sodium bromide crystallization experiments
  For the following Examples 4a-4ah, the equipment, materials and experimental techniques listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in each example).
  a)Equipment and materials
  -Sterilized water (Bio Whittaker)-Water contained in a 1 liter clear plastic bottle and treated by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, deionization and distillation.
  -Sodium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Sodium chloride is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
    Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
      Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)-P. T.A.
      Bromide (Br)-less than 0.01%
      Calcium (Ca) less than 0.0002% to 0.0007%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) -0.0006% to less than 0.0009%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
      Insoluble material-less than 0.001% to 0.006%
      Iodide (I)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0004%
      Iron (Fe) -0.2 ppm to less than 0.4 ppm
      Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.0001% to 0.0003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-<0.0001% to 0.0003%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.0-9.0
      Phosphate (PO_Three) Less than -5 ppm
      Potassium (K) -0.001% to 0.005%
      Sulfate (SO_Four) -0.003% to 0.004%
  -Potassium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is characterized as follows:
    Potassium chloride; warranty A. C. S.
      Bromide-0.01%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) less than -0.003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-less than 0.001%
      Phosphate-less than 5 ppm
      Sulfate-less than 0.001%
      Barium-0.001%
      Calcium and R₂O_ThreePrecipitate-less than 0.002%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 5 ppm
      Iron-less than 2 ppm
      Sodium-less than 0.005%
      Magnesium-less than 0.001%
      Iodide-less than 0.002%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.4 to 8.6
      Insoluble material-less than 0.005%
  -Sodium bromide (Fisher Chemicals)-Wrapped in a small (eg 1 pint size) brown glass bottle. Sodium bromide is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
    Sodium bromide; C. S.
      Barium-less than 0.002%
      Bromate-less than 0.001%
      Calcium-less than 0.002%
      Magnesium-less than 0.001%
      Chloride-less than 0.2%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 5 ppm
      Insoluble material-less than 0.005%
      Iron-less than 5 ppm
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-less than -5 ppm
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.5-8.8
      Potassium-less than 0.1%
      Sulfate-less than 0.002%
  -Humboldt Bunsen burner (Coleman propane fuel).
  -One or more sodium lamps. Stonco 70 watt high pressure sodium protective wall lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light from the housing. The sodium bulb was an S62 lamp, 120 V, 60 Hz, 1.5 A, manufactured by Jemanamjjasond (Hungary). One or more lamps were installed at various angles and position (s) as specified in each experiment. Unless otherwise noted in the examples, the lamps were placed about 15 inches (about 38 cm) from the beaker or pan to maintain a substantially consistent strength.
  -Potassium lamp (Thermo Oriel), 10 W spectral line potassium lamp # 65070, with Thermo Oriel lamp stand # 65160 and Thermo Oriel spectral lamp power supply # 65150. The potassium lamp was oriented horizontally and mounted overhead using a light bulb about 9 inches (about 23 cm) from the crystallization dish.
  -Full spectrum lamp, 75 W, matte Chromalux full spectrum lamp (contains full visible spectrum of sodium, potassium, chlorine and bromine). The full spectrum lamp was oriented vertically and was typically mounted overhead using a light bulb approximately 15 inches from the beaker or pan used in the various examples, unless otherwise noted in each example.
  -A darkroom or darkened room shielding room (Ace shielding room, Ace, Philadelphia, PA, US model A6H3-16, copper mesh, width of about 8 feet, length of about 17 feet, height of about 8 feet (about 2.4 m × 5.2 m x 2.4 m)).
  b)Solution preparation
  i)Classical solutionThe apparatus used to make the classical solution is schematically shown in FIG. Water (about 800 ml) was placed in a glass beaker 104 and heated from room temperature to about 55 ° C. with a Bunsen burner 101 for about 6-12 minutes. Salt was added in an amount of about 50 grams and the solution 105 was stirred with a glass stir bar (not shown) until no more salt dissolved and undissolved salt remained at the bottom of the beaker 104. Solution 105 was then allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 16 hours) and then decanted for use in various crystallization experiments discussed later in this specification.
  ii)Conditioned solutionThe apparatus used to make the conditioned solution is shown in FIG. Water (about 800 ml) was heated by a sodium lamp 112 and housing 111 placed together under the beaker 104. Light from the light bulb 112 was incident on the bottom of the beaker 104 through the aluminum foil cylinder 110 functioning as a light guiding device. The temperature of solution 105 was raised to about 55 ° C. in about 40 minutes. Salt was added in an amount of about 50 grams and solution 105 was stirred with a glass stir bar until no more salt was dissolved and undissolved salt remained at the bottom of beaker 104. Solution 105 was allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 16 hours) and then decanted for use in various crystallization experiments discussed later herein.
  The D line in the sodium electrical spectrum resonates with the vibration overtone of water. When engineered, these vibrational overtones of water change its material properties as a solvent. Therefore, after conditioning the water using a sodium lamp and changing its material properties, it is used in the crystallization solution.
  c)Crystallization technique
  i)Classical crystallization-The solution was placed in a beaker or in a crystallization dish and left in the presence of ambient overhead fluorescent lighting.
  ii)Spectral crystallizationThe solution was placed in a beaker or crystallization dish and allowed to stand in the presence of irradiation from one or more placed sodium or potassium lamps (as discussed in each example). The sodium electrical spectrum generated by the spectral lamp affected the halide phase change.
  d)Spectral delivery shape
  i)Cone-Aluminum foil conical light guiding device attached around the sodium light bulb. Extends approximately 23 cm from the bulb. It has a distal end formed around a uniform diameter of about 1.8 cm.
  ii)Cylindrical-Aluminum foil cylindrical light guiding device attached around the sodium light bulb. Extends approximately 23 cm from the bulb. It has a uniform diameter of about 6 cm.
  iii)Parabolic shape-An aluminum pan (eg from a small range top burner) mounted around a sodium light bulb without a foil light guide.
  e)Ambient lighting
  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamp was Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamp, 75 W, and was about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).
  Example 4a-Sodium chloride:
  Classic saturated NaCl solution (about 50 ml) was placed in three glass beakers (200 ml) at room temperature (22 ° C.). One beaker was placed in a 25 ° C. water bath (with the solution slightly unsaturated) and spectral crystallization was initiated from a single overhead sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 (as shown in FIG. 94). . A second beaker was placed directly on the laboratory counter and spectral crystallization was initiated from a single overhead sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 (as shown in FIG. 94). A third beaker was placed in a plastic bucket as a control and ambient light was incident on the saturated solution. Under ambient overhead fluorescent lighting (ie, first and second beakers), crystallization proceeded for about 21 hours.
  result: Both spectral crystallizations showed more primary nucleation and increased growth compared to the control (crystal shown in FIG. 98a). The spectrally irradiated 25 ° C. unsaturated solution showed more crystallization (crystals shown in FIG. 98c) compared to saturation spectrum crystallization experiments (crystals shown in FIG. 98b). In addition, unsaturated solutions have more primary nucleation, increased NaCl crystal size (eg about 2 mm on average vs. about 1 mm on average) and certain morphological changes compared to saturated and spectrally excited solutions. (In addition to the cube, a rod-like structure (see FIG. 98d)), and more accurate facet formation. Therefore, the crystals from the thermally unsaturated solution shown in FIGS. 98c and 98d were larger than the crystals from the solution shown in FIG. 98b.
  Example 4b-Sodium chloride:
  Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was placed in four glass beakers (size about 200 ml) at room temperature (22 ° C.). Beaker # 1 was suspended on a sodium lamp 112 with an aluminum foil cone 120 used to direct energy from sodium light 112 and a housing directed to beaker 104 as shown in FIG. Beaker # 2, which also contained about 100 ml of classical saturated NaCl solution, had 10 ml of water added to it using a glass syringe (ie, the solution was slightly unsaturated). Beaker # 2 was also suspended on a sodium lamp using a cone 120 as shown in FIG. Beaker # 3 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket as a saturation control. After about 10 ml of water was added to beaker # 4, it was also placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket, but as an unsaturated control. Crystallization started under ambient overhead fluorescence. It was noted that after 2 hours of placing the beaker on the sodium lamp 112 (as shown in FIG. 95), the heat generated from the sodium lamp and sodium lamp housing 111 heated the NaCl solution in the beakers 1 and 2. It was. The solution temperature was measured and beaker # 1 was about 56 ° C. The temperature of solution 105 in beaker # 2 was 58 ° C., and there were numerous small crystals there in the beaker and on the surface of solution 105. The solution was cooled using a blower while still delivering the sodium spectrum through the bottom of the beaker. After about 21 hours, the temperature in beaker # 1 was about 22 ° C. The temperature in beaker # 2 was about 27 ° C.
  result: Spectral crystallization in beakers # 1 and # 2 both showed increased primary nucleation and increased crystal growth compared to the saturation control in beaker # 3. The unsaturated control in beaker # 4 showed no growth. Crystals from the unsaturated solution in beaker # 2 have a reduced primary nucleation and a substantial increase in growth rate (size about 3 mm) compared to the saturated solution in beaker # 1 (cubic crystal size about 1-2 mm). ~ 7 mm) and some morphological changes (rods).
  Example 4c-Sodium chloride:
  Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was placed in three beakers (size about 200 ml) at room temperature (22 ° C.). Sterile water (approximately 10 ml) was added to 100 ml of classic saturated solution in beaker # 1 and beaker # 2 suspended together on a sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 as shown in FIG. . Beaker # 3 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket as a saturation control. Beaker # 1 was cooled with a blower. Beaker # 2 was shielded from the blower until the temperature rose to approximately 58 ° C. and the shield was removed. Crystallization started under ambient overhead fluorescent lighting. After about 20 hours, the temperature in beaker # 1 was about 23 ° C. and no crystallization growth was observed. The temperature in beaker # 2 was about 25 ° C.
  result: Example 4b Similar to beaker # 2, several cubes (about 3-8 mm) and rectangular crystals (about 4 × 11 mm) were observed.
  Example 4d-Sodium chloride:
  Classic saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was placed in beaker # 1 at room temperature (22 ° C.). Spectral saturated NaCl solution (100 ml) was placed in beaker # 2 at room temperature (22 ° C.). Beaker # 3 with about 100 ml classical solution and beaker # 4 with about 100 ml spectral solution were placed in aluminum foil coated buckets as controls. Beakers # 1 and # 2 were each placed under a single overhead lamp having a conical delivery shape 120 (as shown in FIG. 94). Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours) under ambient overhead fluorescent lighting.
  result: Beakers # 1 and # 2 showed increased primary nucleation and increased growth rate compared to controls. Beaker # 2 with spectral solution has a substantial increase in primary nucleation and more overall crystallization (total of about 3.8 g) compared to the classic solution in beaker # 1 (total of about 3.3 g). Indicated. Furthermore, the crystals from the spectral solution had a morphological change including glass sheets, pyramid structures and hollow pyramids within the cubic structure.
  Example 4e-Sodium chloride:
  Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was placed in three beakers (size about 200 ml) at room temperature (22 ° C.). Sterile water (approximately 10 ml) was added to all three beakers. Beaker # 1 and beaker # 2 were suspended together on a sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 (as shown in FIG. 95). Beaker # 3 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket as an unsaturated control. Beaker # 1 was shielded from the blower until the temperature rose to about 58 ° C. and the shield was removed. Beaker # 2 was cooled with a blower. The top surfaces of all three beakers were covered with plastic wrap.
  result: After about 20 hours, no growth was observed in any of the beakers.
  Example 4f-Sodium chloride:
  Classical saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was placed at room temperature (22 ° C.) in 5 beakers (size about 200 ml) and 50 ml in beaker # 6. Beakers # 1-5 were placed under a single overhead sodium lamp 112 with a cone 120 (as shown in FIG. 94). Water was added to beakers # 1-5 by glass syringe (in the following amounts) to make serial dilutions as follows: 1) 0; 2) 2 ml; 3) 4 ml; 4) 6 ml And 5) 8 ml. Beaker # 6 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket as a saturation control. Spectral crystallization proceeded overnight (about 16 hours) at room temperature under ambient fluorescent lighting.
  result: Saturation of 100 ml saturated solution and 2 and 4 ml dilutions showed morphological changes (eg rods, glass sheets, daisy stalks). The saturated solution grew a cubic crystal of about 1-4 mm on a side and a glass-like sheet of about 5 mm × 5 mm. The 2 and 4 ml dilutions showed nearly identical primary nucleation and increased growth rate of cubic individual crystals up to about 5 mm compared to the saturated solution. The 6-8 mm diluted solution showed different morphological findings (eg pyramid shape) and reduced nucleation and growth rate (eg ≦ 1 mm cubic crystals) compared to the saturated solution. The 6-8 ml diluted solution produces limited spectral crystallization at low saturation (ie, 103-104 ml remaining in the beaker), almost identical primary nucleation when compared to a control that has traditionally crystallized from a saturated solution. As well as with almost the same growth rate. Crystals grown from a 3% unsaturated solution are shown in FIG. 98e.
  Example 4g-Sodium Chloride
  A serial dilution of a classically prepared saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was made as in Example 4f and water / 100 ml / beaker was added as follows: 1) 0; 2) 1 ml; 3 4) 4 ml; 5) 6 ml; 6) 8 ml. Control beakers # 7-10 each contained approximately 50 ml of classically saturated solution and added water as follows: 7) 0; 8) 0.5 ml; 9) 1 ml; 10) 2 ml. Beakers # 1-6 were placed under a single overhead sodium lamp 112 having a cylindrical delivery shape 110 (as shown in FIG. 96) and beakers # 7-10 were placed in a closed wooden / plastic cupboard. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 16 hours) at ambient temperature using ambient fluorescent lighting.
  result: Compared to the results of Example 4f using overhead spectral cone irradiation, all solutions in beakers # 1-6 increased primary nucleation, increased growth rate, about 3-5 mm individual cubic crystals. Numerous clusters and increased water evaporation were shown using overhead spectral cylinder irradiation (as shown in FIG. 96). Beakers # 1-6 also showed NaCl dendritic growth on the sides of the beaker apparently from NaCl crystals grown epitaxially on the beaker (shown in FIGS. 98ad and 98ae). By irradiating the sides of the beaker reflecting the sodium spectral pattern, the beaker appeared to function as an epitaxy support for crystallization. The approximate NaCl crystal weights for beakers # 1-6 were as follows: 1) 22.9 g; 2) 10.3 g; 3) 26.4 g; 4) 22.1 g; 5) 23.4 g; Saturated control beaker # 7 grew 2-3 small crystals, while control beaker # 8-10 showed no observable crystal growth.
  Example 4h-Sodium chloride:
  Make serial dilutions of classically prepared saturated NaCl solution as in Example 15f and add water / 100 ml / beaker as follows: 1) 0; 2) 1 ml; 3) 2 ml; 4 3); 5) 4 ml; 6) 5 ml. Beakers # 1-6 were placed under a single overhead sodium lamp 112 having a cylindrical delivery shape 110 (as shown in FIG. 96). Crystallization proceeded for about 65 hours at room temperature without ambient fluorescent illumination.
  result: Total 65 hour crystallization showed increased primary nuclear purification and substantial increase in crystal size compared to overnight spectral crystallization of about 16-20 hours. Crystallization begins first in a more saturated solution and the largest single crystal (ie 12 × 12 × 4 mm) is the highest dilution (5 ml H₂O / 100 ml) solution. In each of the beakers # 1 to 6, 10 to 20 crystals larger than 1 cm were observed on one side. The remaining saturated solution on the counter approximately 11 feet in front of the sodium lamp (eg there were 6 sodium lamps irradiating separate beakers simultaneously) grew overnight from the heated solution in Examples 4b and 4c. A large number of crystals (see FIGS. 98p and 98q) were grown that were equal in size to the crystals (ie about 5-7 mm, cubic). The control for Example 4g, which was left on the counter about 12 feet behind the sodium lamp, grew about 1 mm of sandy crystals in about 85 hours.
  Example 4i-Sodium chloride:
  A classic saturated NaCl solution was prepared on a counter about 10 feet away from the nearest sodium lamp while Example 4h was run. After 7 days, a classic saturated NaCl solution (about 50 ml) was placed in each of three separate beakers in a dark shielded room. Spectral cone crystallization in various shapes proceeded overnight without ambient light as follows: 1) single horizontal sodium lamp (FIG. 97a); 2) two horizontal sodium at right angles to each other Lamps (Fig. 97b); and 3) two horizontal ramps and one overhead lamp (Fig. 97c) at right angles to each other.
  result: Compared to a classic solution that is not exposed to ambient sodium spectrum irradiation during preparation, this solution grows crystals that exhibit a substantial increase in primary nucleation, and all the crystals are small (eg less than 1 mm) sandy It was a crystal.
  Example 4i-Sodium chloride:
  The classic saturated NaCl solution was filtered and approximately 50 ml was placed in each of three beakers in a dark EM shielded room. Spectral cone crystallization (discussed in Example 4i) occurred overnight without ambient light as described above.
  result-Single cubic crystals (about 0.27 g) grew from a single horizontal sodium lamp (Figure 97a). From two horizontal sodium lamps (Fig. 97b) at approximately right angles to each other, they grew on a horizontal plane with a growth axis of 45 ° (total weight about 2.2 g). Two horizontal ramps at approximately the right angle and a third ramp that is overhead at approximately the right angle grew crystals with a twin formation on the hopper and three planes (total weight 3.5 g). The temperature in the shielded room was about 26 ° C. (ie about 2 ° C. above the room temperature of the original saturated solution).
  Example 4k-Sodium Chloride:
  The classic saturated NaCl solution prepared as above was filtered and about 50 ml was placed in each of the three beakers, which were then placed in the dark screen above. Beaker # 1 had four horizontal sodium lamps with cones (FIG. 97d), all at approximately right angles to each other. Beaker # 2 had four overhead sodium lamps with cones and were positioned at right angles to each other at an angle of about 45 degrees from horizontal (FIG. 97e). Beaker # 3 was placed in a control bucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 18 hours) without ambient light in a shielded room.
  result: Beaker # 1 (four horizontal sodium lamps at right angle and as shown in Figure 97d) is a large crystal (approximately 16 mm on a side) with a cube (approximately 4-11 mm on a side) and significant twin formation To grow. Four overhead sodium lamps (FIG. 97e) at an angle of about 45 ° grew twinned cubes (about 5-10 mm) and a large hopper (maximum measured 13 × 13 × 7 mm). FIGS. 98f and 98g show some of the crystals grown according to this example, and FIG. 98b shows the largest crystals grown. The control in total darkness in the shielded room showed no growth. Beaker # 1 also grew epitaxial crystals and dendrite formation on the sides of the beaker, where horizontal rays traversed the glass / solution / air triple point.
  Example 4l-Sodium chloride:
  The experimental procedure is the same as that of Example 4k, except that a spectral NaCl solution was used rather than the classical NaCl solution.
  result: Beaker # 1 (four horizontal sodium lamps at approximately right angle (Fig. 97d) grew a large number of small twinned cubes (approximately 3-4 mm on a side) .Beaker # 2 (approximately 45 ° angle from horizontal) Four overhead sodium lamps (FIG. 97e) at and substantially equidistant from each other grew a large number of small twinned cubes (about 4-5 mm on a side) and 2-3 twin crystals The control, kept in total darkness in the shielded room, showed no growth, and the spectral solution showed increased nucleation.
  When twinned cubic crystals from beakers 1 and 2 were removed and placed in a new spectrally saturated filtered NaCl solution in a dark shielded room, the same spectral cone crystallization proceeded overnight.
  result: The crystals in both beakers # 1 and # 2 grew pyramidal corners and edges on twinned cubes, resulting in a substantial increase in primary nucleation.
  Example 4 m-Sodium Chloride:
  Seven beakers with different serial dilutions of classical saturated filtered NaCl solution were placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a parabolic dish (FIG. 97f). The serial dilution was about 100 ml of saturated solution with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 ml of water added separately. Another 4 beakers with serial dilutions (0, 2, 4 and 6 ml) were placed in the cupboard as controls. Without ambient light, crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours).
  result: Twinned cubes and / or crystals grew in all beakers and increased crystal size in 4 ml dilution.
  Spectral crystallization-About 3-4 mm cube; 1 ml diluted solution, about 3-6 mm cube (with 1 cm polycrystal mass); 2 ml diluted solution, about 4-6 mm cube and about 16 mm diameter twinned crystals (Having about 1 cm rod projecting vertically at 45 degrees); 3 ml diluted solution, about 5-7 mm cube and about 14 mm polycrystalline twinned crystal; 4 ml diluted solution, about 3-4 mm cube And about 5 × 10 mm polycrystalline mass; 5 ml diluted solution, about 2-3 mm cube; 6 ml diluted solution, about 2-3 mm cube.
  A serial dilution control was placed in a wooden / plastic cupboard, which was later found to pass a thin beam of light (eg, sodium light and / or ambient fluorescence) between the cupboard doors. The saturation control grew a large number of small (approximately 1-1.5 mm cubes) primary nucleation overnight, while the dilution did not grow anything. After about another 24 hours in the cupboard, saturation and 2 ml serial dilutions showed a substantial increase in primary nucleation, with crystals of about 1-2 mm; 4 ml dilutions were large rods (about 4 × 10 mm and 3 × 8 mm), cube corners (about 8 mm) and two twinned crystals (about 10 × 12 mm and about 9 × 9 mm) were grown; and the 6 ml dilution was small sand Crystals were grown.
  Example 4 n-Sodium Chloride:
  A classic saturated NaCl solution was prepared and stored in the dark. A beaker with 100 ml filtered solution was placed in a dark screen with the following settings: 1) Four horizontal sodium lamps with cones at approximately right angle (FIG. 97d); 2) Cone at approximately 45 ° angle. 4 overhead sodium lamps (Figure 97e); 3) about 8 feet above the sodium lamp; and 4) in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result: Beaker # 1 (four horizontal sodium lamps) (Fig. 97d) grows many twinned cubes (about 3-4 mm), pyramidal, rod-shaped, twin crystals and cube corners, total weight 6.1 g Met. Beaker # 2 (four sodium lamps at an angle of about 45 °) (Figure 97e) grows twinned cubes and crystals (about 4-5 mm on a side) and large twins (about 18 x 11 mm) The total weight was about 9.5 g. Beaker # 3 (ie on a table 8 feet apart) grew a large number of small (about 1 mm) crystals, with a total weight of about 2.7 g. Beaker # 4 (aluminum foil coated bucket) grew about 0.2 g of very small crystals (less than about 1 mm).
  Example 4 o-sodium chloride:
  The experimental procedure was the same as that of Example 4n except that a spectral NaCl solution prepared in the dark was used.
  result: Beaker # 1 (four horizontal sodium lamps) (Fig. 97d) has 15 twinned cubes (mostly about 5-7 mm), hopper, corners (about 10x10 mm), rods (about 15x 4) and polycrystalline (up to about 15 × 12 mm) were grown. As shown in FIGS. 98i, 98j, 98k and 98l, the crystal grown according to this example also showed a modified growth plane at an angle of 45 ° with respect to the normal axis. Beaker # 2 (four sodium lamps oriented overhead at an angle of about 45 °) (FIG. 97e) consists of a twinned cube (about 7 mm), two large hoppers (about 10 × 10 mm and 12 × 12 mm) and 5 polycrystals with twinning in the range of about 6 × 10 mm to 14 × 18 mm were grown. As shown in FIGS. 98m, 98n, 98o and 98v, the crystals grown according to this example also showed a modified growth plane at an angle of 45 ° with respect to the normal axis. Controls kept in total dark showed no crystallization. This experiment demonstrates the effect of directional spectral crystallization.
  Example 4 p-Sodium Chloride:
  The experimental procedure was the same as that of Example 4n, except that a spectral NaCl solution prepared under ambient fluorescent illumination was used.
  result: Beaker # 1 (4 horizontal sodium lamps; FIG. 97d) grew transparent cubes and rods. Beaker # 2 (four sodium lamps oriented at an angle of about 45 °; FIG. 97e) grew cubes and bulk crystals. Controls kept in total darkness in a shielded room in an aluminum foil coated bucket showed no crystallization. Crystals grown from spectral solutions appear to be more transparent and complete than crystals grown from classical solutions.
  Example 4 q-Sodium Chloride:
  The experimental procedure was the same as that of Example 4n except that a spectral NaCl solution prepared in the dark was used.
  result: Beaker # 1 (four horizontal sodium lamps; FIG. 97d) grew a large number (more than 50) small cubes (about 2-4 mm on a side). Beaker # 2 (four sodium lamps oriented at about 45 °) (FIG. 97e) grew fewer (about 30) but larger cubes (about 5-7 mm on a side) and pyramid features. The crystals in both beakers # 1 and # 2 were growing on a layer of sandy soft crystals. A control that was kept entirely dark in the aluminum foil coated bucket showed no crystallization. Spectral solutions appear to produce a large number of more nucleations, and this solution preparation technique should be applicable where polycrystalline phases or thin films can be useful.
  Example 4 r-Sodium Chloride:
  A spectral NaCl solution was prepared and filtered, and about 50 ml of solution was placed in each of 5 different sized beakers # 1-5: 1) 50 ml beaker; 2) 150 ml beaker; 3 4) 400 ml beaker; and 5) 600 ml beaker. Approximately 50 ml of the solution was also placed in each of control beakers # 6-10 as follows: 6) 50 ml beaker; 7) 150 ml beaker; 8) 250 ml beaker; 9) 400 ml beaker; 600 ml beaker. Beakers # 1-5 were placed under an overhead sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 as shown in FIG. Beakers # 6-10 were placed in a cupboard whose doors were covered with aluminum foil to block light from entering the cupboard. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 16 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  resultFor spectral crystallization, the following results were obtained: 1) about 25 cubes (about 1.5-2 mm); 2) about 12 cubes (about 3-5 mm); 3) about 25 cubes (About 3-6 mm); 4) about 20 cubes (up to about 9 mm); 5) about 25 cubes (about 3-6 mm).
  For the control, the following results were obtained: 6) about 15 cubes (almost about 1 mm); 7) about 10 cubes (about 1.5 mm); 8) about 4 cubes (about 3 mm) And rods (about 1.5 × 9 mm); 9) about 8 cubes (about 2-4 mm); 10) about 12 cubes (about 3-6 mm). Thus, although crystals were obtained using the same solution and crystallization time, growth is affected by the size and / or shape of the beaker (eg, container or reaction vessel effect).
  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to affect phase changes, material properties and structure in solid and liquid materials.
  Example 4s-Sodium Chloride:
  The classic NaCl solution prepared in the dark was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in three separate beakers (size of about 600 ml) in a dark shielded room. Beaker # 1 was illuminated with two horizontal sodium lamps and one overhead sodium lamp (FIG. 97c). Beaker # 2 was illuminated with one horizontal lamp, one overhead lamp at about 90 degrees relative to the horizontal lamp, and one lamp at about 45 degrees between the horizontal and overhead lamps (Figure 97g). Control beaker # 3 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket in a dark screen. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours) in the absence of ambient light in a dark shielding room.
  result: The control in the aluminum foil coated bucket showed no crystallization. Beaker # 1 (horizontal 2 / overhead 1; FIG. 97c) grew more than 50 cubes (about 2-4 mm) and about 10 rods (about 3-11 mm long). Beaker # 2 (horizontal 1, 45 degrees 1, overhead 1; FIG. 97g) grew approximately 15 cubes (approximately 5-12 mm), many of which were twins and / or hoppers, 2-3 were rod-shaped (up to about 22 × 2 mm) and 2 were polycrystalline clusters. Thus, the direction and orientation of spectral input during crystallization appears to affect crystal growth and morphology.
  Example 4 t-sodium chloride:
  The experimental procedure was the same as that of Example 4s, except that a spectral solution prepared in the dark was used. Crystallization proceeded in the absence of ambient light.
  result: The control in the aluminum foil coated bucket showed no crystallization. Beaker # 1 (horizontal 2 / overhead 1; FIG. 97c) contains about 40 cubes (about 3-7 mm) and 4-5 polycrystalline lumps (about 5-10 mm) with much twinning. Grown up. Beaker # 2 (horizontal, 45 degrees, overhead; FIG. 97g) grew approximately 30 slightly larger cubes (approximately 5-7 mm) and rods (approximately 10 × 3 mm). Beaker # 3 (control) showed no growth.
  Example 4u-sodium chloride:
  Spectral NaCl solution (beaker was coated with aluminum foil to block light) was filtered and different amounts were placed in each of the same 400 ml Pyrex beakers # 1-5 as follows: 1) 50 2) 75 ml solution; 3) 100 ml solution; 4) 125 ml solution; 5) 150 ml solution. Beakers # 6-10 (same 400 ml pyrex beakers) were used as controls as follows: 6) 50 ml solution; 7) 75 ml solution; 8) 100 ml solution; 9) 125 ml solution; 10) 150 ml solution. Beakers # 1-5 were placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone. Beakers # 6-10 were placed in a cupboard whose doors were covered with aluminum foil to block light. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 16 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result: For spectral crystallization in beakers # 1-5, the crystals were in the form of approximately 1.5 mm cubes and the weights were roughly as follows: 1) 1.6 g; 2) 2.0 g; 3) 1.6 g; 4) 1.2 g; 5) 1.3 g. Control beakers # 6-10 contained less than 1 mm crystals and weighed approximately as follows: 6) 0.4 g; 7) 0.5 g; 8) 0.4 g; 9) 0.4 g; g. Thus, for the same size, shape and composition beakers, the classical crystallization was the same regardless of the solution volume. However, spectral crystallization was about 3-5 times that of classical crystallization and varied with solution volume.
  Example 4v-Sodium chloride:
  The experimental procedure was the same as in Example 4u.
  result: For spectral crystallization in beakers # 1-5, the crystals were in the form of approximately 1.5 mm cubes and the weights were roughly as follows: 1) 5.0 g; 2) 4.5 g; 3) 5.4 g; 4) 5.2 g; 5) 5.1 g. Control beakers # 6-10 were about 1 mm and weighed roughly as follows: 6) 2.8 g; 7) 3.0 g; 8) 2.8 g; 9) 3.1 g; 10) 3.1 g. For beakers of the same size, shape and composition, the classical crystallization was the same regardless of the solution volume. Spectral crystallization was approximately 65% greater than classical crystallization and varied with solution volume.
  Example 4w-Sodium bromide:
  Classical NaBr and NaCl solutions were filtered. A saturated solution of NaBr (100 ml) was placed in a 600 ml beaker (beaker # 1) and placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94). A saturated solution of NaCl (100 ml) was placed in a 600 ml beaker (beaker # 2) and placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94). Beakers # 3 and # 4 were approximately 100 ml NaBr and NaCl controls, respectively, placed in a 600 ml Pyrex beaker. Crystallization proceeded overnight (approximately 18 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result: The NaBr solution from beaker # 1 grew about 20 flat hexagonal sheets (up to about 8 × 15 mm) and several rods (about 2 × 8 mm). The NaCl solution from beaker # 2 grew about 100 2 × 2 mm typical spectral NaCl. The control for both solutions grew only a small amount of sandy crystals overnight. The control was left under ambient fluorescent lighting for the weekend (about 60 hours) and after 60 hours showed similar crystal growth as in beakers # 1 and # 2 at about 18 hours. The average control NaBr crystals were slightly smaller (about 6 x 8 mm), but the maximum was in one control beaker (about 30 x 20 mm).
  Example 4x-Sodium bromide:
  The spectral NaBr solution was filtered and approximately 100 ml was placed in four beakers (size approximately 600 ml) in a dark screen. Beaker # 1 was illuminated with two horizontal Na lamps and one overhead Na lamp (FIG. 97c). Beaker # 2 was illuminated with one horizontal lamp, one overhead lamp approximately 90 degrees relative to the horizontal lamp, and one lamp approximately 45 degrees between the horizontal and overhead lamps (Figure 97g). Control beaker # 3 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Control beaker # 4 was placed under ambient fluorescent lighting in the office (ie slightly different ambient light intensity). Crystallization proceeded without ambient light for beakers # 1, # 2 and # 3.
  result: Beaker # 1 (horizontal 2 / overhead 1; Fig. 97c) and Beaker # 2 (horizontal, 45 degrees, overhead; Fig. 97g) grow several large flat hexagonal crystals (up to about 30 mm x 20 mm) And weighed about 21.5 g and 19.32 g, respectively. Beaker # 3 in the bucket showed no growth. Beaker # 4 under ambient lighting in the office grew crystals that were similar in size to beakers # 1 and # 2, but were few and weighed about 4.5 g. The solution level in beakers # 1 and # 2 was about 80 ml and in the control about 100 ml. Control beaker # 3 was then placed under ambient fluorescent lighting in the office until it evaporated to about 80 ml level. A small number of moderate size (about 2 mm x 4 mm) flat hexagonal crystals grew. Therefore, the increase in crystal growth rate observed using the sodium lamp was not simply due to greater evaporation, since the control solution with approximately the same amount of water evaporated therefrom did not produce the same amount of crystal growth. It was.
  Example 4 y-Sodium bromide:
  A spectral NaBr solution was prepared, filtered and about 100 ml was placed in three beakers (size about 400 ml). Beaker # 1 was placed in a water bath at about 28 ° C. under an overhead sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 (FIG. 94). The room temperature was about 24 ° C. Beaker # 2 was placed on a counter under an overhead sodium lamp 112 having a conical delivery shape 120 (FIG. 94). Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 21 hours) without ambient lighting. Beaker # 3 was placed in the office in the presence of overhead fluorescent ambient lighting.
  result: Beakers # 1 and # 2 had a polycrystalline thin film on the surface and a flat hexagonal crystal on the bottom. Beaker # 1 crystals were up to about 30 mm × 20 mm and weighed about 14.2 g. The beaker # 2 crystals were up to about 25 mm × 15 mm and weighed about 6.4 g. Beaker # 3 was morphologically similar to beaker # 2, but the amount of crystals was much lower.
  Example 4z-sodium chloride:
  Water was conditioned overnight (about 19 hours) in its original clear plastic package by irradiation with a sodium lamp. A classical NaCl solution was prepared with conditioned water under ambient fluorescent lighting. The saturated classical solution was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in 3 beakers (size of about 600 ml) in a dark screen at 24 ° C. Beaker # 1 was illuminated with two horizontal sodium lamps and one overhead sodium lamp (FIG. 97c). Beaker # 2 was illuminated with one horizontal lamp, one overhead lamp at about 90 degrees relative to the horizontal lamp, and one lamp at about 45 degrees between the horizontal and overhead lamps (Figure 97g). Control beaker # 3 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Crystallization proceeded in the absence of ambient light for beakers 1-3.
  result: The control in the aluminum foil coated bucket showed a small amount of crystallization of 2-3 (too little to collect and weigh). Beaker # 1 (horizontal 2 / overhead 1; FIG. 75c) grew 100 small cubes (approximately 1.5 mm) and several rods approximately 5.9 g. The beaker # 1 fluid level was about 90 ml and the solution temperature was about 27 ° C. Beaker # 2 (horizontal, 45 degrees, overhead; FIG. 97 g) grew 100 small cubic (about 1.5 mm) crystals with several rods and had a total weight of about 5.6 g. The solution level was about 80 ml and the solution temperature was about 27 ° C. Thus, classically prepared solutions from irradiated water showed increased nucleation.
  Example 4aa:
  A classic NaCl solution prepared with sodium conditioned water under ambient fluorescent lighting and stored in an aluminum foil coated beaker is filtered and about 100 ml is emptied at about 25 ° C in two dark beakers (about 600 ml). Of size). Beaker # 1 was placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94) and beaker # 2 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Spectral NaBr solution prepared under ambient fluorescent lighting and stored in aluminum foil was also filtered and about 100 ml was placed in two beakers (about 600 ml size) in a shielded room at about 24 ° C. Beaker # 3 was placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94) and beaker # 4 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight (approximately 18 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result: Beaker # 1 (conditioned water NaCl solution) had 95 ml of solution and produced a large number of small sand-like crystals with a total weight of about 2 g. Beaker # 2 also grew small sand crystals and had a total weight of about 0.7 g. Beaker # 3 had about 95 ml of solution, yielding several flat hexagonal crystals up to about 8 × 4 mm, with a total weight of about 6.3 g. Beaker # 4 has a few small sized flat hexagonal crystals (mostly about 2 x 4 mm, but two were up to about 10 mm on a side), with a total weight of about 5.0 g.
  Example 4 ab-sodium chloride:
  The classic NaCl solution prepared under ambient fluorescent lighting and stored in an aluminum foil coated beaker was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in two beakers (about 600 ml size) in a shielded dark room at about 25 ° C. . Beaker # 1 was placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94) and beaker # 2 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Classical NaCl solution prepared with sodium lamp-conditioned water under ambient fluorescent lighting and stored in aluminum foil is also filtered, and about 100 ml is taken at about 24 ° C. in two beakers (about 600 ml Of size). Beaker # 3 was placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94) and beaker # 4 was placed in an aluminum foil coated bucket. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 21 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result: Beaker # 1 with classical solution grew about 1 mm cubic crystals with a total weight of about 7.0 g. Beaker # 3 with the upper body conditioned aqueous solution grew about 1.5 mm crystals with a total weight of about 6.2 g. Control beakers # 2 and # 4 showed essentially no growth.
  Example 4ac-sodium chloride:
  The procedure in Example 4ab was repeated. The result was similar.
  result: Beaker # 1 with classical solution grew about 2.5 g of about 1 mm cubic crystals. Beaker # 3 with the conditioned aqueous solution grew about 2.3 g of about 1.5 mm crystals. Control beakers # 2 and # 4 showed essentially no growth. Both solutions crystallized approximately the same weight of NaCl, but the crystals from the irradiated aqueous solution were larger (and therefore fewer). Thus, it appears that sodium spectral conditioning of water prior to preparing a classical saturated NaCl solution affects subsequent crystal size and nucleation.
  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to affect the phase change, structure and material properties of solid and liquid materials.
  Example 4ad-sodium chloride:
  Classic NaCl was prepared and stored in four different ways: 1) coated in aluminum foil; 2) wax paper over top; 3) wrapped in black plastic bag; 4) in clear plastic Envelop. Classic NaCl solution stored in aluminum foil was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beakers # 1, # 2 and # 3 (size about 600 ml). The classical NaCl solution, covered with wax paper on top, was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beakers # 4, # 5 and # 6 (size about 600 ml). The classical NaCl solution stored in a black plastic bag was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beakers # 7, # 8 and # 9 (size about 600 ml). The classical NaCl solution stored in clear plastic was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beakers # 10, # 11 and # 12 (size about 600 ml). Beakers # 1, # 4, # 7 and # 10 were placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94). Beakers # 2, # 5, # 8 and # 11 had about 10 ml water added and were placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone. Control beakers # 3, # 6, # 9 and # 12 were placed in a light-resistant cupboard.
  result:
  1. (Foil, sodium lamp)-crystals less than about 1 mm, total weight about 0.17 g
  2. (Foil, diluted)-no growth
  3. (Foil, control)-no growth
  4). (Wax paper, sodium lamp)-3 cubes (about 2-4 mm), clusters of crystals about 1 mm, total weight about 0.26 g
  5). (Wax paper, diluted)-no growth
  6). (Wax paper, control)-no growth
  7). (Black plastic, sodium lamp)-3 cubes (about 2-4 mm), about 1 mm crystal cluster, total weight about 0.44 g
  8). (Black plastic, diluted)-no growth
  9. (Black plastic, control)-no growth
  10. (Clear plastic, sodium lamp)-9 cubes (about 3-6 mm) (with twins) and 3 polycrystalline clusters, total weight about 1.1 g
  11. (Clear plastic, diluted)-no growth
  12 (Clear plastic, control)-no growth.
  Example 4ae-Sodium Chloride:
  The classic NaCl solution stored in aluminum foil was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beaker # 1 and beaker # 2 (size about 600 ml). The classical NaCl solution stored in black plastic bags was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beaker # 3 and beaker # 4 (size about 600 ml). The classic NaCl solution stored in clear plastic was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in beaker # 5 and beaker # 6 (size about 600 ml). Beakers # 1, # 3 and # 5 were placed under an overhead sodium lamp with a cone (FIG. 94). Control beakers # 2, # 4 and # 6 were placed in a light-resistant cupboard. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 20 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result:
  1. (Foil, sodium lamp)-about 1 mm crystal, total weight about 0.8 g
  2. (Foil, control)-no growth
  3. (Black plastic, sodium lamp)-about 3-7 mm cubic crystal, some twins, total weight about 1.2 g
  4). (Black plastic, control)-Less than 0.4 mm crystals, total weight about 0.25 g
  5). (Transparent plastic, sodium lamp)-about 3-4 mm cubic crystal, no twins, total weight about 1.7 g
  6). (Clear plastic, control) —about 1.5 mm crystals, total weight about 0.38 g.
  Thus, the aluminum foil coating on the outside of the Pyrex beaker during storage conditioned the saturated solution and suppressed subsequent NaCl crystal nucleation and growth. Solutions exposed overnight to ambient light during solution equilibration have more (by weight) crystal growth. Thus, storage containers and / or spectral conditions and / or conditioning of the solution before, during and after preparation will likely affect subsequent crystallization from solution.
  Example af-sodium chloride:
  The classic NaCl solution stored in black plastic was filtered and approximately 100 ml was placed in 6 crystallization dishes. The room temperature was about 25 ° C. Plates # 1, # 2 and # 3 were placed under an overhead sodium lamp (FIG. 94) with a cone. Plates # 4, # 5 and # 6 were placed under an overhead full spectrum lamp with a cone. Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 19 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result-Dish # 1, # 2 and # 3 (sodium lamp) grew cubes (about 2 mm) and clusters, total weight was 5.8 g. Dish # 4, # 5 and # 6 (full spectrum lamp) grew cubes (about 2-3 mm) and total weight was 8.1 g.
  Example 4 ag-sodium chloride:
  The classic NaCl solution stored in black plastic was filtered and approximately 100 ml was placed in 6 crystallization dishes. The room temperature was about 25 ° C. Pans # 1, # 2 and # 3 were placed under an overhead sodium lamp (FIG. 94) with a conical delivery shape. Pans # 4, # 5 and # 6 were placed under an overhead full spectrum lamp with a conical delivery shape (similar to the shape shown in FIG. 94). Crystallization proceeded overnight (about 19 hours) in the absence of ambient light.
  result-Dish # 1, # 2 and # 3 (sodium lamp) grew cubes (about 2 mm) and clusters, total weight was 5.5 g. Dish # 4, # 5 and # 6 (full spectrum lamp) grew cubes (about 3-4 mm) and total weight was 7.4 g. The full spectrum lamp had a higher wattage than the Na lamp and contained frequencies in the spectrum for both Na and Cl.
  Example 4 ah-sodium chloride:
  The classic NaCl solution was filtered and about 100 ml was placed in 3 beakers. Beaker # 1 was placed in a dark room directly under an overhead potassium lamp (similar to the shape shown in FIG. 94). Beaker # 2 was placed in a shielded room behind the cupboard in a very low level of ambient potassium spectrum light. Beaker # 3 was placed in the office approximately 3.5 feet from overhead fluorescence.
  result-Beaker # 1 grew cubic crystals (about 3-4 mm) with a total weight of about 2.7 g. Beaker # 2 grew cubic crystals (about 2-2.5 mm) and had a total weight of about 0.5 g. Beaker # 3 grew crystals less than 1 mm and had a total weight of about 0.7 g. A significant direct resonance between sodium and potassium affects NaCl crystal growth using the potassium spectrum alone. Furthermore, NaCl growth using a potassium lamp can be adjusted by spectral intensity, similar to a sodium lamp.
  Observations on Examples 4a-4ah:
  Spectral crystallization techniques allowed crystal modification / control as follows:
  98a-98v and 98ad-98ae show photomicrographs of various crystals produced according to some of the experiments in Example 4. These micrographs, together with direct experimental observations, showed that spectral crystallization has the following general effects:
  (1) Increase in primary nucleation;
  (2) Growth rate increase;
  (3) Increase in temperature at which crystallization begins;
  (4) Crystallization control from thermally unsaturated solution;
  (5) Control of crystallization from diluted unsaturated solution;
  (6) Changes in morphological findings including:
    -Crystal symmetry change
    −Axis change
    A multi-growth axis controlled by multi-axis spectral irradiation;
    -Growth axis direction change controlled by spectral axis direction
  (7) Crystallization changes controlled by controlling spectral states during solution preparation; and
  (8) Crystallization change by controlling the surrounding spectral state during crystallization
  Example 5:
  Microwave and sodium chloride crystallization
  For the following Examples 5a-5c, the equipment, materials and experimental techniques listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in each Example).
  a)Equipment and materials
    -Distilled water-Water was distilled water from American Fare, contained in a 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic bottle and treated by distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. The first source of water: Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee. Prior to use in the experiments described in Examples 5a, 5b and 5c, stored in a darkened and electromagnetic shielding room.
    -Pyrex 1000 ml beaker
    -Pyrex 400 ml beaker
    A solution of water or a solution of sodium chloride and water. Sodium chloride is from Fisher Chemicals and in crystalline form is characterized as follows:
    Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
      Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)-P. T.A.
      Bromide (Br)-less than 0.01%
      Calcium (Ca) less than 0.0002% to 0.0007%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) -less than -0.0006% to 0.0009%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
      Insoluble material-less than 0.001% to 0.006%
      Iodide (I)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0004%
      Iron (Fe)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
      Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.0001% to 0.0003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-<0.0001% to 0.0003%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.0-9.0
      Phosphate (PO_Three) Less than -5 ppm
      Potassium (K) -0.001% to 0.005%
      Sulfate (SO_Four) -0.003% to 0.004%
    -Undercoat dark enclosure: about 6 feet x about 3 feet x about 11/2 feet metal cupboard (24 gauge metal) (with flat black paint inside)
    -Microwave electromagnetic horn, Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN # s959, 12.4-18.0GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725A, 3.5 mm.
    -Microwave spectroscopy system (Hewlett Packard); HP 8335OB sweep transmitter, HP 8510B network analyzer and HP 8513A reflection-transmission test set.
    -Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 Watt high pressure sodium barrier lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light from the housing. Oriented vertically on a flat horizontal test surface. Place the bulb approximately 9 inches from the horizontal test surface.
    -Humboldt Bunsen burner (with Bernzomatic propane fuel)
    -Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate
    −1000 ml Pyrex beaker
    -Crystallization dish, Pyrex, capacity 270 ml, Corning 3140, Ace Glass 8465-12
    -Forma Scientific incubator; Model 3157; water-cooled, internal temperature 28 ° C, opaque doors and walls, almost completely shaded, average internal light 0.82 mW / cm².
    -Intel computer microscope.
  Example 5a:
  Crystallization of sodium chloride using rotational frequency
  From Microwave Spectroscopy: C.H. Townes and A.L. Schwawlow, Dover Publ. Inc., New York, a rotational constant Be of 65368.86 Mc for sodium chloride (NaCl) was obtained. The rotational frequency used in this experiment was calculated to be 2XBe or 13.07372 GHz.
  Saturated sodium chloride solution was prepared by heating distilled water (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55 ° C. and adding NaCl (about 250-300 g) until it no longer dissolved under ambient fluorescent lighting. Prepared. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 15 hours). The saturated solution was filtered over the crystals at room temperature (22 ° C.).
  Saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was pipetted into each of the six crystallization dishes. Two crystallization dishes A and B were placed in an incubator (set at about 28 ° C.); two crystallization dishes C and D were placed under the sodium lamp 112 as shown in FIG. The room temperature was about 28 ° C (8.2 mW / cm²And two crystallization dishes E and F were placed in a shielded dark enclosure for microwave irradiation at about 25 ° C. The microwave field was coupled to the outside of the microwave dish E via air. A microwave dish F was placed adjacent to the microwave dish E in a row with a microwave electromagnetic horn. Microwave parameter S₁₁And swept from 13.0736 to 13.0738 GHz. The solution was crystallized for about 40 hours.
  Photomicrographs were taken at approximately 60x (not shown, but used to determine the "relative crystal size" below) and the total crystal weight from each crystallization dish A-F was determined. . From the photomicrographs, the relative size of the crystals produced was determined by measuring the size of each distinguishable crystal. For rectangular crystals, the smaller dimension was used.
  resultThe crystals from the incubator at about 28 ° C. in dishes A and B were smaller than the crystals in dishes C and D that had been subjected to sodium spectral electron irradiation; and dish E grown using sodium microwave rotation frequency And smaller than the crystals in F. However, crystals grown in dishes E and F (microwave irradiation solution) were suppressed compared to crystals grown in dishes C and D (sodium lamp irradiation solution). The relative size and weight of the crystals produced are shown below:

  Example 5b:
  Sodium chloride crystallization using rotational frequency
  From Microwave Spectroscopy: C.H. Townes and A.L. Schwawlow, Dover Publ. Inc., New York, a rotational constant Be of 65368.86 Mc for sodium chloride (NaCl) was obtained. The rotational frequency used in this experiment was calculated to be 2XBe or 13.07372 GHz.
  Saturated sodium chloride solution was prepared by heating distilled water (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55 ° C. and adding NaCl (about 250-300 g) until it no longer dissolved under ambient fluorescent lighting. Prepared. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 15 hours). The saturated solution was filtered over the crystals at room temperature (22 ° C.).
  Saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) was pipetted into each of 8 crystallization dishes labeled GN. Two crystallization dishes G and H were placed in an incubator (set at about 28 ° C.); two crystallization dishes H and I were placed at 28-30 ° C. (8.2 mW / cm²) Were placed under a sodium lamp 112 as shown in FIG. 94; two crystallization dishes K and L were placed in a shielded dark enclosure for microwave irradiation at about 25 ° C .; and two control crystals Bake dishes M and N were placed in a shielded dark enclosure at about 25 ° C. The microwave field was coupled to the outside of the microwave dish K via air. A microwave dish L was placed adjacent to the microwave dish K in a row with a microwave electromagnetic horn. Microwave parameter S₁₁And swept from 13.073719 to 13.073721 GHz. The solution was crystallized for about 18 hours.
  The total crystal weight in each of the dishes GN was determined.
  result: Irradiation with a sodium chloride rotating microwave frequency in a shielded dark enclosure suppressed sodium chloride crystallization compared to the control in the shielded dark enclosure.
  Sodium lamp spectral electron irradiation enhanced crystallization compared to controls at the same ambient room temperature.

  Example 5c:
  Crystallization of sodium chloride using rotational frequency
  From Microwave Spectroscopy: C.H. Townes and A.L. Schwawlow, Dover Publ. Inc., New York, a rotational constant Be of 65368.86 Mc for sodium chloride (NaCl) was obtained. The rotational frequency used in this experiment was calculated to be 2XBe or 13.07372 GHz.
  Saturated sodium chloride solution was prepared by heating distilled water (about 800 ml) in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker to about 55 ° C. and adding NaCl (about 250-300 g) until it no longer dissolved under ambient fluorescent lighting. Prepared. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 15 hours). The saturated solution was filtered over the crystals at room temperature (20 ° C.).
  Saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) is pipetted into each of the four crystallization dishes labeled OR, and 85 ml of saturated NaCl solution (about 100 ml) is labeled SV. Pipettes were dispensed into each of the two crystallization dishes. Two crystallization dishes O and S were placed in an incubator (set at about 28 ° C.); two crystallization dishes P and T were placed at 28-30 ° C. (8.2 mW / cm²) Were placed under a sodium lamp 112 as shown in FIG. 94; two crystallization dishes Q and U were placed in a shielded dark enclosure for microwave irradiation; and two control crystallization dishes R and V was placed in a shielded dark enclosure at about 25 ° C. The microwave field was coupled to the outside of the microwave dish O via air. A microwave dish U was placed adjacent to the microwave dish O in a row with a microwave electromagnetic horn. Microwave parameter S₁₁And swept from 13.073719 to 13.073721 GHz. The ambient / enclosure temperature was as follows throughout:
    1) Incubator control about 28 ° C;
    2) Sodium lamp about 28 ° C;
    3) Microwave irradiation about 25 ° C;
    4) Shield enclosure control approximately 25 ° C.
  The solution was allowed to crystallize for about 14.5 hours, after which the solution temperature was measured:
    1) Incubator control solution about 26 ° C;
    2) Sodium lamp solution about 22 ° C;
    3) Microwave irradiation about 21 ° C;
    4) Shield enclosure control approximately 20 ° C.
  Plates O-V were photomicrographed at approximately 60x magnification (not shown). The total crystal weight in each of the dishes O-V was determined by drying and weighing.
  result: Irradiation with a sodium chloride rotating microwave frequency in a shielded dark enclosure suppressed sodium chloride crystallization compared to the control in the shielded dark enclosure.
  Sodium lamp spectral electron irradiation enhanced crystallization compared to a control at the same ambient room temperature but different solution temperature. The sodium lamp solution was closest in temperature to the microwave irradiation solution. The sodium lamp and microwave crystal sizes are essentially the same, and the sodium lamp solution is slightly warmer than with microwave irradiation, and the salt crystallized under the sodium lamp is about 2.5 times. It was.

  Example 6:
  Various potassium lamp crystallization experiments
  a)Equipment and materials
  -Sterilized water by Bio Whittaker (prepared by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, deionization and distillation). In a 1 liter plastic bottle.
  -Sodium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Sodium chloride is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
    Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
      Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)-P. T.A.
      Bromide (Br)-less than 0.01%
      Calcium (Ca) less than 0.0002% to 0.0007%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) -less than -0.0006% to 0.0009%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb) -0.2 ppm to less than 0.4 ppm
      Insoluble material-0.001% to less than 0.006%
      Iodide (I)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0004%
      Iron (Fe)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
      Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.0001% to 0.0003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-<0.0001% to 0.0003%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.0-9.0
      Phosphate (PO_Three) Less than -5 ppm
      Potassium (K) -0.001% to 0.005%
      Sulfate (SO_Four) -0.003% to 0.004%
  -Potassium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is characterized as follows:
    Potassium chloride; warranty A. C. S.
      Bromide-0.01%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) less than -0.003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-less than 0.001%
      Phosphate-less than 5 ppm
      Sulfate-less than 0.001%
      Barium-0.001%
      Calcium and R₂O_ThreePrecipitate-less than 0.002%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 5 ppm
      Iron-less than 2 ppm
      Sodium-less than 0.005%
      Magnesium-less than 0.001%
      Iodide-less than 0.002%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.4 to 8.6
      Insoluble material-less than 0.005%
  -Humboldt Bunsen burner (Coleman propane fuel).
  A sodium lamp. Stonco 70 watt high pressure sodium protective wall lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light from the housing, and an aluminum foil conical light guiding device with a distal end formed around a uniform diameter (about 1.8 cm) mounted around the sodium bulb. Sodium was mounted overhead with a vertically oriented bulb, and the bulb tip was about 15 inches (about 38 cm) from the crystallization dish.
  -Potassium lamp (Thermo Oriel), 10 W spectral line potassium lamp # 65070, with Thermo Oriel lamp stand # 65160 and Thermo Oriel spectral lamp power supply # 65150. The potassium lamp was mounted overhead using a light bulb oriented horizontally and horizontally oriented about 9 inches (about 23 cm) from the crystallization dish.
  -Crystallization dish (pyrex capacity 270 ml, Corning 3140, Ace Glass 8465-12).
  b)Solution preparation
  Water was heated from room temperature to about 55 ° C. with a Bunsen burner. Salt was added to the solution and it was stirred with a glass stir bar until no more salt dissolved. The solution was allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours), then decanted and filtered for use in the crystallization procedure.
  Example 6a:
  The classic KCl solution was filtered and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of the 9 crystallization dishes. Plates # 1-3 were placed in a dark shielding room under a potassium lamp. A cupboard shield was placed between the potassium lamp and dishes # 4-6 and then only the very low level ambient potassium spectrum was applied. Plates # 7-9 were placed on another room counter using overhead ambient fluorescent lighting.
  result: Control crystals grew small cubic crystals (see FIG. 98w). When the solution was exposed to low ambient potassium lamp light, approximately 25 crystals with some twinning grew. Most crystals were about 3-5 mm cubes, but the largest crystals (about 12 mm cubes) are shown in FIGS. 98x and 98y. The solution under the potassium lamp grew about 15 large crystals and had cubes, triangular bars, polycrystalline lumps and twinned crystals (see FIGS. 98z and 98aa).
  Example 6b:
  The classic NaCl solution was filtered and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of the three crystallization dishes. Dish # 1 was placed in a dark screen under a potassium lamp. Dish # 2 was placed behind the cupboard shield using only a low ambient level potassium lamp. Plate # 3 was placed in the office under fluorescent light.
  result: All dishes produced small cubic crystals: about 2.8 g in dish # 1 under potassium lamp; about 0.6 g in dish # 2 using ambient potassium lamp light; and in dish # 3 under fluorescent lamp About 0.89 g.
  Example 6c:
  The classic KCl solution was filtered and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of the 8 crystallization dishes. Plates # 1-3 were placed in a dark screen under a potassium lamp. Plates # 4-6 were placed in the same dark screen under a sodium lamp. A cupboard shield was placed between the potassium and sodium lamps to prevent cross-lighting. Plate # 8 is about 40 inches (about 1.12 mW / cm) under fluorescent overhead light.²) On the file cupboard in the office.
  result:
  Different crystal sizes and morphological findings were observed:
    1) Potassium lamp-several cubes and twinning hoppers, the length for the largest crystal grown under the main part of the potassium bulb was about 1.6 x 1.6 x 0.7 cm;
    2) Sodium lamp-cubic and twinned hoppers, numerous rods and glass sheets, the largest crystals of approximately 2 × 2 × 1 cm in length grew directly under the sodium bulb (see FIGS. 98ab and 98ac);
    3) foil bucket-no growth; and
    4) Fluorescent office-many small cubes, about 2-3 mm, 2-3 bars and sheets.
  Average weight / dish is shown below: 1) potassium lamp, about 1.5 g; 2) sodium lamp, about 2.9 g; 3) foil bucket, 0.0 g; and 6) fluorescent office, about 0.97 g.
  Example 7:
  Increase of measured pH in NaCl / water solution by sodium spectral pattern
  This example demonstrates the effect of conditioning a conditionable participant (distilled water) using conditioning energy (sodium lamp) by dissolving crystalline sodium chloride (NaCl) in water and monitoring pH changes.

a) Equipment and Materials The following reference numbers refer to items schematically shown in FIGS. 99, 100 and 101 corresponding to Examples 7a-7f, respectively. FIG. 102 shows the pH electrode in detail. The same reference numbers are used whenever possible.

100-Bernzomatic propane fuel 101-Humboldt Bunsen burner 102-Ring stand 103-Cast iron hot plate (Fisher Scientific)
104-1000 ml Pyrex ^™ cylindrical beaker 105—Water or sodium chloride and water solution—packed in sodium chloride, Fisher Chemicals, lot number 025149, gray plastic 3 kg bottle. Sodium chloride is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
Warranty for Lot Analysis Barium (Ba) (approx. 0.001%) -P. T.A.
Bromide (Br)-Less than 0.01% Calcium (Ca)-Less than 0.0002%-0.0007%
Chlorates and nitrates (as NO ₃ ) -less than 0.0006% to 0.0009%
Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
Insoluble material-less than 0.001% to 0.006%
Iodide (I)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0004%
Iron (Fe)-less than 0.2% to 0.4 ppm
Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.001% to 0.0003%
Nitrogen compounds (as N)-<0.0001% to 0.0003%
PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.0-9.0
Phosphate (PO ₃₎ -5 ppm than potassium (K) -0.001% ~0.005%
Sulfate (SO ₄ ) -0.003% to 0.004%
-Distilled water-American Fare, contained in a 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic bottle. Treated by distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. Source: Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee. Store in a cardboard box in a dark block before use in the experiments described in Examples 7a, 7b and 7c.

106-support structure for pH meter 107-AR20 "pH / mV / ° C / conductivity" meter (from Accumet Research) (Fisher catalog number 13-636-AR20 2000/2001 catalog)
Temperature probe for 108-pH meter 109-AR20 pH electrode for pH meter (Fisher 2000/2001 catalog # 13-620-285; shown in more detail in FIG. 102)
110-Aluminum foil tube made from kitchen aluminum foil, for medium loads.

    Equipped with 111-Stonco 70W high pressure sodium protective wall fixture (TLW series Twilighter Wallprism model), parabolic aluminum reflector to direct light from the housing.

    112-1 Equipped with one or more sodium lamps, Stonco 70W high pressure sodium barrier light, parabolic aluminum reflector to direct the light coming out of the housing. The sodium bulb is an S62 lamp, 120 V, 60 Hz, 1,5 A, manufactured by Jemanamjjasond (Hungary). One or more sodium lamps were installed at various angles and in the position (s) as specified in each example. Unless otherwise noted in the examples, the lamps were placed about 15 inches (about 38 cm) from the beaker or pan to maintain a substantially consistent strength.

113-Ring stand 114-Chain fastener
Experimental method:
Example 7a:
FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram of an experimental apparatus used to generate baseline measured pH information at about 55 ° C. as a function of time. In Example 7a, the Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from the fuel source 100 via the flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsen burner 101 was incident on the cast iron hot plate 103 attached to the ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex ^™ cylindrical beaker 104 was placed on the upper surface of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker 104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained from American Fare. The AR20 pH / mV / ° C./conductivity meter 107 (from Accumet Research) was passed through the temperature probe 108 and pH electrode 109 with 800 ml distilled water and then with the solution 105. Further details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. The pH meter was raised to a convenient height by using the support structure 106.

  The AR20 meter 107 using the pH electrode 109 (electrodes are shown in more detail in FIG. 102) was calibrated together by using two different buffers. The first buffer solution had a pH of 4.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium biphthalate. The second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic sodium hydroxide. Both solutions were 0.05 moles, both proved quality, and both were obtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended to ensure the accuracy of reading from the pH electrode.

  First, the pH of distilled water in the beaker 104 is measured at room temperature, and then heated to about 55 ° C. in about 15 to 20 minutes using a Bunsen burner. When the hot plate 103 is heated, the hot plate 103 has its conditioning energy. Was radiated to a beaker 104 containing distilled water. The water temperature was monitored by an Accumet meter 107. Once a temperature of about 55 ° C. was obtained, add about 50 g of sodium chloride (guaranteed by ACSS and as described herein above) into 800 ml of distilled water in beaker 104. Then, the solution 105 was produced | generated using the glass stirring rod. When sodium chloride was stirred in 800 ml of distilled water, complete dissolution of sodium chloride occurred within about 30-45 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105 dropped by about 1/2 to 1 ° C., but quickly returned to about 55 ° C. in 2 to 3 seconds by the Bunsen burner 101 and the cast iron hot plate 103. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarily removed from the solution 105 in order to stir, mix and dissolve the sodium chloride in distilled water. However, upon completion of stirring, electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted into solution 105.

  FIG. 103a shows the results of three separate experiments corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. The plot data shows the change in measured pH of solution 105 as a function of time at a temperature of about 55 ° C. In particular, the pH of distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and then at about 55 ° C., after which the pH of solution 105 was measured about every 2 minutes after the addition and dissolution of sodium chloride. All time measurements were at intervals of about 2 minutes for about 20 minutes and the final measurement was about 40 minutes later.

  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

Example 7b:
FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of an experimental apparatus used to generate baseline measured pH information at about 55 ° C. as a function of time. In this Example 7b, the bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from the fuel source 100 via the flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsen burner 101 was incident on the cast iron hot plate 103 attached to the ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex ^™ cylindrical beaker 104 was placed on the upper surface of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker 104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained from American Fare. The AR20 pH / mV / ° C./conductivity meter 107 (from Accumet Research) was passed through the temperature probe 108 and pH electrode 109 with 800 ml distilled water and then with the solution 105. Further details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. The pH meter was raised to a convenient height by using the support structure 106.
An AR20 meter 107 using a pH electrode 109 (electrodes are shown in more detail in FIG. 102) was calibrated together by using two different buffers. The first buffer solution had a pH of 4.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium biphthalate. The second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic sodium hydroxide. Both solutions were 0.05 moles, both proved quality, and both were obtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended to ensure the accuracy of reading from the pH electrode.

  First, the pH of distilled water in the beaker 104 was measured at room temperature, and then heated to about 55 ° C. in about 15 to 20 minutes using a Bunsen burner to heat the hot plate 103. The water temperature was monitored by an Accumet meter 107. Once a temperature of about 55 ° C. was obtained, add about 50 g of sodium chloride (guaranteed by ACSS and as described herein above) into 800 ml of distilled water in beaker 104. Thus, a solution 105 was produced. When sodium chloride was stirred in 800 ml distilled water using a glass stir bar, complete dissolution of sodium chloride occurred within about 30-45 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105 dropped by about 1/2 to 1 ° C., but quickly returned to about 55 ° C. in 2 to 3 seconds by the Bunsen burner 101 and the cast iron hot plate 103. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarily removed from the solution 105 in order to stir, mix and dissolve the sodium chloride in distilled water. However, upon completion of stirring, electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted.

  The high pressure sodium light 112 contained in the housing 111 and surrounded by the aluminum foil tube 110 conducts the light emitted from the bulb 112 through the aluminum foil tube 110 and becomes incident on one side of the beaker 104. The ring stand 113 is disposed adjacent to the ring stand 102. The ring stand 113 was placed so that the end of the aluminum tube 110 adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch away from the side of the beaker 104. Tube 110 was about 8 inches long and about 31/2 inches in diameter. The upper end of the sodium light bulb 112 was about 5 inches from the end of the tube 110. In this Example 24b, the sodium light bulb 112 was activated at approximately the same time that the electrodes 108 and 109 were reinserted into the solution 105, after sodium chloride was mixed and dissolved in distilled water. . The light fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113 using the chain fastener 114.

  FIG. 103b shows the results of three separate experiments corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. The plot data shows the change in measured pH of solution 105 as a function of time at a temperature of about 55 ° C. In particular, the pH of distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature, then at about 55 ° C., and then approximately every 2 minutes after addition and dissolution of sodium chloride and activation of high pressure sodium light 112. All time measurements were about 20 minutes apart for about 20 minutes and the last measurement was about 40 minutes later.

  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

Example 7c:
FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram of an experimental apparatus used to generate measured pH information, where the temperature of distilled water in the beaker 104 and then the solution 105 in the beaker 104 is determined by the fixture 111. Heating was solely due to the use of the high pressure sodium bulb 112 contained therein.
An AR20 meter 107 using a pH electrode 109 (electrodes are shown in more detail in FIG. 102) was calibrated together by using two different buffers. The first buffer solution had a pH of 4.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium biphthalate. The second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic sodium hydroxide. Both solutions were 0.05 moles, both proved quality, and both were obtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended to ensure the accuracy of pH reading from the pH electrode.

  The only heat differs from previous Examples 7a and 7b in that this Example 7c does not provide a Bunsen burner for heating. In this respect, it was produced from the flannel emitted by the combination of the high pressure sodium bulb 112 and the fixture 111. In particular, energy was conducted through the use of the aluminum foil tube 110 to the bottom of the beaker 104 containing the distilled water first and then the solution 105. In particular, the ring stand 102 supported the beaker 104 using a chain fastener 114. The beaker 104 was first lowered into the aluminum foil tube 110 so that about 150-200 ml of distilled water contained in the beaker 104 was physically located inside the aluminum foil tube 110. Tube 110 was about 7 inches long and about 4 inches in diameter. The upper end of the sodium light bulb 112 was about 5 inches from the end of the tube 110. Once the distilled water temperature reached about 55 ° C. after about 11/4 to 11/2 hours, sodium chloride was added in the same manner as described above. Next, the chain fastener 114 was raised vertically slightly above the ring stand 102 so that the bottom of the beaker 104 was now slightly outside the aluminum foil tube 110 (as shown in FIG. 101). Experience has made it to the exact final position of the bottom of the beaker 104 to be about 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch above the end of the aluminum foil 110. The main difference between this Example 24c and the previous two Examples 24a and 24b is that the only energy provided to the gun water and solution 105 was obtained from the combination of the sodium bulb 112 and the fixture 111 Is a point.

  FIG. 103c shows the results of three separate experiments corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. The plot data shows the change in measured pH of solution 105 as a function of time at a temperature of about 55 ° C. In particular, the pH of distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature and then at about 55 ° C., after which the pH of solution 105 was measured about every 2 minutes after the addition and dissolution of sodium chloride. All time measurements were about 20 minutes apart for about 20 minutes, and the last measurement was after about 40 minutes.

  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

Example 7d:
FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of an experimental apparatus used to generate measured pH information at about 55 ° C. as a function of time. In this Example 7d, the high pressure sodium light 112 contained in the housing 111 and surrounded by the aluminum foil tube 110 conducts the light emitted from the bulb 112 through the aluminum foil tube 110, and on one side of the beaker 104. The ring stand 113 was disposed adjacent to the ring stand 102 so as to be incident. The ring stand 113 was positioned so that the end of the aluminum tube 110 adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch (about 2.0 cm to about 2.5 cm) away from the side of the beaker 104. Tube 110 was about 8 inches long (about 2.4 m) and about 31/2 inches (about 8.5 cm) in diameter. The upper end of the sodium light bulb 112 was about 5 inches (about 12.5 cm) from the end of the tube 110. In Example 7d, the sodium light bulb 112 was activated about 40 minutes before heating the water with a Bunsen burner, and the solution was subsequently irradiated during pH measurement. The light fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113 using the chain fastener 114.

Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from fuel source 100 via flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsen burner 101 was incident on the cast iron hot plate 103 attached to the ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex ^™ cylindrical beaker 104 was placed on the upper surface of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker 104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained from American Fare. The AR20 pH / mV / ° C./conductivity meter 107 (from Accumet Research) was passed through the temperature probe 108 and pH electrode 109 with 800 ml distilled water and then with the solution 105. Further details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. The pH meter was raised to a convenient height by using the support structure 106.
An AR20 meter 107 using a pH electrode 109 (electrodes are shown in more detail in FIG. 102) was calibrated together by using two different buffers. The first buffer solution had a pH of 4.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium biphthalate. The second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic sodium hydroxide. Both solutions were 0.05 moles, both proved quality, and both were obtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended to ensure the accuracy of pH reading from the pH electrode.

  The pH of distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured at room temperature, and then the sodium lamp was activated. After 40 minutes of Na lamp conditioning, the hot plate 103 was then heated by heating the water to about 55 ° C. in about 15-20 minutes using a Bunsen burner. The water temperature was monitored by an Accumet meter 107. Once a temperature of about 55 ° C. was obtained, add about 50 g of sodium chloride (guaranteed by ACSS and as described herein above) into 800 ml of distilled water in beaker 104. Thus, a solution 105 was produced. When sodium chloride was stirred in 800 ml distilled water using a glass stir bar, complete dissolution of sodium chloride occurred within about 30-45 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105 dropped by about 1/2 to 1 ° C., but quickly returned to about 55 ° C. in 2 to 3 seconds by the Bunsen burner 101 and the cast iron hot plate 103. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarily removed from the solution 105 in order to stir, mix and dissolve the sodium chloride in distilled water. However, upon completion of stirring, electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted.

  FIG. 103e shows the results of three separate experiments corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. The plot data shows the change in measured pH of solution 105 as a function of time at a temperature of about 55 ° C. In particular, the pH of distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature, then at about 55 ° C., and then approximately every 2 minutes after addition and dissolution of sodium chloride and activation of high pressure sodium light 112. All time measurements were at intervals of about 2 minutes for 20 minutes and the final measurement was after about 40 minutes.

  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

Example 7e:
FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of an experimental apparatus used to generate measured pH information at about 55 ° C. as a function of time. In this Example 7e, the high pressure sodium light 112 contained in the housing 111 and surrounded by the aluminum foil tube 110 conducts the light emitted from the bulb 112 through the aluminum foil tube 110 and on one side of the beaker 104. The ring stand 113 was disposed adjacent to the ring stand 102 so as to be incident. The ring stand 113 was positioned so that the end of the aluminum tube 110 adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch (about 2.0 cm to about 2.5 cm) away from the side of the beaker 104. Tube 110 was about 8 inches long (about 2.4 cm) and about 31/2 inches (about 8.5 cm) in diameter. The upper end of the sodium light bulb 112 was about 5 inches (about 12.5 cm) from the end of the tube 110. In Example 24e, the sodium light bulb 112 was activated about 40 minutes before heating the water with a Bunsen burner and then terminated. The light fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113 using the chain fastener 114.

Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from fuel source 100 via flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsen burner 101 was incident on the cast iron hot plate 103 attached to the ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex ^™ cylindrical beaker 104 was placed on the upper surface of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker 104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained from American Fare. The AR20 pH / mV / ° C./conductivity meter 107 (from Accumet Research) was passed through the temperature probe 108 and pH electrode 109 with 800 ml distilled water and then with the solution 105. Further details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. The pH meter was raised to a convenient height by using the support structure 106.

  The AR20 meter 107 using the pH electrode 109 (electrodes are shown in more detail in FIG. 102) was calibrated together by using two different buffers. The first buffer solution had a pH of 4.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium biphthalate. The second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic sodium hydroxide. Both solutions were 0.05 moles, both proved quality, and both were obtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended to ensure the accuracy of pH reading from the pH electrode.

  The pH of distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured at room temperature, and then sodium lamp conditioning was activated. After 40 minutes of water Na lamp conditioning, the water was then heated to about 55 ° C. in about 15-20 minutes using a Bunsen burner to heat the hot plate 103. The water temperature was monitored by an Accumet meter 107. Once a temperature of about 55 ° C. was obtained, add about 50 g of sodium chloride (guaranteed by ACSS and as described herein above) into 800 ml of distilled water in beaker 104. Thus, a solution 105 was produced. When sodium chloride was stirred in 800 ml distilled water using a glass stir bar, complete dissolution of sodium chloride occurred within about 30-45 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105 dropped by about 1/2 to 1 ° C., but quickly returned to about 55 ° C. in 2 to 3 seconds by the Bunsen burner 101 and the cast iron hot plate 103. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarily removed from the solution 105 in order to stir, mix and dissolve the sodium chloride in distilled water. However, upon completion of stirring, electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted.

  FIG. 103f shows the results of three separate experiments corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. The plot data shows the change in measured pH of solution 105 as a function of time at a temperature of about 55 ° C. In particular, the pH of distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature, then at about 55 ° C., and then approximately every 2 minutes after addition and dissolution of sodium chloride and activation of high pressure sodium light 112. All time measurements were at intervals of about 2 minutes for 20 minutes and the final measurement was after about 40 minutes.

  FIG. 103g shows the average calculated from the data from each of the three series of experiments from each of Examples 24a, 24b and 24e.

  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each approximately 8 feet long. The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

Example 7f:
FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of an experimental apparatus used to generate measured pH information at about 55 ° C. as a function of time. In this Example 7f, the high pressure sodium light 112 contained in the housing 111 and surrounded by the aluminum foil tube 110 conducts the light emitted from the bulb 112 through the aluminum foil tube 110 and on one side of the beaker 104. The ring stand 113 was disposed adjacent to the ring stand 102 so as to be incident. The ring stand 113 was positioned such that the end of the aluminum tube 110 adjacent to the side of the beaker 104 was about 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch (about 1.0 cm to about 1.5 cm) away from the side of the beaker 104. Tube 110 was about 8 inches long (about 20 cm) and about 31/2 inches (about 8.5 cm) in diameter. The upper end of the sodium light bulb 112 was about 5 inches (about 12.5 cm) from the end of the tube 110. In Example 28f, the sodium light bulb 112 was activated and terminated at about 40 minutes, and the pH was measured. The light fixture 111 was fixed to the ring stand 113 using the chain fastener 114.

Bunsen burner 101 was supplied with propane fuel from fuel source 100 via flexible rubber tube 115. The flame from the Bunsen burner 101 was incident on the cast iron hot plate 103 attached to the ring stand 102. A 1000 ml Pyrex ^™ cylindrical beaker 104 was placed on the upper surface of the cast iron hot plate 103. The beaker 104 contained approximately 800 ml of distilled water obtained from American Fare. The AR20 pH / mV / ° C./conductivity meter 107 (from Accumet Research) was passed through the temperature probe 108 and pH electrode 109 with 800 ml distilled water and then with the solution 105. Further details of the pH electrode can be seen in FIG. The pH meter was raised to a convenient height by using the support structure 106.

  The AR20 meter 107 using the pH electrode 109 (electrodes are shown in more detail in FIG. 102) was calibrated together by using two different buffers. The first buffer solution had a pH of 4.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium biphthalate. The second buffer solution had a pH of 7.00 +/− 0.01 at 25 ° C. and was a solution of potassium phosphate monobasic sodium hydroxide. Both solutions were 0.05 moles, both proved quality, and both were obtained from Fisher Chemicals. The use of these buffer solutions was intended to ensure the accuracy of pH reading from the pH electrode.

  The pH of distilled water in the beaker 104 was first measured at room temperature, and then sodium lamp conditioning was activated. After 40 minutes of Na lamp conditioning of the water, the following time intervals passed before the water was heated to about 55 ° C. using a Bunsen burner: 1) 0 minutes; 2) 20 minutes; 3) 40 minutes; ) 60 minutes; and 5) 120 minutes. Next, using a Bunsen burner, the water was heated to about 55 ° C. in about 5 minutes, and the hot plate 103 was heated. The water temperature was monitored by an Accumet meter 107. Once a temperature of about 55 ° C. was obtained, add about 50 g of sodium chloride (guaranteed by ACSS and as described herein above) into 800 ml of distilled water in beaker 104. Thus, a solution 105 was produced. When sodium chloride was stirred in 800 ml distilled water using a glass stir bar, complete dissolution of sodium chloride occurred within about 30-45 seconds. The temperature of the solution 105 dropped by about 1/2 to 1 ° C., but quickly returned to about 55 ° C. in 2 to 3 seconds by the Bunsen burner 101 and the cast iron hot plate 103. The electrodes 108 and 109 were temporarily removed from the solution 105 in order to stir, mix and dissolve the sodium chloride in distilled water. However, upon completion of stirring, electrodes 108 and 109 were immediately reinserted.

  FIG. 103h shows the results of three separate experiments (# 3, 4 and 5) corresponding to the experimental apparatus of FIG. The plot data shows the change in measured pH of solution 105 as a function of time at a temperature of about 55 ° C. In particular, the pH of distilled water alone was first measured at room temperature, then when the sodium lamp was terminated, and then approximately every 2 minutes after the addition and dissolution of sodium chloride. All time measurements were about 2 minutes in 20 minutes and the final measurement was about 40 minutes.

  All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each approximately 8 feet long. The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

Discussion of Examples 7a, 7b, 7c, 7d, 7e and 7f FIG. 103d shows the average calculated from the data from each of the three series of experiments from each of Examples 7a, 7b and 7c. The data show that the Bunsen burner alone heating corresponding to Example 7a and FIG. 99 had a minimum overall measured increase in pH after a time of about 4-6 minutes. The data resulting from Example 7b and corresponding to FIG. 100 showed an intermediate increase in measured pH over time after about 4-6 minutes. In Example 7b, a sodium spectral pattern was added only when solution 105 obtained a temperature of about 55 ° C.

  The maximum overall increase in measured pH from a time of about 2-40 minutes is shown in the data corresponding to Example 7c corresponding to the experimental apparatus shown in FIG. In this Example 7c, the longest amount of time (eg, exclusively the sodium light bulb 112, which is about 11/4 to 11/2 hours for heating the water to about 55 ° C., followed by another 40 minutes of pH measurement). And the fixture 111 provided energy to the distilled water and solution 105), and the distilled water in the beaker 104 was exposed to the sodium spectral pattern emitted from the sodium light bulb 112.

  Thus, the data shown in FIG. 103d shows the measured pH of the sodium chloride / water solution 105 as measured by an AR20 meter (Accumet Research) used in combination with the pH electrode 109 (as shown in more detail in FIG. 102). The effect of the sodium spectral pattern on the

  FIG. 103g shows the average calculated from the data from each of the three series of experiments from each of Examples 7a, 7b and 7e. The data show that the Bunsen burner alone heating corresponding to Example 7a and FIG. 99 had a minimum overall measured increase in pH after a time of about 4-6 minutes. Data resulting from Example 7b and corresponding to FIG. 100 showed an intermediate increase in measured pH over time after about 4-6 minutes. In Example 7e, water was conditioned with a sodium spectral pattern, after which it was heated to about 55 ° C. to add NaCl and dissolve.

  The maximum overall increase in measured pH from a time of about 2-40 minutes is shown in the data corresponding to Example 7e corresponding to the experimental apparatus shown in FIG. In this Example 7e, the distilled water in the beaker 104 was exposed to the conditioned sodium spectral pattern emitted from the sodium light bulb 112 for about 40 minutes (eg, the sodium light bulb 112 was used for about 40 minutes to distill the conditioning energy. Provided to water 105).

  Thus, the data shown in FIG. 103g produced a sodium chloride / water solution 105 when measured by an AR20 meter (Accumet Research) used in combination with pH electrode 109 (as shown in more detail in FIG. 102). It clearly shows the pH effect of the conditioned sodium spectral pattern on the distilled water used later.

  FIG. 103h shows experimental data from each of the three experiments from Examples 7f3, 7f4 and 7f5. The data (24f5) shows that the 120 minute interval between conditioning of distilled water and dissolution of the NaCl salt had a minimum overall increase in pH after a time of about 40 minutes. After a 60 minute interval between conditioning of distilled water and dissolution of the NaCl salt, the data generated from Example 7f4 showed an intermediate increase in measured pH at a time after about 40 minutes. In Example 7f3, water was conditioned with a sodium spectral pattern, and the interval between conditioning and dissolution of the NaCl salt was only about 40 minutes. Example 7f3 showed a maximum increase in pH.

  Thus, the data shown in FIG. 103h is used to produce a sodium chloride / water solution 105 when measured by an AR20 meter (Accumet Research) used in combination with pH electrode 109 (as shown in more detail in FIG. 102). Figure 5 clearly shows the time-related decay effect of the conditioned sodium spectral pattern on distilled water used later. The conditioning effect of the sodium spectral pattern on distilled water remained in water for a time approximately equal to the conditioning time. After an interval of 1.5 times the conditioning time, the conditioning effect of the sodium spectral pattern on distilled water began to decline. Finally, after an interval of 3.0 times the conditioning time, the conditioning effect of the sodium spectral pattern on distilled water was further reduced.

Example 7g:
Changes in pH with Na Lamp Conditioned NaCl on pH Another layer of sodium chloride (approximately 50 g) was applied overnight under a sodium lamp in a dark room. The next day, the salt was used for pH experiments.

  Overhead fluorescent lighting was present continuously throughout both experiments. Water (about 800 ml) was placed in a 1000 ml beaker and the pH was measured. The water was then heated to about 55 ° C. and the pH was measured again. The water temperature was maintained at about 55 ° C for the remainder of the experiment. NaCl (about 50 g) was added and stirred with a glass stir bar. After the addition of NaCl, pH measurements were performed 10 more times at approximately 2 minute intervals for a total of about 20 minutes. The final pH was measured about 40 minutes after NaCl addition. FIG. 103j shows the pH as a function of time for two sets of experiments where sodium chloride solids were conditioned before being dissolved in water.

  A series of pH tests were performed on solutions made with normal salt (which was not conditioned), and a series of tests were performed on solutions made with conditioned salt.

Results : The pH increased more when the salt was conditioned with its own Na spectral energy pattern. This same effect was observed in other similar experiments. When significantly higher amounts of salt in very thick layers were irradiated at the same intensity, this effect was not very pronounced or was not observed at all.

  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to change the material properties of the solid on subsequent phase changes to a liquid solution.

Example 8:
Testing of dissolution rate in conditioned water For the following Examples 8a-8d, the equipment, materials and experimental procedures listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in each Example).

a) Equipment and materials -Pyrex 1000 ml beaker (Corning)
-Pyrex 600 ml beaker (Corning)
-Pyrex Petri dish; model 3160-102, 100 x 20 mm
-Standard balance LS200 for Ohaus portable, 0.1 to 100.0 g
-Toastmaster cool touch iron plate (TG15G)
-Distilled water-American Fare, contained in a 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic bottle. Treated by distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. Source: Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee. Store in a cardboard box in a dark block before use in the experiments described in Examples 8a, 8b and 8c.

-Forma Scientific incubator; model 3157, water-cooled, internal temperature 28 ° C, opaque doors and walls, almost completely shaded, average internal light 0.82 mW / cm ² . The chamber capacity is about 5.6 cubic feet.

-Fisher brand salt meter; models 11-605, 11-606; specialized salinity and sodium chloride hydrometer; 12 inches long. Calibration for 60 degrees F-Fisher trademark hydrometer; model 11-520E, 12 inches long. Calibration for 60 ° F.-Fisher brand sugar hydrometer; model 11-6080, length 12 inches. Calibration for 61 ° F in 0.1% fraction Ambient illumination-All experimental conditions described in the examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent illumination. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

-Fischer 50 ml pipette TD 20 ° C serological / Dramont pipette aid-Kymex dip tube (2.3 cm x 30 cm) tapered bottom with rubber stopper-EZ high purity solvent acetone; containing acetone CAS # 67-64-1 . EE Zimmeman Co.
-Glass stir bar-Sodium chloride (Fisher Chemicals, Lot 025149)-Packaged in a 3 kg gray plastic bottle. Sodium chloride is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)-P. T.A.
Bromide (Br) -0.01%
Calcium (Ca) -0.0002% to 0.0007%
Chlorates and nitrates (as NO ₃₎ -0.0006% ~0.0009%
Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
Insoluble substances-0.001% to 0.0006%
Iodide (I) -0.0002% to 0.0004%
Iron (Fe)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.0001% to 0.0003%
Nitrogen compounds (as N) -0.0001% to 0.0003%
PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.9-9.0
Phosphate (PO ₃₎ -5 ppm than potassium (K) -0.001% ~0.005%
Sulfate (SO ₄ ) -0.003% to 0.004%
-Sucrose; sugar 4 g / 1 tsp, Kroger Brand
-Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 Watt high pressure sodium barrier lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light from the housing. Oriented vertically on a flat horizontal test surface. Place the bulb approximately 9 inches from the horizontal test surface.

Example 8a:
Sodium chloride solubility in water at room temperature (22 ° C.) Distilled water (about 500 ml at about 20 ° C.) was placed in each of six beakers (size of about 1000 ml each). One beaker “EE” was placed under the sodium lamp 12 as designed in FIG. 97f, while another beaker “FF” serving as a control was placed in the incubator. After about 1 hour, about 500 ml of water was again placed in two separate beakers. The beaker “CC” was placed under another sodium lamp in the same manner as the beaker “EE”; and the beaker “DD” was placed in the same incubator as the beaker “FF”. After about 1 hour, the process was repeated three times. In particular, the beaker “AA” was placed under another sodium lamp, as were the beakers “EE” and “CC”, and the beaker “BB” was placed in the same incubator as the beakers “FF” and “DD”. Therefore, the results were 1, 2 or 3 hours each with 3 sets of beakers exposed to the sodium lamp and 3 sets of beakers in the incubator. The water temperature was as follows:
1) Beaker AA sodium lamp about 1 hour, about 21 ° C;
2) About 2 hours beaker CC sodium lamp, about 22 ° C;
3) Beaker EE sodium lamp about 3 hours, about 23 ° C;
4) Beaker BB, control beaker, about 1 hour, about 21 ° C;
5) Beaker DD, control beaker, about 2 hours, about 22 ° C; and 6) Beaker FF, control beaker, about 3 hours, about 23 ° C.

  Sodium chloride (about 250 g) was then added to each beaker and stirred. The beaker was covered with wax paper, placed in a dark cupboard and covered with a thick black opaque blackout curtain.

  After 20 hours, the solution in the beaker was filtered over a salt into a 1000 ml beaker. After 2 hours, each solution (approximately 85 ml) was pipetted into a Kimex hydrometer test tube to establish temperature and hydrometer measurements. Finally, the solution was pipetted into each of five Petri dishes (approximately 50 ml) and dried to determine a dry sodium chloride weight / 100 ml solution.

Results : NaCl dissolution rate increased with solvent water exposure to the conditioned sodium lamp compared to unconditioned control water. After 2 hours exposure to the sodium lamp, the conditioned water dissolved about 7% more NaCl than the untreated control water. After 3 hours exposure to the sodium lamp, the conditioned water dissolved about 9% more NaCl than the untreated control water.

  The NaCl dissolution rate also increased with increasing time exposure to the sodium lamp for 1-2 hours. After 2 hours, the conditioned water dissolved about 3.5% more NaCl than the 1 hour conditioned water.

Beaker AA
Sodium lamp 1 hour temperature 22 ℃
82% salinity
Specific gravity 1.163
NaCl (%) 21.5%
Weight 27.0 g / 100 ml
Beaker BB
Control 1 hour temperature 22 ℃
80% salinity
Specific gravity 1.155
NaCl (%) 0.75%
Weight 26.2 g / 100 ml
Beaker CC
Na lamp 2 hours temperature 22 ℃
Salinity 83 +%
Specific gravity 1.160
NaCl (%) 21.5%
Weight 27.8 g / 100 ml
Beaker DD
Control 2 hour temperature 22 ℃
Salinity 77%
Specific gravity 1.145
NaCl (%) 20.0%
Weight 26.2 g / 100 ml
Beaker EE
Na lamp 3 hours temperature 22 ℃
Salinity 80.5%
Specific gravity 1.155
NaCl (%) 21.0%
Weight 26.0 g / 100 ml
Beaker FF
Control 3 hours 22 ℃
Salinity 74%
Specific gravity 1.135
NaCl (%) 19.0%
Weight 23.8 g / 100 ml
Example 8b:
Sodium chloride solubility in water at high temperature (55 ° C.) Distilled water (about 500 ml at about 20 ° C.) is placed in each of four beakers 104 (about 1000 ml) as shown in FIG. Heated to about 55 ° C. on the upper iron ring plate 103. One beaker 105 was then illuminated from the side with a sodium lamp 112 (as shown in FIG. 75a), while the other control water beaker 105 was simply exposed to ambient laboratory lighting. After one hour, water was placed in the second set of beakers 105 and treated exactly the same as the first set of beakers. Using a third set of beakers 105, the process was repeated and after 1 hour, 3 sets of beakers were produced, with each set exposed to sodium lamps and ambient lighting for 1, 2, and 3 hours. The temperature was maintained at about 55 ° C. for all three sets of beakers for the entire time prior to adding sodium chloride thereto.

  Specifically sodium chloride (about 250 g) was added to each beaker and stirred after the above treatment occurred. Each of the six beakers was covered with wax paper, placed in a dark cupboard and covered with a thick black opaque opaque cloth curtain.

  After 20 hours, the solution in the beaker was filtered over a salt into a 1000 ml beaker. Each solution (approximately 85 ml) was pipetted into a Kimex hydrometer test tube to establish temperature and hydrometer measurements.

Results : The results were virtually identical for all six solutions, and all were fully saturated. The temperature was 23.5 ° C., the salt content was about 99.5 to 100%, the specific gravity was about 1.195, and the NaCl% was about 25.5 to 26%.

Example 8c:
Sugar solubility in water at room temperature (22 ° C.) Distilled water (about 500 ml at about 20 ° C.) was placed in each of six beakers (each about 1000 ml). One beaker “KK” was placed under the sodium lamp 12 as designed in FIG. 95f, while another beaker “LL” serving as a control was placed in the incubator at an internal temperature of about 28 ° C. for about 3 hours. After about 1 hour, about 500 ml of water was again placed in two separate beakers. Beaker “II” was placed under another sodium lamp as was beaker “KK”; and beaker “JJ” was placed in the same incubator as beaker “LL”. After about 1 hour, the process was repeated three times. In particular, the beaker “GG” was placed under another sodium lamp, as were the beakers “KK” and “II”, and the beaker “HH” was placed in the same incubator as the beakers “LL” and “II”. Therefore, the results were 1, 2 or 3 hours each with 3 sets of beakers exposed to the sodium lamp and 3 sets of beakers in the incubator.

  Sugar (about 300 g) was then added to each beaker and stirred. The beaker was covered with wax paper, placed in a dark cupboard and covered with a thick black opaque blackout curtain.

  After 20 hours, the solution in the beaker was filtered over the crystals into a 1000 ml beaker. Each solution (approximately 85 ml) was pipetted into a Kimex hydrometer test tube to establish temperature and hydrometer measurements.

Results : The sucrose dissolution rate increased with solvent water exposure to the sodium lamp as compared to unconditioned control water. After 3 hours exposure to the sodium lamp, the conditioned water dissolved about 2-4% more sucrose than the untreated control water.

KK
Sodium lamp 3 hours temperature 23.5 ℃
Specific gravity 1.170
Sugar weight% 39.1%
LL
Control 3 hours Temperature 23.5 ℃
Specific gravity 1.150
Sugar weight% 36.7%

Example 8d:
Phenyl salicylate solubility in acetone at room temperature (22 ° C.) Acetone (about 1 ml) was pipetted into a small glass test tube and the test tube was capped. The neon electron spectrum resonated with the vibrational overtone of acetone. The test tube was placed (about 8 m / cm ² ) under a neon lamp (about 8 mW / cm ² ) that was otherwise darkened at an ambient temperature of about 28 ° C. for about 1.5 hours. The test tubes were simultaneously placed in an incubator at 28 ° C. for about 1.5 hours.

  Phenyl solicylate (about 3.50 g) was added to each tube, leaving an undissolved layer at the bottom of each tube. The solution was allowed to equilibrate (about 20 hours). The solution was filtered over the crystals and 0.500 ml was pipetted into a new tube.

  After evaporating the acetone, the dry weight of phenyl solicylate per ml dissolved in conditioned and unconditioned acetone was determined.

Results : The average amount of phenyl salicylate dissolved in conditioned acetone was 0.78 g / ml. The average amount dissolved in unconditioned acetone was 0.68 g / ml.

Example 9:
For the following Examples 9a-9b, the equipment, materials and experimental procedures listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in each Example).

Mercury-silver alloy crystallization a) Equipment and materials -Distilled water-American Fare, 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic container. Treated by distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. Source: Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee.

-Forma Scientific incubator; model 3157, water-cooled, internal temperature 28 ° C, opaque doors and walls, almost completely shaded, average internal light 0.82 mW / cm ² .

Silver nitrate (AgNO ₃ ) crystals: Fisher Chemicals, ACS guaranteed, in a brown glass bottle, 100 g, product number S181-1001; lot number # 017010
-Mercury reagent; Fisher M141, lot number # 014856; ACS mercury metal-Test tube; Fisher trademark, disposable culture test tube; 12 x 75 mm; Borosilicate glass; Catalog number # 14-961-26
-Mercury vapor lamp; GE; 175 watts; HR 175D x 39; oriented vertically on a flat test surface, spectral emission downward movement along the vertical axis of the test tube from top to bottom-Ambient illumination-Experiments described in the examples All conditions occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent lighting. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters).

-Radiation energy meter; ThermoOriel; Model 70260, 190 nm to 10 μm
-Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 Watt high pressure sodium barrier lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light downward from the housing. Oriented vertically on a flat horizontal test surface. Place the bulb about 8.75 inches (strength about 14.0 mW / cm) from the horizontal test surface.

Example 9a:
Spectral enhanced silver nitrate (about 2.0 g) for mercury-silver alloy crystallization was added to about 80 ml of distilled water (into a 1 gallon white semi-opaque plastic in a cardboard box with a thick black opaque curtain in a dark shielding room) Save). After the solution was allowed to equilibrate in ambient laboratory lighting for about 1.5 hours, about 2 ml was pipetted into each of 36 small tubes. Mercury (about 2 drops) was added to each test tube. Eighteen test tubes were placed in an incubator at about 28 ° C. as a control. Eighteen test tubes were mounted on a black non-reflective surface about 14 inches (about 35 cm) from a mercury lamp (47 mW / cm ² ). Ambient room temperature was about 28 ° C. in a room darkened otherwise.

After about 4 hours, the ambient temperature under the mercury lamp is found to be about 30 ° C., and the test tube on the black non-reflective surface is about 29.5 inches (about 75 inches) from the Hg lamp at a light intensity of about 4.5 mW / cm ^2. cm), but in this case the ambient temperature remained at about 28 ° C. Crystals in test tubes under the mercury lamp were measured up to about 10 mm in length at this point, while crystals in the incubator were up to about 3 mm in length.

Results : Crystals were evaluated approximately 20 hours after mercury addition. Micrographs were taken at a magnification of about 10 times (not shown herein). The height of the crystals produced was determined from the measurements obtained from the micrographs and plotted on the graphs shown in FIGS. 104a and 104b. The average height of the incubator control alloy crystals was about 7 mm, and branched dendrites were observed in one test tube. The average height of the mercury spectrum irradiated alloy crystals was about 12 mm, and branching dendrites were observed in seven test tubes, six of which contained excessive branching dendrites. Three of the spectrally grown crystals were about 22-25 mm in height (an example of a dendritic photograph is shown in Figure 105c). Mercury spectral pattern catalyst-enhanced growth and morphology of mercury-silver alloys were significantly different.

  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to affect phase change and structure.

Example 9b:
Pipette a mercury-silver alloy crystallized distilled water (approximately 40 ml) using water conditioned for 1 hour (stored in 1 gallon bowl of white semi-opaque plastic in a dark screened cupboard) into a 125 ml pyrex beaker. The sample was conditioned and conditioned by irradiation for about 1 hour under a sodium lamp. Another 125 ml pyrex beaker containing about 18 ° C. of distilled water (about 40 ml) was simultaneously placed in a 28 ° C. incubator. At the end of about 1 hour, the water temperature in both beakers was 21 ° C. and the volume did not change. Silver nitrate (about 1.00 g) was added to each beaker. The solution (about 2 ml) was pipetted into 16 small tubes each, and mercury (about 100 μl) was added to each tube. All test tubes were placed in an incubator at about 28 ° C.

Results : Crystals were evaluated approximately 17 hours after mercury addition. Micrographs were taken at a magnification of about 10 times (not shown herein). The height of the crystals produced was determined from the measured values obtained from the micrographs and plotted on the graphs shown in FIGS. 105a and 105b. The average height of the control alloy crystals was about 8 mm, the maximum was about 13 mm, and contained simple branched dendritic crystals in one test tube. The average height of mercury-silver alloy crystals grown from conditioned water was about 9 mm and the maximum was about 25 mm. Three tubes contained excessive branched dendrites.

  Compared to the control solution, the mercury-silver alloy growth was slightly greater in the solution made with sodium lamp conditioned water and the morphological findings were different.

混合ＮａＣｌ／ＫＣｌ結晶において、ＩＣＰ（Baird）により、ナトリウムおよびカリウムに関する元素分析を実施した。結果を以下に示す：
Ｋ重量％ Ｎａ重量％
カリウムランプ 51.4 1.45
ナトリウムランプ 51.1 1.36
アルミ箔被覆容器 51.6 1.17
黒色プラスチック被覆容器 50.1 1.88
蛍光灯 50.5 1.83
低飽和溶液中のスペクトル光周波数（カリウムランプ、ナトリウムランプおよび蛍光灯）の存在もまた、光を遮断した（アルミ箔および黒色プラスチック被覆容器）状態と比較して、結晶化および核生成の全体的速度を増強した。個々の結晶は、同一遮光条件においてはより大きく、有意の低核生成が認められた。
カリウムおよびナトリウムランプは、この不飽和溶液においては選択的結晶化を示さなかった。
アルミ箔被覆容器はまた、ＫＣｌ結晶化に比して、ＮａＣｌ結晶化の抑制を示した。
逆に、Ｎａの結晶化は、蛍光灯下のならびに遮光黒色プラスチックを用いたプラスチック容器中の不飽和溶液中で増強された（それは、遮光性黒色プラスチックを用いたプラスチック容器は電気コードの束の好くとなりに置かれていた、という事実の後に認められた）。
実施例１１ｃ：
塩化ナトリウム／塩化カリウム1:1モル不飽和溶液
実施例１１ａに上記したように飽和塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）／塩化カリウム（ＫＣｌ）1:1モル溶液を調製し、約1600 mlの蒸留／脱イオン水中に総量約528 gの混合塩を溶解した。上記と同様に皿を調製し、処理して、一晩結晶化させたが、しかしながらどのさらにも結晶成長は認められなかった。
実施例１１ｄ：
塩化ナトリウム／塩化カリウム1:1モル不飽和溶液
2000 mlパイレックスビーカー中で蒸留／脱イオン水（約1600 ml）を約55℃に加熱することにより、飽和塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）／塩化カリウム（ＫＣｌ）1:1モル溶液を調製した。ＮａＣｌ（約29 g）およびＫＣｌ（約37 g）を乾燥混合し、アンビエント実験室照明下で、総混合重量約594 gに対して約66 gの量で付加した。ビーカーを黒色プラスチックに包み込んで、戸棚に保存し、一晩（約18時間）平衡させた。
不飽和溶液を室温で濾過し、約100 mlを14個の結晶化皿の各々に入れた。皿を以下のように処理した：
−1 mの高さの光遮断バリアに取り囲まれた遮蔽室中のカリウムランプ下に3つ（カリウムランプを、矩形ハウジング中のランプ部分が試料ビーカーの約9インチ上にあるよう、ランプをリングスタンドに吊り下げた）；
−約1 mの高さの光遮断バリアに取り囲まれた遮蔽室中のナトリウムランプ下に3つ（図９４に示したのと同様の装置）；
−遮蔽室中の、アルミ箔に全体を被覆されて遮光された不透明プラスチック容器中に2つ；
−黒色プラスチックで全体をゆるく被覆されて遮光された不透明プラスチック容器中に2つ；ならびに
−蛍光灯下に2つ。
溶液を一晩結晶化させ、約20時間後に評価した。
結果：不飽和溶液からの結晶成長の重量および形態学知見を以下に示す：

混合ＮａＣｌ／ＫＣｌ結晶において、ＩＣＰ（Baird）により、ナトリウムおよびカリウムに関する元素分析を実施した。結果を以下に示す：
Ｋ重量％ Ｎａ重量％
カリウムランプ 51.8 0.71
ナトリウムランプ 52.1 0.99
蛍光灯 51.1 0.79
この非常に低い飽和溶液中のスペクトル光周波数（カリウムランプ、ナトリウムランプおよび蛍光灯）の存在もまた、光を遮断した（アルミ箔および黒色プラスチック被覆容器）状態と比較して、結晶化および核生成の全体的速度を増強した。結晶化成長速度は、ナトリウムランプを用いた場合に最大であった。核生成は全ての光照射に関してほぼ等しかった。
カリウムおよびナトリウムランプは、この極不飽和溶液においてはわずかな選択的結晶化を示した。
実施例１２：
混合マイクロ波結晶
以下の実施例１２ａおよび１２ｂに関して、以下に列挙した設備、材料および実験手法を利用した（実施例に別記しない限り）。
ａ）設備および材料
−蒸留水−American Fare、１ガロン半透明無色プラスチック壷中に含入。蒸留、精密濾過およびオゾン処理により処理。供給元：Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee。暗遮断室中の段ボール箱中に保存。
−パイレックス1000 mlビーカー
−パイレックス400 mlビーカー
−塩化ナトリウム（Fisher Chemicals） −灰色プラスチック3 kg瓶中に包装。塩化ナトリウムは、結晶形態では、以下のように特性化される：
塩化ナトリウム；保証Ａ．Ｃ．Ｓ．
バリウム（Ｂａ）（約0.001％）−Ｐ．Ｔ．
臭化物（Ｂｒ）−0.01％未満
カルシウム（Ｃａ）0.0002％−0.0007％未満
塩素酸塩および硝酸塩（ＮＯ₃として）−0.0006％〜0.0009％未満
重金属（例えばＰｂ）−0.2 ppm〜0.4 ppm未満
不溶性物質−0.001％〜0.006％未満
ヨウ化物（Ｉ）−0.0002％〜0.0004％未満
鉄（Ｆｅ）−0.2 ppm〜0.4 ppm未満
マグネシウム（Ｍｇ）−0.0001％〜0.0003％未満
窒素化合物（Ｎとして）−0.0001％〜0.0003％未満
25℃での5％溶液のｐＨ−5.0〜9.0
リン酸塩（ＰＯ₃）−5 ppm未満
カリウム（Ｋ）−0.001％〜0.005％
硫酸塩（ＳＯ₄）−0.003％〜0.004％
−塩化カリウム（Fisher Chemicals） −灰色プラスチック3 kg瓶中に包装。塩化カリウムは、結晶形態では、以下のように特性化される：
塩化カリウム；保証Ａ．Ｃ．Ｓ．
ロット分析の証明書
臭化物−0.01％
塩素酸塩および硝酸塩（ＮＯ₃として）−0.003％未満
窒素化合物（Ｎとして）−0.001％未満
リン酸塩−5 ppm未満
硫酸塩−0.001％未満
バリウムウ−0.001％
カルシウムおよびＲ₂Ｏ₃沈殿物−0.002％未満
重金属（例えばＰｂ）−5 ppm未満
鉄−2 ppm未満
ナトリウム−0.005％未満
マグネシウム−0.001％未満
ヨウ化物−0.002％未満
25℃での5％溶液のｐＨ−5.4〜8.6
不溶性物質−0.005％未満
−−下塗り暗色囲い（2）：約6フィート×約3フィート×約１1/2フィート金属戸棚（24ゲージ金属）（平坦黒色塗装内部を有する）
−マイクロ波用電磁ホーン、Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN#s959, 12.4-18.0GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725A, 3.5 mm。
−マイクロ波分光分析系（Hewlett Packard）；ＨＰ8335ＯＢスイープ発信器、ＨＰ8510Ｂネットワーク分析器およびＨＰ8513Ａ反射−透過試験セット。
−ナトリウムランプ、Stonco 70ワット高圧ナトリウム防護壁ランプ。ハウジングから光を投光するパラボラアルミニウム反射鏡を装備。平坦水平試験表面上に垂直に配向。水平試験表面から約9インチ（23 cm）に電球を配置。
−フンボルトブンゼンバーナー（＋Bernzomaticプロパン燃料）、）
−リングスタンドおよびFisher鋳鉄製リングおよび加熱プレート
−結晶化皿、パイレックス、90×50 mm、部品番号3140
−フォルマサイエンティフィックインキュベーター；モデル3157、；ＣＨ／Ｐ ＣＯ２コントロールを有する単一小室／水冷式インキュベーター；小室容量5.6立方フィート、不透明壁およびドア、内部光平均強度約0.82 mW/cm²。
−コンピューター顕微鏡（インテル製、モデルＱ×３）
実施例１２ａ：
塩化ナトリウム／塩化カリウム1:1モル飽和溶液および塩化ナトリウムマイクロ波回転周波数
1000 mlパイレックスビーカー中で蒸留／脱イオン水（約800 ml）を約55℃に加熱することにより、飽和塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）／塩化カリウム（ＫＣｌ）1:1モル溶液を調製した。ＮａＣｌ（約29 g）およびＫＣｌ（約37 g）を乾燥混合し、アンビエント実験室照明下で、それ以上溶解しなくなるまで、約66 gの量で付加した。ビーカーを黒色プラスチックに包み込んで、戸棚に保存し、一晩（約18時間）平衡させた。
飽和溶液を室温で濾過し、約100 mlを4つの結晶化皿の各々に入れた。皿のうち2つを遮蔽暗対照囲いに入れ、そして2つを第二遮蔽暗囲い中に入れて、非常に狭い共振ピークでマイクロ波をパラメーターＳ₁₁で設定し、13.073719から13.073721 GHzまでスイープした。マイクロ波皿「Ａ」は、マイクロ波電磁ホーンの直ぐ隣に置き、マイクロ波皿「Ｂ」は皿Ａの隣に、マイクロ波電磁ホーンと一列に置いた。
約17時間後、マイクロ波照射を終結し、結晶を評価した。両戸棚の温度は約21℃であった。
結果：結晶はサイズおよび形態学的に同様であった。しかしながら全体的結晶に関する重量は異なり、対照結晶の方が重かった。マイクロ波結晶は、対照に比して結晶化速度低減を示した。
結晶重量（g）
マイクロ波皿Ａ 3.2
マイクロ波皿Ｂ 3.1
対照皿Ａ 3.4
対照皿Ｂ 3.5
実施例１２ｂ：
塩化ナトリウム／塩化カリウム1:3モル飽和溶液および塩化ナトリウムマイクロ波回転周波数
1000 mlパイレックスビーカー中で蒸留／脱イオン水（約800 ml）を約55℃に加熱することにより、飽和塩化ナトリウム（ＮａＣｌ）／塩化カリウム（ＫＣｌ）1:4重量（約1:3モル）溶液を調製した。ＮａＣｌ（約75 g）およびＫＣｌ（約300 g）を乾燥混合し、次にアンビエント実験室照明下で水に付加すると、水中に残存する不溶解塩を生じた。ビーカーを黒色プラスチックに包み込んで、戸棚に保存し、一晩（約18時間）平衡させた。
飽和溶液を室温で濾過し、約100 mlを8つの結晶化皿の各々に入れた。皿を以下のように処理した：
−遮蔽暗対照囲い（約22℃）中に2つの皿
−第二遮蔽暗囲い（約22℃）中に2つの皿。非常に狭い共振ピークでマイクロ波をパラメーターＳ₁₁で設定し、13.0736から13.0738 GHzまでスイープした。マイクロ波皿「Ａ」は、マイクロ波電磁ホーンの直ぐ隣に置き、マイクロ波皿「Ｂ」は皿Ａの隣に、マイクロ波電磁ホーンと一列に置いた。
−インキュベーター（約28℃）中に2つの皿
−図９４に示したようなナトリウムランプ下（約28℃）に2つの皿。
約12時間後にマイクロ波照射を終結し、遮蔽対照をマイクロ波皿と同一の囲いに入れた。皿に約5時間後、全ての結晶化皿を査定した。成長結晶に対応する顕微鏡写真を図１０５ｆ〜１０５ｉに示す。乾燥結晶重量も得た。
結果：重量および形態学知見を以下に示す：
結晶重量（g） 形態学知見
マイクロ波皿Ａ（図105f） 2.2 多数の立方体結晶
マイクロ波皿Ｂ 2.0 いくつかの平坦シートを伴う
遮蔽対照Ａ（図105g） 2.5 多数の平坦シート
遮蔽対照Ｂ 2.6 いくつかの立方体結晶を伴う
ＮａランプＡ（図105h） 6.2 ほとんど立方体結晶
ＮａランプＢ 5.9
インキュベーター対照Ａ（図105i） 1.2 ほとんど平坦シート
インキュベーター対照Ｂ 0.9
より広範なマイクロ波共振曲線を実験に用いた。マイクロ波結晶重量および遮蔽対照重量間の差はより顕著で、マイクロ波照射中の結晶化は18％少なかった。
結晶間の形態学的差異は、図１０５ｆ〜１０５ｉに示したように同様により顕著であり、そして、スペクトル照射結晶から対照への連続体を明示した。
実施例１３：
導電率
以下の実施例１３に関しては、以下に列挙した設備、材料および実験手法を利用した。 Example 10:
Protein crystals and phase changes
  For the following Examples 10a-10b, the equipment, materials and experimental techniques listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in the Examples).
  a)Equipment and materials
  -Distilled water-Water is distilled water from American Fare, contained in a 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic bottle and processed by a combination of distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. The first source of water was Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee. Prior to use in the experiments described in Examples 10a, 10b and 10c, the plastic cages were stored in a darkening and electromagnetic shut-off chamber.
  -Equipped with sodium lamp, Stonco 70W high pressure sodium protective wall light, parabolic aluminum reflector to direct light coming out of housing. Ring stand and beaker suspension chain (ie, similar to the device shown in FIG. 94). A sodium lamp was placed on the table in the irradiation chamber (approximately 11 feet x 14 feet). There were no electronics products or other light sources in the room. Room temperature 28 ± 2 ° C.
  -Forma Scientific Incubator; Model 3157, water-cooled, internal temperature 28 ° C, opaque sides and doors, almost completely shaded, average internal light intensity about 0.82 mW / cm².
  -Protein: Sigma lysozyme grade I (from chicken egg white); EC 3.2.1.17: material # L6876, lot number 051K7028, 1 g: 58,100 units / protein 1 mg.
  -Emerald Biostructures Inc., Combi. Clover crystallization plate, first generation Combi plate, 24 wells with 4 wells per well for sitting drop crystallization, Crystal Clear sealing tape (EBS-CBT).
  -Reservoir: Hampton Research grid screen sodium chloride; # HR2-219. Hampton Research Crystal Screen 2, Polymer Crystallization Kit; # HR2-112.
  -Hampton Research, sodium acetate, 3.0 M solution (made from sodium acetate trihydrate), HR2-543.
  -Binocular microscope
  -Intel computer microscope
  -Ambient illumination-All experimental conditions described in these examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent illumination. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters). Fluorescent lamps produce a broad and noisy mercury spectrum.
Example 10a:
Protein crystallization changes and phase changes
  Lysozyme (about 1 g) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to give a sample concentration of about 50 mg / ml. Grid screen sodium chloride (approximately 1.3 ml) was pipetted into two combi plate reservoirs. A protein sample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the four wells and the reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted onto the protein sample for a total of about 60 μl / drop. Drop mixing was accomplished with a single micropipette aspiration / well. The plate was sealed with sealing tape. One plate was placed in the incubator and one plate was placed under a sodium lamp.
result:
the 2nd day
  -A4- (0.1 M HEPES, pH 7.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate showed a single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm) in two wells and a clear drop in two wells. All sodium lamp plates showed clear drops.
  -B1- (0.1 M citric acid, pH 4.0, 2.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate showed precipitation in 2 wells and single crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in 2 wells. The sodium lampwell contained a clear drop.
Day 6
  -A1- (0.1 M citric acid, pH 4.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate showed a clear drop. Two of the four wells in the sodium lamp plate were precipitated.
  -A3- (0.1 MMES, pH 6.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate contained clear drops, while one of the four sodium lamp wells contained needle crystals.
  The A4-incubator plate contained small crystals (less than about 0.2 mm) in all four wells, while the sodium lamp plate still contained clear drops.
  The -B1-incubator plate contained the precipitate in 3 wells and only one well contained a single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm). The sodium lamp plate also contained the precipitate in 3 wells and a new single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm) in one well.
  -B2- (0.1 M citric acid, pH 5.0, 2.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate contained a clear drop, while all four wells of the sodium lamp plate contained precipitate.
Day 9
  -A1-Incubator plate contained clear drops in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in all four wells.
  -A2- (0.1 M citric acid, pH 5.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate contained clear drops in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in 3 out of 4 wells.
  -The A3-incubator plate still contained clear drops in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained needle crystals again in one well, the precipitate in two wells, and a clear drop in the fourth well.
  The A4-incubator plate also contained a single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm and a maximum diameter of up to about 0.5 mm) in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained new needles in two wells and new single crystals (greater than about 0.2 mm up to about 1 × 2 mm) in two wells.
  The -B1-incubator plate contained the precipitate in 3 wells and only one well contained a single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm). The sodium lamp plate contained the precipitate only in two wells, new needle crystals in one well, and a single crystal (greater than about 0.2 mm) in one well.
  -B2-both plates contained sediment in all two wells.
  Crystals from A4 were dried and stored in a container in a drying chamber.
Example 10b:
Protein crystal growth and phase change
  Lysozyme (about 1 g) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to give a sample concentration of about 50 mg / ml. Crystal screen 2 (# 1-18) (approximately 1.3 ml) was pipetted into the first 18 reservoirs of two combi plates. A protein sample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the four wells and the reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted onto the protein sample for a total of about 60 μl / drop. Drop mixing was accomplished with a single micropipette aspiration / well. The plate was sealed with sealing tape. One plate was placed in the incubator and one plate was placed under a sodium lamp.
result:
the 2nd day
  -Test tube # 14-(about 0.2 M sodium potassium tartrate tetrahydrate, 0.1 M trisodium citrate dihydrate, pH 5.6 and 2.0 M ammonium sulfate). The incubator contained clear drops in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in 2 out of 4 wells.
Day 6
  -Test tube # 1- (about 2.0 M sodium chloride, 10% w / v PEG6000). The incubator plate contained clear drops in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained a clear drop in 3 wells and a single crystal (greater than about 0.2 mm) in one well.
  -Test tube # 2- (about 0.01 M hexadecyltrimethylammonium bromide, 0.5 M sodium chloride, 0.01 magnesium chloride hexahydrate). The incubator plate contained precipitates in 2 wells and needle crystals in 2 wells. The sodium lamp plate contained clear drops in two wells and rod crystals in two wells.
  -Test tube # 9- (buffer approximately 0.1 M sodium acetate trihydrate, pH 4.6, precipitate 2.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate contained a single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm) in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate contained precipitate in all four wells.
  -Test tube # 14-Both plates contained sediment in all four wells.
Day 9
  -Test tube # 1-incubator plate contained clear drops in 2 wells and sediment in 2 wells. The sodium lamp plate contained clear drops in two wells, needles in one well, and needles and single crystals (greater than about 0.2 mm) in one well.
  -Test tube # 2-incubator plate contained precipitate in 2 wells and needle crystals in 2 wells. The sodium lamp plate contained a clear drop in only one well, needle crystals in one well, and rod crystals (greater than about 0.2 mm) in two wells.
  -Test tube # 9-Incubator plate contained a single crystal (greater than about 0.2 mm) in all four wells. The sodium lamp plate also contained precipitate in all four wells.
Example 10c:
Protein crystal growth and phase change
  Lysozyme (about 1 g) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to give a sample concentration of about 50 mg / ml. Crystal screen 2 (# 9) (1.2 ml) was pipetted into two reservoirs in each of two combi plates. A protein sample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the four wells and the reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted onto the protein sample for a total of about 60 μl / drop. Drop mixing was accomplished with a single micropipette aspiration / well. The plate was sealed with sealing tape. One plate was placed in an incubator and one plate was placed under a sodium lamp 112 similar to the lamp shown in FIG.
result:
the 2nd day
  -Test tube # 9- (buffer approximately 0.1 M sodium acetate trihydrate, pH 4.6, precipitate 2.0 M sodium chloride). The incubator plate contained a single crystal (less than about 0.2 mm) in all 4 wells of both reservoirs (ie, a total of 8 wells). The sodium lamp plate contained sediment in all four wells of both reservoirs.
Example 10d:
Enhanced protein crystallization
  Lysozyme (about 1 g) was dissolved in about 0.1 M sodium acetate to give a sample concentration of about 50 mg / ml. Grid screen A4 (0.1 M HEPES, pH 7.0, 1.0 M sodium chloride) (approximately 1.3 ml) was pipetted into two reservoirs in each of two combi plates. A protein sample (about 30 μl) was pipetted into each of the four wells and the reservoir solution (about 30 μl) was pipetted onto the protein sample for a total of about 60 μl / drop. Drop mixing was accomplished with a single micropipette aspiration / well. The plate was sealed with sealing tape. One plate was placed in a 28 ° C. incubator and one plate was placed at 28 ° C. under a sodium lamp.
result:
the 2nd day:
  -Clear drop in all wells on both plates.
Day 6:
  -Three of the eight sodium ramp wells grew large (greater than about 1.0 mm) single protein crystals (Figure 105d). For the control plate, 2 out of 8 wells grew several small (less than about 0.1 mm) crystals (FIG. 105e).
Conclusion: Sodium lamp irradiation produced various effects on lysozyme protein crystal growth depending on the reagents used. An example is shown below:
    1. Increased precipitation
    2. Precipitation reduction
    3. Increased sedimentation rate
    4). Single crystal growth retardation and subsequent growth of large single crystals
    5). Increased growth rate of large single crystals
    6). Changes in crystal morphology
  Differences between incubators and sodium lamps were mainly observed for reservoir solutions containing sodium or potassium. The difference was minimal when the reservoir solution did not contain sodium or potassium.
Example 11:
  For the following Examples 11a-e, the equipment, materials and experimental techniques listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in the Examples).
  a)Equipment and materials
  -Sodium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Sodium chloride is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
      Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)-P. T.A.
      Bromide (Br)-less than 0.01%
      Calcium (Ca) less than 0.0002% to 0.0007%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) -0.0006% to less than 0.0009%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
      Insoluble material-less than 0.001% to 0.006%
      Iodide (I)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0004%
      Iron (Fe)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
      Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.0001% to 0.0003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-<0.0001% to 0.0003%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.0-9.0
      Phosphate (PO_Three) Less than -5 ppm
      Potassium (K) -0.001% to 0.005%
      Sulfate (SO_Four) -0.003% to 0.004%
  -Potassium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is characterized as follows:
Potassium chloride; warranty A. C. S.
      Bromide-0.01%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) less than -0.003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-less than 0.001%
      Phosphate-less than 5 ppm
      Sulfate-less than 0.001%
      Barium-0.001%
      Calcium and R₂O_ThreePrecipitate-less than 0.002%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 5 ppm
      Iron-less than 2 ppm
      Sodium-less than 0.005%
      Magnesium-less than 0.001%
      Iodide-less than 0.002%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.4 to 8.6
      Insoluble material-less than 0.005%
    -Sterile water-(Bio Whittaker), contained in 1 liter clear plastic bottle. Prepared by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, deionization and distillation.
    -Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 Watt high pressure sodium barrier lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light from the housing. Oriented vertically on a flat horizontal test surface. Place the bulb about 8.75 inches (strength about 14.0 mW / cm) from the horizontal test surface.
    -Humboldt Bunsen burner
    -Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate
    -Crystallization dish, Pyrex, capacity 270 ml, Corning 3140, Ace Glass 8465-12
    -A darkened room (Ace room, Ace, Philadelphia, PA, US model A6H3-16, copper mesh, about 8 feet wide, about 17 feet long, about 8 feet high (about 2.4 m x 5.2 m × 2.4 m)).
    -Ambient illumination-All experimental conditions described in these examples occurred in the presence of standard fluorescent illumination. The fluorescent lamps were Sylvania Cool White Deluxe fluorescent lamps, 75 W, each about 8 feet long (about 2.4 m long). The lamps were suspended in pairs, about 3.5 meters above the counter in the laboratory where the experimental equipment was placed. There were six pairs of lamps in a room about 25 feet by 40 feet (7.6 meters by 12.1 meters). Fluorescent lamps produce a broad and noisy mercury spectrum.
    -Aluminum foil, plastic container
    -Black plastic, plastic container
    -Potassium lamp (Thermo Oriel), 10 W spectral line potassium lamp # 65070, with Thermo Oriel lamp stand # 65160 and Thermo Oriel spectral lamp power supply # 65150. A potassium lamp was mounted overhead about 9 inches (about 23 cm) from the crystallization dish using a horizontally oriented rectangular bulb (shown in FIG. 97h).
    -Distilled water-American Fare, contained in a 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic bottle. Treated by distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. Source: Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee. Stored in a cardboard box in a dark room.
    -Pyrex 1000 ml beaker
    -Pyrex 400 ml beaker
    -Pyrex 2000 ml beaker
    -Undercoat dark enclosure: about 6 feet x about 3 feet x about 11/2 feet metal cupboard (24 gauge metal) (with flat black paint inside)
    -Microwave electromagnetic horn, Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN # s959, 12.4-18.0GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725A, 3.5 mm.
    -Microwave spectroscopy system (Hewlett Packard); HP 8335OB sweep transmitter, HP 8510B network analyzer and HP 8513A reflection-transmission test set.
    -Forma Scientific Incubator; Model 3157, water-cooled, internal temperature 28 ° C, opaque sides and doors, almost completely shaded, average internal light intensity about 0.82 mW / cm².
    -Computer microscope (Intel, model Q x 3)
Example 11a:
Sodium chloride / potassium chloride 1: 1 molar saturated solution
  A saturated sodium chloride (NaCl) / potassium chloride (KCl) 1: 1 molar solution was prepared by heating distilled / deionized water (about 1600 ml) to about 55 ° C. in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker. NaCl (about 29 g) and KCl (about 37 g) were dry mixed and added under ambient laboratory lighting in an amount of about 66 g for a total mixing weight of about 726 g until no further dissolution occurred. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).
  The saturated solution was filtered at room temperature and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of 13 crystallization dishes. The dish was processed as follows:
  -1 ring below the potassium lamp in a shielded room surrounded by a light-shielding barrier of 1 m height (ring the lamp so that the lamp part in the rectangular housing is approximately 9 inches above the sample beaker. Hung on the stand);
  -Three under the sodium lamp in a shielded room surrounded by a light blocking barrier about 1 m high (similar device as shown in Fig. 94);
  -Two in opaque plastic containers, all covered with aluminum foil and shielded from light in the shielding chamber;
  -Two in opaque plastic containers, all covered with black plastic and shielded from light, in a shielding room;
  3 under fluorescent lamps (fluorescent lamps produce a broad and noisy mercury spectrum).
  The solution was allowed to crystallize overnight.
  Results: All dishes had a crystal mass covering the bottom. The approximate weight is shown below:
Average weight (g) / dish
    Potassium lamp 14.94
    Sodium lamp 15.03
    Aluminum foil coated container 5.75
    Black plastic coated container 5.50
    Fluorescent lamp 13.87
  Elemental analysis for sodium and potassium was performed on mixed NaCl / KCl crystals. The results are shown below:
K wt% Na weight%
    Potassium lamp 52.1 1.15
    Sodium lamp 50.8 1.61
    Aluminum foil coated container 51.9 1.10
    Black plastic coated container 51.9 1.63
    Fluorescent light 51.7 1.55
  The presence of spectral light frequencies (potassium lamps, sodium lamps and fluorescent lamps) increased the rate of crystallization for both sodium and potassium as compared to light blocked (aluminum foil and black plastic coated containers).
  The potassium lamp selectively suppressed NaCl crystallization in favor of KCl. Similarly, the sodium lamp increased NaCl crystallization compared to KCl.
  The aluminum foil-coated container suppressed NaCl crystallization and did not affect KCl crystallization.
Example 11b:
Sodium chloride / potassium chloride 1: 1 molar unsaturated solution
  A saturated sodium chloride (NaCl) / potassium chloride (KCl) 1: 1 molar solution was prepared by heating distilled / deionized water (about 1600 ml) to about 55 ° C. in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker. NaCl (about 29 g) and KCl (about 37 g) were dry mixed and added in an amount of about 66 g for a total mixing weight of about 660 g under ambient laboratory lighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).
  The unsaturated solution was filtered at room temperature and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of 13 crystallization dishes. The dish was processed as follows:
  -1 ring below the potassium lamp in a shielded room surrounded by a light-shielding barrier of 1 m height (ring the lamp so that the lamp part in the rectangular housing is approximately 9 inches above the sample beaker. Hung on the stand);
  -Three under the sodium lamp in a shielded room surrounded by a light blocking barrier about 1 m high (similar device as shown in Fig. 94);
  -Two in opaque plastic containers, all covered with aluminum foil and shielded from light in the shielding chamber;
  -Two in opaque plastic containers, all covered with black plastic and shielded from light, in a shielding room;
  3 under fluorescent lamps (fluorescent lamps produce a broad and noisy mercury spectrum).
  The solution was allowed to crystallize overnight and evaluated after about 20 hours.
result: The weight and morphological findings of crystal growth from unsaturated solutions are shown below:

  Elemental analysis for sodium and potassium was performed by ICP (Baird) on mixed NaCl / KCl crystals. The results are shown below:
K wt% Na weight%
    Potassium lamp 51.4 1.45
    Sodium lamp 51.1 1.36
    Aluminum foil coated container 51.6 1.17
    Black plastic coated container 50.1 1.88
    Fluorescent light 50.5 1.83
  The presence of spectral light frequencies (potassium lamps, sodium lamps and fluorescent lamps) in low-saturated solutions is also the overall crystallization and nucleation compared to light-blocked (aluminum foil and black plastic coated containers) Increased speed. Individual crystals were larger under the same light-shielding conditions and significant hyponucleation was observed.
  The potassium and sodium lamps did not show selective crystallization in this unsaturated solution.
  The aluminum foil coated container also showed a reduction in NaCl crystallization compared to KCl crystallization.
  Conversely, Na crystallization was enhanced in unsaturated solutions under fluorescent lamps as well as in plastic containers using light-shielding black plastic (that is, plastic containers using light-shielding black plastic are bundles of electrical cords). (Recognized after the fact that he had been in favor).
Example 11c:
Sodium chloride / potassium chloride 1: 1 molar unsaturated solution
  A saturated sodium chloride (NaCl) / potassium chloride (KCl) 1: 1 molar solution was prepared as described above in Example 11a and a total of about 528 g of mixed salt was dissolved in about 1600 ml of distilled / deionized water. A dish was prepared, processed and crystallized overnight as above, but no further crystal growth was observed.
Example 11d:
Sodium chloride / potassium chloride 1: 1 molar unsaturated solution
  A saturated sodium chloride (NaCl) / potassium chloride (KCl) 1: 1 molar solution was prepared by heating distilled / deionized water (about 1600 ml) to about 55 ° C. in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker. NaCl (about 29 g) and KCl (about 37 g) were dry mixed and added in an amount of about 66 g to a total mixing weight of about 594 g under ambient laboratory lighting. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).
  The unsaturated solution was filtered at room temperature and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of the 14 crystallization dishes. The dish was processed as follows:
  -1 ring below the potassium lamp in a shielded room surrounded by a light-shielding barrier of 1 m height (ring the lamp so that the lamp part in the rectangular housing is approximately 9 inches above the sample beaker. Hung on the stand);
  -Three under the sodium lamp in a shielded room surrounded by a light blocking barrier about 1 m high (similar device as shown in Fig. 94);
  -Two in opaque plastic containers, all covered with aluminum foil and shielded from light in the shielding chamber;
  -2 in opaque plastic containers, lightly covered with black plastic and shielded entirely; and
  -2 under fluorescent lights.
  The solution was allowed to crystallize overnight and evaluated after about 20 hours.
result: The weight and morphological findings of crystal growth from unsaturated solutions are shown below:

  Elemental analysis for sodium and potassium was performed by ICP (Baird) on mixed NaCl / KCl crystals. The results are shown below:
K wt% Na weight%
    Potassium lamp 51.8 0.71
    Sodium lamp 52.1 0.99
    Fluorescent light 51.1 0.79
  The presence of spectral light frequencies (potassium lamps, sodium lamps and fluorescent lamps) in this very low saturated solution is also responsible for crystallization and nucleation compared to light blocked (aluminum foil and black plastic coated containers) Increased the overall speed. The crystallization growth rate was maximum when using a sodium lamp. Nucleation was nearly equal for all light irradiations.
  Potassium and sodium lamps showed slight selective crystallization in this extremely unsaturated solution.
Example 12:
Mixed microwave crystal
  For the following Examples 12a and 12b, the equipment, materials and experimental procedures listed below were utilized (unless otherwise noted in the Examples).
  a)Equipment and materials
    -Distilled water-American Fare, contained in a 1 gallon translucent colorless plastic bottle. Treated by distillation, microfiltration and ozone treatment. Source: Greeneville Municipal Water supply, Greeneville, Tennessee. Stored in a cardboard box in a dark room.
    -Pyrex 1000 ml beaker
    -Pyrex 400 ml beaker
    -Sodium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Sodium chloride is characterized in crystalline form as follows:
Sodium chloride; Warranty A. C. S.
      Barium (Ba) (about 0.001%)-P. T.A.
      Bromide (Br)-less than 0.01%
      Calcium (Ca) 0.0002%-less than 0.0007%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) -0.0006% to less than 0.0009%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb) -0.2 ppm to less than 0.4 ppm
      Insoluble material-0.001% to less than 0.006%
      Iodide (I) -0.0002% to less than 0.0004%
      Iron (Fe) -0.2 ppm to less than 0.4 ppm
      Magnesium (Mg) -0.0001% to less than 0.0003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N) -0.0001% to less than 0.0003%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.0-9.0
      Phosphate (PO_Three) Less than -5 ppm
      Potassium (K) -0.001% to 0.005%
      Sulfate (SO_Four) -0.003% to 0.004%
  -Potassium chloride (Fisher Chemicals)-Packaged in a 3 kg bottle of gray plastic. Potassium chloride, in crystalline form, is characterized as follows:
Potassium chloride; warranty A. C. S.
    Certificate for batch analysis
      Bromide-0.01%
      Chlorates and nitrates (NO_ThreeAs) less than -0.003%
      Nitrogen compounds (as N)-less than 0.001%
      Phosphate-less than 5 ppm
      Sulfate-less than 0.001%
      Barium-0.001%
      Calcium and R₂O_ThreePrecipitate-less than 0.002%
      Heavy metals (eg Pb)-less than 5 ppm
      Iron-less than 2 ppm
      Sodium-less than 0.005%
      Magnesium-less than 0.001%
      Iodide-less than 0.002%
      PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C -5.4 to 8.6
      Insoluble material-less than 0.005%
    --- Undercoat dark enclosure (2): About 6 feet x about 3 feet x about 11/2 feet metal cupboard (24 gauge metal) (with flat black paint inside)
    -Microwave electromagnetic horn, Maury Microwave, Model P230B, SN # s959, 12.4-18.0GHz (10.0-18.7), 8725A, 3.5 mm.
    -Microwave spectroscopy system (Hewlett Packard); HP 8335OB sweep transmitter, HP 8510B network analyzer and HP 8513A reflection-transmission test set.
    -Sodium lamp, Stonco 70 Watt high pressure sodium barrier lamp. Equipped with a parabolic aluminum reflector that projects light from the housing. Oriented vertically on a flat horizontal test surface. Place the bulb approximately 9 inches (23 cm) from the horizontal test surface.
    -Humboldt Bunsen burner (+ Bernzomatic propane fuel),)
    -Ring stand and Fisher cast iron ring and heating plate
    -Crystallization dish, Pyrex, 90 x 50 mm, part number 3140
    -Forma Scientific incubator; Model 3157; Single chamber / water-cooled incubator with CH / P CO2 control; chamber volume 5.6 cubic feet, opaque walls and doors, average internal light intensity about 0.82 mW / cm².
    -Computer microscope (Intel, model Q x 3)
Example 12a:
Sodium chloride / potassium chloride 1: 1 molar saturated solution and sodium chloride microwave rotation frequency
  A saturated sodium chloride (NaCl) / potassium chloride (KCl) 1: 1 molar solution was prepared by heating distilled / deionized water (about 800 ml) to about 55 ° C. in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker. NaCl (about 29 g) and KCl (about 37 g) were dry mixed and added in an amount of about 66 g under ambient laboratory lighting until no more dissolved. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).
  The saturated solution was filtered at room temperature and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of the four crystallization dishes. Place two of the dishes in a shielded dark enclosure and two in the second shielded dark enclosure, and microwave the parameter S with very narrow resonance peaks.₁₁And swept from 13.073719 to 13.073721 GHz. The microwave dish “A” was placed directly next to the microwave electromagnetic horn, and the microwave dish “B” was placed next to the dish A and in line with the microwave electromagnetic horn.
  After about 17 hours, microwave irradiation was terminated and the crystals were evaluated. The temperature of both cabinets was about 21 ℃.
result: The crystals were similar in size and morphology. However, the weight for the overall crystals was different and the control crystals were heavier. The microwave crystal showed a reduced crystallization rate compared to the control.
                                                Crystal weight (g)
    Microwave dish A 3.2
    Microwave dish B 3.1
    Control dish A 3.4
    Control dish B 3.5
Example 12b:
Sodium chloride / potassium chloride 1: 3 molar saturated solution and sodium chloride microwave rotation frequency
  Saturated sodium chloride (NaCl) / potassium chloride (KCl) 1: 4 weight (about 1: 3 mole) solution by heating distilled / deionized water (about 800 ml) to about 55 ° C. in a 1000 ml Pyrex beaker Was prepared. NaCl (about 75 g) and KCl (about 300 g) were dry mixed and then added to the water under ambient laboratory lighting, resulting in an undissolved salt remaining in the water. The beaker was wrapped in black plastic and stored in a cupboard and allowed to equilibrate overnight (about 18 hours).
  The saturated solution was filtered at room temperature and approximately 100 ml was placed in each of the 8 crystallization dishes. The dish was processed as follows:
    -2 dishes in a shielded dark control enclosure (about 22 ° C)
    -Two dishes in a second shielded dark enclosure (about 22 ° C). Parameter S with microwave at very narrow resonance peak₁₁And swept from 13.0736 to 13.0738 GHz. The microwave dish “A” was placed directly next to the microwave electromagnetic horn, and the microwave dish “B” was placed next to the dish A and in line with the microwave electromagnetic horn.
    -2 dishes in incubator (about 28 ℃)
    -Two dishes under a sodium lamp (about 28 ° C) as shown in Figure 94.
  After about 12 hours, microwave irradiation was terminated and the shielding control was placed in the same enclosure as the microwave dish. After about 5 hours on the dish, all crystallization dishes were assessed. Photomicrographs corresponding to the grown crystals are shown in FIGS. A dry crystal weight was also obtained.
result: Weight and morphology findings are shown below:
                                    Crystal weight (g) Morphological findings
    Microwave dish A (Fig. 105f) 2.2 Numerous cubic crystals
    Microwave dish B 2.0 with some flat sheets
    Shielding control A (Fig. 105g) 2.5 Many flat sheets
    Shielding Control B 2.6 with some cubic crystals
    Na lamp A (Fig. 105h) 6.2 Almost cubic crystal
    Na lamp B 5.9
    Incubator Control A (Fig. 105i) 1.2 Almost flat sheet
    Incubator control B 0.9
  A broader microwave resonance curve was used in the experiment. The difference between the microwave crystal weight and the shielding control weight was more pronounced, with 18% less crystallization during microwave irradiation.
  Morphological differences between crystals were also more pronounced as shown in FIGS. 105f-105i and demonstrated a continuum from the spectrally irradiated crystals to the control.
Example 13:
conductivity
  For Example 13 below, the equipment, materials, and experimental techniques listed below were utilized.

a) Equipment and materials- Accumet Research AR20 pH / conductivity meter (calibration using reference solution before all experiments)
−MicroMHOS / cm−1,004
−Microseimens / cm−1,004
−OmhS / cm−99
−PPM DS−669
-Accuracy @ 25 ° C (+/-. 25%)
-Size-16 oz (473 ml)
-Analysis number # -2713
-Conductivity probe # 13-620-155 (+ thermocouple)
-Humboldt Bunsen burner (+ Bernzomatic propane fuel)
-Ring stands and cast iron rings and heating plates (Fisher)
-Equipped with sodium lamp, Stonco 70W high pressure sodium protective wall light, parabolic aluminum reflector to direct light coming out of housing. The sodium bulb is an S62 lamp, 120 V, 60 Hz, 1,5 A, manufactured by Jemanamjjasond (Hungary). The sodium lamp was placed approximately 12 cm from the beaker side.

    -Sterile water-(Bio Whittaker), contained in 1 liter clear plastic bottle. Processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, deionization and distillation.

Example 13a:
Sodium Chloride Aqueous Conductivity The same procedure was followed as discussed in detail in Example 7, but with the following specific differences.

  Water (about 800 ml) was placed in a 1000 ml beaker at room temperature and the probe was allowed to equilibrate in water for about 10 minutes before obtaining measurements on conductivity (S / cm), dissolved solids (ppm) and resonance (kOhms) . The water was then heated to about 56.1 ° C. and the measurement was repeated. Sodium chloride (about 0.01 g) was added and stirred with a glass stir bar for about 30 seconds. Conductivity measurements were obtained approximately every 2 minutes for approximately 20 minutes, with the final measurement being approximately 40 minutes. Dissolved solids and resonance measurements were also obtained at about 4 minutes, about 14 minutes and about 20 minutes after addition of the salt.

  The experimental apparatus used to obtain the data is shown in FIGS. The conditioning probe was replaced with the pH probe of Example 7.

Four sets of parameters were evaluated, and each set included three trials:
1. Bunsen burner heating alone (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 99);
2. Irradiation with sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before adding sodium (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 100);
3. Irradiation with sodium lamp for about 40 minutes after addition of salt (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 100);
4). Sodium lamp irradiation with water for about 40 minutes before and after salt addition (apparatus corresponding to FIG. 100).

Results : The conductivity appears to increase with sodium lamp irradiation after the addition of sodium chloride.

  FIG. 106a is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of Bunsen burner single data.

  FIG. 106b is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of temperature (only two separate data points) for Bunsen burner single data.

  FIG. 106c is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of Bunsen burner alone data, where the plot is a data point generated 2 minutes after adding sodium chloride to water. Begins with.

  FIG. 106d is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding to water conditioned by a sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before dissolving the sodium chloride.

  FIG. 106e is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of temperature (only two separate data points) corresponding to water conditioned by a sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before dissolving the sodium chloride.

  FIG. 106f is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding to water conditioned by a sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before dissolving the sodium chloride.

  FIG. 106g shows conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding to sodium chloride and a solution of water irradiated to the spectral energy pattern of the sodium lamp starting when sodium chloride is added to the water. It is a graph of the experimental data which shows.

  FIG. 106h shows conductivity as a function of sodium chloride and the temperature (only two separate data points) corresponding to the water solution irradiated to the spectral energy pattern of the sodium lamp starting when sodium chloride is added to the water. It is a graph of the experimental data which shows a rate.

  FIG. 106i shows conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding to sodium chloride and a solution of water irradiated to the spectral energy pattern of the sodium lamp starting when sodium chloride is added to the water. It is a graph of the experimental data which shows.

  FIG. 106j is an experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding to water conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before adding sodium chloride to the water. A graph, where the water is continuously irradiated with a sodium light spectral pattern while sodium chloride is added and persists when all conductivity measurements have been made.

  FIG. 106k is a function of temperature (only two separate data points) for three separate sets of data corresponding to water conditioned by the sodium ramp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before sodium chloride is dissolved. Is a graph of experimental data showing the electrical conductivity of the water, in which case it is continuously irradiated with water in the sodium light spectrum pattern while sodium chloride is added, and persists when all conductivity measurements have been made. .

  FIG. 106l is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data corresponding to water conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before sodium chloride is dissolved. In this case, water is continuously irradiated in the sodium light spectral pattern while sodium chloride is added, and persists when all conductivity measurements have been made.

  FIG. 106m is a graph of experimental data in which the averages from the data in FIGS. 106a, 106d, 106g and 106j are superimposed.

  FIG. 106n is a graph of experimental data in which the averages from the data in FIGS. 106b, 106e, 106h and 106k are superimposed.

  FIG. 106o is a graph of experimental data in which the averages from the data in FIGS. 106c, 106f, 106i and 106j are superimposed.

In this example, the targeted spectral pattern and / or targeted spectral conditioning pattern was used to change the material properties of the solvent and / or solvent / solute system.
(1) A method for growing a crystal in a crystallization reaction system, the following:
Targeting at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system using at least one spectral energy pattern to generate at least one of the generation, stimulation and stabilization of at least one component in the crystallization reaction system A method involving the resulting process.
(2) A method for adjusting the state of at least one state-controllable participant in a crystallization reaction system, comprising:
Applying at least one conditioning frequency to the at least one tunable participant to produce at least one of generation, stimulation and stabilization of the at least one conditioned participant, thereby causing the at least one state The tuning frequency comprises at least one frequency selected from the group consisting of a direct resonant tuning frequency, a harmonic resonant tuning frequency and a non-harmonic heterodyne tuning frequency, and at least one reaction in the crystallization reaction system Using the condition-regulating participant in the crystallization reaction system to enhance the speed of the reaction.
(3) The state-regulating participant resonates with at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system to resonate energy, thereby affecting at least one reaction path in the crystallization reaction system. The method described.
(4) The method of claim 3, further comprising applying at least one spectral energy pattern to the crystallization reaction system.
(5) The method according to claim 4, wherein the rate of at least one reaction in the crystallization reaction system is accelerated.
(6) A method for influencing a specific reaction path in a crystallization reaction system using a spectral catalyst by increasing the physical catalyst, comprising:
Strength sufficient to catalyze at least one reaction in a crystallization reaction system by doubling at least part of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst with at least one energy emitting source to produce a catalytic spectral pattern And applying at least a portion of the catalytic spectral pattern to the crystallization reaction system for a sufficient period of time.
Example 14:
Battery For the following Examples 14a and 14b, the following equipment, materials and experimental procedures were utilized.
a) Equipment and materials- Equipped with sodium lamp, Stonco 70W high pressure sodium barrier light, parabolic aluminum reflector that directs light coming out of the housing. The sodium bulb is an S62 lamp, 120 V, 60 Hz, 1,5 A, manufactured by Jemanamjjasond (Hungary). The sodium lamp was placed approximately 12 cm from the beaker side.
-Sterilized water-contained in a biowhytaker, 1 liter clear plastic bottle and processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, deionization and distillation.
-Sodium chloride, manufactured by Fisher Chemicals, lot no. 025149, 3 kg bottle made of gray plastic. Crystalline sodium chloride is characterized as follows:
Sodium chloride: Certified A. C. S
Lot analysis certificate Barium (Ba) (approx. 0.001%)-P. T.A.
Bromine (Br) -0.01%
Calcium (Ca)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0007%
Chlorates and nitrates (as NO ₃ ) -less than 0.0006% to 0.0009%
Heavy metal (as Pb)-<0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
Insoluble matter-less than 0.001% to 0.0060%
Iodine (I)-less than 0.0002% to 0.0004%
Iron (Fe)-less than 0.2 ppm to 0.4 ppm
Magnesium (Mg)-less than 0.0001% to 0.0003%
Nitrogen compounds (as N)-<0.0001% to 0.0003%
PH of 5% solution at 25 ° C. -5.9-9.0
Phosphate (PO ₃ ) -less than 5 ppm Potassium (K) -0.001% -0.005%
Sulfate (SO ₄₎ -0.003% ~0.004%
Battery anode by Sovietski; # 150400; Magnesium and Aluminum-Battery / flashlight assembly; aqueous sodium chloride (NaCl) electrolyte powdered flashlight by Sovietski; # 150400; double cathode / anode configuration-Sodium (Na) lamp Stonco 70 Watt high pressure sodium safety wall light attached to a cylindrical aluminum reflector about 9 cm in diameter, facing the light away from the horizontally oriented containment.
-Container, clear plastic box, 7.5 x 5.75 x 3.75 inches-Distilled water-Made in American Fair, 1 gallon translucent, contained in a colorless plastic water bowl, distilled, microfiltered, and ozone treated It was processed by. Source: Greenville public water supply in Greenville, Tennessee. Store in a cardboard box in a dark, shielded room.
-Ground circuit, black housing: 6 ftx3 ftx 1.5 ft metal cabinet (24 gauge metal); black paint inside-Load box ammeter / voltmeter (Fuel Cell Store) helicocentris # DBGMNR29126811 with 10 ohm load -Dual channel thermometer with Fisher correction-2000ml Pyrex beaker
Example 14a:
Enhancement of Sodium Chloride Battery Current with Sodium Spectral Irradiation FIG. 107 shows an aqueous NaCl battery / flashlamp assembly 308. Two assemblies 308 were placed side by side in a grounded black housing. Electrolyte 310 was distilled water (about 1700 ml) and NaCl (about 97 g) mixed simultaneously at room temperature in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker. A thermometer wire 309 was placed in the center of the bottom of the electrolyte container 307. FIG. 108 shows the sodium lamp 112 in the containment 111 with the aluminum foil cylinder 110 located outside each electrolyte container 307, which passes through the outside of the container 307 into the electrolyte solution 310 and Sodium spectral illumination can be delivered to the outside of the anode plate 306.
Electrolyte container 307 was filled with electrolyte 310, anode / cathode assembly 301 was lowered into electrolyte 310, and flash lamp 303 of each assembly 308 was switched on throughout the experiment. Initial measurements of current (mAmps) and temperature were made and then measured again every 40 minutes.
The sodium lamp had the following cycle.
1. Cut the first 40 minutes 2.2 Put the second 40 minutes 3. Cut the third 40 minutes 4. Put the fourth 40 minutes
Results : As shown in FIG. 109, the standard initial current rise occurred with the sodium lamp switched off. The current ramp continued with the switched on sodium lamp for the second 40 minutes. However, when the sodium lamp was switched off at 80 minutes, the current stopped rising and remained essentially the same until 120 minutes. When the sodium lamp was switched on again at 120 minutes, the current rose again. Eventually, when the sodium lamp was turned off, the current remained the same.
These current characteristics were not temperature related. The temperature increased between 80 and 120 minutes and between 160 and 200 minutes, but when the sodium lamp was turned off, the current did not increase, indicating that the increase in current was not due to an increase in temperature. It suggests that.
Example 14b:
Enhancement of Sodium Chloride Battery Current with Sodium Spectral Irradiation FIG. 107 shows an aqueous NaCl battery / flashlamp assembly 308. Two assemblies 308 were placed side by side in a grounded black housing. Electrolyte 310 was distilled water (about 1700 ml) and NaCl (about 97 g) mixed simultaneously at room temperature in a 2000 ml Pyrex beaker. FIG. 108 shows the sodium lamp 112 in the containment 111 with the aluminum foil cylinder 110 located outside each electrolyte container 307, which passes through the outside of the container 307 into the electrolyte solution 310 and Sodium spectral illumination can be delivered to the outside of the anode plate 306.
Electrolyte container 307 was filled with electrolyte 310, anode / cathode assembly 301 was lowered into electrolyte 310, and flash lamp 303 of each assembly 308 was switched on throughout the experiment. Initial measurements of current (mAmps) and temperature were made and then measured again every 10 minutes. This migration of the charged species of the battery is accomplished by a phase change that results in dissolution of the anode's metal electrons, migrates through the electrolyte, and is terminated by combined crystallization to the cathode. The spectral energy pattern used in this example enhanced these phase changes.
The sodium lamp had the following cycle.
1. Cut for 40-40 minutes 2. Cut for 40-70 minutes 2. Put for 70-110 minutes 3. Cut for 110-150 minutes 4. Put for 150-190 minutes
Results : As shown in FIG. 110, the standard initial current rise occurred with the sodium lamp switched off. The rate of current increase was slow until 70 minutes. The current increased rapidly when the sodium lamp was switched on between 70 and 110 minutes. When the sodium lamp was switched off in 110 to 150 minutes, the current rise decreased. When the sodium lamp was switched on again in 150 minutes, the rate of current rise increased again.
In these examples, the sodium spectral energy pattern was used to increase the current in the electrolyte.
Example 15:
corrosion
Corrosion of Steel Razor Blades in Aqueous Solution For the following Examples 15a and 15b, the following equipment, materials and experimental procedures were utilized.
a) Equipment and materials -Sterile water-Biowhytaker, contained in 1 liter clear plastic bottle and processed by ultrafiltration, reverse osmosis, deionization and distillation.
-Stanley Utility Blade 11-921, 1095 Carbon Steel-Sodium Lamp, Stoneco 70 Watt High Pressure Sodium Safety Wall Light Attached to a Parabolic Aluminum Reflector Directing Light Off the Storage. The sodium bulb was a 120V, 60Hz, 1.5A S62 type lamp manufactured in Hungary by Gemannam Jasond.
Example 15a:
A steel razor blade was placed in a beaker 104 containing distilled water 105 for about 48 hours. Five razor blades 311b were placed in the dark, and the five razor blades 311a were exposed only to sodium electron spectroscopy that resonated with water vibration overtones. FIG. 94 shows the experimental apparatus used for this experiment. FIG. 111 shows the difference in the amount of corrosion between the blades 311a and 311b.
Result : The razor blade held in the dark was virtually free of corrosion. Razor blades exposed to sodium electron / water vibration overtones exhibited corrosion over 90% of the surface.
Example 15b:
Twelve razor blades 311 were placed in a beaker 104 of a sodium chloride solution 105 (25 g / 100 ml). Six razor blades (311b) were placed in the dark and the six razor blades (311a) were only exposed to the sodium electron / water vibration overtones from the sodium lamp. FIG. 94 shows the experimental apparatus used for this experiment.
Result : The razor blade held in the dark (not shown) had light corrosion on 20-25% of its surface. Razor blades exposed to sodium electron / water vibration overtones exhibited moderate corrosion on 70-75% of their surface (not shown).
In these experiments, the targeted spectral energy was used to alter the chemical and material properties of the solution, resulting in a change in electrochemical reaction rate and solid corrosion.
The invention will be more clearly read and better understood from the following specific examples.

Example 16:
Substitution of physical catalysts by spectral catalysts in gas phase reactions.
2H ₂ + O ₂ >>> Platinum catalyst >>>> 2H ₂ O
Water can be generated by exposing H ₂ and O ₂ to a physical platinum (Pt) catalyst, but there is always the potential to create a potentially dangerous explosion hazard. This experiment replaced the physical platinum catalyst with a spectral catalyst that included the spectral pattern of the physical platinum catalyst, which resonates with energy and transfers it to hydrogen and hydroxy intermediates.

  To demonstrate that oxygen and hydrogen combine to produce water utilizing a spectral catalyst, electrolysis of water is performed to provide the theoretical amounts of oxygen and hydrogen starting gases. Two rubber stoppers were attached to the outer neck of the three-necked flask, and each of the necks was equipped with a platinum electrode 4 inches long in a glass case. Fill the flask with distilled water, expose the part of the electrode in the glass case to air, and submerge the part of the electrode not in the case completely below the surface of the water. The central neck was connected to a vacuum tube via a rubber stopper, which was led to a dry light column to remove any moisture from the product gas.

  After vacuum removal of all gases in the system (to about 700 mmHg), electrolysis was performed using a 12 V power supply attached to the two electrodes. After starting the electrolysis, hydrogen and oxygen gas were produced in theoretical amounts. The gas was passed through a dry lite column and through a vacuum tube connected to positive and negative pressure gauges into a sealed 1,000 ml round quartz glass flask. A strip of filter paper containing dry cobalt was placed in the bottom of the sealed flask. Initially, the cobalt paper was blue, indicating the absence of water in the flask. Similar cobalt test strips exposed to ambient air were also blue.

Spectral catalytic platinum electrical frequency from a Fisher Scientific Hollow Cathode Platinum Lamp with a traditional physical platinum catalyst placed approximately 1 inch from the flask. (With their associated fine and ultrafine frequencies). This allowed the oxygen and hydrogen gas in the round quartz glass flask to be irradiated with radiation from the spectral catalyst. The Pt lamp was powered at 80% maximum current (12 mAmps) using a Cathodeon Hollow Cathode Lamp Supply C610. Dry ice in a styrofoam container placed directly under the round quartz flask was used to cool the reaction flask to offset any effect of heat from the Pt lamp. Turning on the Pt lamp revealed a pronounced pink color on the cobalt paper strip within 2 days of irradiation, indicating the presence of water in the round quartz flask. Cobalt test strips exposed to laboratory ambient air remained blue. Over the next 4-5 days, the pink area on the cobalt strip became brighter and larger. When Pt radiation was stopped, H ₂ O diffused from the cobalt strip and was taken up by the drylite column. During the next 4-5 days, the pink color of the cobalt strip in the quartz flask turned amber. Cobalt strips exposed to ambient air remained blue.

  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to affect chemical reactions in the gas phase.

Example 17:
Spectral catalyst replacement of physical catalysts in liquid phase reactions.
H ₂ O ₂ >>>> platinum catalyst >>>> H ₂ O + O ₂
The decomposition of hydrogen peroxide is a very slow reaction in the absence of a catalyst. Therefore, experiments were conducted that showed that the finely divided platinum, a physical catalyst, could be replaced with a spectral catalyst having a spectral pattern of platinum. Hydrogen peroxide (3%) was filled in two nipple quartz test tubes (the nipple quartz test tube was about 10 mm long towards the upper capillary section with an inner diameter of about 2.0 mm and a length of about 140 mm. It is made of a Photo Vac Laser quartz tube with a narrowed inner diameter of about 17 mm and a length of about 150 mm. Both quartz tubes were placed upside down in a 50 ml beaker reservoir filled to approximately 40 ml of (3%) hydrogen peroxide and shielded from incident light (cardboard cylinder covered with aluminum foil). One of the light shielding tubes was used as a control. The other light-shielding tube was exposed to a platinum (Pt) Fisher Scientific hollow cathode lamp using a cathode-on-hollow cathode lamp source C610 at 80% maximum current (12 mAmps). Experiments were performed several times with exposure times ranging from about 24 to about 96 hours. The shading tube was monitored for temperature increase (not observed at all) to ensure that no reaction was due to thermal effects. In a typical experiment, a nipple tube was prepared using hydrogen peroxide (3%) as described hereinabove. Both tubes were shielded from light as above and the Pt tubes were exposed to platinum spectral radiation for about 24 hours. Gas production in the control tube A is measured as about 4 mm in length (ie about 12.5 mm ³ ) in the capillary while the gas in Pt (test tube B) is measured as about 50 mm (ie about 157 mm ³ ). did. Thus, the platinum spectrum catalyst increased the reaction rate by about 12.5 times.

The test tube was then switched to expose test tube A to the platinum spectrum catalyst for approximately 24 hours, while test tube B served as a control. Gas production in the control (test tube B) is measured to be about 2 mm in length (ie about 6 mm ³ ) in the capillary while the gas in Pt (test tube A) is about 36 mm (ie about 113 mm ³⁾ ) And a difference of about 19 times the reaction rate was obtained.

The experiment was repeated with 6 mA (80% of maximum current) as a negative control to confirm that not all lamps produced the same results. Na in traditional reactions is a reactant with water-releasing hydrogen gas, but is not a catalyst for hydrogen peroxide decomposition. The control tube measured the gas to be about 4 mm (ie about 12 mm ³ ) in length of the capillary section, while the Na tube gas was measured to be about 1 mm (ie about 3 mm ³ ) in length. This indicated that the spectral emissions replaced the catalyst, but they still cannot replace the reactants. Furthermore, the simple effect of using a hollow cathode tube that releases heat and energy into hydrogen peroxide is not the cause of bubble formation, but instead the Pt spectral pattern that replaces the physical catalyst reacts. I showed that it causes.

  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to affect chemical reactions in the liquid phase and subsequent conversion to the gas phase.

Example 18:
It is well known that certain microorganisms have a toxic reaction to silver (Ag) by replacing the physical catalyst with a spectral catalyst in a solid phase reaction . The silver electrical spectrum consists essentially of two ultraviolet frequencies lying between UV-A and UV-B. Here, according to the present invention, the high intensity spectral frequency generated in the silver electrical spectrum is understood to be the ultraviolet frequency that suppresses bacterial growth (by generating free radicals and causing bacterial DNA damage). . These UV frequencies are essentially harmless to mammalian cells. It was therefore theorized that the known pharmaceutical and antibacterial use of silver is due to spectral catalysis. In this regard, experiments were performed to show that spectral catalysts that emit a spectrum of silver demonstrate toxic or inhibitory effects on microorganisms.

  Using standard plating techniques, bacterial dishes were placed on standard growth media in two Petri dishes (one control and one Ag) to cover all dishes. Each dish was placed at the bottom of a light-tight cylindrical chamber. Each culture plate was covered with a light-shielding foil coated cardboard disc having patterned slits. A Fisher Scientific hollow cathode lamp for silver (Ag) was inserted through the top of the Ag exposure chamber so that only the spectral emission pattern from the silver lamp irradiates bacteria on the Ag culture plate (ie through the patterned slit). A cathode on hollow cathode lamp source C610 was used to power Ag at 80% maximum current (3.6 mA). The control was not exposed to the Ag lamp emission and blocked ambient light. Both control and Ag plates were held at room temperature (eg, about 70-74 degrees F.) for silver spectral emission exposure times ranging from about 12-24 hours in various experiments. Both plates were then incubated for approximately 24 hours using standard techniques (37 ° C., aerobic Forma Scientific Model 3157, water-cooled incubator).

The following bacteria (obtained from Microbiology Laboratory at People's Hospital in Mansfield, Ohio, US) were tested for the effects of Ag lamp spectral emission:
1. E. coli;
2. Streptococcus pneumoniae;
3. 3. Staphylococcus aureus; and Salmonella typhi.

This group included gram positive and gram negative species, and cocci and bacilli. The results are shown below:
1. Controls—All controls showed complete growth covering the culture plate.

2. The area that was not exposed to the Ag plate-Ag spectral emission pattern showed complete growth.

The areas exposed to the Ag spectral emission pattern were as follows:
a. E. coli-not growing;
b. Streptococcus pneumoniae-does not grow;
c. S. aureus-does not grow; and d. Salmonella typhi—inhibited growth.

  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to catalyze chemical reactions in biological organisms. These reactions suppressed the growth of biological organisms.

Example 19:
Comparison of Physical Catalysts with Spectral Catalysis and Results with Physical Catalysis Results in Biological Preparations Certain sensitive organisms that have a toxic effect on silver have similar reactions to spectral catalysts that emit silver spectra. For further demonstration, cultures were obtained from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), which included E. coli # 25922 and Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp. Pneumoniae # 13883. Control and Ag plate cultures were performed as described above. After incubation, the plates were examined using a binocular microscope. E. coli was moderately resistant to the bactericidal action of spectral silver release, while Klebsiella was moderately sensitive. All controls showed complete growth.

  Therefore, experiments were conducted that demonstrated similar results with physical silver catalysts as obtained with Ag spectral catalysts. Sterilization test disks were immersed in 80 ppm colloidal silver solution. As above, the same two organisms were re-plated. A colloidal silver test disc was placed on each Ag plate, while the control plate had nothing. Plates were incubated as before and examined under a binocular microscope. Colloidal silver E. coli was moderately resistant to the bactericidal action of physical colloidal silver, while Klebsiella was again moderately sensitive. All controls showed complete growth.

Example 20:
Enhancing Physical Catalysts with Spectral Catalysts As in Example 1, to demonstrate that oxygen and hydrogen can be combined to produce water using spectral catalysts to enhance physical catalysts. Water electrolysis is performed to provide the necessary oxygen and hydrogen starting gases.

Two quartz flasks (A and B), each with its own set of vacuum and pressure gauge, were connected separately after the drylite column. Platinum powder (about 31 mg) was placed in each flask. The flask was charged with theoretical amounts of H ₂ and O ₂ generated by electrolysis to 120 mm Hg. The flasks were separated from the electrolysis system by a cock and from each other. The pressure in each flask was recorded over time as the reaction proceeded through the physical platinum catalyst. The reaction combines 3 moles of gas (ie 2 moles H ₂ and 1 mole O ₂ ) to produce 2 moles of H ₂ O. This reduces the molar concentration, and thus the progress of the reaction can be monitored by reducing the pressure “P” proportional to the molar concentration “n” according to the ideal gas law (PV = nRT). In this way a baseline rate of reaction was obtained. In addition, the test was repeated and each flask was filled with H ₂ and O ₂ to 220 mm Hg. Catalysis of the reaction with only the physical catalyst produced two baseline reaction curves, which were in good agreement for both Flasks A and B and for both the 110 mm and 220 mm Hg tests.

  The traditional physical platinum catalyst in Flask A is then used with spectrally catalyzed platinum release from two parallel Fisher Scientific hollow cathode platinum lamps as in Example 1 located approximately 2 cm from Flask A. Strengthened. The test was repeated as above, separating the two flasks from each other and monitoring the rate of reaction by reducing the pressure in each. Flask B served as a control flask. In Flask A, oxygen and hydrogen gas and physical platinum catalyst were irradiated directly by release from the Pt lamp spectrum catalyst.

  The reaction rate in control flask B was in good agreement with the previous baseline rate. The reaction rate in flask “A” where the physical platinum catalyst was enhanced by the platinum spectral pattern showed an overall average increase of 60% and a maximum increase of 70% over baseline and flask B.

  In this example, the targeted spectral energy was used to change the chemical reaction characteristics of the solid catalyst in the gas phase (heterogeneous) crystallization reaction system.

Example 21:
Substitution of physical catalyst by microstructure heterodyne frequency and substitution of physical catalyst by microstructure frequency
α Rotation-Vibration Constant Water was electrolyzed as described hereinabove to produce theoretical amounts of hydrogen and oxygen gas. In addition, a dry ice cooled stainless steel coil was placed immediately after the dry light column. After vacuum removal of all gases in the system, electrolysis was accomplished using a 12 V power source attached to the two electrodes to produce hydrogen and oxygen gas. After passing through a dry area column, hydrogen and oxygen gas were passed through a vacuum tube connected to positive and negative pressure gauges, through a dry ice cooled stainless steel coil, and then into a 1,000 ml round quartz flask. A strip of filter paper impregnated with dry (blue) cobalt was placed at the bottom of the quartz flask as an indicator of the presence or absence of water.

  The entire system was evacuated to a pressure of about 700 mm Hg, lower than atmospheric pressure. Electrolysis was performed to produce theoretical amounts of hydrogen and oxygen gas, resulting in a pressure of about 220 mm Hg above atmospheric pressure. Here, the center of the quartz flask containing hydrogen and oxygen gas is centered on a continuous micro wave emitted from a Hewlett Packard microwave spectroscopy system including the HP 83350B Sweep Oscillator, HP 8510B Network Analyzer, and HP 8513A Reflection Transmission Test Set. Irradiated with wave electromagnetic radiation for about 12 hours. The frequency used was 21.4 GHz, which corresponds to the fine resolution constant of the hydroxy intermediate, the α-rotation-vibration constant, and is therefore a harmonic resonant heterodyne for the hydroxy radical. The cobalt strips turned strongly pink, indicating the presence of water in the quartz flask and its production was catalyzed by the harmonic resonant heterodyne frequency for the hydroxy radical.

This example used targeted spectral energy to control the gas phase chemical reaction.

Example 22:
Replacement of physical catalyst with hyperfine resolution frequency An experimental darkroom was prepared in which there was no ambient light and it could be totally dark. Shielded basement (Ace Shielded Room, Ace, Philadelphia, PA, US, model A6H3-16; 8 feet wide, 17 feet long and 8 feet high (approximately 2 meters x 5.2 meters x 2.4 meters) copper mesh), dark room Equipped inside.

  Hydrogen peroxide (3%) is placed in a nipple quartz test tube, which is then placed in a beaker filled with (3%) hydrogen peroxide as described in more detail herein. I put it upside down. The test tube was allowed to rest in the dark for about 18 hours and covered with a non-metallic light shielding hood (so that the test tube was placed in the room without exposure to light). Next, the baseline measurement of the gas in the nipple tube was performed.

  Three nipple RF tubes on a wooden grid in the shielding room, using a center frequency of about 6.5 MHz, from a frequency emitting antenna (copper tube, 15 mm diameter, octagonal outer circumference 4.7 m), about 107 cm each Centered on grids 4, 54 and 127, corresponding to distances of 187 cm and 312 cm. A 25 watt, 17 MHz signal was sent to the antenna. This frequency corresponds to the hyperfine division frequency of hydrogen atoms, which are transients in the dissociation of hydrogen peroxide. The antenna was continuously pulsated by the BK Precision RF signal generator model 2005A and amplified by the Amplifier Research amplifier model 25A-100. A control tube was placed on a wooden cart next to the shielded room in the dark room. All tubes were covered with a non-metallic shading hood.

After about 18 hours, gas production from the dissociation of hydrogen peroxide in the nipple tube and the resulting oxygen production were measured. The RF tube closest to the antenna produces a 11 mm long gas in the capillary (34 mm ³ ), and the intermediate distance tube produces a 5 mm (10 mm ³ ) long gas from the antenna. The remote RF tube produced no gas. The control tube produced 1 mm gas. It can therefore be concluded that the RF hyperfine splitting frequency for hydrogen increases the reaction rate by about 5 to 10 times.

  In this example, targeted spectral energy was used to control the chemical reaction in the liquid phase, resulting in the conversion to the gas phase.

Example 23:
Replacement of physical catalyst by magnetic field As described above, hydrogen peroxide (15%) was placed in a nipple quartz tube, which was then placed upside down in a beaker filled with (15%) hydrogen peroxide. The test tube was allowed to rest for about 4 hours on a wooden table in a shielded cage in a dark room. Next, the baseline measurement of the gas in the nipple tube was performed.

  In a dark room, the two control tubes were left on a wooden table as controls, while still in the shielding cage. Two magnetic field tubes were mounted on a central platform of ETS Helmholz single axis coil, model 6402, 1.06 Gauss / Amp and pulsated at approximately 83 Hz by a BK Precision 20 MHz sweep / function generator model 4040. The voltage output of the function generator was adjusted to produce an alternating magnetic field of approximately 19.5 milligauss on the Helmholtz Coil central platform, as measured by the Holaday Model HI-3627, 3-axis ELF magnetic field meter and probe. Hydrogen atoms, which are transients in hydrogen peroxide dissociation, showed nuclear magnetic resonance via Zeeman splitting at this applied frequency and applied magnetic field strength. The frequency of the alternating magnetic field was therefore resonant with the hydrogen transient.

After about 18 hours, gas production from the dissociation of hydrogen peroxide in the nipple tube and the resulting oxygen production were measured. The control tube averaged about 180 mm gas production (540 mm ³ ), while the tube exposed to the alternating magnetic field produced about 810 mm gas (2,430 mm ³ ), and the mid-range tube at the antenna A 5 mm (10 mm ³ ) long gas was produced, resulting in an approximately 4-fold increase in reaction rate.

Example 24:
Negative catalyst for reaction by electric field As described in more detail hereinabove, hydrogen peroxide (15%) is placed in four nipple quartz tubes which are filled with hydrogen peroxide (15%) beakers. I put it upside down. The test tube was placed on a wooden table in a shielded room in a dark room. After 4 hours, a baseline measurement of the gas in the capillary part of the tube was performed.

  An Amplifier Research self-sufficient electromagnetic cell (“TEM”) model TC1510A was placed in a dark shielding room. A BK Precision RF signal generator, model 2005A and Amplifier Research amplifier model 25A100 provided a sinusoidal signal of approximately 133 MHz to the TEM cell. An electric field (E field) of about 5 V / m at the center of the TEM cell, as measured by the Holaday Industries electric field probe, model 4433GRE, adjusted at the output level in the signal generator and amplifier. Was generated.

  Two of the hydrogen peroxide filled tubes were placed in the middle of the upper chamber of the TEM cell, approximately 35 cm from the shielding chamber wall. The other two tubes served as controls, which were also placed on a wooden table approximately 35 cm from the same wall of the shielded dark room, so that there was no ambient electric field as verified by E-field probe measurements. Removed from nearby.

The 133 MHz AC sine signal delivered to the TEM is well above the typical linewidth frequency at room temperature (eg, about 100 KHz) and is:
ΔE = cE ^3/4
(Where E is the change in energy at cm ⁻¹ , c is 7.51 +/− 0.02 for the hydrogen state n = 20, and E is the electric field strength at (Kv / cm) ² )
It is theorized to be resonant with the n = 20 Ryderg state of the hydrogen atom as obtained from

  About 5 hours after exposure to the electric field, the average gas production in the test tube subjected to the E field was about 17.5 mm, while the average gas production during the control test was about 58 mm.

  Although not wishing to be coupled with any particular theory or explanation, the alternating electric field resonates with the high energy level of the hydrogen atom, producing a negative Stark effect, thereby catalyzing the reaction negatively.

Example 25:
Enhancing Physical Catalysts by Irradiating Reactants / Transients with Spectral Catalysts Hydrogen and oxygen gases were produced in stoichiometric amounts by electrolysis as described in more detail hereinabove. A stainless steel coil cooled in dry ice was placed immediately after the dry light column. Positive and negative pressure gauges were connected after the coil, and then a 1,000 ml round quartz flask was connected sequentially with a second set of pressure gauges.

  At the start of each experimental run, the entire system was evacuated to a pressure of about −650 mm Hg. The system was sealed for approximately 15 minutes to ensure retention of the resulting vacuum and connection integrity. As above, electrolysis of water to produce hydrogen and oxygen gas was performed.

  As above, about 10 mg of finely pulverized platinum was initially placed in a round quartz flask. The reaction rate was monitored by reacting the reactant gas over platinum and increasing the rate of pressure drop over time. The starting pressure was about 90 mm mm Hg positive pressure, and the final pressure was about the first half of 30 above the amount when the measurements were made. Two control experiments were performed with reaction rates of about 0.47 mm Hg / min and about 0.48 mm Hg / min.

  For the third experiment, a single platinum lamp was applied as above, except that the operating current was reduced to about 8 mA and the lamp irradiated only the reactant / transient gas, and the physical platinum lamp Placed through the center of the flask to avoid irradiating the catalyst. The reaction rate was determined in the same manner as above, and was found to be about 0.63 mm Hg / min, and the increase rate was 34%.

Example 26:
Apparent disabling of the reaction due to the catalyst pattern of the physical activity inhibitor It is known that the conversion of hydrogen and oxygen gas to water on a stepwise platinum physical catalyst is neutralized by gold. This addition of gold to the platinum catalyzed reaction reduces the reaction rate by about 95%. Gold only blocks about 1/6 of the platinum binding site, which according to the prior art needs to be blocked in order to suppress the physical catalyst to this extent. Therefore, it was theorized that the spectral interaction between physical gold and physical platinum and / or crystallization reaction system could also be involved in the activity-inhibiting action of gold on the reaction. It was further theorized that the addition of a gold spectral pattern to the reaction catalyzed by physical platinum could also inhibit the reaction.

  As described in more detail above, hydrogen and oxygen gas were generated by electrolysis. About 15 mg of finely pulverized platinum was added to a round quartz flask. The starting pressure was approximately 90 mm Hg positive pressure and the final pressure was approximately 20 mm Hg above the amount when the measurement was performed. The reaction rate was determined as above. The first control experiment demonstrated a reaction rate of about 0.81 mm Hg / min.

  In the second experiment, a Fischer hollow cathode gold lamp was applied as described above, with an operating frequency of about 8 mA (80% of maximum current) almost through the center of the round flask. The reaction rate increased to about 0.87 mm Hg / min.

  A third experiment was then performed with physical platinum that was in the same reaction flask as well as the flask exposed to the gold spectral pattern. The reaction rate was reduced to about 0.75 mm Hg / min.

  In this example, the targeted spectral energy was used to control (inhibit activity) the environmental reaction state and to change the chemical reaction characteristics of the physical catalyst in the heterogeneous catalytic crystallization reaction system.

FIG. 1a shows an illustration of sound waves or electromagnetic waves. FIG. 1b shows an illustration of sound waves or electromagnetic waves. FIG. 1c shows a composite wave resulting from the combination of the waves of FIGS. 1a and 1b. Figures 2a and 2b show waves of different amplitude but the same frequency. FIG. 2a shows a low amplitude wave. Figures 2a and 2b show waves of different amplitude but the same frequency. FIG. 2b shows a high amplitude wave. Figures 3a and 3b show frequency diagrams. FIG. 3a shows a plot of time versus amplitude. Figures 3a and 3b show frequency diagrams. FIG. 3b shows a plot of frequency versus amplitude. A specific example of the heterodyne generation process is shown. 5 shows an example graph of a heterodyned sequence from FIG. A fractal diagram is shown. FIG. 7a shows the hydrogen energy level diagram. FIG. 7b shows the hydrogen energy level diagram. Figures 8a-8c show three different simple reaction profiles, and Figure 8a shows one of them. Figures 8a-8c show three different simple reaction profiles, and Figure 8b shows one of them. Figures 8a-8c show three different simple reaction profiles, and Figure 8c shows one of them. FIG. 9a shows a fine frequency diagram curve for hydrogen. FIG. 9b shows a fine frequency diagram curve for hydrogen. Various frequencies and intensities for hydrogen are shown. FIG. 11a shows two light amplification diagrams with stimulated emission / inversion distribution. FIG. 11b shows two light amplification diagrams with stimulated emission / inversion distribution. A resonance curve is shown in which the resonance frequency is f ₀ , the upper frequency = f ₂ and the lower frequency = f ₁ , and f ₁ and f ₂ are approximately 50% of the amplitude of f ₀ . Figures 13a and 13b show two different resonance curves with different quality factors. FIG. 13a shows a narrow resonance curve with high Q. Figures 13a and 13b show two different resonance curves with different quality factors. FIG. 13a shows a narrow resonance curve with high Q. Two different energy transition curves are shown at the fundamental resonance frequency (curve A) and the harmonic frequency (curve B). Figures 15a-c show how the spectral pattern changes at three different temperatures. FIG. 15a is at low temperature. Figures 15a-c show how the spectral pattern changes at three different temperatures. FIG. 15b is at a moderate temperature. Figures 15a-c show how the spectral pattern changes at three different temperatures. FIG. 15c is at high temperature. It is a spectral curve showing the corresponding line width f ₂ -f _1. Figures 17a and 17b show two amplitude versus frequency curves. FIG. 17a shows a sharp spectral curve at low temperature. Figures 17a and 17b show two amplitude versus frequency curves. FIG. 17b shows the spectral curve overlap at higher temperatures. FIG. 18a shows the effect of temperature on infrared absorption spectral resolution. FIG. 18b shows blackbody radiation. FIG. 18c shows curves A and C at low temperature and spread curves A and C ^* at higher temperatures, where C ^* is also displaced. 2 shows a spectral pattern representing the effect of pressure broadening on compound NH ₃ . The theoretical shape of a line broadened by pressures at three different pressures for a single compound is shown. Figures 21a and 21b are two graphs showing experimental confirmation of changes in the spectral pattern at increasing pressures. FIG. 21a corresponds to a spectral pattern representing the absorption of water vapor in the air. Figures 21a and 21b are two graphs showing experimental confirmation of changes in the spectral pattern at increasing pressures. FIG. 21b is a spectral pattern corresponding to the absorption of NH ₃ at 1 atmosphere. FIG. 22a shows a display of radiation from a single atom. FIG. 22b shows a display of radiation from the atomic group. Figures 23a-d show four different spectral curves, three of which represent self-absorption patterns. FIG. 23a is a standard spectral curve that does not show any self-absorption. Figures 23a-d show four different spectral curves, three of which represent self-absorption patterns. FIG. 23b shows the resonance frequency displacement due to self-absorption. Figures 23a-d show four different spectral curves, three of which represent self-absorption patterns. FIG. 23c shows a self-reversing spectral pattern due to self-absorption. Figures 23a-d show four different spectral curves, three of which represent self-absorption patterns. FIG. 23d shows an example of attenuation of the self-reversing spectral pattern. FIG. 24a shows the absorption spectra of alcohol and phthalic acid in hexane. FIG. 24b shows the absorption spectrum for the absorption of iodine in alcohol and carbon tetrachloride. FIG. 24c shows the effect of alcohol and benzene mixture on the solute phenylazophenol. FIG. 25a shows a tetrahedral unit representation of aluminum oxide. FIG. 25b shows a tetrahedral unit representation for silicon dioxide. FIG. 26a shows a cut octahedral crystal structure for aluminum or silicon bonded by oxygen. FIG. 26b shows a plurality of cut octahedrons joined together to represent a zeolite. FIG. 26c shows a cut octahedron for zeolites “X” and “Y” joined together by an oxygen bridge. The influence of copper and bismuth on the zinc / cadmium wire ratio is shown. It is a graph which shows the influence which acts on the copper / aluminum strength ratio of magnesium. Atomic spectral frequencies of N-methyl urethane in carbon tetrachloride solution at the following concentrations: a) 0.01M, b) 0.03M, c) 0.06M, d) 0.10M, e) 0.15M. The effect of concentration on A plot corresponding to the hydrogen emission spectrum is shown. Specifically, FIG. 30a corresponds to Ballmer series 2 for hydrogen. A plot corresponding to the hydrogen emission spectrum is shown. Specifically, FIG. 30b corresponds to the emission spectrum for hydrogen at 456 THz frequency. Corresponds to a high resolution laser saturation spectrum for hydrogen at 456 THz frequency. The fine separation frequency present under the general spectral curve is shown. It corresponds to the diagram of atomic electron level (n) at the fine structure frequency (α). The fine structure of the n = 1 and n = 2 level of a hydrogen atom is shown. Carbon atoms, a multiplet separation for the lowest energy level of the oxygen and ^{fluorine: 43.5cm = 1.3THz, 16.4cm -1 =} 490GHz, 226.5cm -1 = 6.77THz, 158.5cm -1 = 4.74 THz, 404 cm ⁻¹ = 12.1 THz. The vibration band of SF ₆ at a wavelength of 10 μm ² is shown. FIG. 37a shows a spectral pattern similar to that shown in FIG. FIG. 37b shows the fine structure frequency for compound SF ₆ in more detail. An energy level diagram corresponding to various energy levels for a molecule is shown, with rotation corresponding to “J”, vibration corresponding to “ν”, and electron level corresponding to “n”. 39a and 39b correspond to the pure rotational absorption spectrum of gaseous hydrogen chloride recorded by the interferometer, and FIG. 39b shows the same spectrum as FIG. 39a at a lower resolution (ie does not show any fine frequencies). ). 39a and 39b correspond to the pure rotational absorption spectrum of gaseous hydrogen chloride recorded by the interferometer, and FIG. 39b shows the same spectrum as FIG. 39a at a lower resolution (ie does not show any fine frequencies). ). Corresponds to the rotational spectrum for hydrogen cyanide. “J” corresponds to the rotational level. The spectrum corresponding to the additional heterodyne of ν ₁ and ν ₅ in the spectrum band showing the frequency band of A (ν ₁ −ν ₅ ), B = ν ₁ −2ν ₅ is shown. Fig. 4 shows a graphical representation of a fine structure spectrum showing the first four rotational frequencies for CO in the ground state. The difference between the molecular microstructure rotation frequencies (heterodyne) is the 2X rotation constant B (ie, f ₂ −f ₁ = 2B). In this case, B = 57.6 GHz (57,635.970 MHz). FIG. 43a shows the rotation and vibration frequency (MHz) for LiF. FIG. 43b shows the difference between rotation and vibration frequency for LiF. The rotational transition J = 1 → 2 for the trivalent molecule OCS is shown. The vibrational state is given by the vibrational quantum numbers (ν ₁ , ν ₂ , ν ₃ ) in parentheses, and ν ₂ has the superscript [l]. In this case, l = 1. Subscript 1 applies to the lower frequency component of the l-type doublet and 2 applies to the higher frequency component. The two lines at (01 ¹ 0) and (01 ¹ 0) are l-type doublets separated by q _l . The rotation-vibration band and fine structure frequency for SF ₆ are shown. FIG. 5 shows the fine structure spectrum for SF ₆ expanded from zero to 300. FIG. Figure 47a and 47b show the expansion of the two curves from the microstructure of SF ₆ showing the ultrastructure frequency. Note the constant opening of the ultrafine structure curve. FIG. 47a shows an enlargement of the curve with a single star ( ^* ) in FIG. Figure 47a and 47b show the expansion of the two curves from the microstructure of SF ₆ showing the ultrastructure frequency. Note the constant opening of the ultrafine structure curve. FIG. 47b shows an enlargement of the curve with double asterisks ( ^** ) in FIG. FIG. 5 shows an energy level diagram corresponding to hyperfine separation for hyperfine structure at the transition from n = 2 to n = 3 for hydrogen. The hyperfine structure in J = 1 → 2 for the rotational transition of CH ₃ I is shown. The hyperfine structure of the J = 1 → 2 transition for ClCN in the ground vibration state is shown. The energy level diagram and hyperfine frequency for NO molecules are shown. The spectrum corresponding to the hyperfine frequency for NH ₃ is shown. The hyperfine structure and overlap of the NH ₃ spectrum for rotational level J = 3 is shown. The upper curve in FIG. 53 shows experimental data, while the lower curve is derived from theoretical calculations. The frequency increases from left to right at 60 KHz intervals. The hyperfine structure and overlap of the NH ₃ spectrum for rotational level J = 4 is shown. In each of FIG. 54, the upper curve represents experimental data, while the lower curve is derived from theoretical calculations. The frequency increases from left to right at 60 KHz intervals. Shows the Stark effect on potassium. Specifically, there is a graphical dependency of the 4 _S and 5 _P energy levels on the electric field. Shows a graph plotting the deviation from the zero field position of ^{_{5p 2 P 1/2 ← 4s 2 S}} 1 / 2,3 / 2 transition wavenumber to the electric field Square. The frequency component of the J = 0 → 1 rotation transition for CH ₃ Cl as a function of field strength is shown. The frequency is given in megacycles (MHz) and the electric field strength (esu cm) is given as esu ² / cm ² as the square of the electric field E ² . The theoretical value and experimental measurement value of the Stark effect in the J = 1 → 2 transition of the molecular OCS are shown. Unchanged absolute rotational frequency is plotted at zero, and frequency separation and displacement are displayed as MHz higher or lower than the original frequency. The pattern of the Stark component for the transition in the rotation of the asymmetric tip molecule is shown. Specifically, FIG. 59a shows the J = 4 → 5 transition and FIG. 59b shows the J = 4 → 4 transition. The electric field is large enough for full spectral resolution. Figure 2 shows the Stark effect for OCS molecules at the J = 1 → 2 transition with applied electric field at various frequencies. The “a” curve shows the Stark effect due to the static DC field, the “b” curve shows the Stark frequency spread and fluctuation due to the 1 KHz field, and the “c” curve shows the normal Stark effect due to the 1,200 KHz field. . FIG. 61a shows the Stark waveguide structure. FIG. 61b shows the electric field distribution in Stark waveguide. FIG. 62a shows the Zeeman effect on the sodium “D” line. FIG. 62b shows the energy level diagram of the transition in the Zeeman effect for the sodium “D” line. It is a graph which shows isolation | separation of the ground term of an oxygen atom as a magnetic field function. It is a graph which shows the dependence to the magnetic field strength of the Zeeman effect with respect to the "3P" state of silicon. FIG. 65a is a picture showing the normal Zeeman effect. FIG. 65b is a picture showing the anomalous Zeeman effect. The anomalous Zeeman effect for zinc ³ P → ³ S is shown. FIG. 67a shows a graphical representation of four Zeeman separation frequencies. FIG. 67b shows a graphical representation of four new differential heterodyne occurrences. 68a and 68b show graphs of general Zeeman separation patterns for two different transitions in paramagnetic molecules. The frequency of hydrogen listed beside the table and the frequency of platinum listed vertically. The frequency of hydrogen listed beside the table and the frequency of platinum listed vertically. The frequency of hydrogen listed beside the table and the frequency of platinum listed vertically. The frequency of hydrogen listed beside the table and the frequency of platinum listed vertically. The frequency of hydrogen listed beside the table and the frequency of platinum listed vertically. The frequency of hydrogen listed beside the table and the frequency of platinum listed vertically. FIG. 70 shows a schematic diagram of seven different unit cells in the following order: a-cubic, b-tetragonal, c-orthogonal, d-monoclinic, e-triclinic, f-hexagonal. Crystal, g-trigonal / rhombohedral. FIG. 71 shows a one-dimensional grid system consisting of equally spaced point lines. FIG. 72 shows a schematic diagram of a body-centered cubic lattice structure. FIG. 73 shows a schematic diagram of a face-centered lattice structure. FIG. 74 shows a schematic diagram of a face centered cubic lattice structure. FIG. 75 is a phase diagram showing the equilibrium relationship between the solid and liquid forms of sodium chloride. FIG. 76a shows a clinograph projection of the cubic structure of sodium chloride (NaCl). FIG. 76b shows a clinograph projection of the cubic structure of sodium chloride (NaCl). FIG. 77 shows a clinograph projection of a cubic structural unit cell of sodium chloride represented by round ions of sodium and chlorine. FIG. 78 shows a perspective view of a simple binary phase diagram. FIG. 79 shows a phase diagram that is an example of a solubility curve of a solid that forms a hydrate. FIG. 79a shows several solubility curves as a function of temperature for solutions in various waters. FIG. 80a shows the phase diagram of carbon. FIG. 80 b shows a clinograph projection of a hexagonal cubic structure of graphite. FIG. 80c shows a clinograph projection of a diamond cubic structure. FIG. 81a shows one of two phase diagrams of silica (SiO ₂ ). FIG. 81b shows one of two phase diagrams for silica (SiO ₂ ). FIG. 81c shows a clinograph projection of cubic β-cristobalite unit method. FIG. 81d shows a plan view of the rhombohedral structure of α-quartz. FIG. 81e shows a plan view of a hexagonal structure of β-quartz. FIG. 82a shows the phase diagram of the Ba ₂ TiO ₄ / TiO ₂ system. FIG. 82b shows a clinograph projection of a unit cell of an idealized cubic structure (ie, perovskite structure) of barium titanate. FIG. 82c shows a plan view of the lattice relationship of barium, titanium and oxygen ions, showing that there is room for the central ion of Ti ₄ ⁻ to move within the range of the lattice position. FIG. 83a shows one of the various phase diagrams for water. FIG. 83b shows one of the various phase diagrams for water. FIG. 83c shows one of various phase diagrams for water. FIG. 83d shows a clinograph projection of the hexagonal structure of ice. FIG. 84a shows a binary system of MgO / Fe ₂ O ₃ . FIG. 84b shows a plan view of the idealized orthorhombic structure of Mg ₂ SiO ₄ (forsterite). FIG. 85a shows the phase relationship of the FeO / Fe2O3 system. FIG. 85b shows a clinograph projection of four unit cells of the α-iron cubic core structure. FIG. 86a shows a spatial diagram of the ternary eutectic composition. FIG. 86b shows a spatial diagram of one complete series of solid solutions. FIG. 86c shows the crystallization path of element “A” shown in FIG. 86a. FIG. 87a shows the molecular model of the δ-α conversion seen with oleic acid, erucic acid, asclepic acid, and palmitoleic acid. FIG. 87b shows single crystal forms of the α-form and the δ-form of gondonic acid. FIG. 87c shows the Raman scattered CC stretching bands of the α-form and δ-form of gondonic acid. FIG. 87d shows a phase diagram of a mixture of gondonic acid and asclepic acid. FIG. 87e shows a phase diagram of a mixture of gondonic acid and oleic acid. FIG. 88 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to grow sodium chloride crystals according to Example 1. FIG. 89a is a 4X optical micrograph of the crystal formed on the “A” side of the apparatus shown in FIG. FIG. 89b is an optical micrograph at 4 × of a crystal formed under ambient light conditions. FIG. 89c shows a comparison of the amount of crystallization seen on the “A” side and the “B” side of the apparatus shown in FIG. FIG. 90 shows a schematic diagram of the apparatus used to grow sodium chloride crystals according to Example 2. FIG. 91a shows a transmitted light optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystals grown by illumination with a sodium lamp. FIG. 91b shows the growth of sodium chloride crystals illuminated with a tungsten lamp (filtered at 4250 mm). FIG. 91c shows the growth of sodium chloride crystals illuminated with a tungsten lamp (filtered 6200 mm). FIG. 92 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to prepare the classic saturated solution. FIG. 93 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to prepare the spectrally conditioned solution. FIG. 94 shows a schematic of the experiment used to grow crystals from the upper cone delivery system. FIG. 95 shows a schematic of the experiment used to grow crystals from the lower cone delivery system. FIG. 96 shows a schematic of the apparatus used to grow crystals from the upper cylinder delivery system. FIG. 97a shows one of the various schematics of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97b shows one of the various schematic views of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97c shows one of the various schematics of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97d shows one of the various schematics of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97e shows one of the various schematics of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97f shows one of the various schematics of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97g shows one of the various schematics of the different devices used to grow crystals with incident spectral energy from different locations (and combinations of locations) in accordance with various embodiments of the present invention. FIG. 97h is a schematic diagram of the apparatus used in the solubility experiment of Example 8b. FIG. 98a shows an optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystals after growth for about 18 hours as a control from a saturated solution of sodium chloride and water. FIG. 98b shows an optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystals grown by spectral crystallization from a saturated solution of sodium chloride and water. FIG. 98c shows an optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystallization grown by spectral crystallization from an unsaturated solution of sodium chloride and water. FIG. 98d shows an optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystallization grown by spectral crystallization from an unsaturated solution of sodium chloride and water. FIG. 98e shows an optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystallization grown by spectral crystallization from an unsaturated solution of sodium chloride and water. FIG. 98f shows an optical micrograph of sodium chloride crystals grown by spectral crystallization from a saturated solution of sodium chloride and water. FIG. 98g is an optical micrograph showing the largest crystal from FIG. 98f. FIG. 98h shows an optical micrograph comparison of the amount of sodium chloride crystals formed as a function of the solution nature method. FIG. 98 i is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystals grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98j is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98k is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98l is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98m is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98 n is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98o is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98p is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98q is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98 r is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98s is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98 t is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98 u is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98v is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98w is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. 98x is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. FIG. 98 y is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. 98z is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. FIG. 98aa is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. 98ab is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. FIG. 98ac is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 6. FIG. 98ad is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 98ae is one of the optical micrographs corresponding to the crystal grown according to Example 4. FIG. 99 shows a schematic diagram of the experimental setup described in Example 7a, where the Bunsen burner is heating a solution of sodium chloride and water on a hot plate. FIG. 100 shows an experiment described in Example 7b in which Bunsen burner heats a solution of sodium chloride and water on a hot plate and a sodium lamp emits an electromagnetic spectrum pattern on the side of the beaker. The schematic of an apparatus structure is shown. FIG. 101 shows a schematic diagram of the experimental setup described in Example 7c, where the sodium lamp is heating a solution of sodium chloride and water from the bottom of the beaker. FIG. 102 shows a schematic diagram of the pH electrode 109 for use with the Accumet AR20 meter 107. FIG. 103a is a graph of experimental data showing pH as a function of time, corresponding to the experimental setup of Example 7a. FIG. 103b is a graph of experimental data showing pH as a function of time, corresponding to the experimental setup of Example 7b. FIG. 103c is a graph of experimental data showing pH as a function of time, corresponding to the experimental setup of Example 7c. FIG. 103d is a graph showing the average of three different experimental conditions for Experiments 7a, 7b, and 7c, all overlaid on a single plot. FIG. 103e is a graph of experimental data showing pH as a function of time, corresponding to the experimental setup of Example 7d. FIG. 103f is a graph of experimental data showing pH as a function of time, corresponding to the experimental setup of Example 7e. FIG. 103g is a graph showing the average of three different experimental conditions for Experiments 7a, 7b, and 7e, all overlaid on a single plot. FIG. 103h shows the results of three separate experiments (# 's 3, 4, and 5) and represents the decay curve generated by the experimental apparatus shown in FIG. FIG. 103i shows the pH as a function of time for two experiments in which sodium chloride solute was dissolved in water. FIG. 104a is a graphical representation of a metal alloy crystal grown according to Example 9a. FIG. 104b is a graphical representation of a metal alloy crystal grown according to Example 9a. FIG. 105a is a graphical representation of a metal alloy crystal grown according to Example 9b. FIG. 105b is a graphical representation of a metal alloy crystal grown according to Example 9b. FIG. 105c is an optical micrograph of an example of a crystal grown according to Example 9a. FIG. 105d is an optical micrograph of protein crystals grown according to Example 10d. FIG. 105e is an optical micrograph of protein crystals grown according to Example 10d. FIG. 105 f is an optical micrograph of the mixed crystal grown according to Example 12. FIG. 105g is an optical micrograph of a mixed crystal grown according to Example 12. FIG. 105h is an optical micrograph of the mixed crystal grown according to Example 12. FIG. 105 i is an optical micrograph of the mixed crystal grown according to Example 12. FIG. 106a is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for only three separate sets of Bunsen burners. FIG. 106b is a graph of experimental data (only two separate data points) showing conductivity as a function of temperature for Bunsen burner only data. FIG. 106c is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for data of only three separate sets of Bunsen burners, where the plot is a data point obtained 2 minutes after sodium chloride was added to the water. It starts with. FIG. 106d is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data, corresponding to the case where water is conditioned by a sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride is dissolved in the water. It is. FIG. 106e shows experimental data (only two separate data points) showing conductivity as a function of temperature, corresponding to conditioning the water with a sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride is dissolved in the water. It is a graph. FIG. 106f is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data, corresponding to conditioning the water with a sodium ramp for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride is dissolved in the water. It is. FIG. 106g shows the conductivity for three separate sets of data, starting from when sodium chloride was added to the water and corresponding to the case where the sodium chloride and water solution was illuminated with the spectral energy pattern of the sodium lamp. 2 is a graph of experimental data showing degrees as a function of time. FIG. 106h shows an experiment showing conductivity as a function of temperature, starting from when sodium chloride is added to water, corresponding to the case where a solution of sodium chloride and water is irradiated with the spectral energy pattern of a sodium lamp. FIG. 4 is a graph of data (only two separate data points). FIG. 106i shows the conductivity for three separate sets of data, starting from when sodium chloride is added to the water and corresponding to the case where the sodium chloride and water solution is irradiated with the spectral energy pattern of the sodium lamp. 2 is a graph of experimental data showing degrees as a function of time. FIG. 106j shows that water is conditioned by a sodium lamp for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride is dissolved in the water; and while sodium chloride is added to the water, the water is continuously added in the sodium light spectrum pattern. FIG. 5 is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data, corresponding to the case of irradiation and continued as it is during all conductivity measurements. FIG. 106k shows that water is conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride is dissolved in the water; and the sodium is continuously added to the water while sodium chloride is added to the water. Experimental data showing conductivity as a function of temperature for three data sets, corresponding to the case of illuminating with the light spectral pattern and continuing for all conductivity measurements (only two separate data points) ). FIG. 106l shows that water is conditioned by the sodium lamp spectral conditioning pattern for about 40 minutes before the sodium chloride is dissolved in the water; and the sodium is continuously added to the water while sodium chloride is added to the water. FIG. 5 is a graph of experimental data showing conductivity as a function of time for three separate sets of data, corresponding to the case of illuminating with a light spectral pattern and continuing as it is during all conductivity measurements. FIG. 106m is a graph of experimental data overlaid with averages from the data of FIGS. 106a, 106d, 106g, and 106j. FIG. 106n is a graph of experimental data overlaid with averages from the data of FIGS. 106b, 106e, 106h, and 106k. FIG. 106o is a graph of experimental data overlaid with averages from the data of FIGS. 106c, 106f, 106i, and 106j. FIG. 107 shows a schematic diagram of the flashlight battery assembly used in Example 14. FIG. FIG. 108 shows a schematic of the sodium lite used in Example 14. FIG. 109 shows a graph of the change in current as a function of time. FIG. 110 shows a graph of the change in current as a function of time. FIG. 111 shows the corrosion / non-corrosion of a steel razor blade according to Example 15.

Claims (6)

A method for growing crystals in a crystallization reaction system, comprising:
Targeting at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system using at least one spectral energy pattern to generate at least one of the generation, stimulation and stabilization of at least one component in the crystallization reaction system A method involving the resulting process. A method of conditioning at least one tunable participant in a crystallization reaction system, comprising:
Applying at least one conditioning frequency to the at least one tunable participant to produce at least one of generation, stimulation and stabilization of the at least one conditioned participant, thereby causing the at least one state The tuning frequency comprises at least one frequency selected from the group consisting of a direct resonant tuning frequency, a harmonic resonant tuning frequency and a non-harmonic heterodyne tuning frequency, and at least one reaction in the crystallization reaction system Using the condition-regulating participant in the crystallization reaction system to enhance the speed of the reaction.   The method according to claim 2, wherein the state-regulating participant resonates energy with at least one participant in the crystallization reaction system to affect at least one reaction path in the crystallization reaction system. .   4. The method of claim 3, further comprising applying at least one spectral energy pattern to the crystallization reaction system.   The method of claim 4, wherein the rate of at least one reaction in the crystallization reaction system is accelerated. A method for influencing a specific reaction path in a crystallization reaction system using a spectral catalyst by increasing the physical catalyst, comprising:
Strength sufficient to catalyze at least one reaction in a crystallization reaction system by doubling at least part of the spectral pattern of the physical catalyst with at least one energy emitting source to produce a catalytic spectral pattern And applying at least a portion of the catalytic spectral pattern to the crystallization reaction system for a sufficient period of time.

Images